This is a modern-English version of Timaeus, originally written by Plato. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

TIMAEUS

by Plato

Translated by Benjamin Jowett


Contents

INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS.
Section 1.
Section 2.
Section 3.
Section 4.
Section 5.
Section 6.
Section 7.
Section 8.

TIMAEUS
TIMAEUS

INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS.

Of all the writings of Plato the Timaeus is the most obscure and repulsive to the modern reader, and has nevertheless had the greatest influence over the ancient and mediaeval world. The obscurity arises in the infancy of physical science, out of the confusion of theological, mathematical, and physiological notions, out of the desire to conceive the whole of nature without any adequate knowledge of the parts, and from a greater perception of similarities which lie on the surface than of differences which are hidden from view. To bring sense under the control of reason; to find some way through the mist or labyrinth of appearances, either the highway of mathematics, or more devious paths suggested by the analogy of man with the world, and of the world with man; to see that all things have a cause and are tending towards an end—this is the spirit of the ancient physical philosopher. He has no notion of trying an experiment and is hardly capable of observing the curiosities of nature which are ‘tumbling out at his feet,’ or of interpreting even the most obvious of them. He is driven back from the nearer to the more distant, from particulars to generalities, from the earth to the stars. He lifts up his eyes to the heavens and seeks to guide by their motions his erring footsteps. But we neither appreciate the conditions of knowledge to which he was subjected, nor have the ideas which fastened upon his imagination the same hold upon us. For he is hanging between matter and mind; he is under the dominion at the same time both of sense and of abstractions; his impressions are taken almost at random from the outside of nature; he sees the light, but not the objects which are revealed by the light; and he brings into juxtaposition things which to us appear wide as the poles asunder, because he finds nothing between them. He passes abruptly from persons to ideas and numbers, and from ideas and numbers to persons,—from the heavens to man, from astronomy to physiology; he confuses, or rather does not distinguish, subject and object, first and final causes, and is dreaming of geometrical figures lost in a flux of sense. He contrasts the perfect movements of the heavenly bodies with the imperfect representation of them (Rep.), and he does not always require strict accuracy even in applications of number and figure (Rep.). His mind lingers around the forms of mythology, which he uses as symbols or translates into figures of speech. He has no implements of observation, such as the telescope or microscope; the great science of chemistry is a blank to him. It is only by an effort that the modern thinker can breathe the atmosphere of the ancient philosopher, or understand how, under such unequal conditions, he seems in many instances, by a sort of inspiration, to have anticipated the truth.

Of all of Plato's writings, the Timaeus is the most confusing and off-putting to the modern reader, yet it has had the biggest impact on the ancient and medieval worlds. The confusion stems from the early stages of physical science, mixing together theological, mathematical, and physiological ideas, the desire to understand all of nature without fully knowing its parts, and a greater awareness of surface similarities than of hidden differences. The goal was to bring understanding under the control of reason; to navigate through the fog or maze of appearances, either through the straightforward path of mathematics or more complex routes suggested by the connections between humans and the world, and the world and humans; to see that everything has a cause and is moving towards a purpose—this is the essence of the ancient physical philosopher. He doesn't think about conducting experiments and is barely capable of noticing the wonders of nature that are "right at his feet," or interpreting even the most obvious ones. He moves from the immediate to the distant, from specifics to generalities, from the earth to the stars. He looks up at the heavens and tries to let their movements guide his wayward steps. However, we don't appreciate the limitations of knowledge he faced, nor do we hold the same ideas that captured his imagination. He's caught between matter and mind; he's influenced by both sensory experiences and abstract thinking; his impressions are collected almost randomly from the surface of nature; he sees the light but not the things illuminated by it; and he juxtaposes things that seem to us utterly different because he finds no middle ground. He abruptly shifts from people to ideas and numbers, and from ideas and numbers back to people—from the heavens to humans, from astronomy to physiology; he confuses or doesn't distinguish between subject and object, primary and final causes, and he dreams of geometric shapes lost in a stream of sensory experience. He compares the perfect movements of celestial bodies with their imperfect representations and doesn't always demand strict accuracy even in his numerical and geometric applications. His mind often hovers around mythological forms, which he uses as symbols or converts into figures of speech. He has no tools for observation, like a telescope or microscope; the elaborate science of chemistry is completely foreign to him. It takes a significant effort for the modern thinker to grasp the environment of the ancient philosopher or to comprehend how, under such unequal circumstances, he sometimes seems to have intuitively grasped the truth.

The influence with the Timaeus has exercised upon posterity is due partly to a misunderstanding. In the supposed depths of this dialogue the Neo-Platonists found hidden meanings and connections with the Jewish and Christian Scriptures, and out of them they elicited doctrines quite at variance with the spirit of Plato. Believing that he was inspired by the Holy Ghost, or had received his wisdom from Moses, they seemed to find in his writings the Christian Trinity, the Word, the Church, the creation of the world in a Jewish sense, as they really found the personality of God or of mind, and the immortality of the soul. All religions and philosophies met and mingled in the schools of Alexandria, and the Neo-Platonists had a method of interpretation which could elicit any meaning out of any words. They were really incapable of distinguishing between the opinions of one philosopher and another— between Aristotle and Plato, or between the serious thoughts of Plato and his passing fancies. They were absorbed in his theology and were under the dominion of his name, while that which was truly great and truly characteristic in him, his effort to realize and connect abstractions, was not understood by them at all. Yet the genius of Plato and Greek philosophy reacted upon the East, and a Greek element of thought and language overlaid and partly reduced to order the chaos of Orientalism. And kindred spirits, like St. Augustine, even though they were acquainted with his writings only through the medium of a Latin translation, were profoundly affected by them, seeming to find ‘God and his word everywhere insinuated’ in them (August. Confess.)

The impact of the Timaeus on future generations is partly due to a misunderstanding. In this dialogue, the Neo-Platonists discovered hidden meanings and connections to Jewish and Christian scriptures, leading them to develop doctrines that were quite different from Plato’s original ideas. They believed he was inspired by the Holy Spirit or that his wisdom came from Moses, and they found in his writings concepts like the Christian Trinity, the Word, the Church, and a Jewish understanding of creation, as well as the notion of the personality of God and the immortality of the soul. Various religions and philosophies intertwined in the schools of Alexandria, and the Neo-Platonists had a way of interpretation that could extract any meaning from any text. They struggled to differentiate between the views of different philosophers, whether it was Aristotle and Plato or between Plato's serious ideas and his more whimsical thoughts. They were consumed by his theological concepts and were heavily influenced by his name, while they completely missed the truly significant aspect of his work: his attempt to conceptualize and connect abstract ideas. Nonetheless, Plato’s genius and Greek philosophy influenced the East, introducing a layer of Greek thought and language that organized some of the chaos of Orientalism. Like-minded individuals, such as St. Augustine, even if they encountered his works only through a Latin translation, were deeply impacted by them, seeming to find “God and his word everywhere insinuated” in them (August. Confess).

There is no danger of the modern commentators on the Timaeus falling into the absurdities of the Neo-Platonists. In the present day we are well aware that an ancient philosopher is to be interpreted from himself and by the contemporary history of thought. We know that mysticism is not criticism. The fancies of the Neo-Platonists are only interesting to us because they exhibit a phase of the human mind which prevailed widely in the first centuries of the Christian era, and is not wholly extinct in our own day. But they have nothing to do with the interpretation of Plato, and in spirit they are opposed to him. They are the feeble expression of an age which has lost the power not only of creating great works, but of understanding them. They are the spurious birth of a marriage between philosophy and tradition, between Hellas and the East—(Greek) (Rep.). Whereas the so-called mysticism of Plato is purely Greek, arising out of his imperfect knowledge and high aspirations, and is the growth of an age in which philosophy is not wholly separated from poetry and mythology.

There’s no risk of today’s commentators on the Timaeus falling into the ridiculousness of the Neo-Platonists. Nowadays, we understand that we should interpret an ancient philosopher based on his own work and the intellectual context of his time. We recognize that mysticism isn’t the same as criticism. The ideas of the Neo-Platonists are only relevant to us because they reflect a mindset that was widespread in the early centuries of the Christian era and is not entirely gone today. However, they are irrelevant to understanding Plato and, in spirit, contradict him. They are a weak expression of a time that has lost the ability to create great works and to fully grasp them. They represent a false combination of philosophy and tradition, merging Greek thought with Eastern ideas—(Greek) (Rep.). In contrast, the so-called mysticism of Plato is purely Greek, stemming from his limited knowledge and lofty aspirations, and evolving from a time when philosophy wasn’t completely distinct from poetry and mythology.

A greater danger with modern interpreters of Plato is the tendency to regard the Timaeus as the centre of his system. We do not know how Plato would have arranged his own dialogues, or whether the thought of arranging any of them, besides the two ‘Trilogies’ which he has expressly connected; was ever present to his mind. But, if he had arranged them, there are many indications that this is not the place which he would have assigned to the Timaeus. We observe, first of all, that the dialogue is put into the mouth of a Pythagorean philosopher, and not of Socrates. And this is required by dramatic propriety; for the investigation of nature was expressly renounced by Socrates in the Phaedo. Nor does Plato himself attribute any importance to his guesses at science. He is not at all absorbed by them, as he is by the IDEA of good. He is modest and hesitating, and confesses that his words partake of the uncertainty of the subject (Tim.). The dialogue is primarily concerned with the animal creation, including under this term the heavenly bodies, and with man only as one among the animals. But we can hardly suppose that Plato would have preferred the study of nature to man, or that he would have deemed the formation of the world and the human frame to have the same interest which he ascribes to the mystery of being and not-being, or to the great political problems which he discusses in the Republic and the Laws. There are no speculations on physics in the other dialogues of Plato, and he himself regards the consideration of them as a rational pastime only. He is beginning to feel the need of further divisions of knowledge; and is becoming aware that besides dialectic, mathematics, and the arts, there is another field which has been hitherto unexplored by him. But he has not as yet defined this intermediate territory which lies somewhere between medicine and mathematics, and he would have felt that there was as great an impiety in ranking theories of physics first in the order of knowledge, as in placing the body before the soul.

A bigger issue with modern interpreters of Plato is the tendency to see the Timaeus as the core of his philosophy. We don’t really know how Plato would have organized his dialogues, or if he even thought about arranging any of them, aside from the two 'Trilogies' that he clearly linked; it’s likely that this wasn’t something on his mind. If he had organized them, many signs suggest that he wouldn’t have placed the Timaeus here. First off, the dialogue is spoken by a Pythagorean philosopher, not Socrates. This is necessary for dramatic reasons; Socrates explicitly rejected the study of nature in the Phaedo. Plus, Plato doesn’t seem to value his scientific ideas highly. He isn’t caught up in them like he is with the IDEA of good. He’s humble and unsure, admitting that his words reflect the uncertainty of the subject (Tim.). The dialogue mainly focuses on living beings, including the celestial bodies, and addresses humans just as one of many animals. However, it’s hard to believe that Plato would have preferred studying nature over man, or that he would see the creation of the world and human body as equally interesting as the mystery of existence or the major political issues he tackles in the Republic and the Laws. Other Plato dialogues don’t venture into physics, and he himself considers them just a rational diversion. He’s starting to sense the need for further divisions of knowledge and realizing that besides dialectic, mathematics, and the arts, there’s another area he hasn’t explored yet. But he hasn’t clearly identified this middle ground between medicine and mathematics, and he would have thought it equally disrespectful to place physics theories at the top of the knowledge hierarchy as it would be to prioritize the body over the soul.

It is true, however, that the Timaeus is by no means confined to speculations on physics. The deeper foundations of the Platonic philosophy, such as the nature of God, the distinction of the sensible and intellectual, the great original conceptions of time and space, also appear in it. They are found principally in the first half of the dialogue. The construction of the heavens is for the most part ideal; the cyclic year serves as the connection between the world of absolute being and of generation, just as the number of population in the Republic is the expression or symbol of the transition from the ideal to the actual state. In some passages we are uncertain whether we are reading a description of astronomical facts or contemplating processes of the human mind, or of that divine mind (Phil.) which in Plato is hardly separable from it. The characteristics of man are transferred to the world-animal, as for example when intelligence and knowledge are said to be perfected by the circle of the Same, and true opinion by the circle of the Other; and conversely the motions of the world-animal reappear in man; its amorphous state continues in the child, and in both disorder and chaos are gradually succeeded by stability and order. It is not however to passages like these that Plato is referring when he speaks of the uncertainty of his subject, but rather to the composition of bodies, to the relations of colours, the nature of diseases, and the like, about which he truly feels the lamentable ignorance prevailing in his own age.

It's true, however, that the Timaeus isn’t just about physics. The deeper foundations of Platonic philosophy, like the nature of God, the distinction between the sensory and the intellectual, and the key concepts of time and space, are also present. These ideas mainly come up in the first half of the dialogue. The structure of the heavens is mostly ideal; the cyclic year connects the world of absolute existence with that of creation, just as the population numbers in the Republic symbolize the shift from the ideal to the actual state. At times, it’s hard to tell if we’re reading about astronomical facts or reflecting on processes of the human mind—or that divine mind (Phil.) which in Plato is almost inseparable from it. The traits of humans are transferred to the world-animal; for instance, when it says that intelligence and knowledge are perfected by the circle of the Same, and true opinion by the circle of the Other. Similarly, the movements of the world-animal are mirrored in humans; its formless state shows up in children, and in both, disorder and chaos are gradually replaced by stability and order. However, when Plato talks about the uncertainty of his subject, he’s not talking about these passages but rather about the composition of bodies, the relationships of colors, the nature of diseases, and similar topics, where he truly feels the unfortunate ignorance that exists in his own time.

We are led by Plato himself to regard the Timaeus, not as the centre or inmost shrine of the edifice, but as a detached building in a different style, framed, not after the Socratic, but after some Pythagorean model. As in the Cratylus and Parmenides, we are uncertain whether Plato is expressing his own opinions, or appropriating and perhaps improving the philosophical speculations of others. In all three dialogues he is exerting his dramatic and imitative power; in the Cratylus mingling a satirical and humorous purpose with true principles of language; in the Parmenides overthrowing Megarianism by a sort of ultra-Megarianism, which discovers contradictions in the one as great as those which have been previously shown to exist in the ideas. There is a similar uncertainty about the Timaeus; in the first part he scales the heights of transcendentalism, in the latter part he treats in a bald and superficial manner of the functions and diseases of the human frame. He uses the thoughts and almost the words of Parmenides when he discourses of being and of essence, adopting from old religion into philosophy the conception of God, and from the Megarians the IDEA of good. He agrees with Empedocles and the Atomists in attributing the greater differences of kinds to the figures of the elements and their movements into and out of one another. With Heracleitus, he acknowledges the perpetual flux; like Anaxagoras, he asserts the predominance of mind, although admitting an element of necessity which reason is incapable of subduing; like the Pythagoreans he supposes the mystery of the world to be contained in number. Many, if not all the elements of the Pre-Socratic philosophy are included in the Timaeus. It is a composite or eclectic work of imagination, in which Plato, without naming them, gathers up into a kind of system the various elements of philosophy which preceded him.

We are guided by Plato himself to see the Timaeus, not as the focal point or core of the structure, but as a separate building in a different style, designed not after the Socratic model, but instead following some Pythagorean example. As with the Cratylus and Parmenides, it’s unclear whether Plato is sharing his own views or borrowing and potentially enhancing the philosophical ideas of others. In all three dialogues, he showcases his dramatic and imitative abilities; in the Cratylus, he combines a satirical and humorous intent with genuine principles of language; in the Parmenides, he challenges Megarianism with a type of ultra-Megarianism that reveals contradictions within the singular as significant as those previously identified in ideas. There is a similar ambiguity in the Timaeus; in the first part, he reaches the heights of transcendentalism, and in the latter part, he addresses the functions and ailments of the human body in a simplistic and superficial way. He employs the concepts and nearly the words of Parmenides when discussing being and essence, adopting the idea of God from ancient religion into philosophy and the IDEA of good from the Megarians. He aligns with Empedocles and the Atomists in attributing the greater differences among kinds to the shapes of the elements and their interactions. With Heraclitus, he recognizes the constant change; like Anaxagoras, he emphasizes the dominance of mind, while acknowledging a level of necessity that reason cannot overcome; like the Pythagoreans, he believes that the mystery of the world is found in numbers. Many, if not all, elements of Pre-Socratic philosophy are included in the Timaeus. It is a blended or eclectic work of imagination in which Plato, without naming them, compiles various philosophical elements that came before him into a sort of system.

If we allow for the difference of subject, and for some growth in Plato’s own mind, the discrepancy between the Timaeus and the other dialogues will not appear to be great. It is probable that the relation of the ideas to God or of God to the world was differently conceived by him at different times of his life. In all his later dialogues we observe a tendency in him to personify mind or God, and he therefore naturally inclines to view creation as the work of design. The creator is like a human artist who frames in his mind a plan which he executes by the help of his servants. Thus the language of philosophy which speaks of first and second causes is crossed by another sort of phraseology: ‘God made the world because he was good, and the demons ministered to him.’ The Timaeus is cast in a more theological and less philosophical mould than the other dialogues, but the same general spirit is apparent; there is the same dualism or opposition between the ideal and actual—the soul is prior to the body, the intelligible and unseen to the visible and corporeal. There is the same distinction between knowledge and opinion which occurs in the Theaetetus and Republic, the same enmity to the poets, the same combination of music and gymnastics. The doctrine of transmigration is still held by him, as in the Phaedrus and Republic; and the soul has a view of the heavens in a prior state of being. The ideas also remain, but they have become types in nature, forms of men, animals, birds, fishes. And the attribution of evil to physical causes accords with the doctrine which he maintains in the Laws respecting the involuntariness of vice.

If we consider the differences in topic and some growth in Plato’s thinking, the gap between the Timaeus and his other dialogues doesn’t seem that significant. It's likely that his understanding of the relationship between ideas and God, or between God and the world, changed at different points in his life. In his later dialogues, we see him increasingly personifying mind or God, leading him to view creation as a product of design. The creator is similar to a human artist who forms a plan in his mind and carries it out with the help of assistants. Therefore, the philosophical language discussing first and second causes is mixed with another way of speaking: ‘God created the world because he was good, and the demons helped him.’ The Timaeus has a more theological and less philosophical tone than the other dialogues, but the same general mindset is clear; there’s a dualism or conflict between the ideal and the actual—the soul comes before the body, the intelligible and unseen precede the visible and physical. The distinction between knowledge and opinion found in the Theaetetus and Republic is also present, as is his criticism of poets and his blend of music and physical training. He still believes in the doctrine of transmigration, as he does in the Phaedrus and Republic, and the soul has a perspective on the heavens in a prior state of existence. The ideas persist, but they’ve become types in nature, representing men, animals, birds, and fish. Additionally, attributing evil to physical causes aligns with his views in the Laws about the involuntary nature of vice.

The style and plan of the Timaeus differ greatly from that of any other of the Platonic dialogues. The language is weighty, abrupt, and in some passages sublime. But Plato has not the same mastery over his instrument which he exhibits in the Phaedrus or Symposium. Nothing can exceed the beauty or art of the introduction, in which he is using words after his accustomed manner. But in the rest of the work the power of language seems to fail him, and the dramatic form is wholly given up. He could write in one style, but not in another, and the Greek language had not as yet been fashioned by any poet or philosopher to describe physical phenomena. The early physiologists had generally written in verse; the prose writers, like Democritus and Anaxagoras, as far as we can judge from their fragments, never attained to a periodic style. And hence we find the same sort of clumsiness in the Timaeus of Plato which characterizes the philosophical poem of Lucretius. There is a want of flow and often a defect of rhythm; the meaning is sometimes obscure, and there is a greater use of apposition and more of repetition than occurs in Plato’s earlier writings. The sentences are less closely connected and also more involved; the antecedents of demonstrative and relative pronouns are in some cases remote and perplexing. The greater frequency of participles and of absolute constructions gives the effect of heaviness. The descriptive portion of the Timaeus retains traces of the first Greek prose composition; for the great master of language was speaking on a theme with which he was imperfectly acquainted, and had no words in which to express his meaning. The rugged grandeur of the opening discourse of Timaeus may be compared with the more harmonious beauty of a similar passage in the Phaedrus.

The style and layout of the Timaeus are really different from any other Platonic dialogues. The language is heavy, abrupt, and in some parts, impressive. But Plato doesn't have the same command over his writing as he does in the Phaedrus or Symposium. The introduction is incredibly beautiful and skillfully crafted, reflecting his usual style. However, in the rest of the work, he seems to struggle with language, and the dramatic structure is completely abandoned. He could write well in one way, but not in another, and at that time, the Greek language hadn't yet been developed by any poet or philosopher to describe physical phenomena. Early scientists usually wrote in verse; prose writers like Democritus and Anaxagoras, based on their fragments, never really achieved a rhythmic style. As a result, we see a similar awkwardness in Plato's Timaeus that we find in Lucretius's philosophical poem. There's a lack of smoothness and often issues with rhythm; sometimes the meaning is unclear, and there's more apposition and repetition than in Plato’s earlier works. The sentences are less tightly connected and more complicated; in some cases, the antecedents of demonstrative and relative pronouns are confusing and distant. The more frequent use of participles and absolute constructions makes it feel heavy. The descriptive part of the Timaeus shows signs of the earliest Greek prose compositions because the great master of language was tackling a subject he didn't fully understand and lacked the vocabulary to express his ideas. The raw power of Timaeus's opening speech can be compared to the more harmonious beauty of a similar section in the Phaedrus.

To the same cause we may attribute the want of plan. Plato had not the command of his materials which would have enabled him to produce a perfect work of art. Hence there are several new beginnings and resumptions and formal or artificial connections; we miss the ‘callida junctura’ of the earlier dialogues. His speculations about the Eternal, his theories of creation, his mathematical anticipations, are supplemented by desultory remarks on the one immortal and the two mortal souls of man, on the functions of the bodily organs in health and disease, on sight, hearing, smell, taste, and touch. He soars into the heavens, and then, as if his wings were suddenly clipped, he walks ungracefully and with difficulty upon the earth. The greatest things in the world, and the least things in man, are brought within the compass of a short treatise. But the intermediate links are missing, and we cannot be surprised that there should be a want of unity in a work which embraces astronomy, theology, physiology, and natural philosophy in a few pages.

We can attribute the lack of a clear plan to the same issue. Plato didn't have full control over his material, which prevented him from creating a perfect work of art. As a result, there are several awkward beginnings and restarts along with forced connections; we miss the clever transitions found in his earlier dialogues. His thoughts on the Eternal, his theories about creation, and his mathematical predictions are mixed in with scattered comments on the one immortal soul and two mortal souls of humans, as well as on the roles of body organs in health and disease, and our senses of sight, hearing, smell, taste, and touch. He starts soaring high with grand ideas, but then, as if his wings have been clipped, he struggles to walk smoothly on the ground. The most significant ideas in the world, alongside the smallest aspects of humanity, are crammed into a brief essay. However, the connections in between are missing, so it’s no surprise that the work lacks unity when it tries to cover astronomy, theology, physiology, and natural philosophy in just a few pages.

It is not easy to determine how Plato’s cosmos may be presented to the reader in a clearer and shorter form; or how we may supply a thread of connexion to his ideas without giving greater consistency to them than they possessed in his mind, or adding on consequences which would never have occurred to him. For he has glimpses of the truth, but no comprehensive or perfect vision. There are isolated expressions about the nature of God which have a wonderful depth and power; but we are not justified in assuming that these had any greater significance to the mind of Plato than language of a neutral and impersonal character... With a view to the illustration of the Timaeus I propose to divide this Introduction into sections, of which the first will contain an outline of the dialogue: (2) I shall consider the aspects of nature which presented themselves to Plato and his age, and the elements of philosophy which entered into the conception of them: (3) the theology and physics of the Timaeus, including the soul of the world, the conception of time and space, and the composition of the elements: (4) in the fourth section I shall consider the Platonic astronomy, and the position of the earth. There will remain, (5) the psychology, (6) the physiology of Plato, and (7) his analysis of the senses to be briefly commented upon: (8) lastly, we may examine in what points Plato approaches or anticipates the discoveries of modern science.

It's not easy to figure out how to present Plato's cosmos in a clearer and shorter way for the reader, or how to connect his ideas without making them seem more consistent than they actually were in his mind, or adding implications that he would never have considered. He has glimpses of the truth but lacks a complete or perfect understanding. There are individual statements about the nature of God that are incredibly deep and powerful, but we can't assume that these held any greater significance for Plato than neutral, impersonal language... To explain the Timaeus, I propose to break this Introduction into sections: (1) the first will provide an outline of the dialogue; (2) I will discuss the aspects of nature that were important to Plato and his time, along with the philosophical elements involved; (3) the theology and physics of the Timaeus, including the soul of the world, concepts of time and space, and the composition of the elements; (4) in the fourth section, I will look at Platonic astronomy and the position of the earth. Then we have (5) psychology, (6) Plato's physiology, and (7) his analysis of the senses to briefly cover; (8) finally, we can explore how Plato aligns with or anticipates the discoveries of modern science.





Section 1.

Socrates begins the Timaeus with a summary of the Republic. He lightly touches upon a few points,—the division of labour and distribution of the citizens into classes, the double nature and training of the guardians, the community of property and of women and children. But he makes no mention of the second education, or of the government of philosophers.

Socrates starts the Timaeus with a recap of the Republic. He briefly discusses a few topics—the division of labor and the categorization of citizens into classes, the dual nature and training of the guardians, and the shared ownership of property, women, and children. However, he doesn’t bring up the second education or the rule of philosophers.

And now he desires to see the ideal State set in motion; he would like to know how she behaved in some great struggle. But he is unable to invent such a narrative himself; and he is afraid that the poets are equally incapable; for, although he pretends to have nothing to say against them, he remarks that they are a tribe of imitators, who can only describe what they have seen. And he fears that the Sophists, who are plentifully supplied with graces of speech, in their erratic way of life having never had a city or house of their own, may through want of experience err in their conception of philosophers and statesmen. ‘And therefore to you I turn, Timaeus, citizen of Locris, who are at once a philosopher and a statesman, and to you, Critias, whom all Athenians know to be similarly accomplished, and to Hermocrates, who is also fitted by nature and education to share in our discourse.’

And now he wants to see the ideal State in action; he wants to know how it acts in a major conflict. But he can't create that story himself; and he worries that the poets can't either because, although he claims to have nothing against them, he points out that they’re just imitators who can only describe what they’ve experienced. He is concerned that the Sophists, who are full of eloquence but have never had a city or home of their own, might miss the mark in their understanding of philosophers and statesmen due to their lack of experience. "So I turn to you, Timaeus, citizen of Locris, who is both a philosopher and a statesman, and to you, Critias, whom all Athenians recognize as equally talented, and to Hermocrates, who is also well-equipped by nature and education to join in our discussion."

HERMOCRATES: ‘We will do our best, and have been already preparing; for on our way home, Critias told us of an ancient tradition, which I wish, Critias, that you would repeat to Socrates.’ ‘I will, if Timaeus approves.’ ‘I approve.’ Listen then, Socrates, to a tale of Solon’s, who, being the friend of Dropidas my great-grandfather, told it to my grandfather Critias, and he told me. The narrative related to ancient famous actions of the Athenian people, and to one especially, which I will rehearse in honour of you and of the goddess. Critias when he told this tale of the olden time, was ninety years old, I being not more than ten. The occasion of the rehearsal was the day of the Apaturia called the Registration of Youth, at which our parents gave prizes for recitation. Some poems of Solon were recited by the boys. They had not at that time gone out of fashion, and the recital of them led some one to say, perhaps in compliment to Critias, that Solon was not only the wisest of men but also the best of poets. The old man brightened up at hearing this, and said: Had Solon only had the leisure which was required to complete the famous legend which he brought with him from Egypt he would have been as distinguished as Homer and Hesiod. ‘And what was the subject of the poem?’ said the person who made the remark. The subject was a very noble one; he described the most famous action in which the Athenian people were ever engaged. But the memory of their exploits has passed away owing to the lapse of time and the extinction of the actors. ‘Tell us,’ said the other, ‘the whole story, and where Solon heard the story.’ He replied—There is at the head of the Egyptian Delta, where the river Nile divides, a city and district called Sais; the city was the birthplace of King Amasis, and is under the protection of the goddess Neith or Athene. The citizens have a friendly feeling towards the Athenians, believing themselves to be related to them. Hither came Solon, and was received with honour; and here he first learnt, by conversing with the Egyptian priests, how ignorant he and his countrymen were of antiquity. Perceiving this, and with the view of eliciting information from them, he told them the tales of Phoroneus and Niobe, and also of Deucalion and Pyrrha, and he endeavoured to count the generations which had since passed. Thereupon an aged priest said to him: ‘O Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are ever young, and there is no old man who is a Hellene.’ ‘What do you mean?’ he asked. ‘In mind,’ replied the priest, ‘I mean to say that you are children; there is no opinion or tradition of knowledge among you which is white with age; and I will tell you why. Like the rest of mankind you have suffered from convulsions of nature, which are chiefly brought about by the two great agencies of fire and water. The former is symbolized in the Hellenic tale of young Phaethon who drove his father’s horses the wrong way, and having burnt up the earth was himself burnt up by a thunderbolt. For there occurs at long intervals a derangement of the heavenly bodies, and then the earth is destroyed by fire. At such times, and when fire is the agent, those who dwell by rivers or on the seashore are safer than those who dwell upon high and dry places, who in their turn are safer when the danger is from water. Now the Nile is our saviour from fire, and as there is little rain in Egypt, we are not harmed by water; whereas in other countries, when a deluge comes, the inhabitants are swept by the rivers into the sea. The memorials which your own and other nations have once had of the famous actions of mankind perish in the waters at certain periods; and the rude survivors in the mountains begin again, knowing nothing of the world before the flood. But in Egypt the traditions of our own and other lands are by us registered for ever in our temples. The genealogies which you have recited to us out of your own annals, Solon, are a mere children’s story. For in the first place, you remember one deluge only, and there were many of them, and you know nothing of that fairest and noblest race of which you are a seed or remnant. The memory of them was lost, because there was no written voice among you. For in the times before the great flood Athens was the greatest and best of cities and did the noblest deeds and had the best constitution of any under the face of heaven.’ Solon marvelled, and desired to be informed of the particulars. ‘You are welcome to hear them,’ said the priest, ‘both for your own sake and for that of the city, and above all for the sake of the goddess who is the common foundress of both our cities. Nine thousand years have elapsed since she founded yours, and eight thousand since she founded ours, as our annals record. Many laws exist among us which are the counterpart of yours as they were in the olden time. I will briefly describe them to you, and you shall read the account of them at your leisure in the sacred registers. In the first place, there was a caste of priests among the ancient Athenians, and another of artisans; also castes of shepherds, hunters, and husbandmen, and lastly of warriors, who, like the warriors of Egypt, were separated from the rest, and carried shields and spears, a custom which the goddess first taught you, and then the Asiatics, and we among Asiatics first received from her. Observe again, what care the law took in the pursuit of wisdom, searching out the deep things of the world, and applying them to the use of man. The spot of earth which the goddess chose had the best of climates, and produced the wisest men; in no other was she herself, the philosopher and warrior goddess, so likely to have votaries. And there you dwelt as became the children of the gods, excelling all men in virtue, and many famous actions are recorded of you. The most famous of them all was the overthrow of the island of Atlantis. This great island lay over against the Pillars of Heracles, in extent greater than Libya and Asia put together, and was the passage to other islands and to a great ocean of which the Mediterranean sea was only the harbour; and within the Pillars the empire of Atlantis reached in Europe to Tyrrhenia and in Libya to Egypt. This mighty power was arrayed against Egypt and Hellas and all the countries bordering on the Mediterranean. Then your city did bravely, and won renown over the whole earth. For at the peril of her own existence, and when the other Hellenes had deserted her, she repelled the invader, and of her own accord gave liberty to all the nations within the Pillars. A little while afterwards there were great earthquakes and floods, and your warrior race all sank into the earth; and the great island of Atlantis also disappeared in the sea. This is the explanation of the shallows which are found in that part of the Atlantic ocean.’

HERMOCRATES: “We’ll do our best, and we’ve already been preparing; on our way home, Critias told us about an ancient tradition, and I wish, Critias, that you would share it with Socrates.” “I will, if Timaeus agrees.” “I agree.” So, listen, Socrates, to a story from Solon, who was a friend of Dropidas, my great-grandfather. He told it to my grandfather Critias, and Critias told me. The story is about the ancient and famous deeds of the Athenian people, especially one I will share in honor of you and the goddess. When Critias told this story from long ago, he was ninety, and I was only ten. The story was told during the Apaturia, the day called the Registration of Youth, when our parents awarded prizes for recitation. Some poems by Solon were recited by the boys. They were still popular at that time, and someone mentioned, probably to flatter Critias, that Solon was not just the wisest of men but also the best poet. The old man perked up at this and said, “If Solon had only had the time needed to finish the famous legend he brought from Egypt, he would have been as celebrated as Homer and Hesiod.” “What was the subject of the poem?” asked the one who made the comment. “It was an honorable topic; he described the most renowned event the Athenian people ever participated in. But, over time, the memory of their deeds has faded due to the passage of time and the loss of the participants.” “Tell us,” replied the other, “the full story and where Solon heard it.” He answered, “There is a city and region called Sais at the head of the Egyptian Delta, where the Nile splits. This city was the birthplace of King Amasis and is under the protection of the goddess Neith or Athene. The people there feel a bond with the Athenians, believing themselves to be connected. Solon visited there and was well received; this is where he first learned, through discussions with the Egyptian priests, just how ignorant he and his fellow countrymen were about ancient history. Realizing this, and hoping to gain knowledge from them, he shared the tales of Phoroneus and Niobe, as well as Deucalion and Pyrrha, while trying to tally the generations since those times. An old priest then said to him: ‘O Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are eternally youthful, and there is no old man among you Hellenes.’ ‘What do you mean?’ he asked. ‘I mean that in spirit, you are like children; there is no ancient opinion or tradition among you that has stood the test of time, and I will explain why. Like everyone else, you have experienced natural disasters caused mainly by the two great forces of fire and water. The former is symbolized in the Hellenic story of young Phaethon, who drove his father’s chariot wrongly and burned up the earth, only to be struck down by a thunderbolt. Every so often, there are disturbances in the heavens, leading to destruction by fire. During these times, those living by rivers or the sea are safer than those in high and dry places; conversely, those on high ground are safer when the threat comes from water. Now, the Nile protects us from fire, and because it rarely rains in Egypt, we are not harmed by water; while in other regions, when floods occur, the inhabitants get swept into the sea. The memories that your people and others once held of the great deeds of humanity are often lost in floods; and then, the few survivors in the mountains start over, unaware of the world that existed before the deluge. However, in Egypt, we preserve the traditions of our own people and others in our temples. The genealogies you’ve shared from your own history, Solon, are mere children’s tales. First, you remember only one flood, but there have been many, and you are unaware of the most beautiful and noble race of which you are a remnant. Their memory has perished because you lack recorded history. In the times before the great flood, Athens was the greatest and finest of cities, achieving the noblest deeds and having the best constitution of any city on earth.” Solon was amazed and wanted to know the details. “You are welcome to hear them,” said the priest, “both for your own sake and for the sake of the city, and especially for the goddess who is the common founder of both our cities. Nine thousand years have passed since she established yours, and eight thousand since she established ours, according to our records. Many laws exist among us that mirror yours as they were in ancient times. I will give you a brief overview, and you can read the full account in our sacred records. First, there was a class of priests among the ancient Athenians, another of artisans, as well as classes of shepherds, hunters, farmers, and finally warriors who, like the Egyptian warriors, were distinct from the rest and carried shields and spears, a practice the goddess initially taught you, then the Asiatics, and we from the Asiatics first received from her. Notice how carefully the law pursued wisdom, seeking deep truths and applying them for human benefit. The land chosen by the goddess had the best climate and produced wise individuals; nowhere else could she, the philosopher and warrior goddess, find better followers. You thrived there as children of the gods, surpassing all men in virtue, and many notable deeds are recorded of you. The most famous of these was the defeat of the island of Atlantis. This great island was situated across from the Pillars of Heracles and was bigger than Libya and Asia combined, serving as a gateway to other islands and a vast ocean, of which the Mediterranean Sea was merely a harbor; and within the Pillars, the empire of Atlantis extended to Tyrrhenia in Europe and to Egypt in Libya. This formidable power was against Egypt and Hellas and all the countries bordering the Mediterranean. In that time, your city acted bravely and earned a reputation across the earth. For the sake of its own survival, and when the other Hellenes had abandoned it, it resisted the invader and voluntarily granted freedom to all nations within the Pillars. Shortly after, massive earthquakes and floods occurred, and your warrior class disappeared into the earth, and the great island of Atlantis also sank into the sea. This explains the shallow waters found in that part of the Atlantic Ocean.”

Such was the tale, Socrates, which Critias heard from Solon; and I noticed when listening to you yesterday, how close the resemblance was between your city and citizens and the ancient Athenian State. But I would not speak at the time, because I wanted to refresh my memory. I had heard the old man when I was a child, and though I could not remember the whole of our yesterday’s discourse, I was able to recall every word of this, which is branded into my mind; and I am prepared, Socrates, to rehearse to you the entire narrative. The imaginary State which you were describing may be identified with the reality of Solon, and our antediluvian ancestors may be your citizens. ‘That is excellent, Critias, and very appropriate to a Panathenaic festival; the truth of the story is a great advantage.’ Then now let me explain to you the order of our entertainment; first, Timaeus, who is a natural philosopher, will speak of the origin of the world, going down to the creation of man, and then I shall receive the men whom he has created, and some of whom will have been educated by you, and introduce them to you as the lost Athenian citizens of whom the Egyptian record spoke. As the law of Solon prescribes, we will bring them into court and acknowledge their claims to citizenship. ‘I see,’ replied Socrates, ‘that I shall be well entertained; and do you, Timaeus, offer up a prayer and begin.’

That was the story, Socrates, that Critias heard from Solon; and I realized while listening to you yesterday how closely your city and citizens resemble the ancient Athenian State. But I didn’t want to speak then because I wanted to refresh my memory. I had heard the old man when I was a child, and even though I couldn’t remember everything from our discussion yesterday, I could recall every word of this story, which is etched in my mind; and I’m ready, Socrates, to share the whole narrative with you. The fictional State you were describing could be linked to the reality of Solon, and our ancient ancestors might represent your citizens. “That sounds great, Critias, and fits perfectly for a Panathenaic festival; the truth of the story is a significant advantage.” So now let me explain our agenda; first, Timaeus, who is a natural philosopher, will talk about the origin of the world, right up to the creation of man, and then I will introduce you to the men he has created, some of whom have been educated by you, and present them as the lost Athenian citizens mentioned in the Egyptian records. As the law of Solon states, we will bring them into court and acknowledge their claims to citizenship. “I understand,” Socrates replied, “that I’m going to enjoy this; Timaeus, please say a prayer and begin.”

TIMAEUS: All men who have any right feeling, at the beginning of any enterprise, call upon the Gods; and he who is about to speak of the origin of the universe has a special need of their aid. May my words be acceptable to them, and may I speak in the manner which will be most intelligible to you and will best express my own meaning!

TIMAEUS: All people who have a sense of right and wrong, at the start of any venture, call upon the Gods; and anyone who is about to discuss the origin of the universe especially needs their help. May my words be pleasing to them, and may I speak in a way that is clear to you and best conveys my thoughts!

First, I must distinguish between that which always is and never becomes and which is apprehended by reason and reflection, and that which always becomes and never is and is conceived by opinion with the help of sense. All that becomes and is created is the work of a cause, and that is fair which the artificer makes after an eternal pattern, but whatever is fashioned after a created pattern is not fair. Is the world created or uncreated?—that is the first question. Created, I reply, being visible and tangible and having a body, and therefore sensible; and if sensible, then created; and if created, made by a cause, and the cause is the ineffable father of all things, who had before him an eternal archetype. For to imagine that the archetype was created would be blasphemy, seeing that the world is the noblest of creations, and God is the best of causes. And the world being thus created according to the eternal pattern is the copy of something; and we may assume that words are akin to the matter of which they speak. What is spoken of the unchanging or intelligible must be certain and true; but what is spoken of the created image can only be probable; being is to becoming what truth is to belief. And amid the variety of opinions which have arisen about God and the nature of the world we must be content to take probability for our rule, considering that I, who am the speaker, and you, who are the judges, are only men; to probability we may attain but no further.

First, I need to differentiate between what always exists and never changes, which we understand through reason and reflection, and what is always changing and never fully exists, which is perceived through opinion with the help of our senses. Everything that changes and is created comes from a cause, and what the craftsman creates based on an eternal model is considered beautiful, while anything designed from a created model lacks that beauty. The first question is: Is the world created or uncreated? I say it is created because it is visible, tangible, and has a physical form, making it perceptible; if it is perceptible, then it is created; and if it is created, it must have been made by a cause, which is the indescribable source of all things, who possesses an eternal prototype. To believe that the prototype was created would be sacrilegious, as the world is the greatest of all creations, and God is the highest cause. Thus, since the world is created according to an eternal design, it serves as a copy of something; we can assume that words reflect the objects they describe. What is said about the unchanging or intelligible must be certain and true; however, what is said about the created image can only be deemed likely; being relates to becoming as truth relates to belief. Amid the range of opinions that have emerged about God and the nature of the world, we have to accept that probability is our guide, recognizing that I, the speaker, and you, the listeners, are merely human; we can only reach probability and no more.

SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus, I like your manner of approaching the subject—proceed.

SOCRATES: Great, Timaeus, I appreciate your way of tackling the topic—go ahead.

TIMAEUS: Why did the Creator make the world?...He was good, and therefore not jealous, and being free from jealousy he desired that all things should be like himself. Wherefore he set in order the visible world, which he found in disorder. Now he who is the best could only create the fairest; and reflecting that of visible things the intelligent is superior to the unintelligent, he put intelligence in soul and soul in body, and framed the universe to be the best and fairest work in the order of nature, and the world became a living soul through the providence of God.

TIMAEUS: Why did the Creator make the world? He was good, and so he wasn’t jealous. Without jealousy, he wanted everything to be like himself. So, he organized the visible world, which he found to be in chaos. Since he is the best, he could only create what is most beautiful; and realizing that among visible things, the intelligent is greater than the unintelligent, he infused intelligence into the soul and the soul into the body, and shaped the universe to be the best and most beautiful work in nature’s order. Thus, the world became a living soul through God’s providence.

In the likeness of what animal was the world made?—that is the third question...The form of the perfect animal was a whole, and contained all intelligible beings, and the visible animal, made after the pattern of this, included all visible creatures.

In the image of what animal was the world created?—that is the third question... The shape of the perfect animal was a complete entity and encompassed all intelligent beings, and the visible animal, made after this model, included all visible creatures.

Are there many worlds or one only?—that is the fourth question...One only. For if in the original there had been more than one they would have been the parts of a third, which would have been the true pattern of the world; and therefore there is, and will ever be, but one created world. Now that which is created is of necessity corporeal and visible and tangible,—visible and therefore made of fire,—tangible and therefore solid and made of earth. But two terms must be united by a third, which is a mean between them; and had the earth been a surface only, one mean would have sufficed, but two means are required to unite solid bodies. And as the world was composed of solids, between the elements of fire and earth God placed two other elements of air and water, and arranged them in a continuous proportion—

Are there many worlds or just one?—that’s the fourth question... Just one. If there had been more than one in the beginning, they would have formed parts of a third, which would have been the true model of the world; therefore, there is and will always be only one created world. Everything that is created has to be physical, visible, and tangible—it's visible and thus made of fire, tangible and therefore solid and made of earth. But two things need a third to connect them, which serves as a middle ground; if the earth were just a surface, one middle ground would have been enough, but two are needed to connect solid bodies. Since the world consists of solids, God positioned two other elements—air and water—between the elements of fire and earth and arranged them in a continuous proportion—

fire:air::air:water, and air:water::water:earth,

fire:air::air:water, and air:water::water:earth,

and so put together a visible and palpable heaven, having harmony and friendship in the union of the four elements; and being at unity with itself it was indissoluble except by the hand of the framer. Each of the elements was taken into the universe whole and entire; for he considered that the animal should be perfect and one, leaving no remnants out of which another animal could be created, and should also be free from old age and disease, which are produced by the action of external forces. And as he was to contain all things, he was made in the all-containing form of a sphere, round as from a lathe and every way equidistant from the centre, as was natural and suitable to him. He was finished and smooth, having neither eyes nor ears, for there was nothing without him which he could see or hear; and he had no need to carry food to his mouth, nor was there air for him to breathe; and he did not require hands, for there was nothing of which he could take hold, nor feet, with which to walk. All that he did was done rationally in and by himself, and he moved in a circle turning within himself, which is the most intellectual of motions; but the other six motions were wanting to him; wherefore the universe had no feet or legs.

and so he created a visible and tangible heaven, with harmony and friendship in the union of the four elements; and being in unity with itself, it was unbreakable except by the hand of its creator. Each of the elements was included in the universe completely; for he believed that the being should be perfect and whole, leaving no remnants from which another being could be formed, and should also be free from old age and disease, which arise from external forces. And since it was to encompass all things, it was created in the all-encompassing form of a sphere, round and even in all directions from the center, as was natural and appropriate for it. It was finished and smooth, having neither eyes nor ears, for there was nothing outside of it that it could see or hear; and it had no need to bring food to its mouth, nor was there air for it to breathe; and it did not require hands, for there was nothing to grasp, nor feet to walk. All that it did was executed rationally within itself, and it moved in a circle, turning within, which is the most intellectual of motions; but the other six movements were absent; therefore, the universe had no feet or legs.

And so the thought of God made a God in the image of a perfect body, having intercourse with himself and needing no other, but in every part harmonious and self-contained and truly blessed. The soul was first made by him—the elder to rule the younger; not in the order in which our wayward fancy has led us to describe them, but the soul first and afterwards the body. God took of the unchangeable and indivisible and also of the divisible and corporeal, and out of the two he made a third nature, essence, which was in a mean between them, and partook of the same and the other, the intractable nature of the other being compressed into the same. Having made a compound of all the three, he proceeded to divide the entire mass into portions related to one another in the ratios of 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27, and proceeded to fill up the double and triple intervals thus—

And so the idea of God created a God in the form of a perfect being, engaging with himself and needing no one else, but in every part harmonious, self-sufficient, and truly blessed. The soul was created first by him—the elder to govern the younger; not in the sequence our wandering imaginations have led us to explain them, but the soul first and then the body. God took from the unchangeable and indivisible, as well as from the divisible and physical, and from these two, he created a third nature, an essence that existed in between them, sharing attributes of both, with the unyielding nature of the other being contained within the same. After combining all three, he went on to divide the whole mass into parts related to one another in the proportions of 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27, and filled in the double and triple intervals like this—

  - over 1, 4/3, 3/2, - over 2, 8/3, 3, - over 4, 16/3, 6,  - over 8:
  - over 1, 3/2, 2,   - over 3, 9/2, 6, - over 9, 27/2, 18, - over 27;
- over 1, 4/3, 3/2, - over 2, 8/3, 3, - over 4, 16/3, 6, - over 8:  
- over 1, 3/2, 2, - over 3, 9/2, 6, - over 9, 27/2, 18, - over 27;

in which double series of numbers are two kinds of means; the one exceeds and is exceeded by equal parts of the extremes, e.g. 1, 4/3, 2; the other kind of mean is one which is equidistant from the extremes—2, 4, 6. In this manner there were formed intervals of thirds, 3:2, of fourths, 4:3, and of ninths, 9:8. And next he filled up the intervals of a fourth with ninths, leaving a remnant which is in the ratio of 256:243. The entire compound was divided by him lengthways into two parts, which he united at the centre like the letter X, and bent into an inner and outer circle or sphere, cutting one another again at a point over against the point at which they cross. The outer circle or sphere was named the sphere of the same—the inner, the sphere of the other or diverse; and the one revolved horizontally to the right, the other diagonally to the left. To the sphere of the same which was undivided he gave dominion, but the sphere of the other or diverse was distributed into seven unequal orbits, having intervals in ratios of twos and threes, three of either sort, and he bade the orbits move in opposite directions to one another—three of them, the Sun, Mercury, Venus, with equal swiftness, and the remaining four—the Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter, with unequal swiftness to the three and to one another, but all in due proportion.

In which double series of numbers, there are two types of means; one type is greater than and less than equal parts of the extremes, for example, 1, 4/3, 2; the other type of mean is equidistant from the extremes—2, 4, 6. This way, intervals of thirds (3:2), fourths (4:3), and ninths (9:8) were formed. Next, he filled in the intervals of a fourth with ninths, leaving a remainder that is in the ratio of 256:243. He divided the entire compound lengthwise into two parts, which he connected at the center like the letter X, bending them into an inner and outer circle or sphere that intersected again at a point opposite where they crossed. The outer circle or sphere was called the sphere of the same, while the inner was named the sphere of the other or diverse; one revolved horizontally to the right, and the other diagonally to the left. He granted dominion to the undivided sphere of the same, but the sphere of the other or diverse was divided into seven unequal orbits, with intervals in ratios of twos and threes, consisting of three of each type, and he directed the orbits to move in opposite directions: three of them—Sun, Mercury, Venus—with equal speed, and the other four—Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter—with varying speeds in relation to each other and the three, but all in proper proportion.

When the Creator had made the soul he made the body within her; and the soul interfused everywhere from the centre to the circumference of heaven, herself turning in herself, began a divine life of rational and everlasting motion. The body of heaven is visible, but the soul is invisible, and partakes of reason and harmony, and is the best of creations, being the work of the best. And being composed of the same, the other, and the essence, these three, and also divided and bound in harmonical proportion, and revolving within herself—the soul when touching anything which has essence, whether divided or undivided, is stirred to utter the sameness or diversity of that and some other thing, and to tell how and when and where individuals are affected or related, whether in the world of change or of essence. When reason is in the neighbourhood of sense, and the circle of the other or diverse is moving truly, then arise true opinions and beliefs; when reason is in the sphere of thought, and the circle of the same runs smoothly, then intelligence is perfected.

When the Creator made the soul, He created the body within it; and the soul spread everywhere from the center to the edge of heaven, turning within itself, began a divine life of rational and everlasting movement. The body of heaven is visible, but the soul is invisible, is part of reason and harmony, and is the best of creations, being the work of the best. Composed of the same, the other, and essence—these three are also divided and held together in harmonious proportion, revolving within itself—the soul, when it encounters anything with essence, whether divided or whole, is triggered to express the similarity or difference between that and something else, and to explain how, when, and where individuals are affected or connected, whether in a world of change or essence. When reason is close to sense, and the circle of the other or diverse is moving correctly, then true opinions and beliefs arise; when reason is within the realm of thought, and the circle of the same runs smoothly, then understanding is perfected.

When the Father who begat the world saw the image which he had made of the Eternal Gods moving and living, he rejoiced; and in his joy resolved, since the archetype was eternal, to make the creature eternal as far as this was possible. Wherefore he made an image of eternity which is time, having an uniform motion according to number, parted into months and days and years, and also having greater divisions of past, present, and future. These all apply to becoming in time, and have no meaning in relation to the eternal nature, which ever is and never was or will be; for the unchangeable is never older or younger, and when we say that he ‘was’ or ‘will be,’ we are mistaken, for these words are applicable only to becoming, and not to true being; and equally wrong are we in saying that what has become IS become and that what becomes IS becoming, and that the non-existent IS non-existent...These are the forms of time which imitate eternity and move in a circle measured by number.

When the Father who created the world saw the image he had made of the Eternal Gods alive and moving, he felt joy; and in that joy, he decided that since the archetype was eternal, he would make the creature eternal as much as possible. So, he created an image of eternity, which is time, having a consistent movement based on numbers, divided into months, days, and years, along with larger divisions of past, present, and future. These all pertain to becoming in time and have no relevance to the eternal nature, which always exists and never was or will be; for the unchangeable is neither older nor younger, and when we say that he ‘was’ or ‘will be,’ we are mistaken because those terms apply only to becoming, not to true existence; and we are equally wrong in saying that what has become IS become and that what becomes IS becoming, and that the non-existent IS non-existent... These are the forms of time that imitate eternity and move in a circular pattern measured by numbers.

Thus was time made in the image of the eternal nature; and it was created together with the heavens, in order that if they were dissolved, it might perish with them. And God made the sun and moon and five other wanderers, as they are called, seven in all, and to each of them he gave a body moving in an orbit, being one of the seven orbits into which the circle of the other was divided. He put the moon in the orbit which was nearest to the earth, the sun in that next, the morning star and Mercury in the orbits which move opposite to the sun but with equal swiftness—this being the reason why they overtake and are overtaken by one another. All these bodies became living creatures, and learnt their appointed tasks, and began to move, the nearer more swiftly, the remoter more slowly, according to the diagonal movement of the other. And since this was controlled by the movement of the same, the seven planets in their courses appeared to describe spirals; and that appeared fastest which was slowest, and that which overtook others appeared to be overtaken by them. And God lighted a fire in the second orbit from the earth which is called the sun, to give light over the whole heaven, and to teach intelligent beings that knowledge of number which is derived from the revolution of the same. Thus arose day and night, which are the periods of the most intelligent nature; a month is created by the revolution of the moon, a year by that of the sun. Other periods of wonderful length and complexity are not observed by men in general; there is moreover a cycle or perfect year at the completion of which they all meet and coincide...To this end the stars came into being, that the created heaven might imitate the eternal nature.

Time was created in the likeness of the eternal nature, made alongside the heavens so that if they were to dissolve, time would fade with them. God formed the sun, moon, and five other planets, collectively known as wanderers, seven in total. Each was given a body that moves in an orbit, which is one of the seven divisions of the circle of the heavens. The moon was placed in the orbit closest to the earth, the sun in the next one, and the morning star and Mercury in orbits that move opposite to the sun but with equal speed—this is why they catch up to and are passed by one another. All these celestial bodies became living entities, learned their specific roles, and began to move, with those closer to the earth moving faster and those farther away moving more slowly, in line with the diagonal motion of the others. Because this movement was governed by the same law, the seven planets appeared to trace out spirals in their courses; the one that moved slowest seemed to move fastest, and the one that overtook others appeared to be overtaken by them. God ignited a fire in the second orbit from the earth, known as the sun, to illuminate the heavens and teach intelligent beings the numerical knowledge derived from its rotation. Thus, day and night emerged as periods for the most intelligent nature; a month is marked by the moon’s cycle, and a year by that of the sun. Most people do not notice other lengthy and complex cycles; furthermore, there exists a cycle or perfect year, at the end of which all celestial bodies align and coincide...This is why the stars were created, so that the heavens could reflect the eternal nature.

Thus far the universal animal was made in the divine image, but the other animals were not as yet included in him. And God created them according to the patterns or species of them which existed in the divine original. There are four of them: one of gods, another of birds, a third of fishes, and a fourth of animals. The gods were made in the form of a circle, which is the most perfect figure and the figure of the universe. They were created chiefly of fire, that they might be bright, and were made to know and follow the best, and to be scattered over the heavens, of which they were to be the glory. Two kinds of motion were assigned to them—first, the revolution in the same and around the same, in peaceful unchanging thought of the same; and to this was added a forward motion which was under the control of the same. Thus then the fixed stars were created, being divine and eternal animals, revolving on the same spot, and the wandering stars, in their courses, were created in the manner already described. The earth, which is our nurse, clinging around the pole extended through the universe, he made to be the guardian and artificer of night and day, first and eldest of gods that are in the interior of heaven. Vain would be the labour of telling all the figures of them, moving as in dance, and their juxta-positions and approximations, and when and where and behind what other stars they appear to disappear—to tell of all this without looking at a plan of them would be labour in vain.

So far, the universal animal was created in the image of the divine, but the other animals were not yet included in it. God made them according to the forms or species that existed in the divine original. There are four types: one of gods, another of birds, a third of fish, and a fourth of animals. The gods were created in the shape of a circle, which is the perfect figure and represents the universe. They were mainly made of fire to be bright and were meant to understand and follow the best, becoming the glory scattered across the heavens. Two kinds of motion were assigned to them—first, revolution in the same place and around the same, marked by peaceful, unchanging thought; and to this was added forward motion under its own control. Thus, the fixed stars were created as divine and eternal beings, revolving in the same spot, while the wandering stars were created in the same manner previously described. The earth, our nurturer, surrounding the pole that extends through the universe, was made to be the guardian and creator of night and day, the first and oldest of the gods within the interior of heaven. It would be pointless to try to describe all the patterns of stars, moving as if in a dance, their positions and closeness to each other, and when and where they appear or disappear behind other stars—describing all this without a plan would be a futile effort.

The knowledge of the other gods is beyond us, and we can only accept the traditions of the ancients, who were the children of the gods, as they said; for surely they must have known their own ancestors. Although they give no proof, we must believe them as is customary. They tell us that Oceanus and Tethys were the children of Earth and Heaven; that Phoreys, Cronos, and Rhea came in the next generation, and were followed by Zeus and Here, whose brothers and children are known to everybody.

The knowledge of the other gods is beyond our understanding, and we can only accept the traditions of the ancients, who claimed to be the children of the gods; after all, they must have known their own ancestors. Even though they provide no proof, we have to believe them as is common practice. They tell us that Oceanus and Tethys were the children of Earth and Heaven; that Phoreys, Cronos, and Rhea came in the next generation, followed by Zeus and Hera, whose siblings and offspring are known to everyone.

When all of them, both those who show themselves in the sky, and those who retire from view, had come into being, the Creator addressed them thus:—‘Gods, sons of gods, my works, if I will, are indissoluble. That which is bound may be dissolved, but only an evil being would dissolve that which is harmonious and happy. And although you are not immortal you shall not die, for I will hold you together. Hear me, then:—Three tribes of mortal beings have still to be created, but if created by me they would be like gods. Do ye therefore make them; I will implant in them the seed of immortality, and you shall weave together the mortal and immortal, and provide food for them, and receive them again in death.’ Thus he spake, and poured the remains of the elements into the cup in which he had mingled the soul of the universe. They were no longer pure as before, but diluted; and the mixture he distributed into souls equal in number to the stars, and assigned each to a star—then having mounted them, as in a chariot, he showed them the nature of the universe, and told them of their future birth and human lot. They were to be sown in the planets, and out of them was to come forth the most religious of animals, which would hereafter be called man. The souls were to be implanted in bodies, which were in a perpetual flux, whence, he said, would arise, first, sensation; secondly, love, which is a mixture of pleasure and pain; thirdly, fear and anger, and the opposite affections: and if they conquered these, they would live righteously, but if they were conquered by them, unrighteously. He who lived well would return to his native star, and would there have a blessed existence; but, if he lived ill, he would pass into the nature of a woman, and if he did not then alter his evil ways, into the likeness of some animal, until the reason which was in him reasserted her sway over the elements of fire, air, earth, water, which had engrossed her, and he regained his first and better nature. Having given this law to his creatures, that he might be guiltless of their future evil, he sowed them, some in the earth, some in the moon, and some in the other planets; and he ordered the younger gods to frame human bodies for them and to make the necessary additions to them, and to avert from them all but self-inflicted evil.

When everyone, both those visible in the sky and those who disappear from view, had come into existence, the Creator spoke to them: “Gods, sons of gods, my creations, if I choose, are unbreakable. What is bound can be unbound, but only a wicked being would disrupt what is harmonious and joyful. And even though you are not immortal, you will not die, because I will keep you together. Listen: three groups of mortals still need to be created, but if I create them, they will be like gods. Therefore, you will create them; I will place the seed of immortality in them, and you will connect the mortal and immortal, provide for them, and welcome them back in death.” So he spoke and poured the remnants of the elements into the cup that contained the soul of the universe. They were no longer pure as before, but mixed; he distributed the mixture into souls equal in number to the stars and assigned each soul to a star—then, as if in a chariot, he revealed to them the nature of the universe and informed them of their future lives and human experiences. They were to be planted in the planets, and from them would arise the most spiritual of creatures, which would eventually be called human. The souls would inhabit bodies, which were in constant change, and he said that from this would come sensations; next, love, a blend of pleasure and pain; followed by fear and anger, and the opposite feelings: if they overcame these, they would live rightly, but if these overcame them, they would live wrongly. Those who lived well would return to their original star and enjoy a blessed life there; but if they lived poorly, they would become a woman, and if they did not change their bad ways, they would become like an animal, until the rational part of them regained control over the elements of fire, air, earth, and water that had consumed it, allowing them to reclaim their original and better nature. After establishing this law for his creations, so he could be free of responsibility for their future wrongs, he scattered them, some on Earth, some on the moon, and some on other planets; and he instructed the younger gods to shape bodies for them and to make the necessary adjustments, safeguarding them from all harm except what they brought upon themselves.

Having given these commands, the Creator remained in his own nature. And his children, receiving from him the immortal principle, borrowed from the world portions of earth, air, fire, water, hereafter to be returned, which they fastened together, not with the adamantine bonds which bound themselves, but by little invisible pegs, making each separate body out of all the elements, subject to influx and efflux, and containing the courses of the soul. These swelling and surging as in a river moved irregularly and irrationally in all the six possible ways, forwards, backwards, right, left, up and down. But violent as were the internal and alimentary fluids, the tide became still more violent when the body came into contact with flaming fire, or the solid earth, or gliding waters, or the stormy wind; the motions produced by these impulses pass through the body to the soul and have the name of sensations. Uniting with the ever-flowing current, they shake the courses of the soul, stopping the revolution of the same and twisting in all sorts of ways the nature of the other, and the harmonical ratios of twos and threes and the mean terms which connect them, until the circles are bent and disordered and their motion becomes irregular. You may imagine a position of the body in which the head is resting upon the ground, and the legs are in the air, and the top is bottom and the left right. And something similar happens when the disordered motions of the soul come into contact with any external thing; they say the same or the other in a manner which is the very opposite of the truth, and they are false and foolish, and have no guiding principle in them. And when external impressions enter in, they are really conquered, though they seem to conquer.

After giving these commands, the Creator stayed true to his own nature. His children, receiving from him the immortal essence, took portions of earth, air, fire, and water from the world, which they would return later. They connected these elements not with the unbreakable bonds that held themselves together, but with tiny invisible pegs, creating each separate body from all the elements, open to incoming and outgoing forces, and holding the paths of the soul. These elements, swelling and surging like a river, moved erratically and irrationally in all six possible directions: forward, backward, right, left, up, and down. Even though the internal and digestive fluids were powerful, the movement became even more intense when the body interacted with fire, solid ground, flowing water, or strong winds; the motions caused by these stimuli traveled through the body to the soul, which we call sensations. Mixing with the ever-flowing current, they disturbed the paths of the soul, interrupting its natural cycles and twisting the nature of the other, along with the harmonious ratios of twos and threes and their connecting terms, until the circles were distorted and their movements became chaotic. Picture a position where the head is on the ground, the legs are in the air, the top is bottom, and the left is right. A similar situation occurs when the chaotic motions of the soul interact with anything external; they may express the same or something entirely different in a way that contradicts the truth, and they are misguided and foolish, lacking any guiding principle. When external influences come in, they appear to dominate, but in reality, they are overpowered.

By reason of these affections the soul is at first without intelligence, but as time goes on the stream of nutriment abates, and the courses of the soul regain their proper motion, and apprehend the same and the other rightly, and become rational. The soul of him who has education is whole and perfect and escapes the worst disease, but, if a man’s education be neglected, he walks lamely through life and returns good for nothing to the world below. This, however, is an after-stage—at present, we are only concerned with the creation of the body and soul.

Because of these feelings, the soul initially lacks understanding, but as time passes, the flow of nourishment slows down, and the soul’s functions return to their natural state, allowing it to perceive both the familiar and the unfamiliar correctly, becoming rational. The soul of someone who is educated is whole and complete and avoids the worst afflictions, but if a person neglects their education, they move through life clumsily and become useless in the world below. This, however, is a later stage—right now, we are only focused on the formation of the body and soul.

The two divine courses were encased by the gods in a sphere which is called the head, and is the god and lord of us. And to this they gave the body to be a vehicle, and the members to be instruments, having the power of flexion and extension. Such was the origin of legs and arms. In the next place, the gods gave a forward motion to the human body, because the front part of man was the more honourable and had authority. And they put in a face in which they inserted organs to minister in all things to the providence of the soul. They first contrived the eyes, into which they conveyed a light akin to the light of day, making it flow through the pupils. When the light of the eye is surrounded by the light of day, then like falls upon like, and they unite and form one body which conveys to the soul the motions of visible objects. But when the visual ray goes forth into the darkness, then unlike falls upon unlike—the eye no longer sees, and we go to sleep. The fire or light, when kept in by the eyelids, equalizes the inward motions, and there is rest accompanied by few dreams; only when the greater motions remain they engender in us corresponding visions of the night. And now we shall be able to understand the nature of reflections in mirrors. The fires from within and from without meet about the smooth and bright surface of the mirror; and because they meet in a manner contrary to the usual mode, the right and left sides of the object are transposed. In a concave mirror the top and bottom are inverted, but this is no transposition.

The two divine forces were enclosed by the gods in a sphere known as the head, which is our god and master. They provided the body as a vehicle and the limbs as instruments, capable of bending and stretching. This is how legs and arms came to be. Next, the gods gave the human body forward motion because the front part of a person was the most honorable and held authority. They created a face, equipping it with organs that serve the soul's needs. They first designed the eyes, into which they infused a light similar to daylight, allowing it to flow through the pupils. When the light of the eye meets the light of day, they resonate with each other and merge to form a single entity that conveys the movements of visible objects to the soul. However, when the visual ray extends into darkness, the unlike meets the unlike—the eye loses sight, and we drift into sleep. The fire or light, when held back by the eyelids, balances the internal movements, leading to rest with few dreams; only when stronger movements occur do they create corresponding visions during the night. Now we can understand how reflections work in mirrors. The fires from within and outside converge on the smooth, bright surface of the mirror; because they meet in an unconventional way, the right and left sides of the object are reversed. In a concave mirror, the top and bottom are flipped, but this is not a reversal.

These are the second causes which God used as his ministers in fashioning the world. They are thought by many to be the prime causes, but they are not so; for they are destitute of mind and reason, and the lover of mind will not allow that there are any prime causes other than the rational and invisible ones—these he investigates first, and afterwards the causes of things which are moved by others, and which work by chance and without order. Of the second or concurrent causes of sight I have already spoken, and I will now speak of the higher purpose of God in giving us eyes. Sight is the source of the greatest benefits to us; for if our eyes had never seen the sun, stars, and heavens, the words which we have spoken would not have been uttered. The sight of them and their revolutions has given us the knowledge of number and time, the power of enquiry, and philosophy, which is the great blessing of human life; not to speak of the lesser benefits which even the vulgar can appreciate. God gave us the faculty of sight that we might behold the order of the heavens and create a corresponding order in our own erring minds. To the like end the gifts of speech and hearing were bestowed upon us; not for the sake of irrational pleasure, but in order that we might harmonize the courses of the soul by sympathy with the harmony of sound, and cure ourselves of our irregular and graceless ways.

These are the secondary causes that God used as His agents in shaping the world. Many people think they are the primary causes, but that's not true; they lack mind and reason, and anyone who values reason won't accept that there are any primary causes other than the rational and invisible ones—these are examined first, followed by the causes of things that are influenced by others, which happen randomly and without order. I've already discussed the secondary or concurrent causes of sight, and now I'll address God's higher purpose in giving us eyes. Sight is the source of our greatest benefits; if our eyes had never seen the sun, stars, and sky, the words we've expressed would never have been spoken. Observing them and their movements has provided us with the understanding of numbers and time, the ability to inquire, and philosophy, which is a significant blessing in human life, not to mention the smaller benefits that even ordinary people can appreciate. God granted us the ability to see so we could witness the order of the heavens and create a similar order in our own imperfect minds. Similarly, the gifts of speech and hearing were given to us not for mere pleasure, but so we could align our souls with the harmony of sound and correct our irregular and clumsy behaviors.

Thus far we have spoken of the works of mind; and there are other works done from necessity, which we must now place beside them; for the creation is made up of both, mind persuading necessity as far as possible to work out good. Before the heavens there existed fire, air, water, earth, which we suppose men to know, though no one has explained their nature, and we erroneously maintain them to be the letters or elements of the whole, although they cannot reasonably be compared even to syllables or first compounds. I am not now speaking of the first principles of things, because I cannot discover them by our present mode of enquiry. But as I observed the rule of probability at first, I will begin anew, seeking by the grace of God to observe it still.

So far, we have talked about the works of the mind, and now we need to consider other works done out of necessity, placing them alongside the former. Creation consists of both, with the mind trying to persuade necessity to produce something good. Before the heavens, there was fire, air, water, and earth, which we believe people know, even though no one has explained what they really are. We mistakenly think of them as the basic elements of everything, even though they can't really be compared to syllables or simple compounds. I'm not talking about the fundamental principles of things right now because I can’t figure them out with our current way of asking questions. However, since I noticed the rule of probability at the beginning, I'll start over, hoping, with God's grace, to still follow it.

In our former discussion I distinguished two kinds of being—the unchanging or invisible, and the visible or changing. But now a third kind is required, which I shall call the receptacle or nurse of generation. There is a difficulty in arriving at an exact notion of this third kind, because the four elements themselves are of inexact natures and easily pass into one another, and are too transient to be detained by any one name; wherefore we are compelled to speak of water or fire, not as substances, but as qualities. They may be compared to images made of gold, which are continually assuming new forms. Somebody asks what they are; if you do not know, the safest answer is to reply that they are gold. In like manner there is a universal nature out of which all things are made, and which is like none of them; but they enter into and pass out of her, and are made after patterns of the true in a wonderful and inexplicable manner. The containing principle may be likened to a mother, the source or spring to a father, the intermediate nature to a child; and we may also remark that the matter which receives every variety of form must be formless, like the inodorous liquids which are prepared to receive scents, or the smooth and soft materials on which figures are impressed. In the same way space or matter is neither earth nor fire nor air nor water, but an invisible and formless being which receives all things, and in an incomprehensible manner partakes of the intelligible. But we may say, speaking generally, that fire is that part of this nature which is inflamed, water that which is moistened, and the like.

In our previous discussion, I talked about two types of existence—the unchanging or invisible, and the visible or changing. But now we need a third type, which I’ll call the receptacle or source of creation. It’s difficult to nail down exactly what this third type is, because the four elements themselves have unclear natures and can easily transform into one another; they are too fleeting to be captured by any single name. So, we end up describing water or fire not as substances, but as qualities. They are like golden images that keep taking on new shapes. If someone asks what they are and you don’t know, the safest reply is that they are gold. Similarly, there is a universal nature from which everything is made, and it’s unlike any of those things; yet, they come into it and leave it, shaped after the patterns of what is truly real in a remarkable and mysterious way. The containing principle can be compared to a mother, the source or origin to a father, and the intermediary nature to a child. We can also note that the matter that takes on various forms needs to be formless itself, much like odorless liquids that are ready to absorb scents or smooth and soft materials that hold shapes. In the same way, space or matter is neither earth, fire, air, nor water, but an invisible and formless essence that accepts all things and mysteriously shares in the intelligible. Generally speaking, we can say that fire represents the part of this essence that is heated, water represents what is wet, and so on.

Let me ask a question in which a great principle is involved: Is there an essence of fire and the other elements, or are there only fires visible to sense? I answer in a word: If mind is one thing and true opinion another, then there are self-existent essences; but if mind is the same with opinion, then the visible and corporeal is most real. But they are not the same, and they have a different origin and nature. The one comes to us by instruction, the other by persuasion, the one is rational, the other is irrational; the one is movable by persuasion, the other immovable; the one is possessed by every man, the other by the gods and by very few men. And we must acknowledge that as there are two kinds of knowledge, so there are two kinds of being corresponding to them; the one uncreated, indestructible, immovable, which is seen by intelligence only; the other created, which is always becoming in place and vanishing out of place, and is apprehended by opinion and sense. There is also a third nature—that of space, which is indestructible, and is perceived by a kind of spurious reason without the help of sense. This is presented to us in a dreamy manner, and yet is said to be necessary, for we say that all things must be somewhere in space. For they are the images of other things and must therefore have a separate existence and exist in something (i.e. in space). But true reason assures us that while two things (i.e. the idea and the image) are different they cannot inhere in one another, so as to be one and two at the same time.

Let me pose a question that involves an important principle: Is there a true essence of fire and the other elements, or are there just fires that we can see? My answer is simple: If the mind is one thing and true opinion is another, then there are self-existing essences; but if the mind is the same as opinion, then what's visible and physical is the most real. However, they are not the same and have different origins and natures. One comes to us through learning, the other through persuasion; one is rational, the other irrational; one can be influenced by persuasion, the other cannot be changed; one is held by everyone, the other only by the gods and a select few. We must recognize that just as there are two types of knowledge, there are two types of being that correspond to them: one is uncreated, indestructible, and unchanging, which can only be understood through intelligence; the other is created, always changing location and disappearing from it, and is perceived through opinion and the senses. There is also a third nature—space—which is indestructible and can be understood through a kind of false reasoning without sensory help. This is presented to us in a dreamlike way and is considered necessary because we claim that everything must occupy some space. They are the reflections of other things and must therefore have a separate existence and exist within something (i.e., in space). However, true reasoning tells us that while these two things (i.e., the idea and the image) are different, they cannot exist within one another, making them one and two at the same time.

To sum up: Being and generation and space, these three, existed before the heavens, and the nurse or vessel of generation, moistened by water and inflamed by fire, and taking the forms of air and earth, assumed various shapes. By the motion of the vessel, the elements were divided, and like grain winnowed by fans, the close and heavy particles settled in one place, the light and airy ones in another. At first they were without reason and measure, and had only certain faint traces of themselves, until God fashioned them by figure and number. In this, as in every other part of creation, I suppose God to have made things, as far as was possible, fair and good, out of things not fair and good.

To sum up: Being, generation, and space existed before the heavens. The vessel of generation, moistened by water and heated by fire, taking on the forms of air and earth, assumed various shapes. As the vessel moved, the elements separated; the heavy, dense particles settled in one place while the light, airy ones gathered in another. Initially, they were formless and lacked order, with only faint traces of their existence until God shaped them using form and number. In this, as in every other aspect of creation, I believe God made things as beautifully and as good as possible, using materials that were not inherently beautiful or good.

And now I will explain to you the generation of the world by a method with which your scientific training will have made you familiar. Fire, air, earth, and water are bodies and therefore solids, and solids are contained in planes, and plane rectilinear figures are made up of triangles. Of triangles there are two kinds; one having the opposite sides equal (isosceles), the other with unequal sides (scalene). These we may fairly assume to be the original elements of fire and the other bodies; what principles are prior to these God only knows, and he of men whom God loves. Next, we must determine what are the four most beautiful figures which are unlike one another and yet sometimes capable of resolution into one another...Of the two kinds of triangles the equal-sided has but one form, the unequal-sided has an infinite variety of forms; and there is none more beautiful than that which forms the half of an equilateral triangle. Let us then choose two triangles; one, the isosceles, the other, that form of scalene which has the square of the longer side three times as great as the square of the lesser side; and affirm that, out of these, fire and the other elements have been constructed.

And now I will explain the creation of the world using a method you’re likely familiar with from your scientific training. Fire, air, earth, and water are physical substances and therefore solids, and solids exist within planes, with flat shapes being made up of triangles. There are two types of triangles: one has two equal sides (isosceles), while the other has all sides unequal (scalene). We can reasonably consider these as the original elements of fire and the other materials; what came before these, only God knows, along with those favored by Him among men. Next, we need to identify the four most beautiful shapes that are distinct yet sometimes can transform into one another... Among the two types of triangles, the isosceles has only one shape, while the scalene has an infinite range of forms; and none is more beautiful than the one that is half of an equilateral triangle. So let’s choose two triangles: one isosceles and the scalene that has the square of the longer side three times that of the shorter side; and assert that fire and the other elements were formed from these.

I was wrong in imagining that all the four elements could be generated into and out of one another. For as they are formed, three of them from the triangle which has the sides unequal, the fourth from the triangle which has equal sides, three can be resolved into one another, but the fourth cannot be resolved into them nor they into it. So much for their passage into one another: I must now speak of their construction. From the triangle of which the hypotenuse is twice the lesser side the three first regular solids are formed—first, the equilateral pyramid or tetrahedron; secondly, the octahedron; thirdly, the icosahedron; and from the isosceles triangle is formed the cube. And there is a fifth figure (which is made out of twelve pentagons), the dodecahedron—this God used as a model for the twelvefold division of the Zodiac.

I was mistaken to think that all four elements could be transformed into each other. When formed, three of them come from a triangle with unequal sides, while the fourth comes from a triangle with equal sides. The three can change into each other, but the fourth cannot be transformed into them, nor can they change into it. That's enough about their transformation; now, I need to discuss their construction. The first three regular solids come from a triangle where the hypotenuse is twice the length of the shorter side: first, the equilateral pyramid or tetrahedron; second, the octahedron; and third, the icosahedron. The cube is formed from an isosceles triangle. There’s also a fifth shape, the dodecahedron, made up of twelve pentagons, which God used as a model for the twelve divisions of the Zodiac.

Let us now assign the geometrical forms to their respective elements. The cube is the most stable of them because resting on a quadrangular plane surface, and composed of isosceles triangles. To the earth then, which is the most stable of bodies and the most easily modelled of them, may be assigned the form of a cube; and the remaining forms to the other elements,—to fire the pyramid, to air the octahedron, and to water the icosahedron,—according to their degrees of lightness or heaviness or power, or want of power, of penetration. The single particles of any of the elements are not seen by reason of their smallness; they only become visible when collected. The ratios of their motions, numbers, and other properties, are ordered by the God, who harmonized them as far as necessity permitted.

Let's now match the geometric shapes to their corresponding elements. The cube is the most stable shape because it rests on a flat quadrangular surface and is made up of isosceles triangles. So, we assign the form of a cube to the earth, which is the most stable of all bodies and the easiest to shape. The other shapes are assigned to the remaining elements: fire takes the pyramid, air gets the octahedron, and water is represented by the icosahedron, based on their levels of lightness, heaviness, power, or lack of power and penetration. The individual particles of any element are too small to see; they only become visible when gathered together. Their motion ratios, quantities, and other properties are organized by God, who harmonized them as much as necessity allowed.

The probable conclusion is as follows:—Earth, when dissolved by the more penetrating element of fire, whether acting immediately or through the medium of air or water, is decomposed but not transformed. Water, when divided by fire or air, becomes one part fire, and two parts air. A volume of air divided becomes two of fire. On the other hand, when condensed, two volumes of fire make a volume of air; and two and a half parts of air condense into one of water. Any element which is fastened upon by fire is cut by the sharpness of the triangles, until at length, coalescing with the fire, it is at rest; for similars are not affected by similars. When two kinds of bodies quarrel with one another, then the tendency to decomposition continues until the smaller either escapes to its kindred element or becomes one with its conqueror. And this tendency in bodies to condense or escape is a source of motion...Where there is motion there must be a mover, and where there is a mover there must be something to move. These cannot exist in what is uniform, and therefore motion is due to want of uniformity. But then why, when things are divided after their kinds, do they not cease from motion? The answer is, that the circular motion of all things compresses them, and as ‘nature abhors a vacuum,’ the finer and more subtle particles of the lighter elements, such as fire and air, are thrust into the interstices of the larger, each of them penetrating according to their rarity, and thus all the elements are on their way up and down everywhere and always into their own places. Hence there is a principle of inequality, and therefore of motion, in all time.

The likely conclusion is as follows:—Earth, when broken down by the more powerful element of fire, whether directly or through air or water, is decomposed but not transformed. Water, when split by fire or air, turns into one part fire and two parts air. A volume of air that is divided becomes two volumes of fire. Conversely, when condensed, two volumes of fire create one volume of air; and two and a half parts of air condense into one part of water. Any element that is affected by fire is sliced by the sharpness of triangles until eventually, it merges with the fire and comes to rest; for like things do not influence like things. When two types of bodies clash with each other, the tendency to decompose continues until the smaller one either escapes to its related element or becomes one with its dominant counterpart. This tendency in bodies to condense or escape generates motion...Where there is motion, there must be a mover, and where there is a mover, there must be something to be moved. These cannot exist in something uniform, so motion arises from a lack of uniformity. But then why, when things are divided by their types, do they not stop moving? The answer is that the circular motion of everything compresses them, and since 'nature abhors a vacuum,' the finer and more delicate particles of lighter elements like fire and air are pushed into the spaces of the larger ones, each penetrating according to their rarity, and thus all the elements are constantly moving up and down into their rightful places. Therefore, there is a principle of inequality and, consequently, of motion throughout all time.

In the next place, we may observe that there are different kinds of fire—(1) flame, (2) light that burns not, (3) the red heat of the embers of fire. And there are varieties of air, as for example, the pure aether, the opaque mist, and other nameless forms. Water, again, is of two kinds, liquid and fusile. The liquid is composed of small and unequal particles, the fusile of large and uniform particles and is more solid, but nevertheless melts at the approach of fire, and then spreads upon the earth. When the substance cools, the fire passes into the air, which is displaced, and forces together and condenses the liquid mass. This process is called cooling and congealment. Of the fusile kinds the fairest and heaviest is gold; this is hardened by filtration through rock, and is of a bright yellow colour. A shoot of gold which is darker and denser than the rest is called adamant. Another kind is called copper, which is harder and yet lighter because the interstices are larger than in gold. There is mingled with it a fine and small portion of earth which comes out in the form of rust. These are a few of the conjectures which philosophy forms, when, leaving the eternal nature, she turns for innocent recreation to consider the truths of generation.

Next, we can notice that there are different types of fire: (1) flame, (2) light that doesn’t burn, and (3) the red heat of embers. There are also different forms of air, such as pure aether, opaque mist, and other unnamed variations. Water comes in two forms: liquid and fusible. The liquid is made up of small, uneven particles, while the fusible has larger, uniform particles and is denser, but still melts when near fire and spreads across the ground. As it cools, the heat moves into the air, which gets displaced and compresses the liquid mass. This is called cooling and solidification. Among the fusible materials, the heaviest and most beautiful is gold, which hardens when filtered through rock and is a bright yellow color. A darker, denser form of gold is called adamant. Another type is copper, which is harder yet lighter because its spaces are larger compared to gold. It contains a fine, small amount of earth that shows up as rust. These are a few ideas that philosophy comes up with when it steps away from the eternal nature to lightly explore the truths of creation.

Water which is mingled with fire is called liquid because it rolls upon the earth, and soft because its bases give way. This becomes more equable when separated from fire and air, and then congeals into hail or ice, or the looser forms of hoar frost or snow. There are other waters which are called juices and are distilled through plants. Of these we may mention, first, wine, which warms the soul as well as the body; secondly, oily substances, as for example, oil or pitch; thirdly, honey, which relaxes the contracted parts of the mouth and so produces sweetness; fourthly, vegetable acid, which is frothy and has a burning quality and dissolves the flesh. Of the kinds of earth, that which is filtered through water passes into stone; the water is broken up by the earth and escapes in the form of air—this in turn presses upon the mass of earth, and the earth, compressed into an indissoluble union with the remaining water, becomes rock. Rock, when it is made up of equal particles, is fair and transparent, but the reverse when of unequal. Earth is converted into pottery when the watery part is suddenly drawn away; or if moisture remains, the earth, when fused by fire, becomes, on cooling, a stone of a black colour. When the earth is finer and of a briny nature then two half-solid bodies are formed by separating the water,—soda and salt. The strong compounds of earth and water are not soluble by water, but only by fire. Earth itself, when not consolidated, is dissolved by water; when consolidated, by fire only. The cohesion of water, when strong, is dissolved by fire only; when weak, either by air or fire, the former entering the interstices, the latter penetrating even the triangles. Air when strongly condensed is indissoluble by any power which does not reach the triangles, and even when not strongly condensed is only resolved by fire. Compounds of earth and water are unaffected by water while the water occupies the interstices in them, but begin to liquefy when fire enters into the interstices of the water. They are of two kinds, some of them, like glass, having more earth, others, like wax, having more water in them.

Water mixed with fire is called liquid because it flows on the earth, and it’s soft because its foundations yield. It becomes more stable when separated from fire and air, then solidifies into hail or ice, or the lighter forms of frost or snow. There are other waters known as juices that are distilled from plants. For instance, wine, which warms both the soul and the body; oily substances, such as oil or pitch; honey, which relaxes the tight parts of the mouth and creates sweetness; and vegetable acid, which is frothy, has a burning quality, and breaks down flesh. Of the types of earth, that which is filtered through water turns into stone; the water is broken down by the earth and escapes as air—this air then presses down on the mass of earth, and the earth, compacted into a solid union with the leftover water, becomes rock. When rock is made of equal particles, it is clear and beautiful, but the opposite is true when the particles are unequal. Earth becomes pottery when the watery part is suddenly removed; if moisture remains, the earth, when melted by fire, turns into a black stone upon cooling. When the earth is finer and salty, then two semi-solid bodies are formed by separating the water—soda and salt. Strong combinations of earth and water aren't soluble in water, but only in fire. Pure earth dissolves in water when it’s not compacted; when it is compacted, only fire can dissolve it. The strong bond of water can only be broken by fire; when it's weak, either air or fire can break it—air fills the gaps, while fire penetrates even the smallest parts. Air that is heavily condensed cannot be dissolved by any force that doesn’t affect the smallest parts, and even when it’s not heavily condensed, it only dissolves with fire. Combinations of earth and water are not affected by water as long as the water occupies the spaces within them, but they start to liquefy when fire enters those spaces. There are two types: some, like glass, contain more earth, while others, like wax, contain more water.

Having considered objects of sense, we now pass on to sensation. But we cannot explain sensation without explaining the nature of flesh and of the mortal soul; and as we cannot treat of both together, in order that we may proceed at once to the sensations we must assume the existence of body and soul.

Having looked at objects we can perceive, we now move on to sensation. However, we can't explain sensation without first understanding what flesh and the mortal soul are. Since we can’t discuss both at the same time, we'll need to assume that both body and soul exist so we can dive into sensations right away.

What makes fire burn? The fineness of the sides, the sharpness of the angles, the smallness of the particles, the quickness of the motion. Moreover, the pyramid, which is the figure of fire, is more cutting than any other. The feeling of cold is produced by the larger particles of moisture outside the body trying to eject the smaller ones in the body which they compress. The struggle which arises between elements thus unnaturally brought together causes shivering. That is hard to which the flesh yields, and soft which yields to the flesh, and these two terms are also relative to one another. The yielding matter is that which has the slenderest base, whereas that which has a rectangular base is compact and repellent. Light and heavy are wrongly explained with reference to a lower and higher in place. For in the universe, which is a sphere, there is no opposition of above or below, and that which is to us above would be below to a man standing at the antipodes. The greater or less difficulty in detaching any element from its like is the real cause of heaviness or of lightness. If you draw the earth into the dissimilar air, the particles of earth cling to their native element, and you more easily detach a small portion than a large. There would be the same difficulty in moving any of the upper elements towards the lower. The smooth and the rough are severally produced by the union of evenness with compactness, and of hardness with inequality.

What makes fire burn? It’s the thinness of its sides, the sharpness of its angles, the small size of its particles, and the quickness of its movement. Also, the pyramid, which represents fire, is sharper than any other shape. The feeling of cold comes from larger moisture particles outside the body trying to push out the smaller ones inside that they compress. The struggle between these elements, forced together in this way, causes shivering. There’s something hard that the flesh gives way to, and something soft that gives way to the flesh; these two terms refer to one another. The yielding material has the narrowest base, while that with a rectangular base is denser and repellent. Light and heavy are mistakenly explained in terms of lower and higher positions. In the universe, which is spherical, there’s no real concept of above or below, and what is above for us would be below for someone on the opposite side of the globe. The ease or difficulty of separating any element from its similar ones is what truly determines its heaviness or lightness. If you pull earth into the different air, the earth particles stick to their own element, so it’s easier to detach a small piece than a large one. The same applies to moving any of the upper elements downwards. Smooth and rough surfaces are created by the combination of evenness with density, and hardness with unevenness.

Pleasure and pain are the most important of the affections common to the whole body. According to our general doctrine of sensation, parts of the body which are easily moved readily transmit the motion to the mind; but parts which are not easily moved have no effect upon the patient. The bones and hair are of the latter kind, sight and hearing of the former. Ordinary affections are neither pleasant nor painful. The impressions of sight afford an example of these, and are neither violent nor sudden. But sudden replenishments of the body cause pleasure, and sudden disturbances, as for example cuttings and burnings, have the opposite effect.

Pleasure and pain are the most significant feelings shared by the entire body. According to our general understanding of sensation, body parts that are easily moved quickly send signals to the mind, while parts that are not easily moved have no impact on the person. Bones and hair belong to the latter category, while sight and hearing belong to the former. Ordinary sensations are neither enjoyable nor painful. Visual impressions are an example of this; they are neither intense nor abrupt. However, sudden increases in bodily sensations cause pleasure, while sudden disruptions, like cuts and burns, have the opposite effect.

>From sensations common to the whole body, we proceed to those of particular parts. The affections of the tongue appear to be caused by contraction and dilation, but they have more of roughness or smoothness than is found in other affections. Earthy particles, entering into the small veins of the tongue which reach to the heart, when they melt into and dry up the little veins are astringent if they are rough; or if not so rough, they are only harsh, and if excessively abstergent, like potash and soda, bitter. Purgatives of a weaker sort are called salt and, having no bitterness, are rather agreeable. Inflammatory bodies, which by their lightness are carried up into the head, cutting all that comes in their way, are termed pungent. But when these are refined by putrefaction, and enter the narrow veins of the tongue, and meet there particles of earth and air, two kinds of globules are formed—one of earthy and impure liquid, which boils and ferments, the other of pure and transparent water, which are called bubbles; of all these affections the cause is termed acid. When, on the other hand, the composition of the deliquescent particles is congenial to the tongue, and disposes the parts according to their nature, this remedial power in them is called sweet.

>From sensations that affect the entire body, we move on to those specific to certain parts. The sensations of the tongue seem to result from contraction and dilation, but they exhibit more roughness or smoothness than other sensations. Earthy particles entering the small veins of the tongue that connect to the heart, when they dissolve and dry up these tiny veins, become astringent if they are rough; if they are less rough, they are merely harsh, and if excessively cleansing, like potash and soda, they are bitter. Weaker purgatives are referred to as salt and, lacking bitterness, are rather pleasant. Inflammatory substances, which are light and rise to the head, cutting through everything in their path, are known as pungent. However, when these are refined through decay and enter the narrow veins of the tongue, where they encounter particles of earth and air, two types of globules are formed—one made of earthy and impure liquid, which boils and ferments, the other composed of pure and clear water, known as bubbles; the cause of all these sensations is called acid. Conversely, when the composition of the dissolving particles is compatible with the tongue and aligns the parts according to their nature, this healing quality in them is referred to as sweet.

Smells are not divided into kinds; all of them are transitional, and arise out of the decomposition of one element into another, for the simple air or water is without smell. They are vapours or mists, thinner than water and thicker than air: and hence in drawing in the breath, when there is an obstruction, the air passes, but there is no smell. They have no names, but are distinguished as pleasant and unpleasant, and their influence extends over the whole region from the head to the navel.

Smells aren't categorized into types; they are all temporary and come from the breakdown of one substance into another, since pure air or water has no scent. They are vapors or mists, lighter than water and denser than air. So, when we breathe in and there’s a blockage, air flows through, but there's no smell. They don’t have specific names but are recognized as either pleasant or unpleasant, and they affect the entire area from the head to the belly.

Hearing is the effect of a stroke which is transmitted through the ears by means of the air, brain, and blood to the soul, beginning at the head and extending to the liver. The sound which moves swiftly is acute; that which moves slowly is grave; that which is uniform is smooth, and the opposite is harsh. Loudness depends on the quantity of the sound. Of the harmony of sounds I will hereafter speak.

Hearing is the result of a stroke that travels through the ears via air, brain, and blood to the soul, starting at the head and reaching the liver. Sounds that move quickly are high-pitched; those that move slowly are low-pitched; sounds that are consistent are smooth, while their opposites are harsh. Loudness is determined by the amount of sound. I will discuss the harmony of sounds later.

Colours are flames which emanate from all bodies, having particles corresponding to the sense of sight. Some of the particles are less and some larger, and some are equal to the parts of the sight. The equal particles appear transparent; the larger contract, and the lesser dilate the sight. White is produced by the dilation, black by the contraction, of the particles of sight. There is also a swifter motion of another sort of fire which forces a way through the passages of the eyes, and elicits from them a union of fire and water which we call tears. The inner fire flashes forth, and the outer finds a way in and is extinguished in the moisture, and all sorts of colours are generated by the mixture. This affection is termed by us dazzling, and the object which produces it is called bright. There is yet another sort of fire which mingles with the moisture of the eye without flashing, and produces a colour like blood—to this we give the name of red. A bright element mingling with red and white produces a colour which we call auburn. The law of proportion, however, according to which compound colours are formed, cannot be determined scientifically or even probably. Red, when mingled with black and white, gives a purple hue, which becomes umber when the colours are burnt and there is a larger admixture of black. Flame-colour is a mixture of auburn and dun; dun of white and black; yellow of white and auburn. White and bright meeting, and falling upon a full black, become dark blue; dark blue mingling with white becomes a light blue; the union of flame-colour and black makes leek-green. There is no difficulty in seeing how other colours are probably composed. But he who should attempt to test the truth of this by experiment, would forget the difference of the human and divine nature. God only is able to compound and resolve substances; such experiments are impossible to man.

Colors are like flames that come from all objects, having particles that correspond to our sense of sight. Some particles are smaller, some are larger, and some are the same size as the components of sight. The particles that are the same size appear transparent; the larger ones make things look smaller, and the smaller ones make them look bigger. White is created by the expansion of sight particles, while black is created by their contraction. There’s also a quicker movement of a different type of fire that finds its way through the eye passages, causing a combination of fire and water that we call tears. The inner fire bursts forth, while the outer fire enters and is extinguished in the moisture, resulting in various colors from the mixture. This reaction is what we refer to as dazzling, and the object causing it is called bright. Additionally, there’s another kind of fire that blends with the moisture in the eye without bursting, producing a color resembling blood—which we call red. A bright element mixed with red and white creates a color we name auburn. However, the law of proportion that governs the formation of compound colors cannot be determined scientifically or even roughly. When red is mixed with black and white, it produces a purple hue, which turns into umber when the colors are burned and more black is added. Flame color is a mix of auburn and brown; brown is a combination of white and black; yellow comes from white and auburn. When white and bright colors meet and fall on pure black, they turn dark blue; dark blue mixed with white becomes light blue; and the combination of flame color and black results in leek green. It's not hard to see how other colors are likely made. However, anyone trying to test this truth through experimentation would overlook the difference between human and divine nature. Only God can combine and break down substances; such experiments are impossible for humans.

These are the elements of necessity which the Creator received in the world of generation when he made the all-sufficient and perfect creature, using the secondary causes as his ministers, but himself fashioning the good in all things. For there are two sorts of causes, the one divine, the other necessary; and we should seek to discover the divine above all, and, for their sake, the necessary, because without them the higher cannot be attained by us.

These are the essential elements that the Creator introduced into the world when He made the complete and perfect being, using secondary causes as His helpers, while He Himself shaped the good in everything. There are two types of causes: the divine and the necessary. We should prioritize understanding the divine causes and, for their benefit, the necessary ones, because without them, we cannot reach the higher level.

Having now before us the causes out of which the rest of our discourse is to be framed, let us go back to the point at which we began, and add a fair ending to our tale. As I said at first, all things were originally a chaos in which there was no order or proportion. The elements of this chaos were arranged by the Creator, and out of them he made the world. Of the divine he himself was the author, but he committed to his offspring the creation of the mortal. From him they received the immortal soul, but themselves made the body to be its vehicle, and constructed within another soul which was mortal, and subject to terrible affections—pleasure, the inciter of evil; pain, which deters from good; rashness and fear, foolish counsellors; anger hard to be appeased; hope easily led astray. These they mingled with irrational sense and all-daring love according to necessary laws and so framed man. And, fearing to pollute the divine element, they gave the mortal soul a separate habitation in the breast, parted off from the head by a narrow isthmus. And as in a house the women’s apartments are divided from the men’s, the cavity of the thorax was divided into two parts, a higher and a lower. The higher of the two, which is the seat of courage and anger, lies nearer to the head, between the midriff and the neck, and assists reason in restraining the desires. The heart is the house of guard in which all the veins meet, and through them reason sends her commands to the extremity of her kingdom. When the passions are in revolt, or danger approaches from without, then the heart beats and swells; and the creating powers, knowing this, implanted in the body the soft and bloodless substance of the lung, having a porous and springy nature like a sponge, and being kept cool by drink and air which enters through the trachea.

Having now laid out the reasons that shape the rest of our discussion, let’s return to our starting point and bring our story to a proper conclusion. As I mentioned before, everything began as chaos, without order or structure. The Creator organized the elements of this chaos and formed the world from them. He was the author of the divine, but he entrusted his offspring with the creation of the mortal. They received the immortal soul from him, but they created the body to house it and built within it another soul, which is mortal and prone to intense emotions—pleasure, which incites evil; pain, which keeps one from good; recklessness and fear, which are foolish advisors; anger, which is hard to calm; and hope, which is easily misled. They combined these traits with irrational impulses and relentless love according to necessary laws, thus creating humanity. To avoid tainting the divine element, they gave the mortal soul a separate home in the chest, separated from the head by a narrow pathway. Just as in a house, the women’s quarters are distinct from the men’s, the chest cavity was divided into two sections, one higher and one lower. The upper part, which is the seat of courage and anger, is located closer to the head, between the diaphragm and the neck, and helps reason control desires. The heart is the guardhouse where all the veins converge, through which reason sends commands to the farthest reaches of its domain. When passions rise in rebellion or danger looms from outside, the heart begins to race and swell; recognizing this, the creative forces embedded in the body the soft, bloodless tissue of the lung, which is porous and springy like a sponge, and is kept cool by the air and fluids that enter through the trachea.

The part of the soul which desires meat and drink was placed between the midriff and navel, where they made a sort of manger; and here they bound it down, like a wild animal, away from the council-chamber, and leaving the better principle undisturbed to advise quietly for the good of the whole. For the Creator knew that the belly would not listen to reason, and was under the power of idols and fancies. Wherefore he framed the liver to connect with the lower nature, contriving that it should be compact, and bright, and sweet, and also bitter and smooth, in order that the power of thought which originates in the mind might there be reflected, terrifying the belly with the elements of bitterness and gall, and a suffusion of bilious colours when the liver is contracted, and causing pain and misery by twisting out of its place the lobe and closing up the vessels and gates. And the converse happens when some gentle inspiration coming from intelligence mirrors the opposite fancies, giving rest and sweetness and freedom, and at night, moderation and peace accompanied with prophetic insight, when reason and sense are asleep. For the authors of our being, in obedience to their Father’s will and in order to make men as good as they could, gave to the liver the power of divination, which is never active when men are awake or in health; but when they are under the influence of some disorder or enthusiasm then they receive intimations, which have to be interpreted by others who are called prophets, but should rather be called interpreters of prophecy; after death these intimations become unintelligible. The spleen which is situated in the neighbourhood, on the left side, keeps the liver bright and clean, as a napkin does a mirror, and the evacuations of the liver are received into it; and being a hollow tissue it is for a time swollen with these impurities, but when the body is purged it returns to its natural size.

The part of the soul that craves food and drink is located between the stomach and navel, forming something like a trough; here, it is restrained, like a wild animal, away from the decision-making area, while the higher principle remains free to provide guidance for the greater good. The Creator understood that the stomach wouldn't heed logic and was subject to whims and desires. Therefore, he designed the liver to connect to the lower nature, ensuring it was compact, bright, sweet, and also bitter and smooth, so that the power of thought originating in the mind could reflect there, scaring the stomach with sensations of bitterness and discomfort when the liver tightens, causing pain by displacing its lobes and blocking its vessels. Conversely, when gentle inspiration from intelligence reflects the opposite thoughts, it brings rest, sweetness, and freedom, and at night, moderation and peace, along with prophetic clarity, while reason and sense are dormant. The creators of our existence, following their Father's will and aiming to make people as virtuous as possible, granted the liver the ability to foretell, which is inactive when people are awake or healthy; but during periods of illness or passion, they receive messages that need to be interpreted by others, known as prophets, though they should be more accurately called interpreters of prophecy; after death, these messages become incomprehensible. The spleen, located nearby on the left side, keeps the liver clean and bright, much like a cloth keeps a mirror clear, collecting the waste from the liver; being hollow, it swells with these impurities for a time, but when the body is cleansed, it returns to its normal size.

The truth concerning the soul can only be established by the word of God. Still, we may venture to assert what is probable both concerning soul and body.

The truth about the soul can only be determined by the word of God. Still, we can reasonably make claims about both the soul and the body.

The creative powers were aware of our tendency to excess. And so when they made the belly to be a receptacle for food, in order that men might not perish by insatiable gluttony, they formed the convolutions of the intestines, in this way retarding the passage of food through the body, lest mankind should be absorbed in eating and drinking, and the whole race become impervious to divine philosophy.

The creative powers were aware of our tendency to overindulgence. So when they designed the stomach to hold food, to prevent people from suffering from endless overeating, they shaped the twists and turns of the intestines, thereby slowing down the movement of food through the body, so that humanity wouldn’t get lost in eating and drinking, and the entire race would remain open to divine philosophy.

The creation of bones and flesh was on this wise. The foundation of these is the marrow which binds together body and soul, and the marrow is made out of such of the primary triangles as are adapted by their perfection to produce all the four elements. These God took and mingled them in due proportion, making as many kinds of marrow as there were hereafter to be kinds of souls. The receptacle of the divine soul he made round, and called that portion of the marrow brain, intending that the vessel containing this substance should be the head. The remaining part he divided into long and round figures, and to these as to anchors, fastening the mortal soul, he proceeded to make the rest of the body, first forming for both parts a covering of bone. The bone was formed by sifting pure smooth earth and wetting it with marrow. It was then thrust alternately into fire and water, and thus rendered insoluble by either. Of bone he made a globe which he placed around the brain, leaving a narrow opening, and around the marrow of the neck and spine he formed the vertebrae, like hinges, which extended from the head through the whole of the trunk. And as the bone was brittle and liable to mortify and destroy the marrow by too great rigidity and susceptibility to heat and cold, he contrived sinews and flesh—the first to give flexibility, the second to guard against heat and cold, and to be a protection against falls, containing a warm moisture, which in summer exudes and cools the body, and in winter is a defence against cold. Having this in view, the Creator mingled earth with fire and water and mixed with them a ferment of acid and salt, so as to form pulpy flesh. But the sinews he made of a mixture of bone and unfermented flesh, giving them a mean nature between the two, and a yellow colour. Hence they were more glutinous than flesh, but softer than bone. The bones which have most of the living soul within them he covered with the thinnest film of flesh, those which have least of it, he lodged deeper. At the joints he diminished the flesh in order not to impede the flexure of the limbs, and also to avoid clogging the perceptions of the mind. About the thighs and arms, which have no sense because there is little soul in the marrow, and about the inner bones, he laid the flesh thicker. For where the flesh is thicker there is less feeling, except in certain parts which the Creator has made solely of flesh, as for example, the tongue. Had the combination of solid bone and thick flesh been consistent with acute perceptions, the Creator would have given man a sinewy and fleshy head, and then he would have lived twice as long. But our creators were of opinion that a shorter life which was better was preferable to a longer which was worse, and therefore they covered the head with thin bone, and placed the sinews at the extremity of the head round the neck, and fastened the jawbones to them below the face. And they framed the mouth, having teeth and tongue and lips, with a view to the necessary and the good; for food is a necessity, and the river of speech is the best of rivers. Still, the head could not be left a bare globe of bone on account of the extremes of heat and cold, nor be allowed to become dull and senseless by an overgrowth of flesh. Wherefore it was covered by a peel or skin which met and grew by the help of the cerebral humour. The diversity of the sutures was caused by the struggle of the food against the courses of the soul. The skin of the head was pierced by fire, and out of the punctures came forth a moisture, part liquid, and part of a skinny nature, which was hardened by the pressure of the external cold and became hair. And God gave hair to the head of man to be a light covering, so that it might not interfere with his perceptions. Nails were formed by combining sinew, skin, and bone, and were made by the creators with a view to the future when, as they knew, women and other animals who would require them would be framed out of man.

The creation of bones and flesh happened like this. The foundation of these is the marrow that connects body and soul, and the marrow is made from the primary triangles that are perfectly mixed to create all four elements. God took these and combined them in the right proportions, producing as many types of marrow as there would eventually be types of souls. He shaped the divine soul's vessel to be round and named that part of the marrow the brain, intending for this to be the head. He then divided the rest into long and round shapes, using them as anchors to secure the mortal soul, and proceeded to create the rest of the body, starting with a covering of bone for both parts. The bone was made by sifting pure, smooth earth and wetting it with marrow. This mixture was then alternately heated and cooled, making it insoluble in either. From the bone, he formed a globe around the brain, leaving a narrow opening, and shaped the vertebrae around the marrow of the neck and spine like hinges, stretching from the head down through the entire trunk. Since the bone was brittle and could harm the marrow due to excessive rigidity and response to temperature changes, he devised sinews and flesh—the first for flexibility and the second for protection against heat and cold, containing warm moisture that cools the body in summer and provides warmth in winter. With this in mind, the Creator mixed earth with fire and water along with a ferment of acid and salt to create pulpy flesh. The sinews were made from a combination of bone and unfermented flesh, resulting in a composition that was between the two, with a yellow color. Thus, they were stickier than flesh but softer than bone. He covered the bones with the most living soul with the thinnest layer of flesh, while those with less soul were buried deeper. At the joints, he reduced the flesh to allow for the limbs' movement and to keep the mind’s perceptions clear. Around the thighs and arms, which have little sense because of minimal soul in the marrow, and around the inner bones, he laid thicker flesh. Where the flesh is thicker, there is less sensation, except in certain areas like the tongue, which is made entirely of flesh. If solid bone and thick flesh had been compatible with keen perception, the Creator would have given man a sinewy and fleshy head, allowing for a longer life. However, the creators believed a shorter but better life was preferable to a longer but worse one, so they covered the head with thin bone and placed the sinews around the neck, securing the jawbones beneath the face. They designed the mouth with teeth, tongue, and lips for necessity and benefit; food is necessary, and speech is among the most valuable resources. Still, they couldn't leave the head as just a bare bone globe due to extreme heat and cold, nor could they let it become dull and insensible from excessive flesh. Therefore, it was covered by a skin that grew with the help of the brain's fluid. The different sutures resulted from the food's struggle against the soul's courses. The head's skin was affected by fire, and from the punctures emerged a moisture that was partly liquid and partly thin, which hardened due to the external cold and turned into hair. God gave hair to man’s head as a light covering so that it wouldn’t interfere with perception. Nails were formed by merging sinew, skin, and bone, designed by the creators with foresight for future women and other animals that would be made from man.

The gods also mingled natures akin to that of man with other forms and perceptions. Thus trees and plants were created, which were originally wild and have been adapted by cultivation to our use. They partake of that third kind of life which is seated between the midriff and the navel, and is altogether passive and incapable of reflection.

The gods also blended human-like natures with other forms and experiences. This led to the creation of trees and plants, which were originally wild and have since been cultivated for our use. They embody a third type of life that exists between the waist and the belly, which is entirely passive and unable to reflect.

When the creators had furnished all these natures for our sustenance, they cut channels through our bodies as in a garden, watering them with a perennial stream. Two were cut down the back, along the back bone, where the skin and flesh meet, one on the right and the other on the left, having the marrow of generation between them. In the next place, they divided the veins about the head and interlaced them with each other in order that they might form an additional link between the head and the body, and that the sensations from both sides might be diffused throughout the body. In the third place, they contrived the passage of liquids, which may be explained in this way:—Finer bodies retain coarser, but not the coarser the finer, and the belly is capable of retaining food, but not fire and air. God therefore formed a network of fire and air to irrigate the veins, having within it two lesser nets, and stretched cords reaching from both the lesser nets to the extremity of the outer net. The inner parts of the net were made by him of fire, the lesser nets and their cavities of air. The two latter he made to pass into the mouth; the one ascending by the air-pipes from the lungs, the other by the side of the air-pipes from the belly. The entrance to the first he divided into two parts, both of which he made to meet at the channels of the nose, that when the mouth was closed the passage connected with it might still be fed with air. The cavity of the network he spread around the hollows of the body, making the entire receptacle to flow into and out of the lesser nets and the lesser nets into and out of it, while the outer net found a way into and out of the pores of the body, and the internal heat followed the air to and fro. These, as we affirm, are the phenomena of respiration. And all this process takes place in order that the body may be watered and cooled and nourished, and the meat and drink digested and liquefied and carried into the veins.

When the creators designed all these elements for our nourishment, they carved channels through our bodies like in a garden, watering them with a constant stream. Two channels were made along the spine, one on the right and the other on the left, with the essence of life between them. Next, they divided the veins around the head and intertwined them to create a link between the head and the body, ensuring that sensations from both sides could spread throughout. Third, they devised a way for liquids to flow, which can be described like this: finer substances can hold onto coarser ones, but not the other way around; the stomach can store food but not fire and air. So, God constructed a network of fire and air to irrigate the veins, containing two smaller networks, with cords stretching from both smaller networks to the edges of the outer network. The inner parts of the network were made of fire, while the smaller networks and their cavities were made of air. The latter were designed to enter through the mouth: one rising through the air tubes from the lungs, the other from the belly alongside the air tubes. The entrance to the first was divided into two parts that met at the nose, allowing air to continue flowing even when the mouth was closed. He spread the cavity of the network around the hollows of the body, allowing the entire receptacle to circulate into and out of the smaller networks and letting the smaller networks connect to it, while the outer network accessed the body through its pores, with internal heat moving along with the air. This, as we said, describes respiration. All these processes happen so that the body can be hydrated, cooled, nourished, and so food and drink can be digested, liquefied, and carried into the veins.

The causes of respiration have now to be considered. The exhalation of the breath through the mouth and nostrils displaces the external air, and at the same time leaves a vacuum into which through the pores the air which is displaced enters. Also the vacuum which is made when the air is exhaled through the pores is filled up by the inhalation of breath through the mouth and nostrils. The explanation of this double phenomenon is as follows:—Elements move towards their natural places. Now as every animal has within him a fountain of fire, the air which is inhaled through the mouth and nostrils, on coming into contact with this, is heated; and when heated, in accordance with the law of attraction, it escapes by the way it entered toward the place of fire. On leaving the body it is cooled and drives round the air which it displaces through the pores into the empty lungs. This again is in turn heated by the internal fire and escapes, as it entered, through the pores.

Now we need to look at the reasons for respiration. When we exhale through our mouth and nose, we push out the outside air, creating a vacuum that allows air to enter through the pores. Similarly, the vacuum created when air is exhaled through the pores is filled by inhaling air through the mouth and nose. This double process can be explained as follows: Elements move towards their natural positions. Since every animal has an inner source of heat, the air we inhale through the mouth and nose gets warmed when it contacts this heat. Once heated, according to the law of attraction, it moves towards the source of heat and escapes the body in the same way it entered. Upon leaving the body, it cools down and pulls in air from the surrounding environment through the pores into the now-empty lungs. This air, in turn, is heated by the internal source of heat and exits through the pores, just like it came in.

The phenomena of medical cupping-glasses, of swallowing, and of the hurling of bodies, are to be explained on a similar principle; as also sounds, which are sometimes discordant on account of the inequality of them, and again harmonious by reason of equality. The slower sounds reaching the swifter, when they begin to pause, by degrees assimilate with them: whence arises a pleasure which even the unwise feel, and which to the wise becomes a higher sense of delight, being an imitation of divine harmony in mortal motions. Streams flow, lightnings play, amber and the magnet attract, not by reason of attraction, but because ‘nature abhors a vacuum,’ and because things, when compounded or dissolved, move different ways, each to its own place.

The actions of medical cupping, swallowing, and the throwing of bodies can all be explained by similar principles. The sounds we hear can sometimes clash because they’re unequal, while at other times they can be harmonious because they’re equal. Slower sounds catch up to faster ones as they start to fade, and this creates a pleasure that even the unwise can appreciate, while the wise experience a deeper sense of joy, reflecting a divine harmony in human movements. Streams flow, lightning strikes, amber and magnets attract, not simply because of attraction, but because “nature hates a vacuum.” When things combine or break apart, they move in different directions, each heading to where they belong.

I will now return to the phenomena of respiration. The fire, entering the belly, minces the food, and as it escapes, fills the veins by drawing after it the divided portions, and thus the streams of nutriment are diffused through the body. The fruits or herbs which are our daily sustenance take all sorts of colours when intermixed, but the colour of red or fire predominates, and hence the liquid which we call blood is red, being the nurturing principle of the body, whence all parts are watered and empty places filled.

I will now return to the process of breathing. The fire, entering the stomach, breaks down the food, and as it leaves, it fills the veins by pulling along the processed portions, spreading nutrients throughout the body. The fruits or vegetables that make up our daily meals take on many colors when mixed together, but the color red or fire is most dominant, which is why the liquid we call blood is red, serving as the nourishing element of the body, supplying all parts and filling any empty spaces.

The process of repletion and depletion is produced by the attraction of like to like, after the manner of the universal motion. The external elements by their attraction are always diminishing the substance of the body: the particles of blood, too, formed out of the newly digested food, are attracted towards kindred elements within the body and so fill up the void. When more is taken away than flows in, then we decay; and when less, we grow and increase.

The process of filling up and losing substance happens because similar things attract each other, just like how everything moves universally. The external elements pull away from the body, constantly reducing its substance. The blood particles, created from the newly digested food, are drawn to similar elements within the body and help to fill the gaps. When more is lost than is drawn in, we deteriorate; and when less is lost, we grow and thrive.

The young of every animal has the triangles new and closely locked together, and yet the entire frame is soft and delicate, being newly made of marrow and nurtured on milk. These triangles are sharper than those which enter the body from without in the shape of food, and therefore they cut them up. But as life advances, the triangles wear out and are no longer able to assimilate food; and at length, when the bonds which unite the triangles of the marrow become undone, they in turn unloose the bonds of the soul; and if the release be according to nature, she then flies away with joy. For the death which is natural is pleasant, but that which is caused by violence is painful.

The young of every animal have their triangles tightly packed together, but the whole structure is soft and delicate, freshly made of marrow and sustained by milk. These triangles are sharper than those that come into the body as food, so they cut it up. However, as life goes on, the triangles wear down and can no longer process food; eventually, when the connections that bond the marrow's triangles break, they also loosen the bonds of the soul. If this release happens naturally, the soul joyfully departs. Natural death is peaceful, but death from violence is distressing.

Every one may understand the origin of diseases. They may be occasioned by the disarrangement or disproportion of the elements out of which the body is framed. This is the origin of many of them, but the worst of all owe their severity to the following causes: There is a natural order in the human frame according to which the flesh and sinews are made of blood, the sinews out of the fibres, and the flesh out of the congealed substance which is formed by separation from the fibres. The glutinous matter which comes away from the sinews and the flesh, not only binds the flesh to the bones, but nourishes the bones and waters the marrow. When these processes take place in regular order the body is in health.

Everyone can understand where diseases come from. They can be caused by the imbalance or disorder of the elements that make up the body. This is the root of many diseases, but the worst ones are severe due to the following reasons: The human body has a natural order in which flesh and tendons are made from blood, tendons from fibers, and flesh from the solid substance formed by the separation of fibers. The sticky substance that separates from tendons and flesh not only holds the flesh to the bones but also nourishes the bones and hydrates the marrow. When these processes occur in the correct order, the body remains healthy.

But when the flesh wastes and returns into the veins there is discoloured blood as well as air in the veins, having acid and salt qualities, from which is generated every sort of phlegm and bile. All things go the wrong way and cease to give nourishment to the body, no longer preserving their natural courses, but at war with themselves and destructive to the constitution of the body. The oldest part of the flesh which is hard to decompose blackens from long burning, and from being corroded grows bitter, and as the bitter element refines away, becomes acid. When tinged with blood the bitter substance has a red colour, and this when mixed with black takes the hue of grass; or again, the bitter substance has an auburn colour, when new flesh is decomposed by the internal flame. To all which phenomena some physician or philosopher who was able to see the one in many has given the name of bile. The various kinds of bile have names answering to their colours. Lymph or serum is of two kinds: first, the whey of blood, which is gentle; secondly, the secretion of dark and bitter bile, which, when mingled under the influence of heat with salt, is malignant and is called acid phlegm. There is also white phlegm, formed by the decomposition of young and tender flesh, and covered with little bubbles, separately invisible, but becoming visible when collected. The water of tears and perspiration and similar substances is also the watery part of fresh phlegm. All these humours become sources of disease when the blood is replenished in irregular ways and not by food or drink. The danger, however, is not so great when the foundation remains, for then there is a possibility of recovery. But when the substance which unites the flesh and bones is diseased, and is no longer renewed from the muscles and sinews, and instead of being oily and smooth and glutinous becomes rough and salt and dry, then the fleshy parts fall away and leave the sinews bare and full of brine, and the flesh gets back again into the circulation of the blood, and makes the previously mentioned disorders still greater. There are other and worse diseases which are prior to these; as when the bone through the density of the flesh does not receive sufficient air, and becomes stagnant and gangrened, and crumbling away passes into the food, and the food into the flesh, and the flesh returns again into the blood. Worst of all and most fatal is the disease of the marrow, by which the whole course of the body is reversed. There is a third class of diseases which are produced, some by wind and some by phlegm and some by bile. When the lung, which is the steward of the air, is obstructed, by rheums, and in one part no air, and in another too much, enters in, then the parts which are unrefreshed by air corrode, and other parts are distorted by the excess of air; and in this manner painful diseases are produced. The most painful are caused by wind generated within the body, which gets about the great sinews of the shoulders—these are termed tetanus. The cure of them is difficult, and in most cases they are relieved only by fever. White phlegm, which is dangerous if kept in, by reason of the air bubbles, is not equally dangerous if able to escape through the pores, although it variegates the body, generating diverse kinds of leprosies. If, when mingled with black bile, it disturbs the courses of the head in sleep, there is not so much danger; but if it assails those who are awake, then the attack is far more dangerous, and is called epilepsy or the sacred disease. Acid and salt phlegm is the source of catarrh.

But when the body breaks down and the flesh returns to the veins, it creates discolored blood as well as air in the veins with acidic and salty properties, from which all sorts of phlegm and bile are produced. Everything goes wrong and stops nourishing the body, no longer following its natural course but instead fighting against itself and harming the body's constitution. The oldest part of the flesh, which is hard to break down, turns black from prolonged decay, and as it deteriorates, it becomes bitter; as the bitter component deteriorates, it turns acidic. When mixed with blood, the bitter substance has a red color, which, when combined with black, takes on a green hue; or again, the bitter substance can appear auburn when fresh flesh decomposes due to internal heat. To all these phenomena, a physician or philosopher who was able to see unity in diversity has labeled it as bile. The different types of bile have names corresponding to their colors. Lymph or serum comes in two varieties: first, the gentle whey of blood; second, the secretion of dark, bitter bile, which, when mixed with salt under heat, becomes malignant and is known as acidic phlegm. There's also white phlegm, formed from the breakdown of young, tender flesh, covered in tiny bubbles that are usually invisible but can be seen when collected. The watery parts of tears, sweat, and similar substances are also part of the fresh phlegm. All these humors can lead to disease when the blood is replenished in irregular ways, not through food or drink. However, the risk isn't as great when the body’s foundation remains intact, as it leaves room for recovery. But when the substance that connects the flesh and bones becomes diseased, no longer renewed from the muscles and tendons, and instead of being smooth and oily becomes rough, salty, and dry, then the flesh falls away, leaving the tendons exposed and full of brine, and the flesh re-enters the blood circulation, worsening the previously mentioned disorders. There are other, even worse diseases that come before these; for instance, when the bone isn’t getting enough air due to dense flesh, causing it to stagnate and become gangrenous, crumbling and entering the food, then into the flesh, and back into the blood. The most severe and deadly issue is marrow disease, which reverses the body’s whole function. There’s a third category of diseases, created by wind, phlegm, and bile. When the lung, the body's air distributor, is blocked by mucus, with some sections lacking air while others have too much, the areas that aren't refreshed deteriorate, and those with excess air become distorted, leading to painful diseases. The most painful are those caused by wind forming within the body, which affects the major nerves in the shoulders—these are called tetanus. Treating them is tough, and in most cases, they’re only alleviated by fever. White phlegm can be dangerous if it builds up due to the air bubbles, but it’s less perilous if it can escape through the skin, even though it can cause various skin conditions. If, when mixed with black bile, it disrupts sleep patterns, the risk isn’t as high; but if it affects those who are awake, then the situation is much more serious and is referred to as epilepsy or the sacred disease. Acidic and salty phlegm is the root cause of catarrh.

Inflammations originate in bile, which is sometimes relieved by boils and swellings, but when detained, and above all when mingled with pure blood, generates many inflammatory disorders, disturbing the position of the fibres which are scattered about in the blood in order to maintain the balance of rare and dense which is necessary to its regular circulation. If the bile, which is only stale blood, or liquefied flesh, comes in little by little, it is congealed by the fibres and produces internal cold and shuddering. But when it enters with more of a flood it overcomes the fibres by its heat and reaches the spinal marrow, and burning up the cables of the soul sets her free from the body. When on the other hand the body, though wasted, still holds out, then the bile is expelled, like an exile from a factious state, causing associating diarrhoeas and dysenteries and similar disorders. The body which is diseased from the effects of fire is in a continual fever; when air is the agent, the fever is quotidian; when water, the fever intermits a day; when earth, which is the most sluggish element, the fever intermits three days and is with difficulty shaken off.

Inflammations come from bile, which can sometimes be relieved by boils and swellings. However, when it gets trapped, especially when mixed with pure blood, it causes many inflammatory issues, disrupting the fibers spread throughout the blood that help maintain the necessary balance of rare and dense components for proper circulation. If the bile, which is just old blood or liquefied flesh, comes in slowly, it gets solidified by the fibers, leading to internal coldness and shivering. But when it floods in, it overwhelms the fibers with its heat and reaches the spinal cord, burning the connections of the soul and freeing it from the body. On the other hand, if the body, despite being weakened, still holds on, the bile is expelled like an exile from a faction-ridden state, leading to accompanying diarrhea, dysentery, and similar disorders. The body suffering from the effects of heat is always feverish; if air is the cause, the fever occurs daily; if water, the fever comes every other day; and if earth, the most sluggish element, the fever comes every three days and is hard to shake off.

Of mental disorders there are two sorts, one madness, the other ignorance, and they may be justly attributed to disease. Excessive pleasures or pains are among the greatest diseases, and deprive men of their senses. When the seed about the spinal marrow is too abundant, the body has too great pleasures and pains; and during a great part of his life he who is the subject of them is more or less mad. He is often thought bad, but this is a mistake; for the truth is that the intemperance of lust is due to the fluidity of the marrow produced by the loose consistency of the bones. And this is true of vice in general, which is commonly regarded as disgraceful, whereas it is really involuntary and arises from a bad habit of the body and evil education. In like manner the soul is often made vicious by the influence of bodily pain; the briny phlegm and other bitter and bilious humours wander over the body and find no exit, but are compressed within, and mingle their own vapours with the motions of the soul, and are carried to the three places of the soul, creating infinite varieties of trouble and melancholy, of rashness and cowardice, of forgetfulness and stupidity. When men are in this evil plight of body, and evil forms of government and evil discourses are superadded, and there is no education to save them, they are corrupted through two causes; but of neither of them are they really the authors. For the planters are to blame rather than the plants, the educators and not the educated. Still, we should endeavour to attain virtue and avoid vice; but this is part of another subject.

There are two types of mental disorders: madness and ignorance, both of which can rightly be linked to illness. Intense pleasures or pains are among the worst illnesses, often making people lose their senses. When there's too much fluid around the spinal cord, the body experiences excessive pleasures and pains, and for much of their life, those affected are somewhat mad. People often think this is a sign of bad character, but that's a misunderstanding; the reality is that an excess of desire is caused by fluidity in the marrow, which comes from the loose nature of the bones. This applies to vice in general, which is usually seen as disgraceful, but is actually involuntary and stems from poor physical condition and bad upbringing. Similarly, the soul can become corrupted by physical pain; thick phlegm and other bitter bodily fluids can build up and can't escape, mixing their toxic vapors with the soul's movements, leading to a variety of troubles and feelings of sadness, recklessness, cowardice, forgetfulness, and dullness. When people find themselves in this unfortunate state—combined with bad governance and harmful influences, and lacking any education to rescue them— they are corrupted by two factors, yet they're not truly responsible for either. The blame lies more with the farmers than the crops, with the teachers rather than the students. Still, we should strive to pursue virtue and steer clear of vice, but that’s a topic for another discussion.

Enough of disease—I have now to speak of the means by which the mind and body are to be preserved, a higher theme than the other. The good is the beautiful, and the beautiful is the symmetrical, and there is no greater or fairer symmetry than that of body and soul, as the contrary is the greatest of deformities. A leg or an arm too long or too short is at once ugly and unserviceable, and the same is true if body and soul are disproportionate. For a strong and impassioned soul may ‘fret the pigmy body to decay,’ and so produce convulsions and other evils. The violence of controversy, or the earnestness of enquiry, will often generate inflammations and rheums which are not understood, or assigned to their true cause by the professors of medicine. And in like manner the body may be too much for the soul, darkening the reason, and quickening the animal desires. The only security is to preserve the balance of the two, and to this end the mathematician or philosopher must practise gymnastics, and the gymnast must cultivate music. The parts of the body too must be treated in the same way—they should receive their appropriate exercise. For the body is set in motion when it is heated and cooled by the elements which enter in, or is dried up and moistened by external things; and, if given up to these processes when at rest, it is liable to destruction. But the natural motion, as in the world, so also in the human frame, produces harmony and divides hostile powers. The best exercise is the spontaneous motion of the body, as in gymnastics, because most akin to the motion of mind; not so good is the motion of which the source is in another, as in sailing or riding; least good when the body is at rest and the motion is in parts only, which is a species of motion imparted by physic. This should only be resorted to by men of sense in extreme cases; lesser diseases are not to be irritated by medicine. For every disease is akin to the living being and has an appointed term, just as life has, which depends on the form of the triangles, and cannot be protracted when they are worn out. And he who, instead of accepting his destiny, endeavours to prolong his life by medicine, is likely to multiply and magnify his diseases. Regimen and not medicine is the true cure, when a man has time at his disposal.

Enough of disease—I now need to discuss how to maintain the mind and body, a topic of greater importance. The good is the beautiful, and the beautiful is the harmonious, with no greater harmony than that between body and soul, as the opposite is the greatest deformity. A limb that's too long or too short is both unattractive and unfunctional, and the same goes for an imbalance between body and soul. A strong and passionate soul can wear down a small body, leading to convulsions and other problems. Arguments or intense questioning can create irritations and illnesses that medical professionals don't always understand or attribute to their actual causes. Similarly, if the body overwhelms the soul, it can cloud judgment and stir up base desires. The only way to ensure stability is to maintain balance between the two, and for this, mathematicians or philosophers should engage in physical exercise, while athletes should nurture their minds through music. The different parts of the body need to be treated this way as well—they should get the right kind of exercise. The body moves when it absorbs heat and cold from external elements, or when it's dehydrated or hydrated by outside sources; if left to these processes while at rest, it can be damaged. However, natural movement, both in the world and within the human body, creates harmony and divides opposing forces. The best exercise is the body's voluntary movement, like in gymnastics, as it's most similar to mental activity; less effective is movement that comes from an outside source, like in sailing or horseback riding; and the least effective is when the body is still and only certain parts move, which is a kind of motion induced by medication. This last method should only be used by sensible people in extreme situations; minor ailments shouldn't be aggravated by medicine. Every illness is tied to the living being and has its own timeframe, just as life does, which depends on the structure of its elements and cannot be extended when they've aged. Those who try to extend their life with medicine instead of accepting their fate are likely to worsen their conditions. A proper lifestyle, rather than medication, is the true remedy when someone has time to dedicate to it.

Enough of the nature of man and of the body, and of training and education. The subject is a great one and cannot be adequately treated as an appendage to another. To sum up all in a word: there are three kinds of soul located within us, and any one of them, if remaining inactive, becomes very weak; if exercised, very strong. Wherefore we should duly train and exercise all three kinds.

Enough about what it means to be human, our bodies, and how we educate ourselves. This topic is too important to be just an afterthought. To summarize: there are three types of soul within us, and any of them, if left unused, will weaken; if we use them, they will grow strong. Therefore, we should make sure to properly train and exercise all three types.

The divine soul God lodged in the head, to raise us, like plants which are not of earthly origin, to our kindred; for the head is nearest to heaven. He who is intent upon the gratification of his desires and cherishes the mortal soul, has all his ideas mortal, and is himself mortal in the truest sense. But he who seeks after knowledge and exercises the divine part of himself in godly and immortal thoughts, attains to truth and immortality, as far as is possible to man, and also to happiness, while he is training up within him the divine principle and indwelling power of order. There is only one way in which one person can benefit another; and that is by assigning to him his proper nurture and motion. To the motions of the soul answer the motions of the universe, and by the study of these the individual is restored to his original nature.

The divine part of God is placed in our minds to elevate us, like plants that don’t come from the earth, closer to our true nature; because the mind is closest to the heavens. Someone who focuses solely on their desires and values the physical self remains entirely grounded in mortality. On the other hand, someone who seeks knowledge and nurtures the divine aspect within themselves through righteous and everlasting thoughts achieves truth and a form of immortality, to the extent that is possible for a human, as well as happiness, all while developing the divine principle and inner order. There’s only one way for one person to truly benefit another, and that is by providing them with the right guidance and direction. The movements of the soul reflect the movements of the universe, and through understanding these, a person can return to their true nature.

Thus we have finished the discussion of the universe, which, according to our original intention, has now been brought down to the creation of man. Completeness seems to require that something should be briefly said about other animals: first of women, who are probably degenerate and cowardly men. And when they degenerated, the gods implanted in men the desire of union with them, creating in man one animate substance and in woman another in the following manner:—The outlet for liquids they connected with the living principle of the spinal marrow, which the man has the desire to emit into the fruitful womb of the woman; this is like a fertile field in which the seed is quickened and matured, and at last brought to light. When this desire is unsatisfied the man is over-mastered by the power of the generative organs, and the woman is subjected to disorders from the obstruction of the passages of the breath, until the two meet and pluck the fruit of the tree.

Thus, we have completed our discussion of the universe, which, as we initially intended, has now focused on the creation of humans. It seems necessary to briefly mention other animals, starting with women, who are likely just weaker and more timid versions of men. When they became weaker, the gods instilled in men a desire to unite with them, creating one lively being in man and another in woman in the following way: They connected the outlet for liquids to the living essence of the spinal cord, which drives the man to release into the woman’s fertile womb; this is similar to a rich field where seeds are nurtured and grow, eventually coming to fruition. When this desire goes unfulfilled, the man is overwhelmed by the urges of his reproductive organs, while the woman suffers from issues caused by blocked breathing passages, until the two come together and harvest the fruit of the tree.

The race of birds was created out of innocent, light-minded men, who thought to pursue the study of the heavens by sight; these were transformed into birds, and grew feathers instead of hair. The race of wild animals were men who had no philosophy, and never looked up to heaven or used the courses of the head, but followed only the influences of passion. Naturally they turned to their kindred earth, and put their forelegs to the ground, and their heads were crushed into strange oblong forms. Some of them have four feet, and some of them more than four,—the latter, who are the more senseless, drawing closer to their native element; the most senseless of all have no limbs and trail their whole body on the ground. The fourth kind are the inhabitants of the waters; these are made out of the most senseless and ignorant and impure of men, whom God placed in the uttermost parts of the world in return for their utter ignorance, and caused them to respire water instead of the pure element of air. Such are the laws by which animals pass into one another.

The bird species came from naive, carefree people who wanted to study the skies by looking up; they were transformed into birds and grew feathers instead of hair. The wild animals came from people who had no philosophy and never looked up at the sky or used their intellect, but only followed their passions. Naturally, they returned to the earth, got down on all fours, and their heads became squished into unusual shapes. Some have four legs, while others have more than four—the latter, being more foolish, are closer to their natural element; the most foolish of all have no limbs and drag their bodies on the ground. The fourth type are the creatures of the water; these are formed from the most ignorant and impure people, placed by God in the farthest corners of the world due to their complete lack of understanding, and made to breathe water instead of the clean element of air. Such are the rules that govern how animals transform into one another.

And so the world received animals, mortal and immortal, and was fulfilled with them, and became a visible God, comprehending the visible, made in the image of the Intellectual, being the one perfect only-begotten heaven.

And so the world was filled with animals, both mortal and immortal, and came to life with them, becoming a visible representation of God, understanding the visible, and shaped in the image of the Intellect, being the one perfect only-begotten heaven.





Section 2.

Nature in the aspect which she presented to a Greek philosopher of the fourth century before Christ is not easily reproduced to modern eyes. The associations of mythology and poetry have to be added, and the unconscious influence of science has to be subtracted, before we can behold the heavens or the earth as they appeared to the Greek. The philosopher himself was a child and also a man—a child in the range of his attainments, but also a great intelligence having an insight into nature, and often anticipations of the truth. He was full of original thoughts, and yet liable to be imposed upon by the most obvious fallacies. He occasionally confused numbers with ideas, and atoms with numbers; his a priori notions were out of all proportion to his experience. He was ready to explain the phenomena of the heavens by the most trivial analogies of earth. The experiments which nature worked for him he sometimes accepted, but he never tried experiments for himself which would either prove or disprove his theories. His knowledge was unequal; while in some branches, such as medicine and astronomy, he had made considerable proficiency, there were others, such as chemistry, electricity, mechanics, of which the very names were unknown to him. He was the natural enemy of mythology, and yet mythological ideas still retained their hold over him. He was endeavouring to form a conception of principles, but these principles or ideas were regarded by him as real powers or entities, to which the world had been subjected. He was always tending to argue from what was near to what was remote, from what was known to what was unknown, from man to the universe, and back again from the universe to man. While he was arranging the world, he was arranging the forms of thought in his own mind; and the light from within and the light from without often crossed and helped to confuse one another. He might be compared to a builder engaged in some great design, who could only dig with his hands because he was unprovided with common tools; or to some poet or musician, like Tynnichus (Ion), obliged to accommodate his lyric raptures to the limits of the tetrachord or of the flute.

Nature, as it appeared to a Greek philosopher in the fourth century BCE, isn't easy for modern eyes to grasp. We have to add the layers of mythology and poetry, while taking away the unintentional influence of science, before we can see the heavens or the earth as the Greeks did. The philosopher was both a child and an adult—naive in his knowledge but also incredibly intelligent, with an insightful understanding of nature and often ahead of his time. He had many original ideas but could also be easily misled by obvious misconceptions. Sometimes he mixed up numbers with ideas and atoms with numbers; his assumptions often outstripped his experiences. He was quick to explain celestial phenomena with trivial earthly analogies. He sometimes accepted nature's experiments, but he never conducted his own

The Hesiodic and Orphic cosmogonies were a phase of thought intermediate between mythology and philosophy and had a great influence on the beginnings of knowledge. There was nothing behind them; they were to physical science what the poems of Homer were to early Greek history. They made men think of the world as a whole; they carried the mind back into the infinity of past time; they suggested the first observation of the effects of fire and water on the earth’s surface. To the ancient physics they stood much in the same relation which geology does to modern science. But the Greek was not, like the enquirer of the last generation, confined to a period of six thousand years; he was able to speculate freely on the effects of infinite ages in the production of physical phenomena. He could imagine cities which had existed time out of mind (States.; Laws), laws or forms of art and music which had lasted, ‘not in word only, but in very truth, for ten thousand years’ (Laws); he was aware that natural phenomena like the Delta of the Nile might have slowly accumulated in long periods of time (Hdt.). But he seems to have supposed that the course of events was recurring rather than progressive. To this he was probably led by the fixedness of Egyptian customs and the general observation that there were other civilisations in the world more ancient than that of Hellas.

The Hesiodic and Orphic cosmogonies were a stage of thought between mythology and philosophy and significantly influenced the beginnings of knowledge. They had no foundation; they were to physical science what Homer's poems were to early Greek history. They encouraged people to consider the world as a whole, taking the mind back into an endless past; they prompted the first observations of how fire and water affected the earth’s surface. To ancient physics, they had a similar role to what geology plays in modern science. However, the Greeks weren’t, like recent generations, limited to a timeframe of six thousand years; they could freely speculate about the effects of infinite ages on physical phenomena. They could envision cities that had existed for untold time (States.; Laws), laws or forms of art and music that had endured, “not just in words, but in reality, for ten thousand years” (Laws); they understood that natural phenomena like the Delta of the Nile might have slowly built up over long periods (Hdt.). But they appeared to believe that events were recurring rather than evolving. This belief was likely influenced by the consistency of Egyptian customs and the general observation that there were other civilizations in the world that were older than that of Greece.

The ancient philosophers found in mythology many ideas which, if not originally derived from nature, were easily transferred to her—such, for example, as love or hate, corresponding to attraction or repulsion; or the conception of necessity allied both to the regularity and irregularity of nature; or of chance, the nameless or unknown cause; or of justice, symbolizing the law of compensation; are of the Fates and Furies, typifying the fixed order or the extraordinary convulsions of nature. Their own interpretations of Homer and the poets were supposed by them to be the original meaning. Musing in themselves on the phenomena of nature, they were relieved at being able to utter the thoughts of their hearts in figures of speech which to them were not figures, and were already consecrated by tradition. Hesiod and the Orphic poets moved in a region of half-personification in which the meaning or principle appeared through the person. In their vaster conceptions of Chaos, Erebus, Aether, Night, and the like, the first rude attempts at generalization are dimly seen. The Gods themselves, especially the greater Gods, such as Zeus, Poseidon, Apollo, Athene, are universals as well as individuals. They were gradually becoming lost in a common conception of mind or God. They continued to exist for the purposes of ritual or of art; but from the sixth century onwards or even earlier there arose and gained strength in the minds of men the notion of ‘one God, greatest among Gods and men, who was all sight, all hearing, all knowing’ (Xenophanes).

The ancient philosophers found many ideas in mythology that, even if they didn't originally come from nature, were easily connected to it—like love and hate, which relate to attraction and repulsion; or the concept of necessity linked to both the regular and irregular aspects of nature; or chance, the unknown cause; or justice, representing the law of compensation; as well as the Fates and Furies, representing the fixed order or the extraordinary upheavals of nature. They believed their interpretations of Homer and the other poets captured the original meaning. Reflecting on the phenomena of nature, they felt relieved to express their innermost thoughts in metaphors that weren't just figures of speech to them, but were already established by tradition. Hesiod and the Orphic poets worked in a realm of partial personification where meaning or principle came through the person. Their broader ideas about Chaos, Erebus, Aether, Night, and similar concepts reveal the early attempts at generalization. The Gods themselves, especially the major ones like Zeus, Poseidon, Apollo, and Athene, are both universal and individual. They were slowly becoming part of a common understanding of mind or God. They still existed for rituals or artistic purposes, but from the sixth century onward, or even earlier, the idea of ‘one God, greatest among Gods and men, who was all sight, all hearing, all knowing’ (Xenophanes) began to grow stronger in people's minds.

Under the influence of such ideas, perhaps also deriving from the traditions of their own or of other nations scraps of medicine and astronomy, men came to the observation of nature. The Greek philosopher looked at the blue circle of the heavens and it flashed upon him that all things were one; the tumult of sense abated, and the mind found repose in the thought which former generations had been striving to realize. The first expression of this was some element, rarefied by degrees into a pure abstraction, and purged from any tincture of sense. Soon an inner world of ideas began to be unfolded, more absorbing, more overpowering, more abiding than the brightest of visible objects, which to the eye of the philosopher looking inward, seemed to pale before them, retaining only a faint and precarious existence. At the same time, the minds of men parted into the two great divisions of those who saw only a principle of motion, and of those who saw only a principle of rest, in nature and in themselves; there were born Heracliteans or Eleatics, as there have been in later ages born Aristotelians or Platonists. Like some philosophers in modern times, who are accused of making a theory first and finding their facts afterwards, the advocates of either opinion never thought of applying either to themselves or to their adversaries the criterion of fact. They were mastered by their ideas and not masters of them. Like the Heraclitean fanatics whom Plato has ridiculed in the Theaetetus, they were incapable of giving a reason of the faith that was in them, and had all the animosities of a religious sect. Yet, doubtless, there was some first impression derived from external nature, which, as in mythology, so also in philosophy, worked upon the minds of the first thinkers. Though incapable of induction or generalization in the modern sense, they caught an inspiration from the external world. The most general facts or appearances of nature, the circle of the universe, the nutritive power of water, the air which is the breath of life, the destructive force of fire, the seeming regularity of the greater part of nature and the irregularity of a remnant, the recurrence of day and night and of the seasons, the solid earth and the impalpable aether, were always present to them.

Under the influence of these ideas, and possibly influenced by their own traditions or those of other nations—bits of medicine and astronomy—people began to observe nature. The Greek philosopher looked up at the blue expanse of the sky and realized that everything was interconnected; the chaos of the senses calmed down, and the mind found peace in a thought that earlier generations had tried to grasp. The first expression of this idea was some element, gradually refined into a pure abstraction, free from any sensory influence. Soon, an internal world of ideas began to unfold, one that was more engaging, more overwhelming, and more enduring than the brightest visible objects. To the philosopher gazing inward, these ideas seemed to overshadow everything else, which appeared to exist only faintly and precariously. At the same time, people's minds split into two main groups: those who saw only a principle of motion and those who saw only a principle of rest, both in nature and within themselves; this distinction gave rise to Heracliteans and Eleatics, just as later we had Aristotelians and Platonists. Like some modern philosophers who are criticized for creating a theory first and then seeking facts to support it, the supporters of either view never thought to apply the standard of fact to themselves or their opponents. They were driven by their ideas rather than controlling them. Like the Heraclitean extremists that Plato mocked in the Theaetetus, they struggled to articulate the reasons behind their beliefs and exhibited the fervor of a religious group. Yet, undoubtedly, they were influenced by an initial impression from the external world that, similar to mythology, also impacted the thoughts of the early thinkers. Though they didn’t possess the ability for induction or generalization in the modern sense, they drew inspiration from the world around them. The most fundamental facts or appearances of nature—the circular universe, the life-giving power of water, the air we breathe, the destructive nature of fire, the seemingly regular cycles of much of nature and the irregularities of the rest, the predictable pattern of day and night and the changing seasons, the solid ground and the intangible ether—were always at the forefront of their awareness.

The great source of error and also the beginning of truth to them was reasoning from analogy; they could see resemblances, but not differences; and they were incapable of distinguishing illustration from argument. Analogy in modern times only points the way, and is immediately verified by experiment. The dreams and visions, which pass through the philosopher’s mind, of resemblances between different classes of substances, or between the animal and vegetable world, are put into the refiner’s fire, and the dross and other elements which adhere to them are purged away. But the contemporary of Plato and Socrates was incapable of resisting the power of any analogy which occurred to him, and was drawn into any consequences which seemed to follow. He had no methods of difference or of concomitant variations, by the use of which he could distinguish the accidental from the essential. He could not isolate phenomena, and he was helpless against the influence of any word which had an equivocal or double sense.

The main source of error and the start of truth for them was reasoning by analogy; they could see similarities but not differences, and they couldn’t tell the difference between an illustration and an argument. In modern times, analogies only guide us and are quickly verified through experiments. The thoughts and ideas that come to a philosopher about similarities between different types of substances or between the animal and plant worlds are tested rigorously, filtering out the impurities and other elements attached to them. However, contemporaries of Plato and Socrates couldn’t resist the allure of any analogy that came to mind and got swept up in any implications that seemed to follow. They lacked methods to identify differences or variations that could help them distinguish the accidental from the essential. They couldn’t isolate phenomena and were at a loss against any term with an ambiguous or double meaning.

Yet without this crude use of analogy the ancient physical philosopher would have stood still; he could not have made even ‘one guess among many’ without comparison. The course of natural phenomena would have passed unheeded before his eyes, like fair sights or musical sounds before the eyes and ears of an animal. Even the fetichism of the savage is the beginning of reasoning; the assumption of the most fanciful of causes indicates a higher mental state than the absence of all enquiry about them. The tendency to argue from the higher to the lower, from man to the world, has led to many errors, but has also had an elevating influence on philosophy. The conception of the world as a whole, a person, an animal, has been the source of hasty generalizations; yet this general grasp of nature led also to a spirit of comprehensiveness in early philosophy, which has not increased, but rather diminished, as the fields of knowledge have become more divided. The modern physicist confines himself to one or perhaps two branches of science. But he comparatively seldom rises above his own department, and often falls under the narrowing influence which any single branch, when pursued to the exclusion of every other, has over the mind. Language, two, exercised a spell over the beginnings of physical philosophy, leading to error and sometimes to truth; for many thoughts were suggested by the double meanings of words (Greek), and the accidental distinctions of words sometimes led the ancient philosopher to make corresponding differences in things (Greek). ‘If they are the same, why have they different names; or if they are different, why have they the same name?’—is an argument not easily answered in the infancy of knowledge. The modern philosopher has always been taught the lesson which he still imperfectly learns, that he must disengage himself from the influence of words. Nor are there wanting in Plato, who was himself too often the victim of them, impressive admonitions that we should regard not words but things (States.). But upon the whole, the ancients, though not entirely dominated by them, were much more subject to the influence of words than the moderns. They had no clear divisions of colours or substances; even the four elements were undefined; the fields of knowledge were not parted off. They were bringing order out of disorder, having a small grain of experience mingled in a confused heap of a priori notions. And yet, probably, their first impressions, the illusions and mirages of their fancy, created a greater intellectual activity and made a nearer approach to the truth than any patient investigation of isolated facts, for which the time had not yet come, could have accomplished.

Yet without this basic analogy, the ancient physical philosopher would have remained stagnant; he wouldn’t have been able to make even ‘one guess among many’ without comparisons. The flow of natural events would have gone unnoticed before him, like beautiful sights or musical sounds before the eyes and ears of an animal. Even the fetishism of a savage is the start of reasoning; assuming the most imaginative causes shows a more advanced mental state than a complete lack of inquiry about them. The tendency to argue from the higher to the lower, from humans to the world, has led to many misunderstandings, but it has also uplifted philosophy. The idea of the world as a whole, as a person or an animal, has caused hasty generalizations; yet this broad perspective of nature also fostered a spirit of comprehensiveness in early philosophy, which has not grown but rather declined as knowledge fields have grown more specialized. The modern physicist limits themselves to one or maybe two branches of science. However, they rarely look beyond their own area and often fall under the limiting influence that any single field, when pursued exclusively, can have on the mind. Language also played a role in the early stages of physical philosophy, leading to both errors and, at times, to truths; for many ideas were inspired by the double meanings of words (Greek), and the accidental distinctions of words sometimes caused the ancient philosopher to impose corresponding differences on things (Greek). ‘If they are the same, why do they have different names; or if they are different, why do they have the same name?’—is a question not easily answered in the early days of knowledge. The modern philosopher has always been taught the lesson, which they still don’t fully grasp, that they must free themselves from the influence of words. Nor are there lacking examples in Plato, who himself was often misled by them, reminding us that we should focus on things, not words (States.). Overall, the ancients, though not entirely controlled by words, were much more influenced by them than modern thinkers. They had no clear categories of colors or substances; even the four elements were vague; the fields of knowledge were not clearly defined. They were trying to impose order on chaos, having a small amount of experience mixed in with a confusing mass of a priori ideas. And yet, likely, their initial impressions, the illusions and mirages of their imagination, sparked greater intellectual activity and brought them closer to the truth than any careful investigation of isolated facts, which wasn't yet possible, could have achieved.

There was one more illusion to which the ancient philosophers were subject, and against which Plato in his later dialogues seems to be struggling—the tendency to mere abstractions; not perceiving that pure abstraction is only negation, they thought that the greater the abstraction the greater the truth. Behind any pair of ideas a new idea which comprehended them—the (Greek), as it was technically termed—began at once to appear. Two are truer than three, one than two. The words ‘being,’ or ‘unity,’ or essence,’ or ‘good,’ became sacred to them. They did not see that they had a word only, and in one sense the most unmeaning of words. They did not understand that the content of notions is in inverse proportion to their universality—the element which is the most widely diffused is also the thinnest; or, in the language of the common logic, the greater the extension the less the comprehension. But this vacant idea of a whole without parts, of a subject without predicates, a rest without motion, has been also the most fruitful of all ideas. It is the beginning of a priori thought, and indeed of thinking at all. Men were led to conceive it, not by a love of hasty generalization, but by a divine instinct, a dialectical enthusiasm, in which the human faculties seemed to yearn for enlargement. We know that ‘being’ is only the verb of existence, the copula, the most general symbol of relation, the first and most meagre of abstractions; but to some of the ancient philosophers this little word appeared to attain divine proportions, and to comprehend all truth. Being or essence, and similar words, represented to them a supreme or divine being, in which they thought that they found the containing and continuing principle of the universe. In a few years the human mind was peopled with abstractions; a new world was called into existence to give law and order to the old. But between them there was still a gulf, and no one could pass from the one to the other.

There was one more illusion that ancient philosophers fell prey to, and against which Plato seems to struggle in his later dialogues—the tendency toward mere abstractions. They didn’t realize that pure abstraction is just negation; they believed that the greater the abstraction, the greater the truth. Behind any pair of ideas, a new idea that encompassed them—known as the (Greek)—would immediately emerge. Two is truer than three, one is truer than two. Terms like ‘being,’ ‘unity,’ ‘essence,’ or ‘good’ became sacred to them. They failed to see that these were just words, and in many ways, the most meaningless words. They didn’t understand that the content of ideas decreases as their universality increases—the element that is the most broadly spread is also the thinnest; in simpler terms, the greater the extension, the less the comprehension. However, this empty idea of a whole without parts, a subject without predicates, or a rest without motion, has also been the most productive of all ideas. It marks the start of a priori thinking, and indeed of thought itself. People were led to develop it not out of a desire for quick generalization, but from a divine instinct, a dialectical enthusiasm, where human faculties seemed to crave expansion. We know that ‘being’ is merely the verb of existence, a copula, the most general symbol of relation, and the first and most basic of abstractions; but to some ancient philosophers, this little word appeared to take on divine significance and encompass all truth. Being or essence, along with similar words, represented to them a supreme or divine being, in which they believed they found the containing and enduring principle of the universe. Within a few years, the human mind was filled with abstractions; a new realm was created to impose law and order on the old. But between them, there remained a chasm, and no one could transition from one to the other.

Number and figure were the greatest instruments of thought which were possessed by the Greek philosopher; having the same power over the mind which was exerted by abstract ideas, they were also capable of practical application. Many curious and, to the early thinker, mysterious properties of them came to light when they were compared with one another. They admitted of infinite multiplication and construction; in Pythagorean triangles or in proportions of 1:2:4:8 and 1:3:9:27, or compounds of them, the laws of the world seemed to be more than half revealed. They were also capable of infinite subdivision—a wonder and also a puzzle to the ancient thinker (Rep.). They were not, like being or essence, mere vacant abstractions, but admitted of progress and growth, while at the same time they confirmed a higher sentiment of the mind, that there was order in the universe. And so there began to be a real sympathy between the world within and the world without. The numbers and figures which were present to the mind’s eye became visible to the eye of sense; the truth of nature was mathematics; the other properties of objects seemed to reappear only in the light of number. Law and morality also found a natural expression in number and figure. Instruments of such power and elasticity could not fail to be ‘a most gracious assistance’ to the first efforts of human intelligence.

Numbers and figures were the most powerful tools of thought for the Greek philosopher. Just like abstract ideas, they had a strong influence on the mind and were also useful in real-life situations. Many intriguing and, for early thinkers, mysterious properties became clear when they were compared with each other. They could be endlessly multiplied and constructed; in Pythagorean triangles or in ratios like 1:2:4:8 and 1:3:9:27, or their combinations, the laws of the universe appeared to be partially unveiled. They also allowed for infinite subdivision—a wonder and a mystery for ancient thinkers (Rep.). Unlike being or essence, which were just empty abstractions, numbers and figures allowed for growth and development while reinforcing the idea that there was order in the universe. This led to a genuine connection between the inner world and the outer world. The numbers and figures imagined in the mind became apparent to the senses; the truth of nature was mathematics, and other properties of objects seemed to reflect only in the light of numbers. Laws and morality also found a natural expression through numbers and figures. Such powerful and flexible tools undoubtedly provided “a most gracious assistance” to the initial efforts of human intelligence.

There was another reason why numbers had so great an influence over the minds of early thinkers—they were verified by experience. Every use of them, even the most trivial, assured men of their truth; they were everywhere to be found, in the least things and the greatest alike. One, two, three, counted on the fingers was a ‘trivial matter (Rep.), a little instrument out of which to create a world; but from these and by the help of these all our knowledge of nature has been developed. They were the measure of all things, and seemed to give law to all things; nature was rescued from chaos and confusion by their power; the notes of music, the motions of the stars, the forms of atoms, the evolution and recurrence of days, months, years, the military divisions of an army, the civil divisions of a state, seemed to afford a ‘present witness’ of them—what would have become of man or of the world if deprived of number (Rep.)? The mystery of number and the mystery of music were akin. There was a music of rhythm and of harmonious motion everywhere; and to the real connexion which existed between music and number, a fanciful or imaginary relation was superadded. There was a music of the spheres as well as of the notes of the lyre. If in all things seen there was number and figure, why should they not also pervade the unseen world, with which by their wonderful and unchangeable nature they seemed to hold communion?

There was another reason why numbers had such a strong influence over the minds of early thinkers—they could be confirmed by experience. Every use of them, even the simplest, reassured people of their accuracy; they were found everywhere, in both small and big things. One, two, three, counted on fingers was a ‘trivial matter (Rep.), a small tool out of which to create a world; but from these and with their help, all our understanding of nature has grown. They were the measure of everything and appeared to impose order on everything; nature was pulled from chaos and confusion by their power; the notes of music, the movements of the stars, the shapes of atoms, the cycles of days, months, years, the military divisions of an army, the civil divisions of a state, seemed to provide a ‘present witness’ of them—what would have happened to humanity or the world if deprived of number (Rep.)? The mystery of number and the mystery of music were linked. There was a music of rhythm and harmonious motion everywhere; and alongside the true connection between music and number, there was an added fanciful or imaginary relationship. There was music of the spheres as well as the notes of the lyre. If in all visible things there was number and shape, why should they not also exist in the unseen world, which, through their wonderful and unchanging nature, seemed to connect with?

Two other points strike us in the use which the ancient philosophers made of numbers. First, they applied to external nature the relations of them which they found in their own minds; and where nature seemed to be at variance with number, as for example in the case of fractions, they protested against her (Rep.; Arist. Metaph.). Having long meditated on the properties of 1:2:4:8, or 1:3:9:27, or of 3, 4, 5, they discovered in them many curious correspondences and were disposed to find in them the secret of the universe. Secondly, they applied number and figure equally to those parts of physics, such as astronomy or mechanics, in which the modern philosopher expects to find them, and to those in which he would never think of looking for them, such as physiology and psychology. For the sciences were not yet divided, and there was nothing really irrational in arguing that the same laws which regulated the heavenly bodies were partially applied to the erring limbs or brain of man. Astrology was the form which the lively fancy of ancient thinkers almost necessarily gave to astronomy. The observation that the lower principle, e.g. mechanics, is always seen in the higher, e.g. in the phenomena of life, further tended to perplex them. Plato’s doctrine of the same and the other ruling the courses of the heavens and of the human body is not a mere vagary, but is a natural result of the state of knowledge and thought at which he had arrived.

Two other points stand out in how ancient philosophers used numbers. First, they applied the relationships they found in their own minds to the natural world; when nature seemed to disagree with their numerical concepts, like in the case of fractions, they protested against it (Rep.; Arist. Metaph.). After contemplating the properties of sequences like 1:2:4:8 or 1:3:9:27, or the triplet 3, 4, 5, they uncovered many intriguing connections and believed these numbers held the key to the universe. Secondly, they applied numbers and shapes to both areas of physics, such as astronomy or mechanics—where modern philosophers typically expect them—and to those areas they wouldn’t normally consider, like physiology and psychology. Back then, sciences weren’t separated, and it didn't seem unreasonable to argue that the same laws governing celestial bodies could also apply to the flawed limbs or brain of humans. Astrology was the form that the vibrant imagination of ancient thinkers naturally gave to astronomy. The observation that the lower principles, for example mechanics, are always reflected in the higher ones, like in the phenomena of life, further confused them. Plato’s idea that the same and the other govern the movements of the heavens and the human body isn’t just a whimsical notion; it’s a natural outcome of the level of knowledge and thought he had reached.

When in modern times we contemplate the heavens, a certain amount of scientific truth imperceptibly blends, even with the cursory glance of an unscientific person. He knows that the earth is revolving round the sun, and not the sun around the earth. He does not imagine the earth to be the centre of the universe, and he has some conception of chemistry and the cognate sciences. A very different aspect of nature would have been present to the mind of the early Greek philosopher. He would have beheld the earth a surface only, not mirrored, however faintly, in the glass of science, but indissolubly connected with some theory of one, two, or more elements. He would have seen the world pervaded by number and figure, animated by a principle of motion, immanent in a principle of rest. He would have tried to construct the universe on a quantitative principle, seeming to find in endless combinations of geometrical figures or in the infinite variety of their sizes a sufficient account of the multiplicity of phenomena. To these a priori speculations he would add a rude conception of matter and his own immediate experience of health and disease. His cosmos would necessarily be imperfect and unequal, being the first attempt to impress form and order on the primaeval chaos of human knowledge. He would see all things as in a dream.

When we look at the sky today, even someone without a scientific background picks up some scientific truths. They understand that the Earth revolves around the sun, not the other way around. They don’t think of the Earth as the center of the universe and have a basic understanding of chemistry and related sciences. In contrast, an early Greek philosopher would have had a very different view of nature. They would have seen the Earth as just a surface, not really reflected in the lens of science, but inherently linked to theories about one, two, or more elements. They would have perceived the world as filled with numbers and shapes, animated by a principle of motion while also resting on a principle of stillness. They would have attempted to construct the universe based on a quantitative approach, seemingly finding that endless combinations of geometric shapes or their infinite sizes could explain the variety of phenomena. They would have combined these speculative ideas with a basic understanding of matter and their own experiences with health and illness. Their version of the cosmos would necessarily be incomplete and uneven, being the first effort to impose structure and order on the chaotic beginnings of human knowledge. They would view all things as if in a dream.

The ancient physical philosophers have been charged by Dr. Whewell and others with wasting their fine intelligences in wrong methods of enquiry; and their progress in moral and political philosophy has been sometimes contrasted with their supposed failure in physical investigations. ‘They had plenty of ideas,’ says Dr. Whewell, ‘and plenty of facts; but their ideas did not accurately represent the facts with which they were acquainted.’ This is a very crude and misleading way of describing ancient science. It is the mistake of an uneducated person—uneducated, that is, in the higher sense of the word—who imagines every one else to be like himself and explains every other age by his own. No doubt the ancients often fell into strange and fanciful errors: the time had not yet arrived for the slower and surer path of the modern inductive philosophy. But it remains to be shown that they could have done more in their age and country; or that the contributions which they made to the sciences with which they were acquainted are not as great upon the whole as those made by their successors. There is no single step in astronomy as great as that of the nameless Pythagorean who first conceived the world to be a body moving round the sun in space: there is no truer or more comprehensive principle than the application of mathematics alike to the heavenly bodies, and to the particles of matter. The ancients had not the instruments which would have enabled them to correct or verify their anticipations, and their opportunities of observation were limited. Plato probably did more for physical science by asserting the supremacy of mathematics than Aristotle or his disciples by their collections of facts. When the thinkers of modern times, following Bacon, undervalue or disparage the speculations of ancient philosophers, they seem wholly to forget the conditions of the world and of the human mind, under which they carried on their investigations. When we accuse them of being under the influence of words, do we suppose that we are altogether free from this illusion? When we remark that Greek physics soon became stationary or extinct, may we not observe also that there have been and may be again periods in the history of modern philosophy which have been barren and unproductive? We might as well maintain that Greek art was not real or great, because it had nihil simile aut secundum, as say that Greek physics were a failure because they admire no subsequent progress.

The ancient physical philosophers have been criticized by Dr. Whewell and others for wasting their great intellects on flawed methods of inquiry. Their advancements in moral and political philosophy have sometimes been compared to their supposed shortcomings in physical investigations. “They had plenty of ideas,” Dr. Whewell states, “and plenty of facts, but their ideas didn’t accurately represent the facts they knew.” This is a very simplistic and misleading way to describe ancient science. It reflects a lack of education—specifically, a deeper education—where one assumes everyone else is like themselves and judges other eras by their own. It's true that the ancients often made strange and fanciful mistakes: their time had not yet come for the more gradual and reliable path of modern inductive philosophy. However, it remains to be proven that they could have achieved more in their own time and place, or that their contributions to the sciences they understood aren't as significant overall as those made by their successors. There is no single advancement in astronomy as remarkable as that of the anonymous Pythagorean who first envisioned the world as a body orbiting the sun in space; there’s no truer or more all-encompassing principle than applying mathematics to both celestial bodies and particles of matter. The ancients lacked the tools that would have allowed them to correct or verify their ideas, and their chances for observation were limited. Plato likely contributed more to physical science by emphasizing the importance of mathematics than Aristotle or his followers did by collecting facts. When modern thinkers, following Bacon, undervalue or dismiss the ideas of ancient philosophers, they seem to completely overlook the conditions of the world and the human mind that shaped their investigations. When we claim they were influenced by language, do we think we’re entirely free from that illusion? When we note that Greek physics soon stagnated or disappeared, shouldn’t we also recognize that there have been—and can be again—periods in modern philosophy's history that were barren and unproductive? It would be just as misguided to argue that Greek art was not real or great because it lacked any parallels or successors as it is to claim that Greek physics were a failure because they show no subsequent progress.

The charge of premature generalization which is often urged against ancient philosophers is really an anachronism. For they can hardly be said to have generalized at all. They may be said more truly to have cleared up and defined by the help of experience ideas which they already possessed. The beginnings of thought about nature must always have this character. A true method is the result of many ages of experiment and observation, and is ever going on and enlarging with the progress of science and knowledge. At first men personify nature, then they form impressions of nature, at last they conceive ‘measure’ or laws of nature. They pass out of mythology into philosophy. Early science is not a process of discovery in the modern sense; but rather a process of correcting by observation, and to a certain extent only, the first impressions of nature, which mankind, when they began to think, had received from poetry or language or unintelligent sense. Of all scientific truths the greatest and simplest is the uniformity of nature; this was expressed by the ancients in many ways, as fate, or necessity, or measure, or limit. Unexpected events, of which the cause was unknown to them, they attributed to chance (Thucyd.). But their conception of nature was never that of law interrupted by exceptions,—a somewhat unfortunate metaphysical invention of modern times, which is at variance with facts and has failed to satisfy the requirements of thought.

The accusation of premature generalization often directed at ancient philosophers is really just an outdated criticism. They can hardly be said to have generalized at all. Instead, they more accurately clarified and defined ideas they already held, using their experiences. The origins of thinking about nature must always have this nature. A true method comes from many ages of experimentation and observation, continually evolving with advancements in science and knowledge. Initially, people personify nature, then they form impressions of it, and eventually, they conceive of 'measure' or laws of nature. They move from mythology into philosophy. Early science isn’t a discovery process in the modern sense but rather a process of refining initial impressions of nature, which humanity, when it began to think, received from poetry, language, or basic sensory experience. Of all scientific truths, the most significant and fundamental is the uniformity of nature; the ancients expressed this in various ways, such as fate, necessity, measure, or limit. They attributed unexpected events, whose causes were unknown to them, to chance (Thucyd.). However, their understanding of nature was never that of law interrupted by exceptions—a somewhat unfortunate philosophical concept of modern times that conflicts with the facts and fails to meet the needs of thought.





Section 3.

Plato’s account of the soul is partly mythical or figurative, and partly literal. Not that either he or we can draw a line between them, or say, ‘This is poetry, this is philosophy’; for the transition from the one to the other is imperceptible. Neither must we expect to find in him absolute consistency. He is apt to pass from one level or stage of thought to another without always making it apparent that he is changing his ground. In such passages we have to interpret his meaning by the general spirit of his writings. To reconcile his inconsistencies would be contrary to the first principles of criticism and fatal to any true understanding of him.

Plato’s view of the soul is partly mythical or figurative and partly literal. Neither he nor we can clearly separate the two or say, ‘This is poetry, this is philosophy,’ because the shift from one to the other is subtle. We also shouldn’t expect to find complete consistency in his work. He tends to move between different levels or stages of thought without always making it clear that he’s changing his perspective. In these cases, we need to understand his meaning based on the general spirit of his writings. Trying to resolve his inconsistencies would go against the basic principles of criticism and would hinder any real understanding of him.

There is a further difficulty in explaining this part of the Timaeus—the natural order of thought is inverted. We begin with the most abstract, and proceed from the abstract to the concrete. We are searching into things which are upon the utmost limit of human intelligence, and then of a sudden we fall rather heavily to the earth. There are no intermediate steps which lead from one to the other. But the abstract is a vacant form to us until brought into relation with man and nature. God and the world are mere names, like the Being of the Eleatics, unless some human qualities are added on to them. Yet the negation has a kind of unknown meaning to us. The priority of God and of the world, which he is imagined to have created, to all other existences, gives a solemn awe to them. And as in other systems of theology and philosophy, that of which we know least has the greatest interest to us.

There’s another challenge in explaining this section of the Timaeus—the natural order of thought is flipped. We start with the most abstract concepts and then move from the abstract to the concrete. We're delving into ideas that are at the very edge of human understanding, and then suddenly we crash back down to reality. There are no gradual steps connecting the two. But the abstract remains an empty concept for us until it’s connected to humanity and nature. God and the world are just labels, like the Being of the Eleatics, unless we add some human traits to them. Still, the idea of negation holds a kind of unknown significance for us. The precedence of God and the world, which is thought to have been created by Him, gives them a profound sense of reverence. And as in other theological and philosophical systems, what we know the least about fascinates us the most.

There is no use in attempting to define or explain the first God in the Platonic system, who has sometimes been thought to answer to God the Father; or the world, in whom the Fathers of the Church seemed to recognize ‘the firstborn of every creature.’ Nor need we discuss at length how far Plato agrees in the later Jewish idea of creation, according to which God made the world out of nothing. For his original conception of matter as something which has no qualities is really a negation. Moreover in the Hebrew Scriptures the creation of the world is described, even more explicitly than in the Timaeus, not as a single act, but as a work or process which occupied six days. There is a chaos in both, and it would be untrue to say that the Greek, any more than the Hebrew, had any definite belief in the eternal existence of matter. The beginning of things vanished into the distance. The real creation began, not with matter, but with ideas. According to Plato in the Timaeus, God took of the same and the other, of the divided and undivided, of the finite and infinite, and made essence, and out of the three combined created the soul of the world. To the soul he added a body formed out of the four elements. The general meaning of these words is that God imparted determinations of thought, or, as we might say, gave law and variety to the material universe. The elements are moving in a disorderly manner before the work of creation begins; and there is an eternal pattern of the world, which, like the ‘idea of good,’ is not the Creator himself, but not separable from him. The pattern too, though eternal, is a creation, a world of thought prior to the world of sense, which may be compared to the wisdom of God in the book of Ecclesiasticus, or to the ‘God in the form of a globe’ of the old Eleatic philosophers. The visible, which already exists, is fashioned in the likeness of this eternal pattern. On the other hand, there is no truth of which Plato is more firmly convinced than of the priority of the soul to the body, both in the universe and in man. So inconsistent are the forms in which he describes the works which no tongue can utter—his language, as he himself says, partaking of his own uncertainty about the things of which he is speaking.

There’s no point in trying to define or explain the first God in the Platonic system, who has sometimes been thought to correspond to God the Father; or the world, where the Church Fathers seemed to see ‘the firstborn of every creature.’ We also don't need to delve deeply into how closely Plato aligns with the later Jewish idea of creation, which states that God made the world out of nothing. His original view of matter as something that has no qualities is essentially a negation. Furthermore, in the Hebrew Scriptures, the creation of the world is described, even more clearly than in the Timaeus, not as a single event but as a work or process that took six days. There's chaos in both accounts, and it's misleading to claim that the Greeks, like the Hebrews, had any definite belief in the eternal existence of matter. The beginning of things faded into the distance. True creation began, not with matter, but with ideas. According to Plato in the Timaeus, God took from the same and the other, from the divided and undivided, from the finite and infinite, and made essence, and from these three combined, created the soul of the world. He then added a body formed from the four elements. The general message of these words is that God imparted determinations of thought, or as we might say, provided law and variety to the material universe. The elements are moving chaotically before creation begins; and there is an eternal pattern of the world, which, like the ‘idea of good,’ is not the Creator himself, but inseparable from him. This pattern, although eternal, is a creation, a world of thought that comes before the world of sensory experience, which could be compared to the wisdom of God in the book of Ecclesiasticus, or to the ‘God in the form of a globe’ from the early Eleatic philosophers. What exists visibly is shaped in the likeness of this eternal pattern. On the other hand, there’s nothing Plato is more certain about than the primacy of the soul over the body, both in the universe and in humans. The forms in which he describes the works that can’t be put into words are often inconsistent—his language reflects his own uncertainty about the subjects he’s discussing.

We may remark in passing, that the Platonic compared with the Jewish description of the process of creation has less of freedom or spontaneity. The Creator in Plato is still subject to a remnant of necessity which he cannot wholly overcome. When his work is accomplished he remains in his own nature. Plato is more sensible than the Hebrew prophet of the existence of evil, which he seeks to put as far as possible out of the way of God. And he can only suppose this to be accomplished by God retiring into himself and committing the lesser works of creation to inferior powers. (Compare, however, Laws for another solution of the difficulty.)

We can note that the Platonic view of creation is less about freedom or spontaneity compared to the Jewish perspective. In Plato's view, the Creator is still influenced by some necessity that he can’t completely escape. Once the work is done, he remains true to his own nature. Plato recognizes the existence of evil more than the Hebrew prophet does, and he tries to distance it as much as possible from God. He believes this can only be achieved by God withdrawing into himself and leaving the lesser aspects of creation to lower powers. (See Laws for another approach to this issue.)

Nor can we attach any intelligible meaning to his words when he speaks of the visible being in the image of the invisible. For how can that which is divided be like that which is undivided? Or that which is changing be the copy of that which is unchanging? All the old difficulties about the ideas come back upon us in an altered form. We can imagine two worlds, one of which is the mere double of the other, or one of which is an imperfect copy of the other, or one of which is the vanishing ideal of the other; but we cannot imagine an intellectual world which has no qualities—‘a thing in itself’—a point which has no parts or magnitude, which is nowhere, and nothing. This cannot be the archetype according to which God made the world, and is in reality, whether in Plato or in Kant, a mere negative residuum of human thought.

We can’t really make sense of his words when he talks about the visible being resembling the invisible. How can something that is divided be like something that is whole? Or how can something that changes be a reflection of something that doesn’t change? All the old problems regarding ideas come back to us in a different form. We can picture two worlds, where one is simply a duplicate of the other, or one is an imperfect copy, or one is the fading ideal of the other; but we can’t imagine an intellectual world that has no qualities—‘a thing in itself’—a point that has no parts or size, that exists nowhere and is nothing. This can’t be the model that God used to create the world and is, in reality, whether in Plato or in Kant, just a negative remnant of human thought.

There is another aspect of the same difficulty which appears to have no satisfactory solution. In what relation does the archetype stand to the Creator himself? For the idea or pattern of the world is not the thought of God, but a separate, self-existent nature, of which creation is the copy. We can only reply, (1) that to the mind of Plato subject and object were not yet distinguished; (2) that he supposes the process of creation to take place in accordance with his own theory of ideas; and as we cannot give a consistent account of the one, neither can we of the other. He means (3) to say that the creation of the world is not a material process of working with legs and arms, but ideal and intellectual; according to his own fine expression, ‘the thought of God made the God that was to be.’ He means (4) to draw an absolute distinction between the invisible or unchangeable which is or is the place of mind or being, and the world of sense or becoming which is visible and changing. He means (5) that the idea of the world is prior to the world, just as the other ideas are prior to sensible objects; and like them may be regarded as eternal and self-existent, and also, like the IDEA of good, may be viewed apart from the divine mind.

There’s another part of the same issue that seems to have no clear solution. What’s the relationship between the archetype and the Creator? The concept or model of the world isn’t simply God’s thought but rather a separate, self-sufficient essence, of which creation is a reflection. We can only say, (1) that in Plato's mind, subject and object weren’t differentiated yet; (2) that he believes creation happens based on his theory of ideas; and since we can't consistently explain one, we can’t do the same for the other. He means (3) that the creation of the world isn’t a physical process involving hands and feet, but rather an ideal and intellectual one; as he beautifully puts it, “the thought of God created the God that was to be.” He means (4) to establish a clear distinction between the invisible or unchangeable realm of mind or existence, and the visible and changing world of senses or becoming. He means (5) that the idea of the world comes before the world itself, just like other ideas precede physical objects; and like them, it can be seen as eternal and self-existing, and, similar to the IDEA of good, it can be viewed separately from the divine mind.

There are several other questions which we might ask and which can receive no answer, or at least only an answer of the same kind as the preceding. How can matter be conceived to exist without form? Or, how can the essences or forms of things be distinguished from the eternal ideas, or essence itself from the soul? Or, how could there have been motion in the chaos when as yet time was not? Or, how did chaos come into existence, if not by the will of the Creator? Or, how could there have been a time when the world was not, if time was not? Or, how could the Creator have taken portions of an indivisible same? Or, how could space or anything else have been eternal when time is only created? Or, how could the surfaces of geometrical figures have formed solids? We must reply again that we cannot follow Plato in all his inconsistencies, but that the gaps of thought are probably more apparent to us than to him. He would, perhaps, have said that ‘the first things are known only to God and to him of men whom God loves.’ How often have the gaps in Theology been concealed from the eye of faith! And we may say that only by an effort of metaphysical imagination can we hope to understand Plato from his own point of view; we must not ask for consistency. Everywhere we find traces of the Platonic theory of knowledge expressed in an objective form, which by us has to be translated into the subjective, before we can attach any meaning to it. And this theory is exhibited in so many different points of view, that we cannot with any certainty interpret one dialogue by another; e.g. the Timaeus by the Parmenides or Phaedrus or Philebus.

There are several other questions we might ask that may not have answers, or at least only answers similar to those we've already discussed. How can we think of matter existing without form? Or, how can the essences or forms of things be separated from eternal ideas, or essence itself from the soul? How could there have been movement in chaos when time didn’t exist yet? How did chaos come into being, if not by the Creator’s will? Or, how could there have been a time when the world didn’t exist, if time didn't exist? How could the Creator have taken parts from something that is indivisible? How could space or anything else have been eternal when time is only created? Or, how could the surfaces of geometrical figures have formed solids? We must again acknowledge that we can't follow Plato in all his contradictions, but the gaps in thought likely appear more apparent to us than they did to him. He might have said that "the first things are known only to God and to those men whom God loves." How often have the gaps in Theology been hidden from the eye of faith! We could say that only through a stretch of metaphysical imagination can we hope to understand Plato from his own perspective; we shouldn't expect consistency. Everywhere we see hints of the Platonic theory of knowledge expressed in an objective manner, which we need to interpret subjectively before we can assign any meaning to it. This theory is presented from so many different angles that we can't reliably interpret one dialogue with another; for example, the Timaeus through the Parmenides or Phaedrus or Philebus.

The soul of the world may also be conceived as the personification of the numbers and figures in which the heavenly bodies move. Imagine these as in a Pythagorean dream, stripped of qualitative difference and reduced to mathematical abstractions. They too conform to the principle of the same, and may be compared with the modern conception of laws of nature. They are in space, but not in time, and they are the makers of time. They are represented as constantly thinking of the same; for thought in the view of Plato is equivalent to truth or law, and need not imply a human consciousness, a conception which is familiar enough to us, but has no place, hardly even a name, in ancient Greek philosophy. To this principle of the same is opposed the principle of the other—the principle of irregularity and disorder, of necessity and chance, which is only partially impressed by mathematical laws and figures. (We may observe by the way, that the principle of the other, which is the principle of plurality and variation in the Timaeus, has nothing in common with the ‘other’ of the Sophist, which is the principle of determination.) The element of the same dominates to a certain extent over the other—the fixed stars keep the ‘wanderers’ of the inner circle in their courses, and a similar principle of fixedness or order appears to regulate the bodily constitution of man. But there still remains a rebellious seed of evil derived from the original chaos, which is the source of disorder in the world, and of vice and disease in man.

The soul of the world can also be seen as the representation of the numbers and figures in which the heavenly bodies move. Picture them as in a Pythagorean dream, stripped of qualitative differences and reduced to mathematical abstractions. They also follow the principle of sameness and can be compared to the modern idea of natural laws. They exist in space but not in time, and they are the creators of time. They are depicted as constantly thinking about the same ideas; for Plato, thought equates to truth or law, and doesn’t necessarily imply human consciousness, a concept that is quite familiar to us but barely exists, even by name, in ancient Greek philosophy. Opposed to this principle of sameness is the principle of the other—the principle of irregularity and disorder, of necessity and chance, which is only partially shaped by mathematical laws and figures. (It's worth noting that the principle of the other, which represents plurality and variation in the Timaeus, is different from the 'other' of the Sophist, which signifies determination.) The element of sameness partially dominates the other—the fixed stars guide the ‘wanderers’ of the inner circle along their paths, and a similar principle of stability or order seems to regulate the bodily makeup of humans. However, there is still a rebellious element of chaos, which is the source of disorder in the world and of vice and illness in humanity.

But what did Plato mean by essence, (Greek), which is the intermediate nature compounded of the Same and the Other, and out of which, together with these two, the soul of the world is created? It is difficult to explain a process of thought so strange and unaccustomed to us, in which modern distinctions run into one another and are lost sight of. First, let us consider once more the meaning of the Same and the Other. The Same is the unchanging and indivisible, the heaven of the fixed stars, partaking of the divine nature, which, having law in itself, gives law to all besides and is the element of order and permanence in man and on the earth. It is the rational principle, mind regarded as a work, as creation—not as the creator. The old tradition of Parmenides and of the Eleatic Being, the foundation of so much in the philosophy of Greece and of the world, was lingering in Plato’s mind. The Other is the variable or changing element, the residuum of disorder or chaos, which cannot be reduced to order, nor altogether banished, the source of evil, seen in the errors of man and also in the wanderings of the planets, a necessity which protrudes through nature. Of this too there was a shadow in the Eleatic philosophy in the realm of opinion, which, like a mist, seemed to darken the purity of truth in itself.—So far the words of Plato may perhaps find an intelligible meaning. But when he goes on to speak of the Essence which is compounded out of both, the track becomes fainter and we can only follow him with hesitating steps. But still we find a trace reappearing of the teaching of Anaxagoras: ‘All was confusion, and then mind came and arranged things.’ We have already remarked that Plato was not acquainted with the modern distinction of subject and object, and therefore he sometimes confuses mind and the things of mind—(Greek) and (Greek). By (Greek) he clearly means some conception of the intelligible and the intelligent; it belongs to the class of (Greek). Matter, being, the Same, the eternal,—for any of these terms, being almost vacant of meaning, is equally suitable to express indefinite existence,—are compared or united with the Other or Diverse, and out of the union or comparison is elicited the idea of intelligence, the ‘One in many,’ brighter than any Promethean fire (Phil.), which co-existing with them and so forming a new existence, is or becomes the intelligible world...So we may perhaps venture to paraphrase or interpret or put into other words the parable in which Plato has wrapped up his conception of the creation of the world. The explanation may help to fill up with figures of speech the void of knowledge.

But what did Plato mean by essence, which is the middle ground made up of the Same and the Other, and from which, along with these two, the soul of the world is created? It's hard to explain such an unusual and unfamiliar way of thinking, where modern distinctions blur and become unnoticeable. First, let's revisit the meanings of the Same and the Other. The Same represents the unchanging and indivisible, like the heavens with fixed stars, sharing in the divine nature that contains law within itself and gives law to everything else, serving as the foundation of order and stability in humanity and on Earth. It represents the rational principle, viewing the mind as a creation—not as the creator. The old ideas of Parmenides and the Eleatic Being, which greatly influenced Greek philosophy and beyond, were still present in Plato's thoughts. The Other represents the changing element, the leftover chaos that can't be organized nor completely eliminated, the source of evil that manifests in human mistakes and in the movements of the planets, an unavoidable necessity that emerges through nature. There was also a hint of this in Eleatic philosophy regarding opinion, which, like a fog, seemed to obscure the purity of truth itself. Up to this point, Plato's words might have an understandable meaning. But when he starts to talk about Essence compounded of both, the path becomes less clear, and we can only follow him with uncertainty. Yet we still see a hint of Anaxagoras's teaching: ‘All was chaos, and then mind came and organized things.’ We noted earlier that Plato didn't know the modern distinction between subject and object, so he sometimes mixes up mind and the objects of thought. By that, he clearly refers to some idea of the intelligible and the intelligent; it falls under the category of items. Matter, being, the Same, the eternal—any of these terms, being nearly devoid of specific meaning, can represent indefinite existence—are compared or connected with the Other or Diverse, and from this combination arises the concept of intelligence, the ‘One in many,’ brighter than any Promethean fire, which, existing alongside them and thereby forming a new reality, is or becomes the intelligible world... Thus, we might dare to rephrase or interpret the parable in which Plato has expressed his idea of the world’s creation. This explanation may help to fill in the gaps in understanding with figurative language.

The entire compound was divided by the Creator in certain proportions and reunited; it was then cut into two strips, which were bent into an inner circle and an outer, both moving with an uniform motion around a centre, the outer circle containing the fixed, the inner the wandering stars. The soul of the world was diffused everywhere from the centre to the circumference. To this God gave a body, consisting at first of fire and earth, and afterwards receiving an addition of air and water; because solid bodies, like the world, are always connected by two middle terms and not by one. The world was made in the form of a globe, and all the material elements were exhausted in the work of creation.

The whole universe was divided by the Creator in specific proportions and then brought back together; it was sliced into two strips, which were shaped into an inner circle and an outer circle, both moving uniformly around a center. The outer circle held the fixed stars, while the inner circle contained the wandering stars. The soul of the world was spread everywhere from the center to the edge. To this, God gave a physical form, initially made of fire and earth, and later adding air and water; because solid objects, like the world, are always connected by two intermediary elements and not just one. The world was created as a globe, and all the material elements were fully utilized in the process of creation.

The proportions in which the soul of the world as well as the human soul is divided answer to a series of numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27, composed of the two Pythagorean progressions 1, 2, 4, 8 and 1, 3, 9, 27, of which the number 1 represents a point, 2 and 3 lines, 4 and 8, 9 and 27 the squares and cubes respectively of 2 and 3. This series, of which the intervals are afterwards filled up, probably represents (1) the diatonic scale according to the Pythagoreans and Plato; (2) the order and distances of the heavenly bodies; and (3) may possibly contain an allusion to the music of the spheres, which is referred to in the myth at the end of the Republic. The meaning of the words that ‘solid bodies are always connected by two middle terms’ or mean proportionals has been much disputed. The most received explanation is that of Martin, who supposes that Plato is only speaking of surfaces and solids compounded of prime numbers (i.e. of numbers not made up of two factors, or, in other words, only measurable by unity). The square of any such number represents a surface, the cube a solid. The squares of any two such numbers (e.g. 2 squared, 3 squared = 4, 9), have always a single mean proportional (e.g. 4 and 9 have the single mean 6), whereas the cubes of primes (e.g. 3 cubed and 5 cubed) have always two mean proportionals (e.g. 27:45:75:125). But to this explanation of Martin’s it may be objected, (1) that Plato nowhere says that his proportion is to be limited to prime numbers; (2) that the limitation of surfaces to squares is also not to be found in his words; nor (3) is there any evidence to show that the distinction of prime from other numbers was known to him. What Plato chiefly intends to express is that a solid requires a stronger bond than a surface; and that the double bond which is given by two means is stronger than the single bond given by one. Having reflected on the singular numerical phenomena of the existence of one mean proportional between two square numbers are rather perhaps only between the two lowest squares; and of two mean proportionals between two cubes, perhaps again confining his attention to the two lowest cubes, he finds in the latter symbol an expression of the relation of the elements, as in the former an image of the combination of two surfaces. Between fire and earth, the two extremes, he remarks that there are introduced, not one, but two elements, air and water, which are compared to the two mean proportionals between two cube numbers. The vagueness of his language does not allow us to determine whether anything more than this was intended by him.

The way the world's soul and the human soul are divided corresponds to a series of numbers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27, formed by two Pythagorean sequences: 1, 2, 4, 8 and 1, 3, 9, 27. Here, the number 1 represents a point, while 2 and 3 represent lines, and 4, 8, 9, and 27 represent the squares and cubes of 2 and 3. This series, which is later filled in, likely represents (1) the diatonic scale according to the Pythagoreans and Plato; (2) the arrangement and distances of celestial bodies; and (3) it might reference the music of the spheres mentioned in the myth at the end of the Republic. The phrase that “solid bodies are always connected by two middle terms” or mean proportionals has been debated. The most accepted interpretation is by Martin, who suggests that Plato is only discussing surfaces and solids made of prime numbers (i.e., numbers that can’t be divided by any factors other than 1 and themselves). The square of any such number represents a surface, while the cube represents a solid. The squares of any two such numbers (e.g., 2 squared and 3 squared, which are 4 and 9) always have one mean proportional (for example, 4 and 9 have the mean of 6), while the cubes of prime numbers (like 3 cubed and 5 cubed) always have two mean proportionals (for instance, 27:45:75:125). However, Martin's interpretation faces some challenges: (1) Plato doesn’t specify that his proportion should be limited to prime numbers; (2) he doesn’t limit surfaces to squares in his words; and (3) there's no evidence that he understood the distinction between prime and other numbers. What Plato mainly wants to convey is that a solid needs a stronger connection than a surface, and that the double connection provided by two means is stronger than a single connection from one mean. He reflects on the unique numerical phenomena, such as the existence of one mean proportional between two square numbers—most likely just the two smallest squares—and two mean proportionals between two cubes, likely again focusing on the two smallest cubes. He finds in cubes an expression of the relationship of the elements, just as with squares, an image of the combination of two surfaces. Between fire and earth, the two extremes, he notes that two elements, air and water, are introduced, which relate to the two mean proportionals between two cube numbers. The ambiguity of his language doesn’t clarify if he meant anything more than this.

Leaving the further explanation of details, which the reader will find discussed at length in Boeckh and Martin, we may now return to the main argument: Why did God make the world? Like man, he must have a purpose; and his purpose is the diffusion of that goodness or good which he himself is. The term ‘goodness’ is not to be understood in this passage as meaning benevolence or love, in the Christian sense of the term, but rather law, order, harmony, like the idea of good in the Republic. The ancient mythologers, and even the Hebrew prophets, had spoken of the jealousy of God; and the Greek had imagined that there was a Nemesis always attending the prosperity of mortals. But Plato delights to think of God as the author of order in his works, who, like a father, lives over again in his children, and can never have too much of good or friendship among his creatures. Only, as there is a certain remnant of evil inherent in matter which he cannot get rid of, he detaches himself from them and leaves them to themselves, that he may be guiltless of their faults and sufferings.

Leaving the further explanation of details, which the reader will find discussed at length in Boeckh and Martin, we may now return to the main argument: Why did God create the world? Like humans, He must have a purpose; and His purpose is the spreading of that goodness or good which He Himself embodies. The term ‘goodness’ should not be understood here as benevolence or love, in the Christian sense, but rather law, order, and harmony, similar to the idea of good in the Republic. The ancient myth makers, and even the Hebrew prophets, spoke of God’s jealousy; and the Greeks imagined a Nemesis always present during the success of mortals. But Plato enjoys thinking of God as the creator of order in His works, who, like a father, lives on through His children and can never have too much good or friendship among His creatures. However, because there is a certain amount of evil that is inherent in matter which He cannot eliminate, He separates Himself from them and allows them their own autonomy, so that He remains blameless for their faults and suffering.

Between the ideal and the sensible Plato interposes the two natures of time and space. Time is conceived by him to be only the shadow or image of eternity which ever is and never has been or will be, but is described in a figure only as past or future. This is one of the great thoughts of early philosophy, which are still as difficult to our minds as they were to the early thinkers; or perhaps more difficult, because we more distinctly see the consequences which are involved in such an hypothesis. All the objections which may be urged against Kant’s doctrine of the ideality of space and time at once press upon us. If time is unreal, then all which is contained in time is unreal—the succession of human thoughts as well as the flux of sensations; there is no connecting link between (Greek) and (Greek). Yet, on the other hand, we are conscious that knowledge is independent of time, that truth is not a thing of yesterday or tomorrow, but an ‘eternal now.’ To the ‘spectator of all time and all existence’ the universe remains at rest. The truths of geometry and arithmetic in all their combinations are always the same. The generations of men, like the leaves of the forest, come and go, but the mathematical laws by which the world is governed remain, and seem as if they could never change. The ever-present image of space is transferred to time—succession is conceived as extension. (We remark that Plato does away with the above and below in space, as he has done away with the absolute existence of past and future.) The course of time, unless regularly marked by divisions of number, partakes of the indefiniteness of the Heraclitean flux. By such reflections we may conceive the Greek to have attained the metaphysical conception of eternity, which to the Hebrew was gained by meditation on the Divine Being. No one saw that this objective was really a subjective, and involved the subjectivity of all knowledge. ‘Non in tempore sed cum tempore finxit Deus mundum,’ says St. Augustine, repeating a thought derived from the Timaeus, but apparently unconscious of the results to which his doctrine would have led.

Between the ideal and the practical, Plato introduces the two concepts of time and space. He views time as merely a shadow or reflection of eternity, which always exists and never has existed or will exist, but is only described in terms of the past or future. This idea is one of the significant thoughts in early philosophy, which remains as challenging for us today as it was for the early thinkers; or perhaps even more so, since we have a clearer understanding of the implications of such a hypothesis. All objections against Kant’s theory of the ideality of space and time immediately confront us. If time is not real, then everything that exists within time is also not real—the sequence of human thoughts as well as the flow of sensations; there’s no connecting link between (Greek) and (Greek). On the other hand, we are aware that knowledge exists independently of time, and truth isn’t something tied to yesterday or tomorrow, but rather an "eternal now." For the "witness of all time and all existence," the universe remains unchanged. The truths of geometry and arithmetic in all their combinations are always constant. The generations of people, like the leaves in a forest, come and go, but the mathematical laws controlling the world persist, seeming as if they could never change. The ever-present concept of space is applied to time—sequence is understood as extension. (We note that Plato eliminates the concepts of above and below in space, just as he has removed the absolute existence of past and future.) The progression of time, unless regularly marked by divisions of numbers, shares the vagueness of Heraclitus's flow. Through such reflections, we can imagine that the Greeks reached a metaphysical understanding of eternity, which the Hebrews achieved through meditation on the Divine Being. No one recognized that this objective was actually subjective, implicating the subjectivity of all knowledge. "Non in tempore sed cum tempore finxit Deus mundum," says St. Augustine, echoing a thought from the Timaeus, but seemingly unaware of the implications that his doctrine would lead to.

The contradictions involved in the conception of time or motion, like the infinitesimal in space, were a source of perplexity to the mind of the Greek, who was driven to find a point of view above or beyond them. They had sprung up in the decline of the Eleatic philosophy and were very familiar to Plato, as we gather from the Parmenides. The consciousness of them had led the great Eleatic philosopher to describe the nature of God or Being under negatives. He sings of ‘Being unbegotten and imperishable, unmoved and never-ending, which never was nor will be, but always is, one and continuous, which cannot spring from any other; for it cannot be said or imagined not to be.’ The idea of eternity was for a great part a negation. There are regions of speculation in which the negative is hardly separable from the positive, and even seems to pass into it. Not only Buddhism, but Greek as well as Christian philosophy, show that it is quite possible that the human mind should retain an enthusiasm for mere negations. In different ages and countries there have been forms of light in which nothing could be discerned and which have nevertheless exercised a life-giving and illumining power. For the higher intelligence of man seems to require, not only something above sense, but above knowledge, which can only be described as Mind or Being or Truth or God or the unchangeable and eternal element, in the expression of which all predicates fail and fall short. Eternity or the eternal is not merely the unlimited in time but the truest of all Being, the most real of all realities, the most certain of all knowledge, which we nevertheless only see through a glass darkly. The passionate earnestness of Parmenides contrasts with the vacuity of the thought which he is revolving in his mind.

The contradictions in our understanding of time and motion, similar to the concept of the infinitesimal in space, confused the Greeks, who sought a perspective that transcended these issues. These discussions emerged during the decline of Eleatic philosophy and were well-known to Plato, as evident in the Parmenides. The awareness of these contradictions prompted the significant Eleatic philosopher to characterize the nature of God or Being through negatives. He speaks of ‘Being uncreated and imperishable, unchanging and eternal, which never was nor will be, but always is, unified and continuous, which cannot originate from anything else; for it cannot be said or imagined not to exist.’ The concept of eternity largely involves a negation. There are areas of thought where the negative becomes intertwined with the positive and can even transform into it. Buddhism, along with Greek and Christian philosophies, demonstrates that it's entirely possible for the human mind to cultivate an enthusiasm for mere negations. Across different times and cultures, there have been forms of enlightenment where nothing could be clearly seen, yet they still held a life-giving and enlightening power. It seems that the higher intellect of humans requires not just something beyond sensory experience, but something beyond knowledge itself, which can only be explained as Mind or Being or Truth or God, or the unchanging and eternal essence, in which all descriptions ultimately fail. Eternity, or the eternal, is not just the infinite in time but represents the truest Being of all, the most real of all realities, the most certain knowledge, which we can only perceive dimly through a glass. The intense seriousness of Parmenides stands in stark contrast to the emptiness of the thoughts he is considering.

Space is said by Plato to be the ‘containing vessel or nurse of generation.’ Reflecting on the simplest kinds of external objects, which to the ancients were the four elements, he was led to a more general notion of a substance, more or less like themselves, out of which they were fashioned. He would not have them too precisely distinguished. Thus seems to have arisen the first dim perception of (Greek) or matter, which has played so great a part in the metaphysical philosophy of Aristotle and his followers. But besides the material out of which the elements are made, there is also a space in which they are contained. There arises thus a second nature which the senses are incapable of discerning and which can hardly be referred to the intelligible class. For it is and it is not, it is nowhere when filled, it is nothing when empty. Hence it is said to be discerned by a kind of spurious or analogous reason, partaking so feebly of existence as to be hardly perceivable, yet always reappearing as the containing mother or nurse of all things. It had not that sort of consistency to Plato which has been given to it in modern times by geometry and metaphysics. Neither of the Greek words by which it is described are so purely abstract as the English word ‘space’ or the Latin ‘spatium.’ Neither Plato nor any other Greek would have spoken of (Greek) or (Greek) in the same manner as we speak of ‘time’ and ‘space.’

Space is described by Plato as the ‘container or nurturer of creation.’ When considering the simplest external objects, which were the four elements to the ancients, he came to a broader idea of a substance somewhat similar to them, from which they were made. He didn’t want them to be defined too strictly. This seems to be where the first vague idea of (Greek) or matter originated, which has played a significant role in the metaphysical philosophy of Aristotle and his followers. In addition to the material from which the elements are made, there is also a space that holds them. This leads to a second nature that our senses cannot detect and that is difficult to classify as intelligible. For it exists and it doesn’t exist; it is nowhere when occupied, and it is nothing when vacant. Therefore, it is said to be recognized by a kind of false or similar reasoning, participating so lightly in existence that it is barely noticeable, yet always coming back as the mother or nurturer of all things. It didn’t have the same kind of consistency for Plato that modern geometry and metaphysics have given it. Neither of the Greek words used to describe it is as purely abstract as the English word ‘space’ or the Latin ‘spatium.’ Plato or any other Greek wouldn’t have referred to (Greek) or (Greek) in the same way we talk about ‘time’ and ‘space.’

Yet space is also of a very permanent or even eternal nature; and Plato seems more willing to admit of the unreality of time than of the unreality of space; because, as he says, all things must necessarily exist in space. We, on the other hand, are disposed to fancy that even if space were annihilated time might still survive. He admits indeed that our knowledge of space is of a dreamy kind, and is given by a spurious reason without the help of sense. (Compare the hypotheses and images of Rep.) It is true that it does not attain to the clearness of ideas. But like them it seems to remain, even if all the objects contained in it are supposed to have vanished away. Hence it was natural for Plato to conceive of it as eternal. We must remember further that in his attempt to realize either space or matter the two abstract ideas of weight and extension, which are familiar to us, had never passed before his mind.

Yet space is also very permanent, or even eternal; and Plato seems more willing to accept the idea that time is unreal than that space is unreal. He believes that everything must necessarily exist in space. On the other hand, we tend to think that even if space were eliminated, time could still exist. He acknowledges that our understanding of space is somewhat vague and is based on a false reasoning that doesn’t involve our senses. (See the hypotheses and images from Rep.) It’s true that it doesn’t reach the clarity of ideas. But like those ideas, it seems to persist even if all the things within it are thought to have disappeared. So it makes sense that Plato would view it as eternal. We should also remember that in his effort to grasp either space or matter, the two abstract concepts of weight and extension, which are familiar to us, had never occurred to him.

Thus far God, working according to an eternal pattern, out of his goodness has created the same, the other, and the essence (compare the three principles of the Philebus—the finite, the infinite, and the union of the two), and out of them has formed the outer circle of the fixed stars and the inner circle of the planets, divided according to certain musical intervals; he has also created time, the moving image of eternity, and space, existing by a sort of necessity and hardly distinguishable from matter. The matter out of which the world is formed is not absolutely void, but retains in the chaos certain germs or traces of the elements. These Plato, like Empedocles, supposed to be four in number—fire, air, earth, and water. They were at first mixed together; but already in the chaos, before God fashioned them by form and number, the greater masses of the elements had an appointed place. Into the confusion (Greek) which preceded Plato does not attempt further to penetrate. They are called elements, but they are so far from being elements (Greek) or letters in the higher sense that they are not even syllables or first compounds. The real elements are two triangles, the rectangular isosceles which has but one form, and the most beautiful of the many forms of scalene, which is half of an equilateral triangle. By the combination of these triangles which exist in an infinite variety of sizes, the surfaces of the four elements are constructed.

So far, God, working according to an eternal pattern, has created being, the other, and essence (compare the three principles of the Philebus—the finite, the infinite, and the union of the two). From these, He formed the outer circle of fixed stars and the inner circle of planets, arranged according to certain musical intervals. He also created time, the moving image of eternity, and space, which exists out of necessity and is hardly distinguishable from matter. The matter that makes up the world is not completely void but holds in the chaos certain germs or traces of the elements. Plato, like Empedocles, believed there were four elements—fire, air, earth, and water. Initially, they were mixed together; however, even in the chaos, before God shaped them with form and number, the larger masses of the elements had designated places. Plato doesn't delve deeper into the confusion that preceded this. They are called elements, but they are far from being elements or letters in a higher sense; they aren't even syllables or basic compounds. The true elements are two triangles: the right isosceles triangle, which has only one form, and the most beautiful of the various scalene forms, which is half of an equilateral triangle. By combining these triangles, which can be found in an infinite variety of sizes, the surfaces of the four elements are formed.

That there were only five regular solids was already known to the ancients, and out of the surfaces which he has formed Plato proceeds to generate the four first of the five. He perhaps forgets that he is only putting together surfaces and has not provided for their transformation into solids. The first solid is a regular pyramid, of which the base and sides are formed by four equilateral or twenty-four scalene triangles. Each of the four solid angles in this figure is a little larger than the largest of obtuse angles. The second solid is composed of the same triangles, which unite as eight equilateral triangles, and make one solid angle out of four plane angles—six of these angles form a regular octahedron. The third solid is a regular icosahedron, having twenty triangular equilateral bases, and therefore 120 rectangular scalene triangles. The fourth regular solid, or cube, is formed by the combination of four isosceles triangles into one square and of six squares into a cube. The fifth regular solid, or dodecahedron, cannot be formed by a combination of either of these triangles, but each of its faces may be regarded as composed of thirty triangles of another kind. Probably Plato notices this as the only remaining regular polyhedron, which from its approximation to a globe, and possibly because, as Plutarch remarks, it is composed of 12 x 30 = 360 scalene triangles (Platon. Quaest.), representing thus the signs and degrees of the Zodiac, as well as the months and days of the year, God may be said to have ‘used in the delineation of the universe.’ According to Plato earth was composed of cubes, fire of regular pyramids, air of regular octahedrons, water of regular icosahedrons. The stability of the last three increases with the number of their sides.

The ancients already knew there were only five regular solids, and from the surfaces he formed, Plato went on to create the first four of the five. He might overlook that he is just combining surfaces and hasn’t actually turned them into solids. The first solid is a regular pyramid, made up of a base and sides formed by four equilateral triangles or twenty-four scalene triangles. Each of the four solid angles in this figure is slightly larger than the biggest obtuse angle. The second solid is made of the same triangles, with eight equilateral triangles coming together to form one solid angle made up of four plane angles—six of these angles create a regular octahedron. The third solid is a regular icosahedron, which has twenty equilateral triangular faces, leading to a total of 120 rectangular scalene triangles. The fourth regular solid, or cube, is formed by combining four isosceles triangles into a square and six squares into a cube. The fifth regular solid, or dodecahedron, can’t be made from any of these triangles, but each of its faces can be seen as made of thirty triangles of a different kind. Plato likely identifies this as the only remaining regular polyhedron, which, due to its shape's resemblance to a globe, and perhaps because, as Plutarch noted, it consists of 12 x 30 = 360 scalene triangles (Platon. Quaest.), represents the signs and degrees of the Zodiac, along with the months and days of the year, which God may have used in designing the universe. According to Plato, Earth was made of cubes, fire of regular pyramids, air of regular octahedrons, and water of regular icosahedrons. The stability of the last three increases with the number of their sides.

The elements are supposed to pass into one another, but we must remember that these transformations are not the transformations of real solids, but of imaginary geometrical figures; in other words, we are composing and decomposing the faces of substances and not the substances themselves—it is a house of cards which we are pulling to pieces and putting together again (compare however Laws). Yet perhaps Plato may regard these sides or faces as only the forms which are impressed on pre-existent matter. It is remarkable that he should speak of each of these solids as a possible world in itself, though upon the whole he inclines to the opinion that they form one world and not five. To suppose that there is an infinite number of worlds, as Democritus (Hippolyt. Ref. Haer. I.) had said, would be, as he satirically observes, ‘the characteristic of a very indefinite and ignorant mind.’

The elements are meant to transform into one another, but we need to remember that these changes aren't transformations of actual solids, but of imagined geometric shapes; in other words, we are assembling and disassembling the faces of substances, not the substances themselves—it’s like a house of cards that we’re taking apart and putting back together (see Laws, though). Yet Plato might see these sides or faces as just the forms impressed on existing matter. It’s interesting that he describes each of these solids as a possible world in itself, even though overall he leans toward the idea that they create one world rather than five. To think there are an infinite number of worlds, as Democritus (Hippolyt. Ref. Haer. I.) suggested, would be, as he sarcastically notes, ‘the sign of a very vague and ignorant mind.’

The twenty triangular faces of an icosahedron form the faces or sides of two regular octahedrons and of a regular pyramid (20 = 8 x 2 + 4); and therefore, according to Plato, a particle of water when decomposed is supposed to give two particles of air and one of fire. So because an octahedron gives the sides of two pyramids (8 = 4 x 2), a particle of air is resolved into two particles of fire.

The twenty triangular faces of an icosahedron make up the faces or sides of two regular octahedrons and a regular pyramid (20 = 8 x 2 + 4); and so, according to Plato, a water particle, when broken down, is thought to produce two air particles and one fire particle. Likewise, since an octahedron creates the sides of two pyramids (8 = 4 x 2), an air particle is split into two fire particles.

The transformation is effected by the superior power or number of the conquering elements. The manner of the change is (1) a separation of portions of the elements from the masses in which they are collected; (2) a resolution of them into their original triangles; and (3) a reunion of them in new forms. Plato himself proposes the question, Why does motion continue at all when the elements are settled in their places? He answers that although the force of attraction is continually drawing similar elements to the same spot, still the revolution of the universe exercises a condensing power, and thrusts them again out of their natural places. Thus want of uniformity, the condition of motion, is produced. In all such disturbances of matter there is an alternative for the weaker element: it may escape to its kindred, or take the form of the stronger—becoming denser, if it be denser, or rarer if rarer. This is true of fire, air, and water, which, being composed of similar triangles, are interchangeable; earth, however, which has triangles peculiar to itself, is capable of dissolution, but not of change. Of the interchangeable elements, fire, the rarest, can only become a denser, and water, the densest, only a rarer: but air may become a denser or a rarer. No single particle of the elements is visible, but only the aggregates of them are seen. The subordinate species depend, not upon differences of form in the original triangles, but upon differences of size. The obvious physical phenomena from which Plato has gathered his views of the relations of the elements seem to be the effect of fire upon air, water, and earth, and the effect of water upon earth. The particles are supposed by him to be in a perpetual process of circulation caused by inequality. This process of circulation does not admit of a vacuum, as he tells us in his strange account of respiration.

The transformation happens because of the greater power or quantity of the conquering elements. The way this change occurs is (1) by separating parts of the elements from the masses they form; (2) breaking them down into their original triangles; and (3) bringing them back together in new shapes. Plato himself asks, why does motion keep going when the elements are settled in their places? He responds that even though the force of attraction constantly pulls similar elements to the same place, the movement of the universe exerts a compressing force, pushing them out of their natural positions. This creates a lack of uniformity, which is necessary for motion. In all these disturbances of matter, the weaker element has two options: it can escape to join its own kind, or it can take on the form of the stronger element—becoming denser if the stronger is denser, or rarer if the stronger is rarer. This applies to fire, air, and water, which, being made up of similar triangles, can swap places; however, earth, which has triangles unique to itself, can dissolve but not change. Among the interchangeable elements, fire, the rarest, can only become denser, and water, the densest, can only become rarer; but air can become either denser or rarer. No individual particle of the elements is visible; only the groups of them can be seen. The subordinate species rely not on differences in form in the original triangles, but on differences in size. The clear physical phenomena that Plato based his ideas on about the relationships of the elements seem to be the effect of fire on air, water, and earth, as well as the impact of water on earth. He believes that the particles are constantly circulating due to inequality. This circulation process cannot allow for a vacuum, as he explains in his unusual account of respiration.

Of the phenomena of light and heavy he speaks afterwards, when treating of sensation, but they may be more conveniently considered by us in this place. They are not, he says, to be explained by ‘above’ and ‘below,’ which in the universal globe have no existence, but by the attraction of similars towards the great masses of similar substances; fire to fire, air to air, water to water, earth to earth. Plato’s doctrine of attraction implies not only (1) the attraction of similar elements to one another, but also (2) of smaller bodies to larger ones. Had he confined himself to the latter he would have arrived, though, perhaps, without any further result or any sense of the greatness of the discovery, at the modern doctrine of gravitation. He does not observe that water has an equal tendency towards both water and earth. So easily did the most obvious facts which were inconsistent with his theories escape him.

He discusses the concepts of light and heavy later on when he talks about sensation, but it’s easier for us to look at them here. He argues that they can't be explained by 'above' and 'below,' which don’t really exist in the grand scheme of things, but rather by similar substances attracting each other; fire attracts fire, air attracts air, water attracts water, and earth attracts earth. Plato’s idea of attraction suggests not just (1) that similar elements draw towards each other, but also (2) that smaller bodies are drawn to larger ones. If he had only focused on the latter, he might have stumbled upon, perhaps without realizing its significance, the modern concept of gravity. He overlooks that water is equally drawn to both water and earth. It’s remarkable how easily he missed the most straightforward facts that contradicted his theories.

The general physical doctrines of the Timaeus may be summed up as follows: (1) Plato supposes the greater masses of the elements to have been already settled in their places at the creation: (2) they are four in number, and are formed of rectangular triangles variously combined into regular solid figures: (3) three of them, fire, air, and water, admit of transformation into one another; the fourth, earth, cannot be similarly transformed: (4) different sizes of the same triangles form the lesser species of each element: (5) there is an attraction of like to like—smaller masses of the same kind being drawn towards greater: (6) there is no void, but the particles of matter are ever pushing one another round and round (Greek). Like the atomists, Plato attributes the differences between the elements to differences in geometrical figures. But he does not explain the process by which surfaces become solids; and he characteristically ridicules Democritus for not seeing that the worlds are finite and not infinite.

The general physical ideas of the Timaeus can be summed up like this: (1) Plato assumes that the larger masses of the elements were already fixed in their places at the time of creation; (2) there are four elements, made of different arrangements of right triangles combined into regular solid shapes; (3) three of them—fire, air, and water—can change into one another, while the fourth, earth, cannot change in the same way; (4) different sizes of the same triangles make up the smaller varieties of each element; (5) like attracts like—smaller pieces of the same type are drawn to larger ones; (6) there is no empty space, but the particles of matter constantly push against each other (Greek). Similar to the atomists, Plato explains the differences between elements as differences in their geometric shapes. However, he doesn’t clarify how surfaces turn into solids, and he famously mocks Democritus for failing to see that the worlds are finite, not infinite.





Section 4.

The astronomy of Plato is based on the two principles of the same and the other, which God combined in the creation of the world. The soul, which is compounded of the same, the other, and the essence, is diffused from the centre to the circumference of the heavens. We speak of a soul of the universe; but more truly regarded, the universe of the Timaeus is a soul, governed by mind, and holding in solution a residuum of matter or evil, which the author of the world is unable to expel, and of which Plato cannot tell us the origin. The creation, in Plato’s sense, is really the creation of order; and the first step in giving order is the division of the heavens into an inner and outer circle of the other and the same, of the divisible and the indivisible, answering to the two spheres, of the planets and of the world beyond them, all together moving around the earth, which is their centre. To us there is a difficulty in apprehending how that which is at rest can also be in motion, or that which is indivisible exist in space. But the whole description is so ideal and imaginative, that we can hardly venture to attribute to many of Plato’s words in the Timaeus any more meaning than to his mythical account of the heavens in the Republic and in the Phaedrus. (Compare his denial of the ‘blasphemous opinion’ that there are planets or wandering stars; all alike move in circles—Laws.) The stars are the habitations of the souls of men, from which they come and to which they return. In attributing to the fixed stars only the most perfect motion—that which is on the same spot or circulating around the same—he might perhaps have said that to ‘the spectator of all time and all existence,’ to borrow once more his own grand expression, or viewed, in the language of Spinoza, ‘sub specie aeternitatis,’ they were still at rest, but appeared to move in order to teach men the periods of time. Although absolutely in motion, they are relatively at rest; or we may conceive of them as resting, while the space in which they are contained, or the whole anima mundi, revolves.

The astronomy of Plato is based on the two principles of the same and the other, which God combined in creating the world. The soul, made up of the same, the other, and essence, spreads from the center to the edges of the heavens. We refer to the soul of the universe; but more accurately, the universe in the Timaeus is a soul, governed by intellect, and holds a residual matter or evil that the creator of the world cannot eliminate, and Plato cannot explain its origin. Creation, in Plato’s view, is really about establishing order; and the first step in achieving order is dividing the heavens into an inner and outer circle of the other and the same, of the divisible and the indivisible, corresponding to the two spheres of the planets and the world beyond them, all moving around the earth, which is their center. For us, it's hard to grasp how something can be at rest and in motion at the same time or how something indivisible exists in space. Yet the entire description is so ideal and imaginative that we can hardly assume that many of Plato’s words in the Timaeus have more meaning than his mythical depiction of the heavens in the Republic and in the Phaedrus. (Compare his rejection of the ‘blasphemous opinion’ that there are planets or wandering stars; they all move in circles—Laws.) The stars are the homes of human souls, from which they come and to which they return. By attributing only the most perfect motion to the fixed stars—that which is stationary or revolves around the same point—he could have stated that for ‘the spectator of all time and all existence,’ to borrow his grand expression again, or viewed, in Spinoza's terms, ‘sub specie aeternitatis,’ they were still at rest, but appeared to be moving to teach people the cycles of time. Although absolutely in motion, they are relatively at rest; or we can think of them as resting while the space they occupy, or the entire anima mundi, revolves.

The universe revolves around a centre once in twenty-four hours, but the orbits of the fixed stars take a different direction from those of the planets. The outer and the inner sphere cross one another and meet again at a point opposite to that of their first contact; the first moving in a circle from left to right along the side of a parallelogram which is supposed to be inscribed in it, the second also moving in a circle along the diagonal of the same parallelogram from right to left; or, in other words, the first describing the path of the equator, the second, the path of the ecliptic. The motion of the second is controlled by the first, and hence the oblique line in which the planets are supposed to move becomes a spiral. The motion of the same is said to be undivided, whereas the inner motion is split into seven unequal orbits—the intervals between them being in the ratio of two and three, three of either:—the Sun, moving in the opposite direction to Mercury and Venus, but with equal swiftness; the remaining four, Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter, with unequal swiftness to the former three and to one another. Thus arises the following progression:—Moon 1, Sun 2, Venus 3, Mercury 4, Mars 8, Jupiter 9, Saturn 27. This series of numbers is the compound of the two Pythagorean ratios, having the same intervals, though not in the same order, as the mixture which was originally divided in forming the soul of the world.

The universe rotates around a center every twenty-four hours, but the paths of the fixed stars differ from those of the planets. The outer and inner spheres intersect and reconnect at a point opposite their initial contact; the first moves in a circle from left to right along the side of a parallelogram that is thought to be inscribed within it, while the second also moves in a circle along the diagonal of that parallelogram from right to left; in other words, the first follows the equator's path and the second follows the ecliptic's path. The motion of the second is guided by the first, which is why the tilted path of the planets is considered a spiral. The motion of the second is said to be unified, while the inner motion is divided into seven unequal orbits, with the gaps between them in a ratio of two to three, with three of either:—the Sun moves in the opposite direction of Mercury and Venus, but at the same speed; the remaining four—Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter—move at different speeds compared to the first three and to each other. This leads to the following sequence:—Moon 1, Sun 2, Venus 3, Mercury 4, Mars 8, Jupiter 9, Saturn 27. This sequence of numbers combines the two Pythagorean ratios, having the same intervals, though not in the same order, as the mixture that was originally divided when forming the soul of the world.

Plato was struck by the phenomenon of Mercury, Venus, and the Sun appearing to overtake and be overtaken by one another. The true reason of this, namely, that they lie within the circle of the earth’s orbit, was unknown to him, and the reason which he gives—that the two former move in an opposite direction to the latter—is far from explaining the appearance of them in the heavens. All the planets, including the sun, are carried round in the daily motion of the circle of the fixed stars, and they have a second or oblique motion which gives the explanation of the different lengths of the sun’s course in different parts of the earth. The fixed stars have also two movements—a forward movement in their orbit which is common to the whole circle; and a movement on the same spot around an axis, which Plato calls the movement of thought about the same. In this latter respect they are more perfect than the wandering stars, as Plato himself terms them in the Timaeus, although in the Laws he condemns the appellation as blasphemous.

Plato was fascinated by how Mercury, Venus, and the Sun seemed to pass each other. He didn't know the real reason behind this, which is that they orbit within the Earth's path. His explanation—that the first two move in the opposite direction to the Sun—doesn't really clarify their appearance in the sky. All the planets, including the Sun, are moved daily by the rotation of the fixed stars, and they also have a second, angled movement that accounts for the varying lengths of the Sun's path in different parts of the Earth. The fixed stars have two movements as well: a forward movement in their orbit that is common to the entire circle, and a spinning movement around an axis that Plato describes as the movement of thought. In this way, they are more perfect than the planets, which Plato refers to as wandering stars in the Timaeus, though he later criticizes this label as offensive in the Laws.

The revolution of the world around earth, which is accomplished in a single day and night, is described as being the most perfect or intelligent. Yet Plato also speaks of an ‘annus magnus’ or cyclical year, in which periods wonderful for their complexity are found to coincide in a perfect number, i.e. a number which equals the sum of its factors, as 6 = 1 + 2 + 3. This, although not literally contradictory, is in spirit irreconcilable with the perfect revolution of twenty-four hours. The same remark may be applied to the complexity of the appearances and occultations of the stars, which, if the outer heaven is supposed to be moving around the centre once in twenty-four hours, must be confined to the effects produced by the seven planets. Plato seems to confuse the actual observation of the heavens with his desire to find in them mathematical perfection. The same spirit is carried yet further by him in the passage already quoted from the Laws, in which he affirms their wanderings to be an appearance only, which a little knowledge of mathematics would enable men to correct.

The revolution of the world around Earth, completed in a single day and night, is described as the most perfect or intelligent. However, Plato also talks about an ‘annus magnus’ or cyclical year, in which complex periods wonderfully coincide in a perfect number, meaning a number that equals the sum of its factors, like 6 = 1 + 2 + 3. Although this isn’t literally contradictory, it is fundamentally incompatible with the perfect revolution of twenty-four hours. The same applies to the complex movements and disappearances of the stars, which, if we assume the outer heavens revolve around the center once every twenty-four hours, must be limited to the effects of the seven planets. Plato seems to mix up the actual observation of the heavens with his desire to discover mathematical perfection in them. He takes this idea even further in the passage from the Laws, where he claims that their movements are merely an illusion that a bit of mathematical knowledge could help people correct.

We have now to consider the much discussed question of the rotation or immobility of the earth. Plato’s doctrine on this subject is contained in the following words:—‘The earth, which is our nurse, compacted (OR revolving) around the pole which is extended through the universe, he made to be the guardian and artificer of night and day, first and eldest of gods that are in the interior of heaven’. There is an unfortunate doubt in this passage (1) about the meaning of the word (Greek), which is translated either ‘compacted’ or ‘revolving,’ and is equally capable of both explanations. A doubt (2) may also be raised as to whether the words ‘artificer of day and night’ are consistent with the mere passive causation of them, produced by the immobility of the earth in the midst of the circling universe. We must admit, further, (3) that Aristotle attributed to Plato the doctrine of the rotation of the earth on its axis. On the other hand it has been urged that if the earth goes round with the outer heaven and sun in twenty-four hours, there is no way of accounting for the alternation of day and night; since the equal motion of the earth and sun would have the effect of absolute immobility. To which it may be replied that Plato never says that the earth goes round with the outer heaven and sun; although the whole question depends on the relation of earth and sun, their movements are nowhere precisely described. But if we suppose, with Mr. Grote, that the diurnal rotation of the earth on its axis and the revolution of the sun and outer heaven precisely coincide, it would be difficult to imagine that Plato was unaware of the consequence. For though he was ignorant of many things which are familiar to us, and often confused in his ideas where we have become clear, we have no right to attribute to him a childish want of reasoning about very simple facts, or an inability to understand the necessary and obvious deductions from geometrical figures or movements. Of the causes of day and night the pre-Socratic philosophers, and especially the Pythagoreans, gave various accounts, and therefore the question can hardly be imagined to have escaped him. On the other hand it may be urged that the further step, however simple and obvious, is just what Plato often seems to be ignorant of, and that as there is no limit to his insight, there is also no limit to the blindness which sometimes obscures his intelligence (compare the construction of solids out of surfaces in his account of the creation of the world, or the attraction of similars to similars). Further, Mr. Grote supposes, not that (Greek) means ‘revolving,’ or that this is the sense in which Aristotle understood the word, but that the rotation of the earth is necessarily implied in its adherence to the cosmical axis. But (a) if, as Mr Grote assumes, Plato did not see that the rotation of the earth on its axis and of the sun and outer heavens around the earth in equal times was inconsistent with the alternation of day and night, neither need we suppose that he would have seen the immobility of the earth to be inconsistent with the rotation of the axis. And (b) what proof is there that the axis of the world revolves at all? (c) The comparison of the two passages quoted by Mr Grote (see his pamphlet on ‘The Rotation of the Earth’) from Aristotle De Coelo, Book II (Greek) clearly shows, although this is a matter of minor importance, that Aristotle, as Proclus and Simplicius supposed, understood (Greek) in the Timaeus to mean ‘revolving.’ For the second passage, in which motion on an axis is expressly mentioned, refers to the first, but this would be unmeaning unless (Greek) in the first passage meant rotation on an axis. (4) The immobility of the earth is more in accordance with Plato’s other writings than the opposite hypothesis. For in the Phaedo the earth is described as the centre of the world, and is not said to be in motion. In the Republic the pilgrims appear to be looking out from the earth upon the motions of the heavenly bodies; in the Phaedrus, Hestia, who remains immovable in the house of Zeus while the other gods go in procession, is called the first and eldest of the gods, and is probably the symbol of the earth. The silence of Plato in these and in some other passages (Laws) in which he might be expected to speak of the rotation of the earth, is more favourable to the doctrine of its immobility than to the opposite. If he had meant to say that the earth revolves on its axis, he would have said so in distinct words, and have explained the relation of its movements to those of the other heavenly bodies. (5) The meaning of the words ‘artificer of day and night’ is literally true according to Plato’s view. For the alternation of day and night is not produced by the motion of the heavens alone, or by the immobility of the earth alone, but by both together; and that which has the inherent force or energy to remain at rest when all other bodies are moving, may be truly said to act, equally with them. (6) We should not lay too much stress on Aristotle or the writer De Caelo having adopted the other interpretation of the words, although Alexander of Aphrodisias thinks that he could not have been ignorant either of the doctrine of Plato or of the sense which he intended to give to the word (Greek). For the citations of Plato in Aristotle are frequently misinterpreted by him; and he seems hardly ever to have had in his mind the connection in which they occur. In this instance the allusion is very slight, and there is no reason to suppose that the diurnal revolution of the heavens was present to his mind. Hence we need not attribute to him the error from which we are defending Plato.

We now need to consider the frequently debated topic of whether the earth rotates or is stationary. Plato's views on this matter are expressed in the following words: "The earth, our nurturer, which is either compacted or revolving around the pole that extends through the universe, was made to be the guardian and creator of night and day, the first and oldest of the gods in the heavens." There is an unfortunate ambiguity in this passage regarding the meaning of the Greek word, which can be interpreted as either "compacted" or "revolving," and both interpretations are plausible. There is also a question about whether the phrase "creator of day and night" is compatible with the idea of the earth being passive, merely causing them by its stillness amidst the moving universe. Additionally, we must acknowledge that Aristotle attributed to Plato the idea of the earth rotating on its axis. On the other hand, it has been argued that if the earth revolves with the outer heavens and the sun in twenty-four hours, there's no explanation for the changing of day and night; since the equal motion of the earth and sun would result in complete stillness. In response, it's worth noting that Plato never claims that the earth moves in tandem with the outer heavens and the sun; although the entire question hinges on the relationship between the earth and the sun, their movements are not clearly detailed. However, if we accept, as Mr. Grote suggests, that the earth's daily rotation on its axis aligns perfectly with the sun's and outer heavens' movement, it would be hard to believe that Plato missed the implication. While he lacked knowledge of many things we understand today and often muddled his concepts where we have clarity, we have no right to dismiss him as lacking reasoning on very basic facts or an inability to grasp the necessary and obvious conclusions from geometric shapes or motions. Pre-Socratic philosophers, especially the Pythagoreans, provided various explanations for the causes of day and night; therefore, it is unlikely that this question eluded him. On the other hand, one could argue that the further step, no matter how simple and obvious, is exactly what Plato seems to overlook often, and just as there is no limit to his insight, there can also be an equal measure of blindness that sometimes clouds his understanding (consider his account of creating solids from surfaces or the attraction of similar things to one another). Mr. Grote also posits that the Greek word does not mean "revolving," nor does this seem to be how Aristotle interpreted it, but rather that the rotation of the earth is implied in its connection to the cosmic axis. However, (a) if, as Mr. Grote suggests, Plato failed to see that the earth's rotation on its axis and the sun's and outer heavens' movements around the earth at the same time were inconsistent with the change between day and night, then we shouldn’t assume he would have recognized the earth's stillness as inconsistent with rotational movement. And (b) what evidence do we have that the world’s axis rotates at all? (c) The comparison of the two passages referenced by Mr. Grote (see his pamphlet on "The Rotation of the Earth") from Aristotle's De Coelo, Book II, clearly shows—though this is less significant—that Aristotle, as Proclus and Simplicius thought, understood the Greek term in the Timaeus to mean "revolving." The second passage, which explicitly mentions motion around an axis, refers back to the first one; this would be nonsensical unless the Greek term in the first passage did indeed mean rotation around an axis. (4) The idea that the earth is stationary aligns more with Plato’s other writings than the contrary theory. In the Phaedo, the earth is depicted as the center of the universe, with no mention of it being in motion. In the Republic, the travelers seem to be observing the movements of celestial bodies from the earth; in the Phaedrus, Hestia, who remains motionless in Zeus's house while the other gods march in procession, is called the first and oldest of the gods and likely symbolizes the earth. Plato's silence in these and some other passages (Laws) where he might have been expected to discuss the earth's rotation supports the idea of its stillness rather than the opposite. If he intended to convey that the earth rotates on its axis, he would have stated it clearly and explained how its movements relate to those of the other heavenly bodies. (5) The meaning of the phrase "creator of day and night" is literally true according to Plato’s perspective. The change between day and night is not caused solely by the motion of the heavens or the earth's stillness, but by both working together; and something with the inherent ability to remain stationary while all else moves can genuinely be said to act just like the rest. (6) We should not place too much emphasis on Aristotle or the writer of De Caelo adopting the alternative interpretation of the words, even though Alexander of Aphrodisias believes he could not have been unaware of either Plato’s theory or the meaning he intended for the word. Aristotle often misinterprets Plato's citations, and he rarely seems to grasp the context in which they occur. In this case, the reference is quite subtle, and there's no reason to think that the daily revolution of the heavens was on his mind. Thus, we need not ascribe to him the error we are defending Plato against.

After weighing one against the other all these complicated probabilities, the final conclusion at which we arrive is that there is nearly as much to be said on the one side of the question as on the other, and that we are not perfectly certain, whether, as Bockh and the majority of commentators, ancient as well as modern, are inclined to believe, Plato thought that the earth was at rest in the centre of the universe, or, as Aristotle and Mr. Grote suppose, that it revolved on its axis. Whether we assume the earth to be stationary in the centre of the universe, or to revolve with the heavens, no explanation is given of the variation in the length of days and nights at different times of the year. The relations of the earth and heavens are so indistinct in the Timaeus and so figurative in the Phaedo, Phaedrus and Republic, that we must give up the hope of ascertaining how they were imagined by Plato, if he had any fixed or scientific conception of them at all.

After considering all these complex possibilities, our final conclusion is that there's almost as much to argue for one side of the question as for the other. We aren't completely sure whether, as Bockh and many ancient and modern commentators believe, Plato thought the earth was stationary at the center of the universe, or, as Aristotle and Mr. Grote suggest, that it spun on its axis. Whether we take the earth to be still at the center of the universe or to be rotating with the heavens, there's no explanation for the changes in the length of days and nights at different times of the year. The relationships between the earth and heavens are so vague in the Timaeus and so metaphorical in the Phaedo, Phaedrus, and Republic that we have to give up hope of figuring out how Plato imagined them, assuming he even had any fixed or scientific idea about them at all.





Section 5.

The soul of the world is framed on the analogy of the soul of man, and many traces of anthropomorphism blend with Plato’s highest flights of idealism. The heavenly bodies are endowed with thought; the principles of the same and other exist in the universe as well as in the human mind. The soul of man is made out of the remains of the elements which had been used in creating the soul of the world; these remains, however, are diluted to the third degree; by this Plato expresses the measure of the difference between the soul human and divine. The human soul, like the cosmical, is framed before the body, as the mind is before the soul of either—this is the order of the divine work—and the finer parts of the body, which are more akin to the soul, such as the spinal marrow, are prior to the bones and flesh. The brain, the containing vessel of the divine part of the soul, is (nearly) in the form of a globe, which is the image of the gods, who are the stars, and of the universe.

The soul of the world is shaped similarly to the soul of a person, and many hints of anthropomorphism mix with Plato’s lofty ideas of idealism. The heavenly bodies are thought to have their own consciousness; the same principles that exist in the universe are also found in the human mind. The human soul is made from remnants of the elements used to create the soul of the world; however, these remnants are diluted to a third degree, highlighting the difference between human and divine souls. Both the human soul and the cosmic soul are formed before the body, just as the mind exists before the soul of either—this is the order of divine creation—and the more refined parts of the body, which are closer to the soul, like the spinal marrow, come before the bones and flesh. The brain, which holds the divine aspect of the soul, is nearly spherical, resembling the gods, who are the stars, and the universe itself.

There is, however, an inconsistency in Plato’s manner of conceiving the soul of man; he cannot get rid of the element of necessity which is allowed to enter. He does not, like Kant, attempt to vindicate for men a freedom out of space and time; but he acknowledges him to be subject to the influence of external causes, and leaves hardly any place for freedom of the will. The lusts of men are caused by their bodily constitution, though they may be increased by bad education and bad laws, which implies that they may be decreased by good education and good laws. He appears to have an inkling of the truth that to the higher nature of man evil is involuntary. This is mixed up with the view which, while apparently agreeing with it, is in reality the opposite of it, that vice is due to physical causes. In the Timaeus, as well as in the Laws, he also regards vices and crimes as simply involuntary; they are diseases analogous to the diseases of the body, and arising out of the same causes. If we draw together the opposite poles of Plato’s system, we find that, like Spinoza, he combines idealism with fatalism.

There is, however, a contradiction in Plato's way of understanding the human soul; he cannot shake off the element of necessity that he allows to come in. Unlike Kant, he doesn’t try to assert that people have freedom beyond space and time; instead, he recognizes that individuals are affected by external influences, leaving little room for free will. People's desires are shaped by their physical makeup, although they can be intensified by poor education and bad laws, which suggests that they can also be reduced by good education and good laws. He seems to sense that for the higher aspects of humanity, wrongdoing is involuntary. This idea gets tangled with the opposing notion that vice stems from physical causes. In both the Timaeus and the Laws, he also sees vices and crimes as entirely involuntary; they are like illnesses related to bodily diseases and arising from similar causes. When we examine the contrasting elements of Plato's philosophy, we find that, like Spinoza, he combines idealism with fatalism.

The soul of man is divided by him into three parts, answering roughly to the charioteer and steeds of the Phaedrus, and to the (Greek) of the Republic and Nicomachean Ethics. First, there is the immortal nature of which the brain is the seat, and which is akin to the soul of the universe. This alone thinks and knows and is the ruler of the whole. Secondly, there is the higher mortal soul which, though liable to perturbations of her own, takes the side of reason against the lower appetites. The seat of this is the heart, in which courage, anger, and all the nobler affections are supposed to reside. There the veins all meet; it is their centre or house of guard whence they carry the orders of the thinking being to the extremities of his kingdom. There is also a third or appetitive soul, which receives the commands of the immortal part, not immediately but mediately, through the liver, which reflects on its surface the admonitions and threats of the reason.

The human soul is divided into three parts, similar to the charioteer and horses in Phaedrus, as well as the concepts discussed in the Republic and Nicomachean Ethics. First, there's the immortal part, located in the brain, which is connected to the soul of the universe. This part alone can think, know, and governs everything. Second, there’s the higher mortal soul, which, although subject to its own disturbances, sides with reason against lower desires. Its center is the heart, where courage, anger, and other noble emotions are believed to reside. This is where all the veins converge; it acts as the center or command post from which the thinking part sends orders throughout its domain. Lastly, there’s the third or appetitive soul, which receives commands from the immortal part not directly, but indirectly, through the liver, which reflects the advice and warnings of reason on its surface.

The liver is imagined by Plato to be a smooth and bright substance, having a store of sweetness and also of bitterness, which reason freely uses in the execution of her mandates. In this region, as ancient superstition told, were to be found intimations of the future. But Plato is careful to observe that although such knowledge is given to the inferior parts of man, it requires to be interpreted by the superior. Reason, and not enthusiasm, is the true guide of man; he is only inspired when he is demented by some distemper or possession. The ancient saying, that ‘only a man in his senses can judge of his own actions,’ is approved by modern philosophy too. The same irony which appears in Plato’s remark, that ‘the men of old time must surely have known the gods who were their ancestors, and we should believe them as custom requires,’ is also manifest in his account of divination.

Plato imagines the liver as a smooth and shiny substance, containing both sweetness and bitterness, which reason uses freely to carry out its commands. In this area, as ancient superstition suggested, there were hints of the future. However, Plato points out that although such knowledge is provided to the lower parts of a person, it needs to be interpreted by the higher faculties. Reason, not passion, is the true guide for people; they are only inspired when they are disturbed by some illness or possession. The old saying, "only someone in their right mind can judge their own actions," is also supported by modern philosophy. The same irony in Plato's remark that "people of ancient times must have known their divine ancestors, and we should believe them as tradition dictates," is also evident in his description of divination.

The appetitive soul is seated in the belly, and there imprisoned like a wild beast, far away from the council chamber, as Plato graphically calls the head, in order that the animal passions may not interfere with the deliberations of reason. Though the soul is said by him to be prior to the body, yet we cannot help seeing that it is constructed on the model of the body—the threefold division into the rational, passionate, and appetitive corresponding to the head, heart and belly. The human soul differs from the soul of the world in this respect, that it is enveloped and finds its expression in matter, whereas the soul of the world is not only enveloped or diffused in matter, but is the element in which matter moves. The breath of man is within him, but the air or aether of heaven is the element which surrounds him and all things.

The appetitive soul is located in the belly, trapped there like a wild beast, far from the council chamber, as Plato vividly describes the head, so that animal instincts don’t disrupt rational thinking. Although Plato suggests that the soul comes before the body, we can’t ignore that it’s shaped like the body—the three parts: rational, passionate, and appetitive correspond to the head, heart, and belly. The human soul is different from the world’s soul because it is wrapped up in and expresses itself through matter, while the world's soul is not only wrapped in matter but is also the very element that allows matter to move. The breath of a person is within them, but the air or ether of the heavens surrounds them and everything else.

Pleasure and pain are attributed in the Timaeus to the suddenness of our sensations—the first being a sudden restoration, the second a sudden violation, of nature (Phileb.). The sensations become conscious to us when they are exceptional. Sight is not attended either by pleasure or pain, but hunger and the appeasing of hunger are pleasant and painful because they are extraordinary.

Pleasure and pain in the Timaeus are linked to the abruptness of our sensations—pleasure being a sudden return to balance, and pain a sudden disruption of it (Phileb.). We become aware of these sensations when they are unusual. Sight doesn’t bring either pleasure or pain, but hunger and satisfying hunger are both pleasurable and painful because they are out of the ordinary.





Section 6.

I shall not attempt to connect the physiological speculations of Plato either with ancient or modern medicine. What light I can throw upon them will be derived from the comparison of them with his general system.

I won’t try to link Plato’s ideas about physiology with either ancient or modern medicine. Any insights I can offer will come from comparing them to his overall philosophy.

There is no principle so apparent in the physics of the Timaeus, or in ancient physics generally, as that of continuity. The world is conceived of as a whole, and the elements are formed into and out of one another; the varieties of substances and processes are hardly known or noticed. And in a similar manner the human body is conceived of as a whole, and the different substances of which, to a superficial observer, it appears to be composed—the blood, flesh, sinews—like the elements out of which they are formed, are supposed to pass into one another in regular order, while the infinite complexity of the human frame remains unobserved. And diseases arise from the opposite process—when the natural proportions of the four elements are disturbed, and the secondary substances which are formed out of them, namely, blood, flesh, sinews, are generated in an inverse order.

There is no concept as clear in the physics of the Timaeus, or in ancient physics overall, as that of continuity. The world is seen as a whole, where elements are formed into and out of each other; the different types of substances and processes are barely recognized. Similarly, the human body is viewed as a whole, and the various substances that a casual observer might think it is made of—the blood, flesh, sinews—like the elements they come from, are believed to transition into one another in a regular way, while the endless complexity of the human body goes unnoticed. Diseases occur when this natural balance of the four elements is disrupted, and the secondary substances formed from them—specifically blood, flesh, and sinews—are created in the wrong order.

Plato found heat and air within the human frame, and the blood circulating in every part. He assumes in language almost unintelligible to us that a network of fire and air envelopes the greater part of the body. This outer net contains two lesser nets, one corresponding to the stomach, the other to the lungs; and the entrance to the latter is forked or divided into two passages which lead to the nostrils and to the mouth. In the process of respiration the external net is said to find a way in and out of the pores of the skin: while the interior of it and the lesser nets move alternately into each other. The whole description is figurative, as Plato himself implies when he speaks of a ‘fountain of fire which we compare to the network of a creel.’ He really means by this what we should describe as a state of heat or temperature in the interior of the body. The ‘fountain of fire’ or heat is also in a figure the circulation of the blood. The passage is partly imagination, partly fact.

Plato discovered heat and air within the human body, along with blood flowing through every part. He suggests, in language that’s almost impossible for us to understand, that a network of fire and air surrounds most of the body. This outer network contains two smaller networks, one related to the stomach and the other to the lungs; the entrance to the lung network splits into two passages that lead to the nostrils and mouth. During breathing, it’s said that the external network moves in and out through the skin's pores, while the interior and smaller networks alternate movement with each other. Overall, this description is metaphorical, as Plato himself indicates when he refers to a ‘fountain of fire which we compare to the network of a creel.’ By this, he essentially means what we would call a state of heat or temperature inside the body. The ‘fountain of fire’ or heat also figuratively represents blood circulation. This account is partly imaginative and partly factual.

He has a singular theory of respiration for which he accounts solely by the movement of the air in and out of the body; he does not attribute any part of the process to the action of the body itself. The air has a double ingress and a double exit, through the mouth or nostrils, and through the skin. When exhaled through the mouth or nostrils, it leaves a vacuum which is filled up by other air finding a way in through the pores, this air being thrust out of its place by the exhalation from the mouth and nostrils. There is also a corresponding process of inhalation through the mouth or nostrils, and of exhalation through the pores. The inhalation through the pores appears to take place nearly at the same time as the exhalation through the mouth; and conversely. The internal fire is in either case the propelling cause outwards—the inhaled air, when heated by it, having a natural tendency to move out of the body to the place of fire; while the impossibility of a vacuum is the propelling cause inwards.

He has a unique theory of breathing that he explains solely through the movement of air in and out of the body; he doesn’t attribute any part of the process to the body's own actions. Air enters and exits in two ways: through the mouth or nostrils and through the skin. When air is exhaled through the mouth or nostrils, it creates a vacuum that gets filled by other air coming in through the pores, as this air is pushed out of its spot by the exhaled breath. There's also a corresponding process of inhaling through the mouth or nostrils and exhaling through the pores. The inhalation through the pores seems to happen almost simultaneously with the exhalation through the mouth, and vice versa. The internal heat acts as the driving force outwards—the inhaled air, once heated by it, naturally moves out of the body toward the source of heat; meanwhile, the impossibility of a vacuum drives air inwards.

Thus we see that this singular theory is dependent on two principles largely employed by Plato in explaining the operations of nature, the impossibility of a vacuum and the attraction of like to like. To these there has to be added a third principle, which is the condition of the action of the other two,—the interpenetration of particles in proportion to their density or rarity. It is this which enables fire and air to permeate the flesh.

Thus, we can see that this unique theory relies on two key principles often used by Plato to explain how nature works: the impossibility of a vacuum and the attraction of similar things to each other. A third principle needs to be added, which is what allows the other two to function—this is the interpenetration of particles based on their density or rarity. This is what lets fire and air pass through flesh.

Plato’s account of digestion and the circulation of the blood is closely connected with his theory of respiration. Digestion is supposed to be effected by the action of the internal fire, which in the process of respiration moves into the stomach and minces the food. As the fire returns to its place, it takes with it the minced food or blood; and in this way the veins are replenished. Plato does not enquire how the blood is separated from the faeces.

Plato’s description of digestion and blood circulation is closely linked to his theory of breathing. Digestion is thought to happen through the action of internal fire, which moves into the stomach during breathing and breaks down the food. As the fire returns to its original place, it carries along the broken-down food or blood; this is how the veins get refilled. Plato doesn’t question how the blood is separated from the waste.

Of the anatomy and functions of the body he knew very little,—e.g. of the uses of the nerves in conveying motion and sensation, which he supposed to be communicated by the bones and veins; he was also ignorant of the distinction between veins and arteries;—the latter term he applies to the vessels which conduct air from the mouth to the lungs;—he supposes the lung to be hollow and bloodless; the spinal marrow he conceives to be the seed of generation; he confuses the parts of the body with the states of the body—the network of fire and air is spoken of as a bodily organ; he has absolutely no idea of the phenomena of respiration, which he attributes to a law of equalization in nature, the air which is breathed out displacing other air which finds a way in; he is wholly unacquainted with the process of digestion. Except the general divisions into the spleen, the liver, the belly, and the lungs, and the obvious distinctions of flesh, bones, and the limbs of the body, we find nothing that reminds us of anatomical facts. But we find much which is derived from his theory of the universe, and transferred to man, as there is much also in his theory of the universe which is suggested by man. The microcosm of the human body is the lesser image of the macrocosm. The courses of the same and the other affect both; they are made of the same elements and therefore in the same proportions. Both are intelligent natures endued with the power of self-motion, and the same equipoise is maintained in both. The animal is a sort of ‘world’ to the particles of the blood which circulate in it. All the four elements entered into the original composition of the human frame; the bone was formed out of smooth earth; liquids of various kinds pass to and fro; the network of fire and air irrigates the veins. Infancy and childhood is the chaos or first turbid flux of sense prior to the establishment of order; the intervals of time which may be observed in some intermittent fevers correspond to the density of the elements. The spinal marrow, including the brain, is formed out of the finest sorts of triangles, and is the connecting link between body and mind. Health is only to be preserved by imitating the motions of the world in space, which is the mother and nurse of generation. The work of digestion is carried on by the superior sharpness of the triangles forming the substances of the human body to those which are introduced into it in the shape of food. The freshest and acutest forms of triangles are those that are found in children, but they become more obtuse with advancing years; and when they finally wear out and fall to pieces, old age and death supervene.

He knew very little about the anatomy and functions of the body—for example, he was unaware of how nerves transmit movement and sensation, thinking instead that this was done by bones and veins. He didn’t understand the difference between veins and arteries; he used the term "arteries" for the vessels that carry air from the mouth to the lungs. He believed the lungs were hollow and devoid of blood, and thought the spinal cord was the seed of reproduction. He mixed up bodily parts with bodily states, referring to the network of fire and air as a physical organ. He had no grasp of how breathing worked, attributing it to a natural law of equalization, with the air exhaled displacing other air that comes in. He was completely unaware of the digestion process. Other than the basic divisions of the spleen, liver, belly, and lungs, along with the clear distinctions of flesh, bones, and limbs, there was nothing that reminded us of anatomical facts. However, much of what he believed came from his theories about the universe, which he applied to humanity, just as there’s much in his universe theory influenced by humans. The microcosm of the human body mirrors the macrocosm of the universe. The same principles affect both; they are made from the same elements and thus in the same proportions. Both have intelligent natures capable of self-motion, and the same balance is maintained in each. The animal body is like a “world” for the blood particles circulating within it. All four elements came together to make up the human body; bones were created from smooth earth; various liquids flow in and out; and the network of fire and air nourishes the veins. Infancy and childhood represent the chaotic beginning of sensory experience before order is established; the time intervals noticed in certain fevers correspond to the density of these elements. The spinal cord, including the brain, is made up of the finest types of triangles and serves as the link between body and mind. Health is maintained by mimicking the motions of the world in space, the source and sustainer of life. Digestion occurs through the sharper triangles formed by the substances of the human body compared to those introduced as food. The freshest and sharpest triangle shapes are found in children, but they become blunter over the years; eventually, when they wear out and break down, aging and death occur.

As in the Republic, Plato is still the enemy of the purgative treatment of physicians, which, except in extreme cases, no man of sense will ever adopt. For, as he adds, with an insight into the truth, ‘every disease is akin to the nature of the living being and is only irritated by stimulants.’ He is of opinion that nature should be left to herself, and is inclined to think that physicians are in vain (Laws—where he says that warm baths would be more beneficial to the limbs of the aged rustic than the prescriptions of a not over-wise doctor). If he seems to be extreme in his condemnation of medicine and to rely too much on diet and exercise, he might appeal to nearly all the best physicians of our own age in support of his opinions, who often speak to their patients of the worthlessness of drugs. For we ourselves are sceptical about medicine, and very unwilling to submit to the purgative treatment of physicians. May we not claim for Plato an anticipation of modern ideas as about some questions of astronomy and physics, so also about medicine? As in the Charmides he tells us that the body cannot be cured without the soul, so in the Timaeus he strongly asserts the sympathy of soul and body; any defect of either is the occasion of the greatest discord and disproportion in the other. Here too may be a presentiment that in the medicine of the future the interdependence of mind and body will be more fully recognized, and that the influence of the one over the other may be exerted in a manner which is not now thought possible.

As in the Republic, Plato is still against the harsh treatments that doctors use, which, except in serious cases, no sensible person would choose. He insightfully adds, "Every disease is related to the nature of the living being and is only aggravated by stimulants." He believes that nature should be allowed to take its course and tends to think that doctors are often ineffective (in Laws, he suggests that warm baths would be more helpful for the limbs of an elderly farmer than the prescriptions of a not-so-wise doctor). If he seems overly critical of medicine and relies too heavily on diet and exercise, he could point to almost all the best doctors of our time who frequently tell their patients that drugs are often useless. We ourselves are doubtful about medicine and are quite reluctant to go through the harsh treatments recommended by doctors. Can we not argue that Plato anticipates modern ideas, similar to his insights on certain astronomical and physical questions, but also relating to medicine? Just as he states in the Charmides that the body cannot be healed without the soul, he strongly affirms in the Timaeus the connection between the soul and the body; any flaw in one leads to significant imbalance in the other. This might also hint that future medicine will more fully acknowledge the interdependence of mind and body, and that the influence each has on the other could be exercised in ways that are not currently believed to be possible.





Section 7.

In Plato’s explanation of sensation we are struck by the fact that he has not the same distinct conception of organs of sense which is familiar to ourselves. The senses are not instruments, but rather passages, through which external objects strike upon the mind. The eye is the aperture through which the stream of vision passes, the ear is the aperture through which the vibrations of sound pass. But that the complex structure of the eye or the ear is in any sense the cause of sight and hearing he seems hardly to be aware.

In Plato’s explanation of sensation, we notice that he doesn't have the same clear understanding of the sensory organs that we do today. The senses aren’t viewed as tools, but rather as pathways through which external objects impact the mind. The eye is simply the opening that allows light to enter, and the ear is the opening that lets sound waves in. However, he doesn’t really seem to grasp that the intricate design of the eye or ear is, in any way, responsible for sight and hearing.

The process of sight is the most complicated (Rep.), and consists of three elements—the light which is supposed to reside within the eye, the light of the sun, and the light emitted from external objects. When the light of the eye meets the light of the sun, and both together meet the light issuing from an external object, this is the simple act of sight. When the particles of light which proceed from the object are exactly equal to the particles of the visual ray which meet them from within, then the body is transparent. If they are larger and contract the visual ray, a black colour is produced; if they are smaller and dilate it, a white. Other phenomena are produced by the variety and motion of light. A sudden flash of fire at once elicits light and moisture from the eye, and causes a bright colour. A more subdued light, on mingling with the moisture of the eye, produces a red colour. Out of these elements all other colours are derived. All of them are combinations of bright and red with white and black. Plato himself tells us that he does not know in what proportions they combine, and he is of opinion that such knowledge is granted to the gods only. To have seen the affinity of them to each other and their connection with light, is not a bad basis for a theory of colours. We must remember that they were not distinctly defined to his, as they are to our eyes; he saw them, not as they are divided in the prism, or artificially manufactured for the painter’s use, but as they exist in nature, blended and confused with one another.

The process of seeing is the most complex (Rep.), consisting of three elements—the light that’s thought to come from within the eye, the light of the sun, and the light emitted by external objects. When the light from the eye meets the sunlight, and together they interact with the light from an external object, this is the basic act of seeing. When the particles of light coming from the object match the particles of the visual ray coming from within, the object appears transparent. If the particles are larger and compress the visual ray, it creates a black color; if they are smaller and expand it, a white color is produced. Other effects arise from the variety and movement of light. A sudden flash of fire instantly triggers light and moisture from the eye, resulting in a bright color. A softer light, mixing with the moisture in the eye, produces a red color. From these elements, all other colors are formed. They are combinations of bright and red with white and black. Plato himself admits that he doesn’t know the exact proportions in which they combine, believing that such knowledge is only granted to the gods. Understanding their connections to one another and their relation to light is a solid foundation for a theory of colors. We must remember that they weren’t clearly defined for him as they are for us; he perceived them not as they appear when separated by a prism or artificially created for painters, but as they exist in nature, blended and mixed together.

We can hardly agree with him when he tells us that smells do not admit of kinds. He seems to think that no definite qualities can attach to bodies which are in a state of transition or evaporation; he also makes the subtle observation that smells must be denser than air, though thinner than water, because when there is an obstruction to the breathing, air can penetrate, but not smell.

We can barely agree with him when he says that smells don’t come in different types. He seems to believe that no specific qualities can belong to substances that are changing or evaporating; he also makes the astute point that smells must be denser than air but lighter than water, because when there's a blockage to breathing, air can get through, but smell cannot.

The affections peculiar to the tongue are of various kinds, and, like many other affections, are caused by contraction and dilation. Some of them are produced by rough, others by abstergent, others by inflammatory substances,—these act upon the testing instruments of the tongue, and produce a more or less disagreeable sensation, while other particles congenial to the tongue soften and harmonize them. The instruments of taste reach from the tongue to the heart. Plato has a lively sense of the manner in which sensation and motion are communicated from one part of the body to the other, though he confuses the affections with the organs. Hearing is a blow which passes through the ear and ends in the region of the liver, being transmitted by means of the air, the brain, and the blood to the soul. The swifter sound is acute, the sound which moves slowly is grave. A great body of sound is loud, the opposite is low. Discord is produced by the swifter and slower motions of two sounds, and is converted into harmony when the swifter motions begin to pause and are overtaken by the slower.

The sensations related to the tongue come in different types and, like many other sensations, are caused by tightening and loosening. Some are triggered by rough substances, others by cleansing agents, and some by inflammatory substances—these interact with the tongue's sensitive areas, creating varying degrees of discomfort, while other substances that are pleasing to the tongue help to soften and balance these sensations. The taste sensations extend from the tongue to the heart. Plato has a vivid understanding of how feelings and movements are transmitted from one part of the body to another, although he mixes up the sensations with the organs. Hearing is like a wave that travels through the ear and ends up near the liver, transmitted through the air, brain, and blood to the soul. Faster sounds are high-pitched, while slower sounds are low-pitched. A loud sound is made by a strong volume of sound, while a soft sound is made by a low volume. Discord occurs when two sounds have different speeds, and it turns into harmony when the faster sounds slow down and align with the slower ones.

The general phenomena of sensation are partly internal, but the more violent are caused by conflict with external objects. Proceeding by a method of superficial observation, Plato remarks that the more sensitive parts of the human frame are those which are least covered by flesh, as is the case with the head and the elbows. Man, if his head had been covered with a thicker pulp of flesh, might have been a longer-lived animal than he is, but could not have had as quick perceptions. On the other hand, the tongue is one of the most sensitive of organs; but then this is made, not to be a covering to the bones which contain the marrow or source of life, but with an express purpose, and in a separate mass.

Sensation occurs both internally and externally, with stronger sensations resulting from interaction with outside objects. Plato observes that the most sensitive parts of the human body are those that have less flesh covering them, like the head and elbows. If a person's head were covered with thicker flesh, they might live longer, but they wouldn’t have the same quick perceptions. On the flip side, the tongue is one of the most sensitive organs, but it's not there to protect the bones that house the marrow, which is essential for life; instead, it has a specific purpose and exists as a separate entity.





Section 8.

We have now to consider how far in any of these speculations Plato approximated to the discoveries of modern science. The modern physical philosopher is apt to dwell exclusively on the absurdities of ancient ideas about science, on the haphazard fancies and a priori assumptions of ancient teachers, on their confusion of facts and ideas, on their inconsistency and blindness to the most obvious phenomena. He measures them not by what preceded them, but by what has followed them. He does not consider that ancient physical philosophy was not a free enquiry, but a growth, in which the mind was passive rather than active, and was incapable of resisting the impressions which flowed in upon it. He hardly allows to the notions of the ancients the merit of being the stepping-stones by which he has himself risen to a higher knowledge. He never reflects, how great a thing it was to have formed a conception, however imperfect, either of the human frame as a whole, or of the world as a whole. According to the view taken in these volumes the errors of ancient physicists were not separable from the intellectual conditions under which they lived. Their genius was their own; and they were not the rash and hasty generalizers which, since the days of Bacon, we have been apt to suppose them. The thoughts of men widened to receive experience; at first they seemed to know all things as in a dream: after a while they look at them closely and hold them in their hands. They begin to arrange them in classes and to connect causes with effects. General notions are necessary to the apprehension of particular facts, the metaphysical to the physical. Before men can observe the world, they must be able to conceive it.

We now need to think about how much Plato's ideas align with the discoveries of modern science. Today's physical philosopher tends to focus solely on the absurdities of ancient scientific concepts, the random speculations and assumptions of ancient thinkers, their mixing of facts and ideas, and their inconsistencies and inability to see the most obvious phenomena. They judge these ancient ideas not by what came before but by what has come after. They overlook that ancient physical philosophy wasn't a free exploration, but rather a development process where the mind was more passive than active, unable to resist the influences around it. They hardly acknowledge that the ideas of ancient thinkers were the building blocks that helped them achieve a deeper understanding. They seldom reflect on how significant it was for them to form a conception, even if flawed, of either the human body or the universe as a whole. According to the perspective in these volumes, the mistakes of ancient physicists were intertwined with the intellectual context of their time. Their creativity was their own; they weren’t the impulsive and quick generalizers that we've been led to believe since Bacon's time. People’s thoughts expanded as they gained experience; at first, they seemed to know everything as if in a dream, but over time they began to examine things closely and grasp them. They started to categorize their observations and link causes to effects. General concepts are crucial for understanding specific facts, and metaphysical ideas are essential for grasping the physical. Before people can study the world, they must be able to think about it.

To do justice to the subject, we should consider the physical philosophy of the ancients as a whole; we should remember, (1) that the nebular theory was the received belief of several of the early physicists; (2) that the development of animals out of fishes who came to land, and of man out of the animals, was held by Anaximander in the sixth century before Christ (Plut. Symp. Quaest; Plac. Phil.); (3) that even by Philolaus and the early Pythagoreans, the earth was held to be a body like the other stars revolving in space around the sun or a central fire; (4) that the beginnings of chemistry are discernible in the ‘similar particles’ of Anaxagoras. Also they knew or thought (5) that there was a sex in plants as well as in animals; (6) they were aware that musical notes depended on the relative length or tension of the strings from which they were emitted, and were measured by ratios of number; (7) that mathematical laws pervaded the world; and even qualitative differences were supposed to have their origin in number and figure; (8) the annihilation of matter was denied by several of them, and the seeming disappearance of it held to be a transformation only. For, although one of these discoveries might have been supposed to be a happy guess, taken together they seem to imply a great advance and almost maturity of natural knowledge.

To do justice to the topic, we should look at the physical philosophy of the ancients as a whole; we should remember, (1) that the nebular theory was the accepted belief of several early physicists; (2) that Anaximander proposed in the sixth century BCE that animals evolved from fish that came onto land, and that humans came from animals (Plut. Symp. Quaest; Plac. Phil.); (3) that even Philolaus and the early Pythagoreans believed the earth was a body like the other stars, revolving in space around the sun or a central fire; (4) that the beginnings of chemistry can be seen in Anaxagoras’ ‘similar particles.’ They also knew or believed (5) that there was a sex in plants as well as in animals; (6) they understood that musical notes depended on the length or tension of the strings they came from and were measured by numerical ratios; (7) that mathematical laws were present throughout the world; and even that qualitative differences were thought to have their roots in number and shape; (8) the destruction of matter was denied by several of them, and its apparent disappearance was considered a transformation only. Because, while one of these discoveries might have been seen as a lucky guess, taken together they suggest a significant advance and nearly complete understanding of natural knowledge.

We should also remember, when we attribute to the ancients hasty generalizations and delusions of language, that physical philosophy and metaphysical too have been guilty of similar fallacies in quite recent times. We by no means distinguish clearly between mind and body, between ideas and facts. Have not many discussions arisen about the Atomic theory in which a point has been confused with a material atom? Have not the natures of things been explained by imaginary entities, such as life or phlogiston, which exist in the mind only? Has not disease been regarded, like sin, sometimes as a negative and necessary, sometimes as a positive or malignant principle? The ‘idols’ of Bacon are nearly as common now as ever; they are inherent in the human mind, and when they have the most complete dominion over us, we are least able to perceive them. We recognize them in the ancients, but we fail to see them in ourselves.

We should also remember that when we criticize ancient thinkers for making rash generalizations and language mistakes, physical and metaphysical philosophy have made similar errors even in recent times. We don't clearly separate the mind from the body, or ideas from facts. Haven't many debates about the atomic theory confused a point with a material atom? Have we not explained the nature of things with imaginary concepts, like life or phlogiston, which exist only in our minds? Hasn't disease been viewed, like sin, sometimes as a negative necessity and other times as a positive or harmful force? The 'idols' of Bacon are still just as prevalent today; they are ingrained in our human nature, and when they have the most control over us, we are the least able to see them. We notice them in the ancients, but we overlook them in ourselves.

Such reflections, although this is not the place in which to dwell upon them at length, lead us to take a favourable view of the speculations of the Timaeus. We should consider not how much Plato actually knew, but how far he has contributed to the general ideas of physics, or supplied the notions which, whether true or false, have stimulated the minds of later generations in the path of discovery. Some of them may seem old-fashioned, but may nevertheless have had a great influence in promoting system and assisting enquiry, while in others we hear the latest word of physical or metaphysical philosophy. There is also an intermediate class, in which Plato falls short of the truths of modern science, though he is not wholly unacquainted with them. (1) To the first class belongs the teleological theory of creation. Whether all things in the world can be explained as the result of natural laws, or whether we must not admit of tendencies and marks of design also, has been a question much disputed of late years. Even if all phenomena are the result of natural forces, we must admit that there are many things in heaven and earth which are as well expressed under the image of mind or design as under any other. At any rate, the language of Plato has been the language of natural theology down to our own time, nor can any description of the world wholly dispense with it. The notion of first and second or co-operative causes, which originally appears in the Timaeus, has likewise survived to our own day, and has been a great peace-maker between theology and science. Plato also approaches very near to our doctrine of the primary and secondary qualities of matter. (2) Another popular notion which is found in the Timaeus, is the feebleness of the human intellect—‘God knows the original qualities of things; man can only hope to attain to probability.’ We speak in almost the same words of human intelligence, but not in the same manner of the uncertainty of our knowledge of nature. The reason is that the latter is assured to us by experiment, and is not contrasted with the certainty of ideal or mathematical knowledge. But the ancient philosopher never experimented: in the Timaeus Plato seems to have thought that there would be impiety in making the attempt; he, for example, who tried experiments in colours would ‘forget the difference of the human and divine natures.’ Their indefiniteness is probably the reason why he singles them out, as especially incapable of being tested by experiment. (Compare the saying of Anaxagoras—Sext. Pyrrh.—that since snow is made of water and water is black, snow ought to be black.)

These reflections, while not the focus of this discussion, lead us to view the ideas in the Timaeus positively. We should think not about how much Plato actually knew, but about how much he contributed to the overall concepts of physics and provided ideas that, whether right or wrong, have inspired later generations in their quest for knowledge. Some of these ideas may seem outdated, yet they may have significantly influenced the development of systems and supported inquiry, while others echo the latest in physical or metaphysical philosophy. There’s also a middle ground where Plato falls short of modern scientific truths, though he's not entirely ignorant of them. (1) One example of the first category is the teleological theory of creation. The debate over whether everything in the world can be explained by natural laws alone or if we must also acknowledge tendencies and signs of design has been a hot topic in recent years. Even if all phenomena stem from natural forces, we have to acknowledge that many aspects of the universe can just as easily be described as products of mind or design. Regardless, Plato’s language has remained a key part of natural theology up to today, and no description of the world can completely avoid it. The idea of first and second or cooperative causes, which first appears in the Timaeus, has also persisted into our time and has served as a crucial bridge between theology and science. Plato also comes close to our understanding of primary and secondary qualities of matter. (2) Another well-known idea in the Timaeus is the limitation of human intellect—‘God knows the original qualities of things; humans can only hope to achieve certainty in probabilities.’ We often express similar thoughts about human intelligence, but we don’t view our uncertainty about nature in the same way. This difference arises because our knowledge of nature is confirmed through experiments, and it doesn’t compare to the certainty we find in ideal or mathematical knowledge. However, the ancient philosopher did not conduct experiments: in the Timaeus, Plato seems to believe that attempting to do so would be disrespectful; for instance, he suggests that someone who experiments with colors would ‘forget the difference between human and divine natures.’ Their ambiguity likely explains why he specifically highlights them as especially unsuitable for experimental testing. (Compare the saying of Anaxagoras—Sext. Pyrrh.—that since snow is made of water and water is black, snow should be black.)

The greatest ‘divination’ of the ancients was the supremacy which they assigned to mathematics in all the realms of nature; for in all of them there is a foundation of mechanics. Even physiology partakes of figure and number; and Plato is not wrong in attributing them to the human frame, but in the omission to observe how little could be explained by them. Thus we may remark in passing that the most fanciful of ancient philosophies is also the most nearly verified in fact. The fortunate guess that the world is a sum of numbers and figures has been the most fruitful of anticipations. The ‘diatonic’ scale of the Pythagoreans and Plato suggested to Kepler that the secret of the distances of the planets from one another was to be found in mathematical proportions. The doctrine that the heavenly bodies all move in a circle is known by us to be erroneous; but without such an error how could the human mind have comprehended the heavens? Astronomy, even in modern times, has made far greater progress by the high a priori road than could have been attained by any other. Yet, strictly speaking—and the remark applies to ancient physics generally—this high a priori road was based upon a posteriori grounds. For there were no facts of which the ancients were so well assured by experience as facts of number. Having observed that they held good in a few instances, they applied them everywhere; and in the complexity, of which they were capable, found the explanation of the equally complex phenomena of the universe. They seemed to see them in the least things as well as in the greatest; in atoms, as well as in suns and stars; in the human body as well as in external nature. And now a favourite speculation of modern chemistry is the explanation of qualitative difference by quantitative, which is at present verified to a certain extent and may hereafter be of far more universal application. What is this but the atoms of Democritus and the triangles of Plato? The ancients should not be wholly deprived of the credit of their guesses because they were unable to prove them. May they not have had, like the animals, an instinct of something more than they knew?

The greatest form of ‘divination’ in ancient times was the importance they placed on mathematics in all areas of nature; for in all of them, there is a foundation in mechanics. Even physiology involves shapes and numbers; and Plato is right to connect them to the human body, but he overlooks how little can actually be explained by them. It’s worth noting that the most imaginative of ancient philosophies is also the one that aligns most closely with reality. The fortunate insight that the world is made up of numbers and shapes has sparked the most productive ideas. The ‘diatonic’ scale of the Pythagoreans and Plato led Kepler to believe that the distances between planets could be understood through mathematical ratios. The idea that celestial bodies all move in circles is known to be incorrect; however, without such a misconception, how could people have grasped the cosmos? Even today, astronomy has advanced far more through this high a priori approach than it could have through any other means. Yet, strictly speaking — and this comment applies to ancient physics overall — this high a priori path was based on a posteriori evidence. The ancients were most certain about numerical facts due to their experiences. Having seen that these worked in a few cases, they applied them broadly; and in their complex thinking, they found explanations for the equally complex phenomena of the universe. They seemed to perceive these patterns in both the smallest and largest things; in atoms, as well as in the sun and stars; in the human body and in the outside world. Now, a popular theory in modern chemistry is that qualitative differences can be explained through quantitative ones, which is currently confirmed to some degree and might one day be widely applicable. What is this but the atoms of Democritus and the shapes of Plato? The ancients shouldn’t be completely stripped of credit for their theories just because they couldn’t prove them. Could they not have had, like animals, an instinct for something beyond their understanding?

Besides general notions we seem to find in the Timaeus some more precise approximations to the discoveries of modern physical science. First, the doctrine of equipoise. Plato affirms, almost in so many words, that nature abhors a vacuum. Whenever a particle is displaced, the rest push and thrust one another until equality is restored. We must remember that these ideas were not derived from any definite experiment, but were the original reflections of man, fresh from the first observation of nature. The latest word of modern philosophy is continuity and development, but to Plato this is the beginning and foundation of science; there is nothing that he is so strongly persuaded of as that the world is one, and that all the various existences which are contained in it are only the transformations of the same soul of the world acting on the same matter. He would have readily admitted that out of the protoplasm all things were formed by the gradual process of creation; but he would have insisted that mind and intelligence—not meaning by this, however, a conscious mind or person—were prior to them, and could alone have created them. Into the workings of this eternal mind or intelligence he does not enter further; nor would there have been any use in attempting to investigate the things which no eye has seen nor any human language can express.

Besides general ideas, we seem to find in the Timaeus some more specific insights that align with modern physical science. First, there's the concept of balance. Plato states, almost explicitly, that nature hates a vacuum. Whenever a particle is moved, the others push and pull each other until balance is restored. It's important to remember that these ideas didn't come from any particular experiment, but were the original thoughts of humanity, newly observing nature. The latest trend in modern philosophy is continuity and development, but to Plato, this is the foundation of science; he was very convinced that the world is unified, and all the different things within it are just transformations of the same soul of the world acting on the same matter. He would have easily agreed that everything originated from protoplasm through a gradual creation process; however, he would have argued that mind and intelligence—not in the sense of a conscious mind or person—were essential beforehand and could have created everything. He doesn't delve further into the workings of this eternal mind or intelligence; nor would it have been useful to try to explore things that no eye has seen or that no human language can describe.

Lastly, there remain two points in which he seems to touch great discoveries of modern times—the law of gravitation, and the circulation of the blood.

Lastly, there are two points where he seems to reference major discoveries of modern times—the law of gravity and the circulation of blood.

(1) The law of gravitation, according to Plato, is a law, not only of the attraction of lesser bodies to larger ones, but of similar bodies to similar, having a magnetic power as well as a principle of gravitation. He observed that earth, water, and air had settled down to their places, and he imagined fire or the exterior aether to have a place beyond air. When air seemed to go upwards and fire to pierce through air—when water and earth fell downward, they were seeking their native elements. He did not remark that his own explanation did not suit all phenomena; and the simpler explanation, which assigns to bodies degrees of heaviness and lightness proportioned to the mass and distance of the bodies which attract them, never occurred to him. Yet the affinities of similar substances have some effect upon the composition of the world, and of this Plato may be thought to have had an anticipation. He may be described as confusing the attraction of gravitation with the attraction of cohesion. The influence of such affinities and the chemical action of one body upon another in long periods of time have become a recognized principle of geology.

(1) According to Plato, the law of gravitation is a principle that not only causes smaller bodies to be attracted to larger ones but also similar bodies to attract each other, having a magnetic force in addition to a gravitational principle. He noticed that earth, water, and air settled into their respective places and imagined that fire or the outer aether existed beyond air. When air seemed to rise and fire seemed to pierce through it—while water and earth fell downwards—they were seeking their natural elements. He didn't realize that his own explanation didn't account for all phenomena, and he never considered the simpler explanation, which attributes degrees of heaviness and lightness to bodies based on their mass and the distance from the bodies that attract them. However, the affinities of similar substances do influence the composition of the world, and in this regard, Plato can be seen as having an early insight. He seemed to confuse gravitational attraction with cohesive attraction. The impact of such affinities and the chemical interactions between bodies over long periods of time have now become established principles in geology.

(2) Plato is perfectly aware—and he could hardly be ignorant—that blood is a fluid in constant motion. He also knew that blood is partly a solid substance consisting of several elements, which, as he might have observed in the use of ‘cupping-glasses’, decompose and die, when no longer in motion. But the specific discovery that the blood flows out on one side of the heart through the arteries and returns through the veins on the other, which is commonly called the circulation of the blood, was absolutely unknown to him.

(2) Plato is fully aware—and he couldn't possibly be unaware—that blood is a liquid that’s always moving. He also understood that blood is partly a solid made up of several components, which, as he might have seen with the use of ‘cupping glasses’, break down and die when they stop moving. However, the specific discovery that blood flows out from one side of the heart through the arteries and returns through the veins on the other side, which we now refer to as blood circulation, was completely unknown to him.

A further study of the Timaeus suggests some after-thoughts which may be conveniently brought together in this place. The topics which I propose briefly to reconsider are (a) the relation of the Timaeus to the other dialogues of Plato and to the previous philosophy; (b) the nature of God and of creation (c) the morality of the Timaeus:—

A closer look at the Timaeus brings up some reflections that can be conveniently grouped here. The topics I plan to briefly revisit are (a) the connection between the Timaeus and Plato's other dialogues as well as earlier philosophical ideas; (b) the nature of God and creation; and (c) the morality presented in the Timaeus:—

(a) The Timaeus is more imaginative and less scientific than any other of the Platonic dialogues. It is conjectural astronomy, conjectural natural philosophy, conjectural medicine. The writer himself is constantly repeating that he is speaking what is probable only. The dialogue is put into the mouth of Timaeus, a Pythagorean philosopher, and therefore here, as in the Parmenides, we are in doubt how far Plato is expressing his own sentiments. Hence the connexion with the other dialogues is comparatively slight. We may fill up the lacunae of the Timaeus by the help of the Republic or Phaedrus: we may identify the same and other with the (Greek) of the Philebus. We may find in the Laws or in the Statesman parallels with the account of creation and of the first origin of man. It would be possible to frame a scheme in which all these various elements might have a place. But such a mode of proceeding would be unsatisfactory, because we have no reason to suppose that Plato intended his scattered thoughts to be collected in a system. There is a common spirit in his writings, and there are certain general principles, such as the opposition of the sensible and intellectual, and the priority of mind, which run through all of them; but he has no definite forms of words in which he consistently expresses himself. While the determinations of human thought are in process of creation he is necessarily tentative and uncertain. And there is least of definiteness, whenever either in describing the beginning or the end of the world, he has recourse to myths. These are not the fixed modes in which spiritual truths are revealed to him, but the efforts of imagination, by which at different times and in various manners he seeks to embody his conceptions. The clouds of mythology are still resting upon him, and he has not yet pierced ‘to the heaven of the fixed stars’ which is beyond them. It is safer then to admit the inconsistencies of the Timaeus, or to endeavour to fill up what is wanting from our own imagination, inspired by a study of the dialogue, than to refer to other Platonic writings,—and still less should we refer to the successors of Plato,—for the elucidation of it.

(a) The Timaeus is more creative and less scientific than any other of the Platonic dialogues. It explores hypothetical astronomy, speculative natural philosophy, and conjectural medicine. The author repeatedly emphasizes that he is only discussing what seems probable. The dialogue is presented through Timaeus, a Pythagorean philosopher, which raises questions about how much of Plato's own views are being conveyed. As a result, its connection to the other dialogues is relatively weak. We can fill in the gaps of the Timaeus using ideas from the Republic or Phaedrus, and we can relate the same and other concepts to the (Greek) of the Philebus. We might find parallels in the Laws or the Statesman that connect to the creation narrative and the origins of humanity. It would be possible to create a framework where all these different elements fit together. However, that approach would be unsatisfactory because there's no reason to believe that Plato intended for his scattered thoughts to form a cohesive system. There is an underlying spirit in his works, and certain overarching principles, like the distinction between the sensible and intellectual and the primacy of the mind, that run throughout them; yet he doesn't use consistent terminology. As human understanding evolves, he remains tentative and uncertain. This uncertainty is most pronounced when he describes the beginnings or ends of the world, often resorting to myths. These myths are not established ways in which spiritual truths are revealed to him, but rather imaginative attempts to express his ideas at different times and in various forms. He is still clouded by mythology and hasn't yet reached "the heaven of the fixed stars" that lies beyond it. Therefore, it's better to acknowledge the inconsistencies in the Timaeus or to use our imagination, inspired by studying the dialogue, to fill in what's missing, rather than looking to other Platonic works—or, even less, to Plato's successors—for clarification.

More light is thrown upon the Timaeus by a comparison of the previous philosophies. For the physical science of the ancients was traditional, descending through many generations of Ionian and Pythagorean philosophers. Plato does not look out upon the heavens and describe what he sees in them, but he builds upon the foundations of others, adding something out of the ‘depths of his own self-consciousness.’ Socrates had already spoken of God the creator, who made all things for the best. While he ridiculed the superficial explanations of phenomena which were current in his age, he recognised the marks both of benevolence and of design in the frame of man and in the world. The apparatus of winds and waters is contemptuously rejected by him in the Phaedo, but he thinks that there is a power greater than that of any Atlas in the ‘Best’ (Phaedo; Arist. Met.). Plato, following his master, affirms this principle of the best, but he acknowledges that the best is limited by the conditions of matter. In the generation before Socrates, Anaxagoras had brought together ‘Chaos’ and ‘Mind’; and these are connected by Plato in the Timaeus, but in accordance with his own mode of thinking he has interposed between them the idea or pattern according to which mind worked. The circular impulse (Greek) of the one philosopher answers to the circular movement (Greek) of the other. But unlike Anaxagoras, Plato made the sun and stars living beings and not masses of earth or metal. The Pythagoreans again had framed a world out of numbers, which they constructed into figures. Plato adopted their speculations and improved upon them by a more exact knowledge of geometry. The Atomists too made the world, if not out of geometrical figures, at least out of different forms of atoms, and these atoms resembled the triangles of Plato in being too small to be visible. But though the physiology of the Timaeus is partly borrowed from them, they are either ignored by Plato or referred to with a secret contempt and dislike. He looks with more favour on the Pythagoreans, whose intervals of number applied to the distances of the planets reappear in the Timaeus. It is probable that among the Pythagoreans living in the fourth century B.C., there were already some who, like Plato, made the earth their centre. Whether he obtained his circles of the Same and Other from any previous thinker is uncertain. The four elements are taken from Empedocles; the interstices of the Timaeus may also be compared with his (Greek). The passage of one element into another is common to Heracleitus and several of the Ionian philosophers. So much of a syncretist is Plato, though not after the manner of the Neoplatonists. For the elements which he borrows from others are fused and transformed by his own genius. On the other hand we find fewer traces in Plato of early Ionic or Eleatic speculation. He does not imagine the world of sense to be made up of opposites or to be in a perpetual flux, but to vary within certain limits which are controlled by what he calls the principle of the same. Unlike the Eleatics, who relegated the world to the sphere of not-being, he admits creation to have an existence which is real and even eternal, although dependent on the will of the creator. Instead of maintaining the doctrine that the void has a necessary place in the existence of the world, he rather affirms the modern thesis that nature abhors a vacuum, as in the Sophist he also denies the reality of not-being (Aristot. Metaph.). But though in these respects he differs from them, he is deeply penetrated by the spirit of their philosophy; he differs from them with reluctance, and gladly recognizes the ‘generous depth’ of Parmenides (Theaet.).

The Timaeus is better understood when compared to earlier philosophies. The ancient physical sciences were traditional, passed down through many generations of Ionian and Pythagorean thinkers. Plato doesn’t just observe the heavens and describe what he sees; instead, he builds on the ideas of others while also contributing his own insights. Socrates had already talked about God as the creator, who made everything for the best. He mocked the superficial explanations of natural phenomena common in his time but acknowledged the signs of kindness and design in both human nature and the universe. He dismisses the mechanics of winds and waters in the Phaedo, yet believes there is a force greater than any Atlas, which he calls the ‘Best’ (Phaedo; Arist. Met.). Following Socrates, Plato upholds this idea of the best but recognizes that it is constrained by the conditions of matter. Anaxagoras, who lived before Socrates, combined ‘Chaos’ and ‘Mind’. Plato connects these ideas in the Timaeus but, staying true to his thinking style, introduces the concept of an idea or pattern that guides the mind's work. The circular impulse (Greek) of one philosopher corresponds with the circular movement (Greek) of the other. Unlike Anaxagoras, however, Plato portrays the sun and stars as living beings rather than mere masses of earth or metal. The Pythagoreans created a world based on numbers, which they organized into shapes. Plato adopted and refined their ideas with a more precise understanding of geometry. The Atomists also constructed a world, not necessarily from geometric shapes, but from various forms of atoms, which shared the quality of being too small to see, similar to Plato's triangles. Although Plato draws some physiological concepts from the Atomists, he either ignores them or looks down on them with quiet disdain. He shows more appreciation for the Pythagoreans, whose numerical intervals related to planet distances also appear in the Timaeus. It’s likely that, among the Pythagoreans of the fourth century B.C., there were already some thinkers, like Plato, who placed the earth at the center. It's unclear whether he adapted the circles of the Same and Other from previous thinkers. He takes the four elements from Empedocles, and the connections in the Timaeus can also be compared to his work (Greek). The transition of one element into another is a shared idea with Heraclitus and several Ionian philosophers. Plato is indeed a syncretist, but not in the manner of the Neoplatonists. The elements he borrows are reshaped and transformed by his own creativity. On the other hand, there are fewer signs of early Ionic or Eleatic thought in Plato. He does not view the sensory world as made up of opposites or in constant change; instead, he sees it as varying within specific limits controlled by what he calls the principle of the same. Unlike the Eleatics, who assigned the world to the realm of non-being, he affirms that creation exists in a way that is real and even eternal, though dependent on the creator's will. Instead of arguing that a void is necessary for the world's existence, he supports the modern view that nature abhors a vacuum, as reflected in the Sophist where he also denies the reality of non-being (Aristot. Metaph.). Despite these differences, he is deeply influenced by the essence of their philosophy; he diverges from them reluctantly and readily acknowledges the ‘generous depth’ of Parmenides (Theaet.).

There is a similarity between the Timaeus and the fragments of Philolaus, which by some has been thought to be so great as to create a suspicion that they are derived from it. Philolaus is known to us from the Phaedo of Plato as a Pythagorean philosopher residing at Thebes in the latter half of the fifth century B.C., after the dispersion of the original Pythagorean society. He was the teacher of Simmias and Cebes, who became disciples of Socrates. We have hardly any other information about him. The story that Plato had purchased three books of his writings from a relation is not worth repeating; it is only a fanciful way in which an ancient biographer dresses up the fact that there was supposed to be a resemblance between the two writers. Similar gossiping stories are told about the sources of the Republic and the Phaedo. That there really existed in antiquity a work passing under the name of Philolaus there can be no doubt. Fragments of this work are preserved to us, chiefly in Stobaeus, a few in Boethius and other writers. They remind us of the Timaeus, as well as of the Phaedrus and Philebus. When the writer says (Stob. Eclog.) that all things are either finite (definite) or infinite (indefinite), or a union of the two, and that this antithesis and synthesis pervades all art and nature, we are reminded of the Philebus. When he calls the centre of the world (Greek), we have a parallel to the Phaedrus. His distinction between the world of order, to which the sun and moon and the stars belong, and the world of disorder, which lies in the region between the moon and the earth, approximates to Plato’s sphere of the Same and of the Other. Like Plato (Tim.), he denied the above and below in space, and said that all things were the same in relation to a centre. He speaks also of the world as one and indestructible: ‘for neither from within nor from without does it admit of destruction’ (Tim). He mentions ten heavenly bodies, including the sun and moon, the earth and the counter-earth (Greek), and in the midst of them all he places the central fire, around which they are moving—this is hidden from the earth by the counter-earth. Of neither is there any trace in Plato, who makes the earth the centre of his system. Philolaus magnifies the virtues of particular numbers, especially of the number 10 (Stob. Eclog.), and descants upon odd and even numbers, after the manner of the later Pythagoreans. It is worthy of remark that these mystical fancies are nowhere to be found in the writings of Plato, although the importance of number as a form and also an instrument of thought is ever present to his mind. Both Philolaus and Plato agree in making the world move in certain numerical ratios according to a musical scale: though Bockh is of opinion that the two scales, of Philolaus and of the Timaeus, do not correspond...We appear not to be sufficiently acquainted with the early Pythagoreans to know how far the statements contained in these fragments corresponded with their doctrines; and we therefore cannot pronounce, either in favour of the genuineness of the fragments, with Bockh and Zeller, or, with Valentine Rose and Schaarschmidt, against them. But it is clear that they throw but little light upon the Timaeus, and that their resemblance to it has been exaggerated.

There is a similarity between the Timaeus and the fragments of Philolaus, which some people believe is so significant that it raises doubts about whether they come from the same source. We know about Philolaus from Plato's Phaedo as a Pythagorean philosopher living in Thebes during the latter half of the fifth century B.C., after the original Pythagorean society had dispersed. He was the teacher of Simmias and Cebes, who became students of Socrates. We barely have any other information about him. The tale that Plato bought three books of his writings from a relative isn’t worth repeating; it's just a fanciful way for an ancient biographer to suggest that there was a similarity between the two writers. Similar stories have circulated about the sources of the Republic and the Phaedo. There’s no doubt that a work attributed to Philolaus existed in antiquity. Fragments of this work are preserved mainly in Stobaeus, with a few found in Boethius and other writers. They remind us of the Timaeus, as well as the Phaedrus and Philebus. When the writer states (Stob. Eclog.) that everything is either finite (definite) or infinite (indefinite), or a combination of the two, and that this contrast and synthesis pervade all art and nature, it brings to mind the Philebus. When he refers to the center of the world (Greek), it parallels the Phaedrus. His distinction between the ordered world, which includes the sun, moon, and stars, and the disordered world, lying in the space between the moon and the earth, closely resembles Plato’s idea of the sphere of the Same and the Other. Like Plato (Tim.), he denied any above and below in space and claimed that everything is the same in relation to a center. He also describes the world as one and indestructible: ‘for neither from within nor from without does it admit of destruction’ (Tim). He identifies ten heavenly bodies, including the sun, moon, earth, and counter-earth (Greek), placing the central fire among them, which is hidden from the earth by the counter-earth. Neither of these concepts is found in Plato, who centers his system around the earth. Philolaus emphasizes the significance of particular numbers, especially the number 10 (Stob. Eclog.), and discusses odd and even numbers like later Pythagoreans. It's noteworthy that these mystical ideas are absent from Plato’s writings, although he constantly acknowledges the role of numbers as both form and tools of thought. Both Philolaus and Plato agree that the world moves according to specific numerical ratios based on a musical scale, although Bockh believes that the two scales of Philolaus and the Timaeus do not match. We don’t seem to know enough about the early Pythagoreans to determine how well the statements in these fragments align with their beliefs, so we can't decisively support or oppose the authenticity of the fragments, as Bockh and Zeller do, or as Valentine Rose and Schaarschmidt argue against them. However, it is clear that they offer little insight into the Timaeus, and their resemblance to it has likely been overstated.

That there is a degree of confusion and indistinctness in Plato’s account both of man and of the universe has been already acknowledged. We cannot tell (nor could Plato himself have told) where the figure or myth ends and the philosophical truth begins; we cannot explain (nor could Plato himself have explained to us) the relation of the ideas to appearance, of which one is the copy of the other, and yet of all things in the world they are the most opposed and unlike. This opposition is presented to us in many forms, as the antithesis of the one and many, of the finite and infinite, of the intelligible and sensible, of the unchangeable and the changing, of the indivisible and the divisible, of the fixed stars and the planets, of the creative mind and the primeval chaos. These pairs of opposites are so many aspects of the great opposition between ideas and phenomena—they easily pass into one another; and sometimes the two members of the relation differ in kind, sometimes only in degree. As in Aristotle’s matter and form the connexion between them is really inseparable; for if we attempt to separate them they become devoid of content and therefore indistinguishable; there is no difference between the idea of which nothing can be predicated, and the chaos or matter which has no perceptible qualities—between Being in the abstract and Nothing. Yet we are frequently told that the one class of them is the reality and the other appearance; and one is often spoken of as the double or reflection of the other. For Plato never clearly saw that both elements had an equal place in mind and in nature; and hence, especially when we argue from isolated passages in his writings, or attempt to draw what appear to us to be the natural inferences from them, we are full of perplexity. There is a similar confusion about necessity and free-will, and about the state of the soul after death. Also he sometimes supposes that God is immanent in the world, sometimes that he is transcendent. And having no distinction of objective and subjective, he passes imperceptibly from one to the other; from intelligence to soul, from eternity to time. These contradictions may be softened or concealed by a judicious use of language, but they cannot be wholly got rid of. That an age of intellectual transition must also be one of inconsistency; that the creative is opposed to the critical or defining habit of mind or time, has been often repeated by us. But, as Plato would say, ‘there is no harm in repeating twice or thrice’ (Laws) what is important for the understanding of a great author.

There's definitely some confusion and ambiguity in Plato's views on humanity and the universe. We can't really tell (and neither could Plato) where the stories or myths stop and the philosophical truths start; we can't explain (and neither could Plato) the relationship between ideas and appearances, where one copies the other yet they are completely different. This distinction shows up in various forms, like the contrast between the one and the many, the finite and infinite, the intelligible and the sensible, the unchangeable and the changing, the indivisible and the divisible, the fixed stars and the planets, and the creative mind versus the primordial chaos. These pairs of opposites reflect the larger opposition between ideas and phenomena—they can easily blend into each other; sometimes the two sides differ fundamentally, other times just in degrees. Just like Aristotle's matter and form, their connection is truly inseparable; if we try to split them, they lose their meaning and become indistinguishable—there's no difference between an idea that can't be described and chaos or matter that lacks any obvious qualities—between abstract Being and Nothing. Yet we often hear that one group represents reality while the other shows mere appearance; one is frequently referred to as a shadow or reflection of the other. Plato never fully recognized that both elements hold equal value in thought and nature; as a result, particularly when we analyze isolated excerpts from his writings or draw what seem to be logical conclusions, we find ourselves confused. A similar ambiguity exists regarding necessity and free will, as well as what happens to the soul after death. Sometimes he indicates that God is present in the world, while other times he suggests that God exists beyond it. Without a clear distinction between objective and subjective, he moves seamlessly back and forth; from intellect to soul, from eternity to time. These contradictions might be softened or hidden through careful language use, but they can't be fully eliminated. An era of intellectual change inevitably leads to inconsistencies; the creative mindset is often at odds with the critical or defining mindset of the time, as we've pointed out repeatedly. However, as Plato might say, ‘there’s no harm in repeating something important for understanding a great author’ (Laws).

It has not, however, been observed, that the confusion partly arises out of the elements of opposing philosophies which are preserved in him. He holds these in solution, he brings them into relation with one another, but he does not perfectly harmonize them. They are part of his own mind, and he is incapable of placing himself outside of them and criticizing them. They grow as he grows; they are a kind of composition with which his own philosophy is overlaid. In early life he fancies that he has mastered them: but he is also mastered by them; and in language (Sophist) which may be compared with the hesitating tone of the Timaeus, he confesses in his later years that they are full of obscurity to him. He attributes new meanings to the words of Parmenides and Heracleitus; but at times the old Eleatic philosophy appears to go beyond him; then the world of phenomena disappears, but the doctrine of ideas is also reduced to nothingness. All of them are nearer to one another than they themselves supposed, and nearer to him than he supposed. All of them are antagonistic to sense and have an affinity to number and measure and a presentiment of ideas. Even in Plato they still retain their contentious or controversial character, which was developed by the growth of dialectic. He is never able to reconcile the first causes of the pre-Socratic philosophers with the final causes of Socrates himself. There is no intelligible account of the relation of numbers to the universal ideas, or of universals to the idea of good. He found them all three, in the Pythagorean philosophy and in the teaching of Socrates and of the Megarians respectively; and, because they all furnished modes of explaining and arranging phenomena, he is unwilling to give up any of them, though he is unable to unite them in a consistent whole.

It has not been observed, however, that the confusion partly comes from the conflicting philosophies that exist within him. He holds these conflicting ideas together, relating them to each other, but he doesn’t fully harmonize them. They are part of his own mind, and he can't step outside of them to critique them. They evolve as he evolves; they form a kind of mix under which his own philosophy is layered. In his early years, he thinks he has mastered them, but he is also controlled by them; and in his later years, with language (Sophist) that echoes the uncertain tone of the Timaeus, he admits that they remain unclear to him. He assigns new meanings to the words of Parmenides and Heraclitus; yet at times, the old Eleatic philosophy seems to surpass him; then the world of phenomena vanishes, and the doctrine of ideas also collapses. All of them are more connected than they realized, and closer to him than he thought. They all oppose sensory perception and share an affinity for numbers and measurement, along with a sense of ideas. Even in Plato, they still maintain their contentious nature, which developed through the evolution of dialectics. He can never reconcile the first causes of the pre-Socratic philosophers with the final causes of Socrates himself. There’s no clear explanation of how numbers relate to universal ideas or how universals connect to the idea of good. He encountered all three in Pythagorean philosophy, as well as in the teachings of Socrates and the Megarians; and because each provided ways to explain and organize phenomena, he is reluctant to abandon any of them, even though he can't integrate them into a consistent whole.

Lastly, Plato, though an idealist philosopher, is Greek and not Oriental in spirit and feeling. He is no mystic or ascetic; he is not seeking in vain to get rid of matter or to find absorption in the divine nature, or in the Soul of the universe. And therefore we are not surprised to find that his philosophy in the Timaeus returns at last to a worship of the heavens, and that to him, as to other Greeks, nature, though containing a remnant of evil, is still glorious and divine. He takes away or drops the veil of mythology, and presents her to us in what appears to him to be the form-fairer and truer far—of mathematical figures. It is this element in the Timaeus, no less than its affinity to certain Pythagorean speculations, which gives it a character not wholly in accordance with the other dialogues of Plato.

Lastly, Plato, despite being an idealist philosopher, is Greek and not influenced by Eastern traditions in spirit and feeling. He isn't a mystic or an ascetic; he isn't desperately trying to escape from the physical world or seek unity with the divine nature or the soul of the universe. Therefore, it's no surprise that his philosophy in the Timaeus ultimately leads to a reverence for the heavens, and to him, like to other Greeks, nature, despite having some traces of evil, is still beautiful and divine. He removes the veil of mythology and presents it to us in what he believes to be a much more beautiful and accurate form—mathematical shapes. This aspect in the Timaeus, along with its connections to certain Pythagorean ideas, gives it a character that doesn’t completely align with Plato’s other dialogues.

(b) The Timaeus contains an assertion perhaps more distinct than is found in any of the other dialogues (Rep.; Laws) of the goodness of God. ‘He was good himself, and he fashioned the good everywhere.’ He was not ‘a jealous God,’ and therefore he desired that all other things should be equally good. He is the IDEA of good who has now become a person, and speaks and is spoken of as God. Yet his personality seems to appear only in the act of creation. In so far as he works with his eye fixed upon an eternal pattern he is like the human artificer in the Republic. Here the theory of Platonic ideas intrudes upon us. God, like man, is supposed to have an ideal of which Plato is unable to tell us the origin. He may be said, in the language of modern philosophy, to resolve the divine mind into subject and object.

(b) The Timaeus makes a claim that is perhaps clearer than in any of the other dialogues (Rep.; Laws) about the goodness of God. 'He was good himself, and he made goodness everywhere.' He was not 'a jealous God,' so he wanted all other things to be equally good. He represents the IDEA of good that has now taken on a personality, speaking and being referred to as God. However, his personality seems to only emerge during the act of creation. As he works with his focus on an eternal model, he resembles the human creator from the Republic. This is where the theory of Platonic ideas comes into play. God, like humans, is thought to have an ideal, but Plato cannot explain its origin. In terms of modern philosophy, we could say that he breaks down the divine mind into subject and object.

The first work of creation is perfected, the second begins under the direction of inferior ministers. The supreme God is withdrawn from the world and returns to his own accustomed nature (Tim.). As in the Statesman, he retires to his place of view. So early did the Epicurean doctrine take possession of the Greek mind, and so natural is it to the heart of man, when he has once passed out of the stage of mythology into that of rational religion. For he sees the marks of design in the world; but he no longer sees or fancies that he sees God walking in the garden or haunting stream or mountain. He feels also that he must put God as far as possible out of the way of evil, and therefore he banishes him from an evil world. Plato is sensible of the difficulty; and he often shows that he is desirous of justifying the ways of God to man. Yet on the other hand, in the Tenth Book of the Laws he passes a censure on those who say that the Gods have no care of human things.

The first act of creation is complete, and the second begins under the guidance of lower beings. The supreme God pulls away from the world and returns to his usual essence (Tim.). Just like in the Statesman, he retreats to his vantage point. The Epicurean philosophy had a strong hold on the Greek mind early on, and it feels so natural to human hearts once they move beyond mythology into rational religion. They notice the signs of design in the world; however, they no longer see or imagine God wandering through gardens or roaming the streams and mountains. They also feel the need to keep God as distant as possible from evil, which leads them to exclude him from a troubled world. Plato recognizes this challenge; he frequently tries to justify God's actions to humanity. Yet, in the Tenth Book of the Laws, he criticizes those who claim that the gods are indifferent to human affairs.

The creation of the world is the impression of order on a previously existing chaos. The formula of Anaxagoras—‘all things were in chaos or confusion, and then mind came and disposed them’—is a summary of the first part of the Timaeus. It is true that of a chaos without differences no idea could be formed. All was not mixed but one; and therefore it was not difficult for the later Platonists to draw inferences by which they were enabled to reconcile the narrative of the Timaeus with the Mosaic account of the creation. Neither when we speak of mind or intelligence, do we seem to get much further in our conception than circular motion, which was deemed to be the most perfect. Plato, like Anaxagoras, while commencing his theory of the universe with ideas of mind and of the best, is compelled in the execution of his design to condescend to the crudest physics.

The creation of the world is about bringing order to a previously existing chaos. Anaxagoras summed it up with his idea that "everything was chaotic or confusing, and then thought came and organized it." This captures the first part of the Timaeus. It's true that from a chaos without differences, no idea could emerge. Everything wasn’t just mixed together but was one; so it wasn’t hard for later Platonists to find ways to align the Timaeus narrative with the Mosaic creation story. When we talk about mind or intelligence, we don’t seem to get much further than the idea of circular motion, which was considered the most perfect. Plato, like Anaxagoras, starts his theory of the universe with concepts of mind and the best but ends up relying on very basic physics to carry out his ideas.

(c) The morality of the Timaeus is singular, and it is difficult to adjust the balance between the two elements of it. The difficulty which Plato feels, is that which all of us feel, and which is increased in our own day by the progress of physical science, how the responsibility of man is to be reconciled with his dependence on natural causes. And sometimes, like other men, he is more impressed by one aspect of human life, sometimes by the other. In the Republic he represents man as freely choosing his own lot in a state prior to birth—a conception which, if taken literally, would still leave him subject to the dominion of necessity in his after life; in the Statesman he supposes the human race to be preserved in the world only by a divine interposition; while in the Timaeus the supreme God commissions the inferior deities to avert from him all but self-inflicted evils—words which imply that all the evils of men are really self-inflicted. And here, like Plato (the insertion of a note in the text of an ancient writer is a literary curiosity worthy of remark), we may take occasion to correct an error. For we too hastily said that Plato in the Timaeus regarded all ‘vices and crimes as involuntary.’ But the fact is that he is inconsistent with himself; in one and the same passage vice is attributed to the relaxation of the bodily frame, and yet we are exhorted to avoid it and pursue virtue. It is also admitted that good and evil conduct are to be attributed respectively to good and evil laws and institutions. These cannot be given by individuals to themselves; and therefore human actions, in so far as they are dependent upon them, are regarded by Plato as involuntary rather than voluntary. Like other writers on this subject, he is unable to escape from some degree of self-contradiction. He had learned from Socrates that vice is ignorance, and suddenly the doctrine seems to him to be confirmed by observing how much of the good and bad in human character depends on the bodily constitution. So in modern times the speculative doctrine of necessity has often been supported by physical facts.

(c) The morality in the Timaeus is unique, and it's hard to strike a balance between its two aspects. The struggle that Plato experiences is one that we all face, which is made even more complex today by advances in physical science—how to reconcile human responsibility with dependence on natural forces. At times, like anyone else, he feels more strongly about one side of human life or the other. In the Republic, he shows people as freely choosing their own fate before birth—a view that, if taken literally, still leaves them under the control of necessity afterwards; in the Statesman, he argues that humanity only survives in the world through divine intervention; while in the Timaeus, the supreme God delegates power to lesser deities to protect humans from all but self-inflicted harms—suggesting that all human suffering is genuinely self-imposed. Here, like Plato (insertions in ancient texts are interesting), we can correct a mistake. We were too quick to say that Plato considered all 'vices and crimes as involuntary' in the Timaeus. The truth is, he is inconsistent; in one part of his writing, he links vice to the weakening of the body, yet we are still encouraged to avoid vice and seek virtue. He also recognizes that good and bad actions are tied to good and bad laws and institutions. Individuals can't create these for themselves; hence, Plato views human actions that depend on them as involuntary rather than voluntary. Like other writers on this topic, he wrestles with some level of self-contradiction. He learned from Socrates that vice is a form of ignorance and suddenly he seems to validate this by noticing how much of what is good and bad in people ties back to their physical make-up. Similarly, in modern times, the philosophical idea of necessity has often been supported by physical realities.

The Timaeus also contains an anticipation of the stoical life according to nature. Man contemplating the heavens is to regulate his erring life according to them. He is to partake of the repose of nature and of the order of nature, to bring the variable principle in himself into harmony with the principle of the same. The ethics of the Timaeus may be summed up in the single idea of ‘law.’ To feel habitually that he is part of the order of the universe, is one of the highest ethical motives of which man is capable. Something like this is what Plato means when he speaks of the soul ‘moving about the same in unchanging thought of the same.’ He does not explain how man is acted upon by the lesser influences of custom or of opinion; or how the commands of the soul watching in the citadel are conveyed to the bodily organs. But this perhaps, to use once more expressions of his own, ‘is part of another subject’ or ‘may be more suitably discussed on some other occasion.’

The Timaeus also hints at living a stoic life in line with nature. People should look to the heavens to guide their wayward lives. They should experience the peace and order of nature, bringing the chaotic aspects of themselves into harmony with that same principle. The ethics in the Timaeus can be summarized by the concept of ‘law.’ Feeling consistently like a part of the universe's order is one of the highest ethical motivations a person can have. This is similar to what Plato means when he describes the soul ‘moving about the same in unchanging thought of the same.’ He doesn’t clarify how people are influenced by the smaller factors of custom or opinion, or how the soul’s commands, which watch over us from our core, are communicated to our physical bodies. But perhaps this, to borrow his own phrases, ‘is part of another subject’ or ‘might be better addressed another time.’

There is no difficulty, by the help of Aristotle and later writers, in criticizing the Timaeus of Plato, in pointing out the inconsistencies of the work, in dwelling on the ignorance of anatomy displayed by the author, in showing the fancifulness or unmeaningness of some of his reasons. But the Timaeus still remains the greatest effort of the human mind to conceive the world as a whole which the genius of antiquity has bequeathed to us.

There’s no trouble, with the help of Aristotle and later thinkers, in critiquing Plato's Timaeus, in highlighting the inconsistencies in the work, in noting the author's ignorance of anatomy, or in revealing the fanciful or meaningless nature of some of his arguments. However, the Timaeus still stands as the greatest attempt of the human mind to understand the world as a whole that the genius of ancient times has left us.


One more aspect of the Timaeus remains to be considered—the mythological or geographical. Is it not a wonderful thing that a few pages of one of Plato’s dialogues have grown into a great legend, not confined to Greece only, but spreading far and wide over the nations of Europe and reaching even to Egypt and Asia? Like the tale of Troy, or the legend of the Ten Tribes (Ewald, Hist. of Isr.), which perhaps originated in a few verses of II Esdras, it has become famous, because it has coincided with a great historical fact. Like the romance of King Arthur, which has had so great a charm, it has found a way over the seas from one country and language to another. It inspired the navigators of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries; it foreshadowed the discovery of America. It realized the fiction so natural to the human mind, because it answered the enquiry about the origin of the arts, that there had somewhere existed an ancient primitive civilization. It might find a place wherever men chose to look for it; in North, South, East, or West; in the Islands of the Blest; before the entrance of the Straits of Gibraltar, in Sweden or in Palestine. It mattered little whether the description in Plato agreed with the locality assigned to it or not. It was a legend so adapted to the human mind that it made a habitation for itself in any country. It was an island in the clouds, which might be seen anywhere by the eye of faith. It was a subject especially congenial to the ponderous industry of certain French and Swedish writers, who delighted in heaping up learning of all sorts but were incapable of using it.

One more aspect of the Timaeus needs to be discussed—the mythological or geographical. Isn’t it amazing that a few pages from one of Plato’s dialogues have turned into a grand legend, not just limited to Greece, but spreading across Europe and reaching even to Egypt and Asia? Like the story of Troy or the legend of the Ten Tribes (Ewald, Hist. of Isr.), which may have started from a few verses of II Esdras, it has gained fame because it coincided with a significant historical event. Similar to the romance of King Arthur, which has captivated many, it traveled across the seas from one country and language to another. It inspired explorers during the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries and hinted at the discovery of America. It embodied the idea that is so natural to the human mind, answering the question of the origins of the arts by suggesting that a great ancient civilization once existed somewhere. It could be imagined anywhere—North, South, East, or West; in the Isles of the Blessed; before the entrance of the Straits of Gibraltar, in Sweden, or in Palestine. It didn’t really matter if Plato’s description matched the location assigned to it or not. It was a legend so well-suited to the human imagination that it could settle in any country. It was an island in the clouds, visible anywhere to the eye of faith. It was a topic particularly well-suited to the heavy scholarship of certain French and Swedish writers, who loved to gather all kinds of knowledge but struggled to apply it.

M. Martin has written a valuable dissertation on the opinions entertained respecting the Island of Atlantis in ancient and modern times. It is a curious chapter in the history of the human mind. The tale of Atlantis is the fabric of a vision, but it has never ceased to interest mankind. It was variously regarded by the ancients themselves. The stronger heads among them, like Strabo and Longinus, were as little disposed to believe in the truth of it as the modern reader in Gulliver or Robinson Crusoe. On the other hand there is no kind or degree of absurdity or fancy in which the more foolish writers, both of antiquity and of modern times, have not indulged respecting it. The Neo-Platonists, loyal to their master, like some commentators on the Christian Scriptures, sought to give an allegorical meaning to what they also believed to be an historical fact. It was as if some one in our own day were to convert the poems of Homer into an allegory of the Christian religion, at the same time maintaining them to be an exact and veritable history. In the Middle Ages the legend seems to have been half-forgotten until revived by the discovery of America. It helped to form the Utopia of Sir Thomas More and the New Atlantis of Bacon, although probably neither of those great men were at all imposed upon by the fiction. It was most prolific in the seventeenth or in the early part of the eighteenth century, when the human mind, seeking for Utopias or inventing them, was glad to escape out of the dulness of the present into the romance of the past or some ideal of the future. The later forms of such narratives contained features taken from the Edda, as well as from the Old and New Testament; also from the tales of missionaries and the experiences of travellers and of colonists.

M. Martin has written an important dissertation on the perspectives held about the Island of Atlantis in both ancient and modern times. It's a fascinating chapter in the history of human thought. The story of Atlantis is a product of imagination, yet it has always captivated people. The ancients themselves viewed it in various ways. The more rational thinkers among them, like Strabo and Longinus, were as skeptical about its truth as modern readers might be about Gulliver or Robinson Crusoe. On the flip side, there's no level of absurdity or fantasy that the more gullible writers, both ancient and contemporary, haven't entertained regarding it. The Neo-Platonists, loyal to their philosophical leader, similar to some interpreters of the Christian Scriptures, tried to interpret it allegorically while believing it to be a historical fact. It would be like someone today trying to turn the poems of Homer into an allegory of Christianity while claiming they are a true historical account. In the Middle Ages, the legend seems to have been largely forgotten until it was revived by the discovery of America. It contributed to the creation of Sir Thomas More's Utopia and Bacon's New Atlantis, although it's likely that neither of those great thinkers were truly fooled by the fiction. It flourished most in the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries when people, searching for Utopias or creating them, were eager to escape the dullness of present reality for the excitement of the past or some vision of the future. The later versions of such stories included elements drawn from the Edda, as well as from the Old and New Testaments, along with tales from missionaries and the experiences of travelers and colonists.

The various opinions respecting the Island of Atlantis have no interest for us except in so far as they illustrate the extravagances of which men are capable. But this is a real interest and a serious lesson, if we remember that now as formerly the human mind is liable to be imposed upon by the illusions of the past, which are ever assuming some new form.

The different opinions about the Island of Atlantis don’t really interest us, except to show how far people can go with their ideas. However, this is an important takeaway and a serious reminder that, just like in the past, people today can easily get caught up in illusions that constantly take on new shapes.

When we have shaken off the rubbish of ages, there remain one or two questions of which the investigation has a permanent value:—

When we have gotten rid of the outdated ideas, there are one or two questions that will always be worth looking into:—

1. Did Plato derive the legend of Atlantis from an Egyptian source? It may be replied that there is no such legend in any writer previous to Plato; neither in Homer, nor in Pindar, nor in Herodotus is there any mention of an Island of Atlantis, nor any reference to it in Aristotle, nor any citation of an earlier writer by a later one in which it is to be found. Nor have any traces been discovered hitherto in Egyptian monuments of a connexion between Greece and Egypt older than the eighth or ninth century B.C. It is true that Proclus, writing in the fifth century after Christ, tells us of stones and columns in Egypt on which the history of the Island of Atlantis was engraved. The statement may be false—there are similar tales about columns set up ‘by the Canaanites whom Joshua drove out’ (Procop.); but even if true, it would only show that the legend, 800 years after the time of Plato, had been transferred to Egypt, and inscribed, not, like other forgeries, in books, but on stone. Probably in the Alexandrian age, when Egypt had ceased to have a history and began to appropriate the legends of other nations, many such monuments were to be found of events which had become famous in that or other countries. The oldest witness to the story is said to be Crantor, a Stoic philosopher who lived a generation later than Plato, and therefore may have borrowed it from him. The statement is found in Proclus; but we require better assurance than Proclus can give us before we accept this or any other statement which he makes.

1. Did Plato get the legend of Atlantis from an Egyptian source? It's worth noting that no one before Plato mentions such a legend; there's no mention of an Island of Atlantis in Homer, Pindar, or Herodotus, and there's no reference to it in Aristotle or any earlier writer cited by a later one. So far, no evidence has been found in Egyptian monuments that connects Greece and Egypt prior to the eighth or ninth century B.C. Proclus, writing in the fifth century A.D., does mention stones and columns in Egypt that supposedly detail the history of the Island of Atlantis. This claim might be untrue—there are similar stories about columns set up ‘by the Canaanites whom Joshua drove out’ (Procop.); but even if it is true, it would only indicate that the legend was transferred to Egypt 800 years after Plato's time and recorded, not in books like other forgeries, but on stone. It's likely that during the Alexandrian period, when Egypt had stopped having its own history and began to adopt the legends of other nations, many such monuments appeared relating to events that had become famous in Egypt or elsewhere. The earliest known mention of the story is attributed to Crantor, a Stoic philosopher who lived a generation after Plato and may have borrowed it from him. This claim is found in Proclus; however, we need stronger evidence than Proclus can provide before we accept this or any other claims he makes.

Secondly, passing from the external to the internal evidence, we may remark that the story is far more likely to have been invented by Plato than to have been brought by Solon from Egypt. That is another part of his legend which Plato also seeks to impose upon us. The verisimilitude which he has given to the tale is a further reason for suspecting it; for he could easily ‘invent Egyptian or any other tales’ (Phaedrus). Are not the words, ‘The truth of the story is a great advantage,’ if we read between the lines, an indication of the fiction? It is only a legend that Solon went to Egypt, and if he did he could not have conversed with Egyptian priests or have read records in their temples. The truth is that the introduction is a mosaic work of small touches which, partly by their minuteness, and also by their seeming probability, win the confidence of the reader. Who would desire better evidence than that of Critias, who had heard the narrative in youth when the memory is strongest at the age of ten from his grandfather Critias, an old man of ninety, who in turn had heard it from Solon himself? Is not the famous expression—‘You Hellenes are ever children and there is no knowledge among you hoary with age,’ really a compliment to the Athenians who are described in these words as ‘ever young’? And is the thought expressed in them to be attributed to the learning of the Egyptian priest, and not rather to the genius of Plato? Or when the Egyptian says—‘Hereafter at our leisure we will take up the written documents and examine in detail the exact truth about these things’—what is this but a literary trick by which Plato sets off his narrative? Could any war between Athens and the Island of Atlantis have really coincided with the struggle between the Greeks and Persians, as is sufficiently hinted though not expressly stated in the narrative of Plato? And whence came the tradition to Egypt? or in what does the story consist except in the war between the two rival powers and the submersion of both of them? And how was the tale transferred to the poem of Solon? ‘It is not improbable,’ says Mr. Grote, ‘that Solon did leave an unfinished Egyptian poem’ (Plato). But are probabilities for which there is not a tittle of evidence, and which are without any parallel, to be deemed worthy of attention by the critic? How came the poem of Solon to disappear in antiquity? or why did Plato, if the whole narrative was known to him, break off almost at the beginning of it?

Secondly, shifting from external to internal evidence, we can observe that the story is much more likely to have been created by Plato than to have been brought back by Solon from Egypt. That aspect of the legend is another thing Plato tries to impose on us. The credibility he gives to the tale raises further suspicion; he could easily "invent Egyptian or any other tales" (Phaedrus). Are not the words, "The truth of the story is a great advantage," if we read between the lines, a hint at its fictional nature? The notion that Solon went to Egypt is just a legend, and if he did, he couldn't have spoken with Egyptian priests or read records in their temples. The reality is that the introduction is a crafted piece made of small details that, partly due to their precision and also their seeming plausibility, gain the reader's trust. Who would want better evidence than that of Critias, who heard the story as a child, which is when memories are strongest, at age ten, from his grandfather Critias, an old man of ninety, who had heard it from Solon himself? Isn't the famous statement—"You Hellenes are ever children and there is no knowledge among you hoary with age," really a compliment to the Athenians, who are described in these words as "ever young"? Shouldn't the thought in these words be credited to the Egyptian priest’s knowledge, rather than the brilliance of Plato? And when the Egyptian says—"Later, we will leisurely review the written documents and thoroughly examine the exact truth about these matters"—isn't this just a literary device that Plato uses to enhance his narrative? Could any conflict between Athens and the Island of Atlantis have practically coincided with the struggle between the Greeks and Persians, as is suggested but not explicitly stated in Plato's account? And where did the tradition come from to Egypt? Or what does the story consist of other than the war between the two rival powers and their eventual downfall? And how was the tale passed into Solon’s poem? "It is not improbable," says Mr. Grote, "that Solon did leave an unfinished Egyptian poem" (Plato). But should probabilities that lack a shred of evidence and have no parallel really be considered worthy of the critic's attention? How did Solon’s poem vanish in ancient times? And why did Plato, if he knew the entire narrative, abruptly stop almost at the beginning?

While therefore admiring the diligence and erudition of M. Martin, we cannot for a moment suppose that the tale was told to Solon by an Egyptian priest, nor can we believe that Solon wrote a poem upon the theme which was thus suggested to him—a poem which disappeared in antiquity; or that the Island of Atlantis or the antediluvian Athens ever had any existence except in the imagination of Plato. Martin is of opinion that Plato would have been terrified if he could have foreseen the endless fancies to which his Island of Atlantis has given occasion. Rather he would have been infinitely amused if he could have known that his gift of invention would have deceived M. Martin himself into the belief that the tradition was brought from Egypt by Solon and made the subject of a poem by him. M. Martin may also be gently censured for citing without sufficient discrimination ancient authors having very different degrees of authority and value.

While we admire M. Martin's hard work and knowledge, we can't for a second believe that an Egyptian priest told the story to Solon, nor can we accept that Solon wrote a poem based on this idea—a poem that has since vanished in history; or that the Island of Atlantis or the ancient Athens ever existed beyond Plato's imagination. Martin thinks that Plato would have been shocked if he foresaw the endless theories that his Island of Atlantis would inspire. In reality, he would probably have found it highly amusing to know that his creative storytelling tricked M. Martin into thinking that the idea came from Egypt through Solon and became a poem written by him. M. Martin could also be lightly criticized for referencing ancient authors without enough discernment, as they have very different levels of authority and value.

2. It is an interesting and not unimportant question which is touched upon by Martin, whether the Atlantis of Plato in any degree held out a guiding light to the early navigators. He is inclined to think that there is no real connexion between them. But surely the discovery of the New World was preceded by a prophetic anticipation of it, which, like the hope of a Messiah, was entering into the hearts of men? And this hope was nursed by ancient tradition, which had found expression from time to time in the celebrated lines of Seneca and in many other places. This tradition was sustained by the great authority of Plato, and therefore the legend of the Island of Atlantis, though not closely connected with the voyages of the early navigators, may be truly said to have contributed indirectly to the great discovery.

2. It’s an interesting and significant question that Martin raises about whether Plato's Atlantis provided any guidance to early navigators. He seems to believe there’s no real connection between the two. But wasn’t the discovery of the New World preceded by a prophetic anticipation of it, similar to how the hope for a Messiah filled people's hearts? This hope was supported by ancient traditions that found expression in the famous lines of Seneca and in many other works. This tradition was bolstered by Plato's great authority, so although the legend of Atlantis wasn’t directly linked to the voyages of the early navigators, it can be said to have indirectly contributed to this monumental discovery.

The Timaeus of Plato, like the Protagoras and several portions of the Phaedrus and Republic, was translated by Cicero into Latin. About a fourth, comprehending with lacunae the first portion of the dialogue, is preserved in several MSS. These generally agree, and therefore may be supposed to be derived from a single original. The version is very faithful, and is a remarkable monument of Cicero’s skill in managing the difficult and intractable Greek. In his treatise De Natura Deorum, he also refers to the Timaeus, which, speaking in the person of Velleius the Epicurean, he severely criticises.

The Timaeus by Plato, similar to the Protagoras and parts of the Phaedrus and Republic, was translated into Latin by Cicero. About a quarter of it, including some missing sections from the beginning of the dialogue, is preserved in several manuscripts. These generally agree with each other, suggesting they come from a single original source. The translation is very accurate and highlights Cicero’s ability to handle the complex and challenging Greek language. In his work De Natura Deorum, he also references the Timaeus, which he criticizes sharply while speaking as Velleius the Epicurean.

The commentary of Proclus on the Timaeus is a wonderful monument of the silliness and prolixity of the Alexandrian Age. It extends to about thirty pages of the book, and is thirty times the length of the original. It is surprising that this voluminous work should have found a translator (Thomas Taylor, a kindred spirit, who was himself a Neo-Platonist, after the fashion, not of the fifth or sixteenth, but of the nineteenth century A.D.). The commentary is of little or no value, either in a philosophical or philological point of view. The writer is unable to explain particular passages in any precise manner, and he is equally incapable of grasping the whole. He does not take words in their simple meaning or sentences in their natural connexion. He is thinking, not of the context in Plato, but of the contemporary Pythagorean philosophers and their wordy strife. He finds nothing in the text which he does not bring to it. He is full of Porphyry, Iamblichus and Plotinus, of misapplied logic, of misunderstood grammar, and of the Orphic theology.

The commentary by Proclus on the Timaeus is a clear example of the absurdity and lengthiness of the Alexandrian Age. It spans about thirty pages of the book and is thirty times longer than the original text. It's surprising that such a lengthy work found a translator (Thomas Taylor, a kindred spirit, who was a Neo-Platonist himself, not in the style of the fifth or sixteenth century, but rather the nineteenth century A.D.). The commentary holds little to no value from both a philosophical and linguistic perspective. The author struggles to explain specific passages clearly and fails to grasp the overall meaning. He doesn't consider words in their straightforward meaning or sentences in their natural connection. He focuses not on the context in Plato but on the contemporary Pythagorean philosophers and their verbose debates. He finds nothing in the text that he doesn’t force onto it. He's filled with ideas from Porphyry, Iamblichus, and Plotinus, along with misapplied logic, misunderstood grammar, and Orphic theology.

Although such a work can contribute little or nothing to the understanding of Plato, it throws an interesting light on the Alexandrian times; it realizes how a philosophy made up of words only may create a deep and widespread enthusiasm, how the forms of logic and rhetoric may usurp the place of reason and truth, how all philosophies grow faded and discoloured, and are patched and made up again like worn-out garments, and retain only a second-hand existence. He who would study this degeneracy of philosophy and of the Greek mind in the original cannot do better than devote a few of his days and nights to the commentary of Proclus on the Timaeus.

Although this work may add little to the understanding of Plato, it offers an intriguing perspective on the Alexandrian era. It shows how a philosophy that consists solely of words can spark deep and widespread enthusiasm, how the structures of logic and rhetoric can take the place of reason and truth, and how all philosophies eventually fade and become discolored, getting patched up like worn-out clothes, only to exist in a second-hand form. Anyone interested in studying the decline of philosophy and the Greek mindset firsthand would do well to spend a few days and nights with Proclus's commentary on the Timaeus.

A very different account must be given of the short work entitled ‘Timaeus Locrus,’ which is a brief but clear analysis of the Timaeus of Plato, omitting the introduction or dialogue and making a few small additions. It does not allude to the original from which it is taken; it is quite free from mysticism and Neo-Platonism. In length it does not exceed a fifth part of the Timaeus. It is written in the Doric dialect, and contains several words which do not occur in classical Greek. No other indication of its date, except this uncertain one of language, appears in it. In several places the writer has simplified the language of Plato, in a few others he has embellished and exaggerated it. He generally preserves the thought of the original, but does not copy the words. On the whole this little tract faithfully reflects the meaning and spirit of the Timaeus.

A very different account must be given of the short work titled ‘Timaeus Locrus,’ which is a brief but clear analysis of Plato's Timaeus, omitting the introduction or dialogue and adding a few small points. It doesn’t reference the original source; it is completely free from mysticism and Neo-Platonism. It is no longer than a fifth of the Timaeus. It’s written in the Doric dialect and includes several words not found in classical Greek. There are no other clear indicators of its date, apart from the uncertain aspect of the language. In several instances, the author has simplified Plato's language, while in a few others, he has embellished and exaggerated it. He generally maintains the original thought but doesn’t replicate the words. Overall, this little piece accurately reflects the meaning and spirit of the Timaeus.

From the garden of the Timaeus, as from the other dialogues of Plato, we may still gather a few flowers and present them at parting to the reader. There is nothing in Plato grander and simpler than the conversation between Solon and the Egyptian priest, in which the youthfulness of Hellas is contrasted with the antiquity of Egypt. Here are to be found the famous words, ‘O Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are ever young, and there is not an old man among you’—which may be compared to the lively saying of Hegel, that ‘Greek history began with the youth Achilles and left off with the youth Alexander.’ The numerous arts of verisimilitude by which Plato insinuates into the mind of the reader the truth of his narrative have been already referred to. Here occur a sentence or two not wanting in Platonic irony (Greek—a word to the wise). ‘To know or tell the origin of the other divinities is beyond us, and we must accept the traditions of the men of old time who affirm themselves to be the offspring of the Gods—that is what they say—and they must surely have known their own ancestors. How can we doubt the word of the children of the Gods? Although they give no probable or certain proofs, still, as they declare that they are speaking of what took place in their own family, we must conform to custom and believe them.’ ‘Our creators well knew that women and other animals would some day be framed out of men, and they further knew that many animals would require the use of nails for many purposes; wherefore they fashioned in men at their first creation the rudiments of nails.’ Or once more, let us reflect on two serious passages in which the order of the world is supposed to find a place in the human soul and to infuse harmony into it. ‘The soul, when touching anything that has essence, whether dispersed in parts or undivided, is stirred through all her powers to declare the sameness or difference of that thing and some other; and to what individuals are related, and by what affected, and in what way and how and when, both in the world of generation and in the world of immutable being. And when reason, which works with equal truth, whether she be in the circle of the diverse or of the same,—in voiceless silence holding her onward course in the sphere of the self-moved,—when reason, I say, is hovering around the sensible world, and when the circle of the diverse also moving truly imparts the intimations of sense to the whole soul, then arise opinions and beliefs sure and certain. But when reason is concerned with the rational, and the circle of the same moving smoothly declares it, then intelligence and knowledge are necessarily perfected;’ where, proceeding in a similar path of contemplation, he supposes the inward and the outer world mutually to imply each other. ‘God invented and gave us sight to the end that we might behold the courses of intelligence in the heaven, and apply them to the courses of our own intelligence which are akin to them, the unperturbed to the perturbed; and that we, learning them and partaking of the natural truth of reason, might imitate the absolutely unerring courses of God and regulate our own vagaries.’ Or let us weigh carefully some other profound thoughts, such as the following. ‘He who neglects education walks lame to the end of his life, and returns imperfect and good for nothing to the world below.’ ‘The father and maker of all this universe is past finding out; and even if we found him, to tell of him to all men would be impossible.’ ‘Let me tell you then why the Creator made this world of generation. He was good, and the good can never have jealousy of anything. And being free from jealousy, he desired that all things should be as like himself as they could be. This is in the truest sense the origin of creation and of the world, as we shall do well in believing on the testimony of wise men: God desired that all things should be good and nothing bad, so far as this was attainable.’ This is the leading thought in the Timaeus, just as the IDEA of Good is the leading thought of the Republic, the one expression describing the personal, the other the impersonal Good or God, differing in form rather than in substance, and both equally implying to the mind of Plato a divine reality. The slight touch, perhaps ironical, contained in the words, ‘as we shall do well in believing on the testimony of wise men,’ is very characteristic of Plato.

From the garden of the Timaeus, just like in Plato's other dialogues, we can still pick a few flowers and share them with the reader at the end. There’s nothing in Plato more grand and straightforward than the conversation between Solon and the Egyptian priest, where the youthfulness of Greece is compared to the ancient history of Egypt. This is where the famous line, ‘O Solon, Solon, you Greeks are always young, and there isn’t an old man among you’ can be found, which echoes Hegel’s lively remark that ‘Greek history began with the youthful Achilles and ended with the youthful Alexander.’ The many techniques Plato uses to subtly convey the truth of his story have already been mentioned. Here we find a sentence or two rich in Platonic irony (Greek—a word to the wise). ‘Knowing or explaining the origins of the other gods is beyond our grasp, and we must accept the traditions of the ancients who claim to be descendants of the Gods—that’s what they say—and they must surely know their own ancestry. How can we doubt the words of the children of the Gods? Even if they provide no reasonable or certain proof, since they assert they’re discussing their own family history, we have to follow tradition and believe them.’ ‘Our creators understood well that women and other beings would someday be formed from men, and they also realized that many creatures would need nails for various purposes; thus, they included the basics of nails in the first creation of men.’ Or let’s contemplate two serious passages where the structure of the universe is believed to find a place within the human soul and bring it harmony. ‘The soul, when it interacts with anything that has essence, whether scattered in parts or whole, stirs in all its capabilities to identify the similarity or difference of that thing in relation to another; and concerning which individuals are connected, and how they are affected, and in what way, and when, in both the world of creation and the realm of unchanging existence. When reason, which finds truth equally whether it’s engaging with diversity or sameness—silently continuing its journey in the realm of the self-moved—when reason is brooding over the sensory world, and when the diverse circle truly imparts sensory indications to the entire soul, then definite opinions and beliefs come to life. But when reason focuses on the rational, and the smooth circle of the same clearly articulates this, then intelligence and knowledge are necessarily refined;’ where, following a similar contemplative route, he suggests that the inner and outer worlds mutually reflect one another. ‘God created and gave us sight so that we could observe the pathways of intelligence in the heavens and apply them to our own similar paths of thought, the steady with the unsteady; and that we, by learning them and sharing in the natural truth of reason, might imitate the entirely reliable paths of God and direct our own whims.’ Or let us carefully consider some other profound insights, like the following. ‘He who neglects education limps through life and ends up incomplete and useless to the world below.’ ‘The father and creator of this universe is impossible to fully understand; and even if we found him, conveying his essence to everyone would be out of reach.’ ‘Let me explain why the Creator made this world of generation. He was good, and goodness can never be jealous of anything. And being free of jealousy, he wished for everything to be as much like himself as possible. This is, in the truest sense, the origin of creation and the world, as we should believe on the wise men's word: God wanted all things to be good and nothing evil, as far as that was possible.’ This core idea in the Timaeus parallels the IDEA of Good as the central theme of the Republic; one representing the personal, the other the impersonal Good or God, differing in form but not in substance, and both, to Plato’s mind, implying a divine reality. The slight touch, possibly ironic, in the words, ‘as we should believe on the wise men's word,’ is very characteristic of Plato.






TIMAEUS.

PERSONS OF THE DIALOGUE: Socrates, Critias, Timaeus, Hermocrates.

PERSONS OF THE DIALOGUE: Socrates, Critias, Timaeus, Hermocrates.

SOCRATES: One, two, three; but where, my dear Timaeus, is the fourth of those who were yesterday my guests and are to be my entertainers to-day?

SOCRATES: One, two, three; but where, my dear Timaeus, is the fourth of those who were my guests yesterday and are going to entertain me today?

TIMAEUS: He has been taken ill, Socrates; for he would not willingly have been absent from this gathering.

TIMAEUS: He’s feeling unwell, Socrates; he wouldn’t have missed this gathering on purpose.

SOCRATES: Then, if he is not coming, you and the two others must supply his place.

SOCRATES: Then, if he's not coming, you and the other two will need to take his place.

TIMAEUS: Certainly, and we will do all that we can; having been handsomely entertained by you yesterday, those of us who remain should be only too glad to return your hospitality.

TIMAEUS: Of course, and we will do everything we can; after being so nicely hosted by you yesterday, those of us who are still here would be more than happy to return the favor.

SOCRATES: Do you remember what were the points of which I required you to speak?

SOCRATES: Do you remember the points I asked you to discuss?

TIMAEUS: We remember some of them, and you will be here to remind us of anything which we have forgotten: or rather, if we are not troubling you, will you briefly recapitulate the whole, and then the particulars will be more firmly fixed in our memories?

TIMAEUS: We remember some of those things, and you’ll be here to jog our memories about anything we’ve forgotten. Or, if it’s not too much trouble, could you summarize everything briefly? That way, the details will stick in our minds better.

SOCRATES: To be sure I will: the chief theme of my yesterday’s discourse was the State—how constituted and of what citizens composed it would seem likely to be most perfect.

SOCRATES: Sure, I will: the main topic of my discussion yesterday was the State—how it’s organized and what kind of citizens it should ideally have to be the most perfect.

TIMAEUS: Yes, Socrates; and what you said of it was very much to our mind.

TIMAEUS: Yes, Socrates; and what you said about it really resonated with us.

SOCRATES: Did we not begin by separating the husbandmen and the artisans from the class of defenders of the State?

SOCRATES: Didn't we start by distinguishing the farmers and the craftsmen from the group of defenders of the State?

TIMAEUS: Yes.

TIMAEUS: Yeah.

SOCRATES: And when we had given to each one that single employment and particular art which was suited to his nature, we spoke of those who were intended to be our warriors, and said that they were to be guardians of the city against attacks from within as well as from without, and to have no other employment; they were to be merciful in judging their subjects, of whom they were by nature friends, but fierce to their enemies, when they came across them in battle.

SOCRATES: Once we assigned each person their specific job and the particular skill that matched their nature, we talked about those who were meant to be our warriors. We said they would be guardians of the city, protecting it from threats both internal and external, and they would have no other duties. They were to show mercy when judging their own people, who they were naturally friendly towards, but be fierce against enemies when they faced them in battle.

TIMAEUS: Exactly.

TIMAEUS: Yes.

SOCRATES: We said, if I am not mistaken, that the guardians should be gifted with a temperament in a high degree both passionate and philosophical; and that then they would be as they ought to be, gentle to their friends and fierce with their enemies.

SOCRATES: We mentioned, if I'm not mistaken, that the guardians should have a temperament that is both highly passionate and philosophical; and that way they would be how they should be, kind to their friends and fierce with their enemies.

TIMAEUS: Certainly.

Sure.

SOCRATES: And what did we say of their education? Were they not to be trained in gymnastic, and music, and all other sorts of knowledge which were proper for them?

SOCRATES: And what did we say about their education? Were they not supposed to be trained in sports, music, and all other kinds of knowledge suitable for them?

TIMAEUS: Very true.

Absolutely.

SOCRATES: And being thus trained they were not to consider gold or silver or anything else to be their own private property; they were to be like hired troops, receiving pay for keeping guard from those who were protected by them—the pay was to be no more than would suffice for men of simple life; and they were to spend in common, and to live together in the continual practice of virtue, which was to be their sole pursuit.

SOCRATES: And with this training, they were not supposed to think of gold or silver or anything else as their personal property; they were to act like hired soldiers, being paid by those they protected—the pay was only enough for a simple lifestyle; they were to share their resources and live together, constantly practicing virtue, which was to be their only focus.

TIMAEUS: That was also said.

TIMAEUS: That was mentioned too.

SOCRATES: Neither did we forget the women; of whom we declared, that their natures should be assimilated and brought into harmony with those of the men, and that common pursuits should be assigned to them both in time of war and in their ordinary life.

SOCRATES: We also didn't forget about the women; we stated that their nature should be aligned and harmonized with that of the men, and that they should engage in the same activities during both wartime and everyday life.

TIMAEUS: That, again, was as you say.

TIMAEUS: Yeah, that was just like you said.

SOCRATES: And what about the procreation of children? Or rather was not the proposal too singular to be forgotten? for all wives and children were to be in common, to the intent that no one should ever know his own child, but they were to imagine that they were all one family; those who were within a suitable limit of age were to be brothers and sisters, those who were of an elder generation parents and grandparents, and those of a younger, children and grandchildren.

SOCRATES: What about having kids? Wasn't the idea too unique to just be overlooked? All wives and kids were supposed to be shared so that no one would ever know their own child. Instead, they would think of everyone as part of one big family; those within a certain age range would be considered brothers and sisters, while the older generation would be seen as parents and grandparents, and the younger ones as children and grandchildren.

TIMAEUS: Yes, and the proposal is easy to remember, as you say.

TIMAEUS: Yes, and it's easy to remember the suggestion, just like you mentioned.

SOCRATES: And do you also remember how, with a view of securing as far as we could the best breed, we said that the chief magistrates, male and female, should contrive secretly, by the use of certain lots, so to arrange the nuptial meeting, that the bad of either sex and the good of either sex might pair with their like; and there was to be no quarrelling on this account, for they would imagine that the union was a mere accident, and was to be attributed to the lot?

SOCRATES: Do you also remember how, in order to ensure we’d have the best offspring, we suggested that the top officials, both men and women, should secretly organize the pairing using certain lots? This way, the bad individuals of each gender would pair up with their counterparts, and the good ones would do the same. There was to be no fighting about it, since they would believe that the unions were just a coincidence and due to the lot.

TIMAEUS: I remember.

TIMAEUS: I remember that.

SOCRATES: And you remember how we said that the children of the good parents were to be educated, and the children of the bad secretly dispersed among the inferior citizens; and while they were all growing up the rulers were to be on the look-out, and to bring up from below in their turn those who were worthy, and those among themselves who were unworthy were to take the places of those who came up?

SOCRATES: And do you remember how we talked about how the children of good parents should be educated, while the children of bad parents would be secretly sent among the lesser citizens? During their upbringing, the rulers were supposed to keep an eye out and elevate those who were worthy from below, while those among themselves who weren't worthy would replace those who were brought up?

TIMAEUS: True.

TIMAEUS: For sure.

SOCRATES: Then have I now given you all the heads of our yesterday’s discussion? Or is there anything more, my dear Timaeus, which has been omitted?

SOCRATES: So, have I covered everything from our discussion yesterday? Or is there anything else, my dear Timaeus, that I've left out?

TIMAEUS: Nothing, Socrates; it was just as you have said.

TIMAEUS: Nothing, Socrates; you were exactly right.

SOCRATES: I should like, before proceeding further, to tell you how I feel about the State which we have described. I might compare myself to a person who, on beholding beautiful animals either created by the painter’s art, or, better still, alive but at rest, is seized with a desire of seeing them in motion or engaged in some struggle or conflict to which their forms appear suited; this is my feeling about the State which we have been describing. There are conflicts which all cities undergo, and I should like to hear some one tell of our own city carrying on a struggle against her neighbours, and how she went out to war in a becoming manner, and when at war showed by the greatness of her actions and the magnanimity of her words in dealing with other cities a result worthy of her training and education. Now I, Critias and Hermocrates, am conscious that I myself should never be able to celebrate the city and her citizens in a befitting manner, and I am not surprised at my own incapacity; to me the wonder is rather that the poets present as well as past are no better—not that I mean to depreciate them; but every one can see that they are a tribe of imitators, and will imitate best and most easily the life in which they have been brought up; while that which is beyond the range of a man’s education he finds hard to carry out in action, and still harder adequately to represent in language. I am aware that the Sophists have plenty of brave words and fair conceits, but I am afraid that being only wanderers from one city to another, and having never had habitations of their own, they may fail in their conception of philosophers and statesmen, and may not know what they do and say in time of war, when they are fighting or holding parley with their enemies. And thus people of your class are the only ones remaining who are fitted by nature and education to take part at once both in politics and philosophy. Here is Timaeus, of Locris in Italy, a city which has admirable laws, and who is himself in wealth and rank the equal of any of his fellow-citizens; he has held the most important and honourable offices in his own state, and, as I believe, has scaled the heights of all philosophy; and here is Critias, whom every Athenian knows to be no novice in the matters of which we are speaking; and as to Hermocrates, I am assured by many witnesses that his genius and education qualify him to take part in any speculation of the kind. And therefore yesterday when I saw that you wanted me to describe the formation of the State, I readily assented, being very well aware, that, if you only would, none were better qualified to carry the discussion further, and that when you had engaged our city in a suitable war, you of all men living could best exhibit her playing a fitting part. When I had completed my task, I in return imposed this other task upon you. You conferred together and agreed to entertain me to-day, as I had entertained you, with a feast of discourse. Here am I in festive array, and no man can be more ready for the promised banquet.

SOCRATES: Before we continue, I want to share my thoughts about the State we’ve been discussing. It's like looking at beautiful animals—either ones created by an artist or, even better, living ones that are calm—makes me eager to see them moving or engaged in some struggle that suits their nature. This is how I feel about the State we've described. Every city faces conflicts, and I’d love to hear about our own city in battle against its neighbors, how it went to war with dignity, and how it demonstrated the greatness of its actions and the nobility of its words toward other cities, reflecting its training and education. Now, Critias and Hermocrates, I know I can never adequately praise the city and its citizens, and I’m not surprised by my limitations. What amazes me is that poets—both past and present—aren't any better. I don’t mean to belittle them; it’s just that they are a group of imitators who naturally replicate the life they’ve known best. Anything beyond their education is challenging for them to act out and even harder to express well in words. I understand that the Sophists have plenty of bold talk and clever ideas, but I worry that since they wander from city to city without a real home, they may struggle to understand what philosophers and statesmen do and say during war, whether they’re fighting or negotiating with their enemies. Thus, it’s people like you who are naturally and educationally fitted to engage in both politics and philosophy. Timaeus from Locris in Italy is here; his city has excellent laws, and he is as wealthy and respected as anyone else there. He has held important and honorable positions in his own state and, I believe, has reached the heights of philosophy. And there’s Critias, who every Athenian knows is no stranger to these discussions; as for Hermocrates, many attest to his talent and education qualifying him for any discussion of this nature. So yesterday, when I saw you wanted me to describe the formation of the State, I gladly accepted, fully aware that, if you chose to, no one is better suited to continue this conversation than you. When you had engaged our city in a fitting war, you would be the best at showcasing her in the right light. After completing my part, I assigned you another task: you conferred and agreed to entertain me today, just as I entertained you, with a discourse feast. Here I am, all dressed up, and no one could be more prepared for the promised banquet.

HERMOCRATES: And we too, Socrates, as Timaeus says, will not be wanting in enthusiasm; and there is no excuse for not complying with your request. As soon as we arrived yesterday at the guest-chamber of Critias, with whom we are staying, or rather on our way thither, we talked the matter over, and he told us an ancient tradition, which I wish, Critias, that you would repeat to Socrates, so that he may help us to judge whether it will satisfy his requirements or not.

HERMOCRATES: And we too, Socrates, like Timaeus said, are ready to be enthusiastic; there's no reason not to fulfill your request. As soon as we got to Critias's guest chamber yesterday, where we're staying, or actually on our way there, we discussed the topic, and he shared an old tradition with us. I wish, Critias, that you would tell Socrates again, so he can help us decide if it meets his standards or not.

CRITIAS: I will, if Timaeus, who is our other partner, approves.

CRITIAS: I will do it if Timaeus, who is our other partner, agrees.

TIMAEUS: I quite approve.

TIMAEUS: I totally agree.

CRITIAS: Then listen, Socrates, to a tale which, though strange, is certainly true, having been attested by Solon, who was the wisest of the seven sages. He was a relative and a dear friend of my great-grandfather, Dropides, as he himself says in many passages of his poems; and he told the story to Critias, my grandfather, who remembered and repeated it to us. There were of old, he said, great and marvellous actions of the Athenian city, which have passed into oblivion through lapse of time and the destruction of mankind, and one in particular, greater than all the rest. This we will now rehearse. It will be a fitting monument of our gratitude to you, and a hymn of praise true and worthy of the goddess, on this her day of festival.

CRITIAS: So listen, Socrates, to a story that, while it may seem strange, is definitely true, as confirmed by Solon, who was the wisest of the seven sages. He was a relative and a close friend of my great-grandfather, Dropides, as he mentions in several of his poems. He shared this story with Critias, my grandfather, who remembered it and passed it down to us. Long ago, he said, there were remarkable events in the city of Athens that have faded from memory due to the passage of time and the destruction of humanity, and one event in particular, greater than all the others. We will now tell this story. It will serve as a fitting tribute to you, and a true hymn of praise worthy of the goddess, on this day of her festival.

SOCRATES: Very good. And what is this ancient famous action of the Athenians, which Critias declared, on the authority of Solon, to be not a mere legend, but an actual fact?

SOCRATES: Great. So what is this well-known historical event of the Athenians that Critias claimed, based on Solon's authority, is not just a myth, but actually happened?

CRITIAS: I will tell an old-world story which I heard from an aged man; for Critias, at the time of telling it, was, as he said, nearly ninety years of age, and I was about ten. Now the day was that day of the Apaturia which is called the Registration of Youth, at which, according to custom, our parents gave prizes for recitations, and the poems of several poets were recited by us boys, and many of us sang the poems of Solon, which at that time had not gone out of fashion. One of our tribe, either because he thought so or to please Critias, said that in his judgment Solon was not only the wisest of men, but also the noblest of poets. The old man, as I very well remember, brightened up at hearing this and said, smiling: Yes, Amynander, if Solon had only, like other poets, made poetry the business of his life, and had completed the tale which he brought with him from Egypt, and had not been compelled, by reason of the factions and troubles which he found stirring in his own country when he came home, to attend to other matters, in my opinion he would have been as famous as Homer or Hesiod, or any poet.

CRITIAS: I’m going to share an old story I heard from an elderly man; Critias, when he told it, claimed he was almost ninety years old, and I was about ten. The day was the Apaturia, known as the Registration of Youth, when, according to tradition, our parents awarded prizes for recitals. We boys recited poems from various poets, and many of us sang Solon’s works, which were still popular at the time. One of our group, either out of his own belief or just to please Critias, declared that he thought Solon was not only the wisest of men but also the greatest of poets. The old man visibly brightened at this and said with a smile: Yes, Amynander, if Solon had only made poetry his life's work like other poets, and had completed the story he brought back from Egypt, and hadn't been forced to deal with the factions and chaos he encountered upon his return home, I believe he would have been as renowned as Homer, Hesiod, or any other poet.

And what was the tale about, Critias? said Amynander.

And what was the story about, Critias? asked Amynander.

About the greatest action which the Athenians ever did, and which ought to have been the most famous, but, through the lapse of time and the destruction of the actors, it has not come down to us.

About the greatest action the Athenians ever took, which should have been the most famous, but over time and due to the loss of those involved, it hasn't been passed down to us.

Tell us, said the other, the whole story, and how and from whom Solon heard this veritable tradition.

"Please tell us," said the other, "the whole story, and how and from whom Solon heard this true tradition."

He replied:—In the Egyptian Delta, at the head of which the river Nile divides, there is a certain district which is called the district of Sais, and the great city of the district is also called Sais, and is the city from which King Amasis came. The citizens have a deity for their foundress; she is called in the Egyptian tongue Neith, and is asserted by them to be the same whom the Hellenes call Athene; they are great lovers of the Athenians, and say that they are in some way related to them. To this city came Solon, and was received there with great honour; he asked the priests who were most skilful in such matters, about antiquity, and made the discovery that neither he nor any other Hellene knew anything worth mentioning about the times of old. On one occasion, wishing to draw them on to speak of antiquity, he began to tell about the most ancient things in our part of the world—about Phoroneus, who is called ‘the first man,’ and about Niobe; and after the Deluge, of the survival of Deucalion and Pyrrha; and he traced the genealogy of their descendants, and reckoning up the dates, tried to compute how many years ago the events of which he was speaking happened. Thereupon one of the priests, who was of a very great age, said: O Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are never anything but children, and there is not an old man among you. Solon in return asked him what he meant. I mean to say, he replied, that in mind you are all young; there is no old opinion handed down among you by ancient tradition, nor any science which is hoary with age. And I will tell you why. There have been, and will be again, many destructions of mankind arising out of many causes; the greatest have been brought about by the agencies of fire and water, and other lesser ones by innumerable other causes. There is a story, which even you have preserved, that once upon a time Paethon, the son of Helios, having yoked the steeds in his father’s chariot, because he was not able to drive them in the path of his father, burnt up all that was upon the earth, and was himself destroyed by a thunderbolt. Now this has the form of a myth, but really signifies a declination of the bodies moving in the heavens around the earth, and a great conflagration of things upon the earth, which recurs after long intervals; at such times those who live upon the mountains and in dry and lofty places are more liable to destruction than those who dwell by rivers or on the seashore. And from this calamity the Nile, who is our never-failing saviour, delivers and preserves us. When, on the other hand, the gods purge the earth with a deluge of water, the survivors in your country are herdsmen and shepherds who dwell on the mountains, but those who, like you, live in cities are carried by the rivers into the sea. Whereas in this land, neither then nor at any other time, does the water come down from above on the fields, having always a tendency to come up from below; for which reason the traditions preserved here are the most ancient. The fact is, that wherever the extremity of winter frost or of summer sun does not prevent, mankind exist, sometimes in greater, sometimes in lesser numbers. And whatever happened either in your country or in ours, or in any other region of which we are informed—if there were any actions noble or great or in any other way remarkable, they have all been written down by us of old, and are preserved in our temples. Whereas just when you and other nations are beginning to be provided with letters and the other requisites of civilized life, after the usual interval, the stream from heaven, like a pestilence, comes pouring down, and leaves only those of you who are destitute of letters and education; and so you have to begin all over again like children, and know nothing of what happened in ancient times, either among us or among yourselves. As for those genealogies of yours which you just now recounted to us, Solon, they are no better than the tales of children. In the first place you remember a single deluge only, but there were many previous ones; in the next place, you do not know that there formerly dwelt in your land the fairest and noblest race of men which ever lived, and that you and your whole city are descended from a small seed or remnant of them which survived. And this was unknown to you, because, for many generations, the survivors of that destruction died, leaving no written word. For there was a time, Solon, before the great deluge of all, when the city which now is Athens was first in war and in every way the best governed of all cities, is said to have performed the noblest deeds and to have had the fairest constitution of any of which tradition tells, under the face of heaven. Solon marvelled at his words, and earnestly requested the priests to inform him exactly and in order about these former citizens. You are welcome to hear about them, Solon, said the priest, both for your own sake and for that of your city, and above all, for the sake of the goddess who is the common patron and parent and educator of both our cities. She founded your city a thousand years before ours (Observe that Plato gives the same date (9000 years ago) for the foundation of Athens and for the repulse of the invasion from Atlantis (Crit.).), receiving from the Earth and Hephaestus the seed of your race, and afterwards she founded ours, of which the constitution is recorded in our sacred registers to be 8000 years old. As touching your citizens of 9000 years ago, I will briefly inform you of their laws and of their most famous action; the exact particulars of the whole we will hereafter go through at our leisure in the sacred registers themselves. If you compare these very laws with ours you will find that many of ours are the counterpart of yours as they were in the olden time. In the first place, there is the caste of priests, which is separated from all the others; next, there are the artificers, who ply their several crafts by themselves and do not intermix; and also there is the class of shepherds and of hunters, as well as that of husbandmen; and you will observe, too, that the warriors in Egypt are distinct from all the other classes, and are commanded by the law to devote themselves solely to military pursuits; moreover, the weapons which they carry are shields and spears, a style of equipment which the goddess taught of Asiatics first to us, as in your part of the world first to you. Then as to wisdom, do you observe how our law from the very first made a study of the whole order of things, extending even to prophecy and medicine which gives health, out of these divine elements deriving what was needful for human life, and adding every sort of knowledge which was akin to them. All this order and arrangement the goddess first imparted to you when establishing your city; and she chose the spot of earth in which you were born, because she saw that the happy temperament of the seasons in that land would produce the wisest of men. Wherefore the goddess, who was a lover both of war and of wisdom, selected and first of all settled that spot which was the most likely to produce men likest herself. And there you dwelt, having such laws as these and still better ones, and excelled all mankind in all virtue, as became the children and disciples of the gods.

He replied: "In the Egyptian Delta, where the Nile River splits, there's a region called Sais, which is also the name of its main city, the birthplace of King Amasis. The locals worship a goddess they claim founded their city; they call her Neith in their language, and they say she’s the same as the Greek goddess Athena. They have a strong admiration for the Athenians and believe they share some kinship. Solon visited this city and was received with great respect. He asked the priests skilled in ancient matters about history, only to find that neither he nor any other Greek knew anything significant about the past. On one occasion, wanting to encourage them to discuss history, he talked about the oldest stories in our world—Phoroneus, known as ‘the first man,’ and Niobe; and after the Flood, about Deucalion and Pyrrha’s survival; he traced their descendants’ lineage and tried to calculate how many years ago those events happened. Then one of the priests, an elderly man, said, 'Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are always just children, and there's not an old man among you.' Solon asked him what he meant. The priest replied, 'I mean that in spirit you are all young; there are no ancient opinions passed down through tradition among you, nor any knowledge that has stood the test of time. I'll tell you why. Throughout history, there have been many destructions of humanity caused by various factors; the worst have been due to fire and water, while many others resulted from countless other causes. There's a story, which you have even preserved, about how Phaethon, the son of Helios, once attempted to drive his father’s chariot. Unable to stay on the right path, he scorched everything on Earth and was ultimately struck down by a thunderbolt. This story has mythological elements, but it actually represents a shift in the celestial bodies around the Earth and a great fire on the planet, which happens after long intervals. During such times, those living in high, dry places are more prone to destruction than those by rivers or the sea. Our Nile, our unfailing savior, protects and saves us from this disaster. In contrast, when the gods cleanse the Earth with floods, the survivors in your land are herders and shepherds living in the mountains, while those of you living in cities are swept away by the rivers into the sea. In our land, however, water never descends from the sky to the fields; it tends to rise from below, which is why the traditions preserved here are the oldest. The truth is, wherever winter frost or summer heat doesn’t hinder, people live, sometimes in larger, sometimes in smaller numbers. Whatever occurred in your land or ours, or in any other region we know about—if there were any noble or remarkable actions, they have all been recorded by us long ago and are kept in our temples. Just when you and other nations are starting to gain access to letters and the other essentials of civilized life, the usual disasters strike, and only those of you who lack education and writing survive; thus, you have to start over like children, unaware of what happened in ancient times, whether among us or within yourselves. The genealogies you just told us, Solon, are no better than children’s stories. First, you only remember a single flood, but there have been many before that; also, you don’t know that there was once in your land the most beautiful and noble race of people that ever existed, and that you and your entire city are descended from a small remnant of them that survived. You didn’t know this because, for many generations, the survivors of that destruction died without leaving a written record. There was a time, Solon, before the great flood of all, when the city we now call Athens was the greatest in war and governance, reputed for performing the noblest deeds and having the best constitution of any city in history. Solon was amazed by this, and he earnestly asked the priests to tell him about those ancient citizens in detail. 'You are welcome to learn about them, Solon,' the priest said, 'both for your own benefit and for your city's, and especially for the goddess who is the common patron and parent of both our cities. She established your city a thousand years before ours, receiving from Earth and Hephaestus the essence of your race, and later, she founded ours, recorded in our sacred records to be 8000 years old. Regarding your citizens from 9000 years ago, I will briefly inform you about their laws and most famous actions; we will delve into the details from our sacred records at another time. If you compare these ancient laws with ours, you’ll find that many match those from long ago. First, there’s the caste of priests, which is separate from all others; then, there are the artisans who work in their trades without mingling; there's also the class of shepherds and hunters, as well as farmers, and you’ll notice that the warriors in Egypt are distinct from all other classes and mandated by law to dedicate themselves to military pursuits. Furthermore, the weapons they carry are shields and spears, a style of equipment the goddess taught Asiatics first and then brought to you in your part of the world. As for wisdom, notice how our laws from the beginning studied the natural order of everything, incorporating even prophecy and medicine, which promotes health, deriving from these divine elements what is necessary for human life and adding all kinds of knowledge related to them. This order and structure were first imparted to you by the goddess when she established your city; she chose the location where you were born, recognizing that the temperate climate of that land would give rise to the wisest people. That’s why the goddess, who loved both war and wisdom, selected and settled on the spot best suited to produce men who were most like herself. There you thrived, with such laws and even better ones, excelling all humanity in virtue, as befits the children and students of the gods."

Many great and wonderful deeds are recorded of your state in our histories. But one of them exceeds all the rest in greatness and valour. For these histories tell of a mighty power which unprovoked made an expedition against the whole of Europe and Asia, and to which your city put an end. This power came forth out of the Atlantic Ocean, for in those days the Atlantic was navigable; and there was an island situated in front of the straits which are by you called the Pillars of Heracles; the island was larger than Libya and Asia put together, and was the way to other islands, and from these you might pass to the whole of the opposite continent which surrounded the true ocean; for this sea which is within the Straits of Heracles is only a harbour, having a narrow entrance, but that other is a real sea, and the surrounding land may be most truly called a boundless continent. Now in this island of Atlantis there was a great and wonderful empire which had rule over the whole island and several others, and over parts of the continent, and, furthermore, the men of Atlantis had subjected the parts of Libya within the columns of Heracles as far as Egypt, and of Europe as far as Tyrrhenia. This vast power, gathered into one, endeavoured to subdue at a blow our country and yours and the whole of the region within the straits; and then, Solon, your country shone forth, in the excellence of her virtue and strength, among all mankind. She was pre-eminent in courage and military skill, and was the leader of the Hellenes. And when the rest fell off from her, being compelled to stand alone, after having undergone the very extremity of danger, she defeated and triumphed over the invaders, and preserved from slavery those who were not yet subjugated, and generously liberated all the rest of us who dwell within the pillars. But afterwards there occurred violent earthquakes and floods; and in a single day and night of misfortune all your warlike men in a body sank into the earth, and the island of Atlantis in like manner disappeared in the depths of the sea. For which reason the sea in those parts is impassable and impenetrable, because there is a shoal of mud in the way; and this was caused by the subsidence of the island.

Many amazing and remarkable events are recorded about your state in our histories. But one of them stands out above all the rest in greatness and bravery. These histories tell of a great power that, without provocation, launched an attack on all of Europe and Asia, and it was your city that put an end to it. This power emerged from the Atlantic Ocean, which was navigable in those days; there was an island located in front of the straits you refer to as the Pillars of Heracles. This island was larger than Libya and Asia combined, and it served as a gateway to other islands, which led you to the entire opposite continent that surrounded the true ocean. The sea within the Straits of Heracles is merely a harbor with a narrow entrance, but the other is a genuine sea, and the land surrounding it can be rightly called a boundless continent. Now, on this island of Atlantis, there existed a great and powerful empire that ruled over the entire island and several others, as well as parts of the continent. Furthermore, the people of Atlantis had conquered the regions of Libya within the columns of Heracles all the way to Egypt, and in Europe as far as Tyrrhenia. This immense power, united as one, attempted to conquer our country and yours, along with the whole region within the straits; and then, Solon, your country shone brightly in its virtue and strength among all humanity. It stood out for its bravery and military prowess, and was the leader of the Hellenes. When others abandoned her, forced to stand alone after facing extreme danger, she defeated and triumphed over the invaders, saving those who had not yet been conquered, and generously freeing all the rest of us who lived within the pillars. But afterward, there were devastating earthquakes and floods; in just one day and night of disaster, all your warriors sank into the earth, and the island of Atlantis similarly vanished beneath the sea. That’s why the sea in those areas is impassable and unreachable, because of a mud shoal blocking the way; this was caused by the sinking of the island.

I have told you briefly, Socrates, what the aged Critias heard from Solon and related to us. And when you were speaking yesterday about your city and citizens, the tale which I have just been repeating to you came into my mind, and I remarked with astonishment how, by some mysterious coincidence, you agreed in almost every particular with the narrative of Solon; but I did not like to speak at the moment. For a long time had elapsed, and I had forgotten too much; I thought that I must first of all run over the narrative in my own mind, and then I would speak. And so I readily assented to your request yesterday, considering that in all such cases the chief difficulty is to find a tale suitable to our purpose, and that with such a tale we should be fairly well provided.

I’ve briefly told you, Socrates, what the elderly Critias heard from Solon and shared with us. When you were talking yesterday about your city and its citizens, I was reminded of the story I just repeated to you, and I was surprised at how closely your account matched Solon's narrative. I hesitated to speak up at the time because so much time had passed, and I had forgotten important details. I thought I should first review the story in my mind before saying anything. So, I agreed to your request yesterday, thinking that in situations like this, the biggest challenge is finding a story that fits our needs, and that with a suitable tale, we would be in good shape.

And therefore, as Hermocrates has told you, on my way home yesterday I at once communicated the tale to my companions as I remembered it; and after I left them, during the night by thinking I recovered nearly the whole of it. Truly, as is often said, the lessons of our childhood make a wonderful impression on our memories; for I am not sure that I could remember all the discourse of yesterday, but I should be much surprised if I forgot any of these things which I have heard very long ago. I listened at the time with childlike interest to the old man’s narrative; he was very ready to teach me, and I asked him again and again to repeat his words, so that like an indelible picture they were branded into my mind. As soon as the day broke, I rehearsed them as he spoke them to my companions, that they, as well as myself, might have something to say. And now, Socrates, to make an end of my preface, I am ready to tell you the whole tale. I will give you not only the general heads, but the particulars, as they were told to me. The city and citizens, which you yesterday described to us in fiction, we will now transfer to the world of reality. It shall be the ancient city of Athens, and we will suppose that the citizens whom you imagined, were our veritable ancestors, of whom the priest spoke; they will perfectly harmonize, and there will be no inconsistency in saying that the citizens of your republic are these ancient Athenians. Let us divide the subject among us, and all endeavour according to our ability gracefully to execute the task which you have imposed upon us. Consider then, Socrates, if this narrative is suited to the purpose, or whether we should seek for some other instead.

So, as Hermocrates mentioned, on my way home yesterday, I immediately shared the story with my friends as I remembered it. After I left them, I spent the night thinking and managed to recall almost all of it. It’s true what they say: the lessons from our childhood leave a lasting mark on our memories. I might not remember everything from yesterday’s conversation, but I’d be really surprised if I forgot any of these things I learned a long time ago. I listened with childlike curiosity to the old man's story; he was eager to teach me, and I kept asking him to repeat his words, so they stuck in my mind like a permanent imprint. As soon as morning came, I recapped what he told me to my friends, so we all had something to discuss. Now, Socrates, to wrap up my introduction, I'm ready to share the entire story. I'll provide not just the main points, but also the details as they were shared with me. The city and the citizens you described in your story yesterday, we will now connect to reality. Let’s consider ancient Athens, and let’s assume that the citizens you envisioned were truly our ancestors, as the priest mentioned; they will fit perfectly, and it won't be inconsistent to say that the citizens of your republic are these ancient Athenians. Let’s break down the topic among us, and each do our best to smoothly carry out the task you've set for us. So, Socrates, think about whether this narrative works for our purpose, or if we should find another one instead.

SOCRATES: And what other, Critias, can we find that will be better than this, which is natural and suitable to the festival of the goddess, and has the very great advantage of being a fact and not a fiction? How or where shall we find another if we abandon this? We cannot, and therefore you must tell the tale, and good luck to you; and I in return for my yesterday’s discourse will now rest and be a listener.

SOCRATES: So, Critias, what else can we find that’s better than this? It fits the goddess’s festival perfectly and has the huge benefit of being real instead of made up. How or where will we find another if we give this one up? We can’t, so you have to tell the story, and I wish you luck. In exchange for my talk yesterday, I’ll just relax and listen now.

CRITIAS: Let me proceed to explain to you, Socrates, the order in which we have arranged our entertainment. Our intention is, that Timaeus, who is the most of an astronomer amongst us, and has made the nature of the universe his special study, should speak first, beginning with the generation of the world and going down to the creation of man; next, I am to receive the men whom he has created, and of whom some will have profited by the excellent education which you have given them; and then, in accordance with the tale of Solon, and equally with his law, we will bring them into court and make them citizens, as if they were those very Athenians whom the sacred Egyptian record has recovered from oblivion, and thenceforward we will speak of them as Athenians and fellow-citizens.

CRITIAS: Let me explain to you, Socrates, how we’ve organized our gathering. We want Timaeus, who knows the most about astronomy and has focused on understanding the nature of the universe, to speak first. He’ll start with the creation of the world and continue to the creation of man. After that, I’ll introduce the men he has created, some of whom will have benefited from the excellent education you've provided. Then, following the story of Solon and his law, we’ll bring them into court and make them citizens, as if they were the very Athenians those sacred Egyptian records have saved from being forgotten. From that point on, we’ll refer to them as Athenians and fellow citizens.

SOCRATES: I see that I shall receive in my turn a perfect and splendid feast of reason. And now, Timaeus, you, I suppose, should speak next, after duly calling upon the Gods.

SOCRATES: I can tell I'm about to hear an amazing and insightful discussion. Now, Timaeus, I guess it's your turn to speak, after properly addressing the Gods.

TIMAEUS: All men, Socrates, who have any degree of right feeling, at the beginning of every enterprise, whether small or great, always call upon God. And we, too, who are going to discourse of the nature of the universe, how created or how existing without creation, if we be not altogether out of our wits, must invoke the aid of Gods and Goddesses and pray that our words may be acceptable to them and consistent with themselves. Let this, then, be our invocation of the Gods, to which I add an exhortation of myself to speak in such manner as will be most intelligible to you, and will most accord with my own intent.

TIMAEUS: All people, Socrates, who have any sense of what’s right, at the start of any effort, whether big or small, always turn to God. And we, too, who are about to discuss the nature of the universe, whether it was created or just exists, if we’re not completely out of our minds, must ask for help from the Gods and Goddesses and hope that what we say will be pleasing to them and consistent with itself. So let this be our prayer to the Gods, and I’ll also remind myself to speak in a way that is clear to you and true to my own purpose.

First then, in my judgment, we must make a distinction and ask, What is that which always is and has no becoming; and what is that which is always becoming and never is? That which is apprehended by intelligence and reason is always in the same state; but that which is conceived by opinion with the help of sensation and without reason, is always in a process of becoming and perishing and never really is. Now everything that becomes or is created must of necessity be created by some cause, for without a cause nothing can be created. The work of the creator, whenever he looks to the unchangeable and fashions the form and nature of his work after an unchangeable pattern, must necessarily be made fair and perfect; but when he looks to the created only, and uses a created pattern, it is not fair or perfect. Was the heaven then or the world, whether called by this or by any other more appropriate name—assuming the name, I am asking a question which has to be asked at the beginning of an enquiry about anything—was the world, I say, always in existence and without beginning? or created, and had it a beginning? Created, I reply, being visible and tangible and having a body, and therefore sensible; and all sensible things are apprehended by opinion and sense and are in a process of creation and created. Now that which is created must, as we affirm, of necessity be created by a cause. But the father and maker of all this universe is past finding out; and even if we found him, to tell of him to all men would be impossible. And there is still a question to be asked about him: Which of the patterns had the artificer in view when he made the world—the pattern of the unchangeable, or of that which is created? If the world be indeed fair and the artificer good, it is manifest that he must have looked to that which is eternal; but if what cannot be said without blasphemy is true, then to the created pattern. Every one will see that he must have looked to the eternal; for the world is the fairest of creations and he is the best of causes. And having been created in this way, the world has been framed in the likeness of that which is apprehended by reason and mind and is unchangeable, and must therefore of necessity, if this is admitted, be a copy of something. Now it is all-important that the beginning of everything should be according to nature. And in speaking of the copy and the original we may assume that words are akin to the matter which they describe; when they relate to the lasting and permanent and intelligible, they ought to be lasting and unalterable, and, as far as their nature allows, irrefutable and immovable—nothing less. But when they express only the copy or likeness and not the eternal things themselves, they need only be likely and analogous to the real words. As being is to becoming, so is truth to belief. If then, Socrates, amid the many opinions about the gods and the generation of the universe, we are not able to give notions which are altogether and in every respect exact and consistent with one another, do not be surprised. Enough, if we adduce probabilities as likely as any others; for we must remember that I who am the speaker, and you who are the judges, are only mortal men, and we ought to accept the tale which is probable and enquire no further.

First, in my view, we need to make a distinction and ask: What is that which always exists and has no change, and what is that which is always changing and never truly exists? What is understood through intelligence and reason remains constant, but what is perceived through opinion and sensation, without reason, is always in a state of becoming and ceasing to be and never truly exists. Everything that either changes or is created must be caused by something, because nothing can be created without a cause. The creator's work, when he references the unchangeable and shapes it according to an unchangeable model, must be fair and perfect; however, if he only looks at what is created and uses a created model, it will not be fair or perfect. So, was the heavens or the world, regardless of the name used—here I'm posing an essential question to start any investigation—was the world always existing and uncreated? Or was it created and did it have a beginning? I say it was created, as it is visible, tangible, and has a physical form, and therefore can be sensed; all things which can be sensed are understood through opinion and sensation and are in the process of being created. Now, as we assert, anything that is created must necessarily come from a cause. But the father and creator of this entire universe is beyond our understanding; and even if we were to find out who he is, telling everyone about him would be impossible. There is still a question to consider about him: Which model did the creator have in mind when he made the world—the model of the unchangeable or that of created things? If the world is indeed beautiful and the creator is good, it is clear he must have looked to the eternal; but if what can’t be said without offense is true, then he must have referred to the created model. Everyone will see that he must have looked to the eternal, for the world is the most beautiful of all creations and he is the greatest of causes. Having been created this way, the world resembles that which is understood through reason and mind and is unchangeable, and therefore it must necessarily be a copy of something. It is crucial that the beginning of everything aligns with nature. When we discuss the copy and the original, we might assume that words correspond closely to the things they describe; when they relate to what is lasting, permanent, and intelligible, they should also be lasting, unchangeable, and, as much as possible, convincing and steadfast—nothing less. But when they convey only the copy or likeness, not the eternal things themselves, they need only be similar and appropriate to the actual words. Just as being is to becoming, truth is to belief. Therefore, Socrates, amid the many opinions about the gods and the creation of the universe, if we cannot provide notions that are completely and consistently accurate, don’t be surprised. It is sufficient if we present probabilities that are as likely as any others; for we must remember that I, the speaker, and you, the listeners, are only mortal men, and we should accept the likely tale and not inquire further.

SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus; and we will do precisely as you bid us. The prelude is charming, and is already accepted by us—may we beg of you to proceed to the strain?

SOCRATES: Great, Timaeus; we’ll do exactly as you ask. The introduction is lovely, and we’re already on board—could you please go ahead with the music?

TIMAEUS: Let me tell you then why the creator made this world of generation. He was good, and the good can never have any jealousy of anything. And being free from jealousy, he desired that all things should be as like himself as they could be. This is in the truest sense the origin of creation and of the world, as we shall do well in believing on the testimony of wise men: God desired that all things should be good and nothing bad, so far as this was attainable. Wherefore also finding the whole visible sphere not at rest, but moving in an irregular and disorderly fashion, out of disorder he brought order, considering that this was in every way better than the other. Now the deeds of the best could never be or have been other than the fairest; and the creator, reflecting on the things which are by nature visible, found that no unintelligent creature taken as a whole was fairer than the intelligent taken as a whole; and that intelligence could not be present in anything which was devoid of soul. For which reason, when he was framing the universe, he put intelligence in soul, and soul in body, that he might be the creator of a work which was by nature fairest and best. Wherefore, using the language of probability, we may say that the world became a living creature truly endowed with soul and intelligence by the providence of God.

TIMAEUS: Let me explain why the creator made this world of existence. He was good, and good beings have no jealousy. Free from jealousy, he wanted everything to be as much like him as possible. This is truly the origin of creation and the world, as wise people have told us: God wanted everything to be good and nothing bad, as far as that was possible. Observing that the entire visible universe was not at rest, but moving in a chaotic and disordered way, he brought order out of disorder, understanding that this was better in every way. The actions of the best creation could only ever be the most beautiful; and the creator, considering the naturally visible things, realized that no unintelligent whole could be fairer than an intelligent whole, and that intelligence couldn’t exist in anything lacking a soul. Therefore, when he was shaping the universe, he placed intelligence in the soul and the soul in the body, intending to create a work that was naturally the fairest and best. Hence, we can reasonably say that the world became a living creature truly endowed with soul and intelligence by the providence of God.

This being supposed, let us proceed to the next stage: In the likeness of what animal did the Creator make the world? It would be an unworthy thing to liken it to any nature which exists as a part only; for nothing can be beautiful which is like any imperfect thing; but let us suppose the world to be the very image of that whole of which all other animals both individually and in their tribes are portions. For the original of the universe contains in itself all intelligible beings, just as this world comprehends us and all other visible creatures. For the Deity, intending to make this world like the fairest and most perfect of intelligible beings, framed one visible animal comprehending within itself all other animals of a kindred nature. Are we right in saying that there is one world, or that they are many and infinite? There must be one only, if the created copy is to accord with the original. For that which includes all other intelligible creatures cannot have a second or companion; in that case there would be need of another living being which would include both, and of which they would be parts, and the likeness would be more truly said to resemble not them, but that other which included them. In order then that the world might be solitary, like the perfect animal, the creator made not two worlds or an infinite number of them; but there is and ever will be one only-begotten and created heaven.

Assuming this is true, let's move on to the next point: In what animal's likeness did the Creator shape the world? It would be inappropriate to compare it to anything that exists only as a part, because nothing can be beautiful if it resembles something imperfect. Instead, let’s consider the world to be the very image of the whole from which all other animals, both individually and in their groups, are just fragments. The original universe contains all intelligent beings within itself, just like this world contains us and all other visible creatures. The Deity, intending to make this world resemble the most beautiful and perfect of all intelligible beings, created one visible animal that encompasses all other animals of a similar nature. Are we correct in asserting that there is one world, or are there many and countless worlds? There must be only one if the created version is meant to match the original. That which contains all other intelligent creatures cannot have a second or a companion; otherwise, there would need to be another living being that encompasses both, of which they would be parts, and the resemblance would be more accurately said to reflect not them, but that other being which includes them. To ensure that the world could be unique, like the perfect animal, the creator made not two worlds or an infinite number of them; rather, there is and will always be one only-begotten and created heaven.

Now that which is created is of necessity corporeal, and also visible and tangible. And nothing is visible where there is no fire, or tangible which has no solidity, and nothing is solid without earth. Wherefore also God in the beginning of creation made the body of the universe to consist of fire and earth. But two things cannot be rightly put together without a third; there must be some bond of union between them. And the fairest bond is that which makes the most complete fusion of itself and the things which it combines; and proportion is best adapted to effect such a union. For whenever in any three numbers, whether cube or square, there is a mean, which is to the last term what the first term is to it; and again, when the mean is to the first term as the last term is to the mean—then the mean becoming first and last, and the first and last both becoming means, they will all of them of necessity come to be the same, and having become the same with one another will be all one. If the universal frame had been created a surface only and having no depth, a single mean would have sufficed to bind together itself and the other terms; but now, as the world must be solid, and solid bodies are always compacted not by one mean but by two, God placed water and air in the mean between fire and earth, and made them to have the same proportion so far as was possible (as fire is to air so is air to water, and as air is to water so is water to earth); and thus he bound and put together a visible and tangible heaven. And for these reasons, and out of such elements which are in number four, the body of the world was created, and it was harmonized by proportion, and therefore has the spirit of friendship; and having been reconciled to itself, it was indissoluble by the hand of any other than the framer.

Now, what’s created is necessarily physical, as well as visible and tangible. And nothing can be seen without fire, or felt without solidity, and nothing is solid without earth. So, in the beginning of creation, God made the body of the universe from fire and earth. However, two things can’t be properly put together without a third; there needs to be some connection between them. The best connection is one that creates the most complete merging of itself with the things it combines, and proportion is best suited to achieve such a union. Because whenever in any three numbers, whether cubic or square, there’s a mean that relates to the last term just as the first term relates to it; and when the mean relates to the first term as the last term relates to the mean—then, as the mean becomes both the first and last, and the first and last become means, they will all inevitably become the same, and once they become the same with one another, they will all be one. If the universe had been created as just a surface without depth, a single mean would have been enough to connect itself with the other terms; but now, since the world must be solid, and solid bodies are always bound not by one mean but by two, God placed water and air in the mean between fire and earth, and made them to have the same proportion as much as possible (as fire is to air, so is air to water, and as air is to water, so is water to earth); and in this way, He bound and assembled a visible and tangible heaven. For these reasons, and from these four elements, the body of the world was created, harmonized by proportion, and thus possesses a spirit of friendship; and having been reconciled to itself, it could not be dissolved by any hand other than that of its creator.

Now the creation took up the whole of each of the four elements; for the Creator compounded the world out of all the fire and all the water and all the air and all the earth, leaving no part of any of them nor any power of them outside. His intention was, in the first place, that the animal should be as far as possible a perfect whole and of perfect parts: secondly, that it should be one, leaving no remnants out of which another such world might be created: and also that it should be free from old age and unaffected by disease. Considering that if heat and cold and other powerful forces which unite bodies surround and attack them from without when they are unprepared, they decompose them, and by bringing diseases and old age upon them, make them waste away—for this cause and on these grounds he made the world one whole, having every part entire, and being therefore perfect and not liable to old age and disease. And he gave to the world the figure which was suitable and also natural. Now to the animal which was to comprehend all animals, that figure was suitable which comprehends within itself all other figures. Wherefore he made the world in the form of a globe, round as from a lathe, having its extremes in every direction equidistant from the centre, the most perfect and the most like itself of all figures; for he considered that the like is infinitely fairer than the unlike. This he finished off, making the surface smooth all round for many reasons; in the first place, because the living being had no need of eyes when there was nothing remaining outside him to be seen; nor of ears when there was nothing to be heard; and there was no surrounding atmosphere to be breathed; nor would there have been any use of organs by the help of which he might receive his food or get rid of what he had already digested, since there was nothing which went from him or came into him: for there was nothing beside him. Of design he was created thus, his own waste providing his own food, and all that he did or suffered taking place in and by himself. For the Creator conceived that a being which was self-sufficient would be far more excellent than one which lacked anything; and, as he had no need to take anything or defend himself against any one, the Creator did not think it necessary to bestow upon him hands: nor had he any need of feet, nor of the whole apparatus of walking; but the movement suited to his spherical form was assigned to him, being of all the seven that which is most appropriate to mind and intelligence; and he was made to move in the same manner and on the same spot, within his own limits revolving in a circle. All the other six motions were taken away from him, and he was made not to partake of their deviations. And as this circular movement required no feet, the universe was created without legs and without feet.

Now the creation encompassed all four elements entirely; the Creator made the world from all the fire, water, air, and earth, leaving nothing out from any of them or any of their powers. His purpose was twofold: first, that the living being should be a complete and perfect whole with flawless parts; second, that it should be singular, leaving no leftovers from which another world could be formed; and also that it should be free from aging and disease. He recognized that if heat, cold, and other strong forces that bind matter were to surround and attack unprepared bodies, they would break them down and lead to decay through illness and aging. For this reason, he created the world as a unified whole, with every part intact, making it perfect and immune to aging and illness. He shaped the world in a way that was both fitting and natural. To the living being that would encompass all animals, a form that contained all other shapes was appropriate. Thus, he made the world a globe, perfectly round as if turned on a lathe, with all extremes equidistant from the center—this was the most perfect shape, most similar to itself of all forms, since he believed that similar forms are infinitely more beautiful than dissimilar ones. He finished it off by smoothing the surface all around for several reasons: primarily, because the living being didn't need eyes when there was nothing outside of itself to see; nor ears when there was nothing to hear; and there was no atmosphere to breathe; nor would there be any use for organs to help it consume food or dispose of what was digested since there was nothing coming in or going out of it—there was nothing around it. By design, it was created this way, with its own waste providing its own nourishment, and everything it experienced occurred within and by itself. The Creator believed that a self-sufficient being would be far superior to one that lacked anything; and since it had no need to acquire anything or defend itself against anyone, the Creator didn’t find it important to give it hands, or feet, or the whole mechanism for walking. Instead, the movement suited to its spherical shape was assigned to it, as this was the most fitting of all seven motions for mind and intelligence; and it was made to move in a circular motion in its own space, revolving in its own limits. All the other six types of movement were taken away from it, and it was designed not to experience their variations. Since this circular movement didn’t require feet, the universe was created without legs and feet.

Such was the whole plan of the eternal God about the god that was to be, to whom for this reason he gave a body, smooth and even, having a surface in every direction equidistant from the centre, a body entire and perfect, and formed out of perfect bodies. And in the centre he put the soul, which he diffused throughout the body, making it also to be the exterior environment of it; and he made the universe a circle moving in a circle, one and solitary, yet by reason of its excellence able to converse with itself, and needing no other friendship or acquaintance. Having these purposes in view he created the world a blessed god.

This was the entire plan of the eternal God regarding the god that was to come, for whom He provided a body that is smooth and even, with a surface equally distant from the center in every direction, a complete and perfect body made from perfect elements. He placed the soul at the center, spreading it throughout the body, making it also the outer environment. He designed the universe as a circle moving within a circle, unique and solitary, yet, due to its greatness, capable of communicating with itself and requiring no other friendships or connections. With these intentions in mind, He created the world as a blessed god.

Now God did not make the soul after the body, although we are speaking of them in this order; for having brought them together he would never have allowed that the elder should be ruled by the younger; but this is a random manner of speaking which we have, because somehow we ourselves too are very much under the dominion of chance. Whereas he made the soul in origin and excellence prior to and older than the body, to be the ruler and mistress, of whom the body was to be the subject. And he made her out of the following elements and on this wise: Out of the indivisible and unchangeable, and also out of that which is divisible and has to do with material bodies, he compounded a third and intermediate kind of essence, partaking of the nature of the same and of the other, and this compound he placed accordingly in a mean between the indivisible, and the divisible and material. He took the three elements of the same, the other, and the essence, and mingled them into one form, compressing by force the reluctant and unsociable nature of the other into the same. When he had mingled them with the essence and out of three made one, he again divided this whole into as many portions as was fitting, each portion being a compound of the same, the other, and the essence. And he proceeded to divide after this manner:—First of all, he took away one part of the whole (1), and then he separated a second part which was double the first (2), and then he took away a third part which was half as much again as the second and three times as much as the first (3), and then he took a fourth part which was twice as much as the second (4), and a fifth part which was three times the third (9), and a sixth part which was eight times the first (8), and a seventh part which was twenty-seven times the first (27). After this he filled up the double intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4, 8) and the triple (i.e. between 1, 3, 9, 27) cutting off yet other portions from the mixture and placing them in the intervals, so that in each interval there were two kinds of means, the one exceeding and exceeded by equal parts of its extremes (as for example 1, 4/3, 2, in which the mean 4/3 is one-third of 1 more than 1, and one-third of 2 less than 2), the other being that kind of mean which exceeds and is exceeded by an equal number (e.g.

Now, God didn’t create the soul after the body, even though we’re discussing them in this order; if He had brought them together, He would never allow the older to be ruled by the younger. This is just a random way of speaking that we have, reflecting how much we too are under the influence of chance. He made the soul originally and in its excellence before and older than the body, so that it would be the ruler, with the body as its subject. He created the soul from the following elements and in this way: from the indivisible and unchangeable, as well as from that which is divisible and related to material bodies, He mixed a third kind of essence that partakes of the nature of both. He placed this mixture in a middle ground between the indivisible and the divisible and material. He took the three elements of the same, the other, and the essence, and combined them into one form, forcefully unifying the reluctant and unsociable nature of the other. After mingling them with the essence and creating one from three, He divided this whole into as many parts as appropriate, with each part being a compound of the same, the other, and the essence. He divided it in this way: first, He took away one part of the whole (1), then separated a second part that was double the first (2), then a third part that was one and a half times the second and three times the first (3), then a fourth part that was double the second (4), a fifth part that was three times the third (9), a sixth part that was eight times the first (8), and a seventh part that was twenty-seven times the first (27). After this, He filled in the double intervals (i.e., between 1, 2, 4, 8) and the triple (i.e., between 1, 3, 9, 27) by cutting off additional portions from the mixture and placing them in the gaps, so that in each gap there were two kinds of means: one that exceeds and is exceeded by equal parts of its extremes (like 1, 4/3, 2, where the mean 4/3 is one-third more than 1 and one-third less than 2), and the other being that kind of mean which exceeds and is exceeded by an equal number (e.g.

  - over 1, 4/3, 3/2, - over 2, 8/3, 3, - over 4, 16/3, 6,  - over 8: and
  - over 1, 3/2, 2,   - over 3, 9/2, 6, - over 9, 27/2, 18, - over 27.
- over 1, 1.33, 1.5, - over 2, 2.67, 3, - over 4, 5.33, 6, - over 8: and  
- over 1, 1.5, 2, - over 3, 4.5, 6, - over 9, 13.5, 18, - over 27.

Where there were intervals of 3/2 and of 4/3 and of 9/8, made by the connecting terms in the former intervals, he filled up all the intervals of 4/3 with the interval of 9/8, leaving a fraction over; and the interval which this fraction expressed was in the ratio of 256 to 243 (e.g.

Where there were intervals of 3/2, 4/3, and 9/8, created by the connecting terms in the earlier intervals, he filled all the intervals of 4/3 with the interval of 9/8, leaving a remainder; and the interval represented by this remainder was in the ratio of 256 to 243 (e.g.

 243:256::81/64:4/3::243/128:2::81/32:8/3::243/64:4::81/16:16/3::242/32:8.
243:256::81/64:4/3::243/128:2::81/32:8/3::243/64:4::81/16:16/3::242/32:8.

And thus the whole mixture out of which he cut these portions was all exhausted by him. This entire compound he divided lengthways into two parts, which he joined to one another at the centre like the letter X, and bent them into a circular form, connecting them with themselves and each other at the point opposite to their original meeting-point; and, comprehending them in a uniform revolution upon the same axis, he made the one the outer and the other the inner circle. Now the motion of the outer circle he called the motion of the same, and the motion of the inner circle the motion of the other or diverse. The motion of the same he carried round by the side (i.e. of the rectangular figure supposed to be inscribed in the circle of the Same) to the right, and the motion of the diverse diagonally (i.e. across the rectangular figure from corner to corner) to the left. And he gave dominion to the motion of the same and like, for that he left single and undivided; but the inner motion he divided in six places and made seven unequal circles having their intervals in ratios of two and three, three of each, and bade the orbits proceed in a direction opposite to one another; and three (Sun, Mercury, Venus) he made to move with equal swiftness, and the remaining four (Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter) to move with unequal swiftness to the three and to one another, but in due proportion.

And so, the entire mixture he used to create these parts was all used up. He split this whole combination lengthwise into two sections, which he connected at the center like the letter X, and shaped them into a circle, linking them back to themselves and each other at the point opposite where they first met; and by making them rotate uniformly around the same axis, he designated one as the outer circle and the other as the inner circle. He referred to the motion of the outer circle as the motion of the same, and the motion of the inner circle as the motion of the other or different. He moved the outer circle along the side (i.e., of the rectangular shape thought to be inscribed in the circle of the Same) to the right, and the motion of the diverse diagonally (i.e., across the rectangular figure from corner to corner) to the left. He gave authority to the motion of the same and similar, as he kept it singular and undivided; however, he divided the inner motion in six places, creating seven unequal circles with intervals in ratios of two and three, three of each, and instructed the orbits to move in opposite directions; three (Sun, Mercury, Venus) were made to move at the same speed, while the other four (Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter) were to move at different speeds compared to the three and to each other, but still in proper proportion.

Now when the Creator had framed the soul according to his will, he formed within her the corporeal universe, and brought the two together, and united them centre to centre. The soul, interfused everywhere from the centre to the circumference of heaven, of which also she is the external envelopment, herself turning in herself, began a divine beginning of never-ceasing and rational life enduring throughout all time. The body of heaven is visible, but the soul is invisible, and partakes of reason and harmony, and being made by the best of intellectual and everlasting natures, is the best of things created. And because she is composed of the same and of the other and of the essence, these three, and is divided and united in due proportion, and in her revolutions returns upon herself, the soul, when touching anything which has essence, whether dispersed in parts or undivided, is stirred through all her powers, to declare the sameness or difference of that thing and some other; and to what individuals are related, and by what affected, and in what way and how and when, both in the world of generation and in the world of immutable being. And when reason, which works with equal truth, whether she be in the circle of the diverse or of the same—in voiceless silence holding her onward course in the sphere of the self-moved—when reason, I say, is hovering around the sensible world and when the circle of the diverse also moving truly imparts the intimations of sense to the whole soul, then arise opinions and beliefs sure and certain. But when reason is concerned with the rational, and the circle of the same moving smoothly declares it, then intelligence and knowledge are necessarily perfected. And if any one affirms that in which these two are found to be other than the soul, he will say the very opposite of the truth.

Now, when the Creator shaped the soul according to His will, He created the physical universe within it and brought the two together, uniting them from center to center. The soul, spread out everywhere from the center to the edges of heaven, of which it is also the outer covering, turning within itself, began a divine beginning of never-ending and rational life lasting through all time. The body of heaven is visible, but the soul is invisible and shares in reason and harmony. Being made from the best intellectual and eternal natures, it is the finest of all created things. Because it consists of the same essence and other elements, these three, and is divided and united in the right measure, and in its rotations returns to itself, the soul, when it comes into contact with anything that has essence—whether it's in pieces or whole—is stirred in all its powers to express the similarities or differences between that thing and others; to understand how individuals are connected, what affects them, and how, when, and in what way, both in the world of change and in the world of unchanging being. When reason, which is equally true, whether in the realm of the diverse or the same—advances silently in the realm of self-movement—when reason is floating around the sensory world and when the realm of the diverse also moves genuinely and relays sensory information to the whole soul, then clear and certain opinions and beliefs arise. But when reason focuses on the rational, and the realm of the same moves smoothly to express it, then intelligence and knowledge are inevitably perfected. If anyone claims that what is found in these two is anything other than the soul, they will be stating the exact opposite of the truth.

When the father and creator saw the creature which he had made moving and living, the created image of the eternal gods, he rejoiced, and in his joy determined to make the copy still more like the original; and as this was eternal, he sought to make the universe eternal, so far as might be. Now the nature of the ideal being was everlasting, but to bestow this attribute in its fulness upon a creature was impossible. Wherefore he resolved to have a moving image of eternity, and when he set in order the heaven, he made this image eternal but moving according to number, while eternity itself rests in unity; and this image we call time. For there were no days and nights and months and years before the heaven was created, but when he constructed the heaven he created them also. They are all parts of time, and the past and future are created species of time, which we unconsciously but wrongly transfer to the eternal essence; for we say that he ‘was,’ he ‘is,’ he ‘will be,’ but the truth is that ‘is’ alone is properly attributed to him, and that ‘was’ and ‘will be’ are only to be spoken of becoming in time, for they are motions, but that which is immovably the same cannot become older or younger by time, nor ever did or has become, or hereafter will be, older or younger, nor is subject at all to any of those states which affect moving and sensible things and of which generation is the cause. These are the forms of time, which imitates eternity and revolves according to a law of number. Moreover, when we say that what has become IS become and what becomes IS becoming, and that what will become IS about to become and that the non-existent IS non-existent—all these are inaccurate modes of expression (compare Parmen.). But perhaps this whole subject will be more suitably discussed on some other occasion.

When the father and creator saw the creature he had made moving and living, which was a reflection of the eternal gods, he felt joy. In his happiness, he decided to make the copy even more similar to the original. Since the original was eternal, he aimed to make the universe eternal as well, as much as possible. The nature of the ideal being is everlasting, but it was impossible to give this quality fully to a creature. Therefore, he resolved to create a moving image of eternity. As he organized the heavens, he made this image eternal but moving according to numbers, while eternity itself remains in unity; this image we call time. Before the heavens were created, there were no days, nights, months, or years, but when he created the heavens, he created them, too. They are all parts of time, and the past and future are created aspects of time, which we mistakenly attribute to the eternal essence; we say that he ‘was,’ he ‘is,’ he ‘will be,’ but the reality is that only ‘is’ truly applies to him. 'Was' and 'will be' only refer to changes in time, as they are movements; however, that which is immovably the same cannot grow older or younger over time, nor has it ever or will it ever become older or younger, nor is it affected by any of those states that impact moving and sensible things, which are caused by generation. These are the forms of time, which imitates eternity and moves according to a numerical order. Furthermore, when we say that what has come to be IS come to be, that what is becoming IS in the process of becoming, and that what will come to be IS about to become, and that the non-existent IS non-existent—all of these are inaccurate expressions (compare Parmen.). But perhaps we can discuss this whole topic more appropriately on another occasion.

Time, then, and the heaven came into being at the same instant in order that, having been created together, if ever there was to be a dissolution of them, they might be dissolved together. It was framed after the pattern of the eternal nature, that it might resemble this as far as was possible; for the pattern exists from eternity, and the created heaven has been, and is, and will be, in all time. Such was the mind and thought of God in the creation of time. The sun and moon and five other stars, which are called the planets, were created by him in order to distinguish and preserve the numbers of time; and when he had made their several bodies, he placed them in the orbits in which the circle of the other was revolving,—in seven orbits seven stars. First, there was the moon in the orbit nearest the earth, and next the sun, in the second orbit above the earth; then came the morning star and the star sacred to Hermes, moving in orbits which have an equal swiftness with the sun, but in an opposite direction; and this is the reason why the sun and Hermes and Lucifer overtake and are overtaken by each other. To enumerate the places which he assigned to the other stars, and to give all the reasons why he assigned them, although a secondary matter, would give more trouble than the primary. These things at some future time, when we are at leisure, may have the consideration which they deserve, but not at present.

Time and the heavens were created at the same moment so they could fall apart together if ever needed. The universe was designed to mirror eternal nature as closely as possible; because the original exists eternally, the created heavens have been, are, and will be through all time. This was God's intention when He created time. He made the sun, moon, and five other stars known as planets to mark and manage the passage of time. After forming their respective bodies, He set them in their orbits, each in a circle with the others—seven stars total in seven orbits. First, the moon was placed in the orbit closest to the earth, followed by the sun in the second orbit above it. Then came the morning star and the star dedicated to Hermes, both moving in orbits that match the sun's speed but in the opposite direction. This is why the sun and Hermes and Lucifer pass each other. Listing the positions assigned to the other stars and explaining the reasons for their placements, although important, would take more effort than discussing the main points. These details can be considered later when we have more time, but not right now.

Now, when all the stars which were necessary to the creation of time had attained a motion suitable to them, and had become living creatures having bodies fastened by vital chains, and learnt their appointed task, moving in the motion of the diverse, which is diagonal, and passes through and is governed by the motion of the same, they revolved, some in a larger and some in a lesser orbit—those which had the lesser orbit revolving faster, and those which had the larger more slowly. Now by reason of the motion of the same, those which revolved fastest appeared to be overtaken by those which moved slower although they really overtook them; for the motion of the same made them all turn in a spiral, and, because some went one way and some another, that which receded most slowly from the sphere of the same, which was the swiftest, appeared to follow it most nearly. That there might be some visible measure of their relative swiftness and slowness as they proceeded in their eight courses, God lighted a fire, which we now call the sun, in the second from the earth of these orbits, that it might give light to the whole of heaven, and that the animals, as many as nature intended, might participate in number, learning arithmetic from the revolution of the same and the like. Thus then, and for this reason the night and the day were created, being the period of the one most intelligent revolution. And the month is accomplished when the moon has completed her orbit and overtaken the sun, and the year when the sun has completed his own orbit. Mankind, with hardly an exception, have not remarked the periods of the other stars, and they have no name for them, and do not measure them against one another by the help of number, and hence they can scarcely be said to know that their wanderings, being infinite in number and admirable for their variety, make up time. And yet there is no difficulty in seeing that the perfect number of time fulfils the perfect year when all the eight revolutions, having their relative degrees of swiftness, are accomplished together and attain their completion at the same time, measured by the rotation of the same and equally moving. After this manner, and for these reasons, came into being such of the stars as in their heavenly progress received reversals of motion, to the end that the created heaven might imitate the eternal nature, and be as like as possible to the perfect and intelligible animal.

Now, when all the stars necessary for the creation of time began to move in a way that suited them and became living beings with bodies connected by vital chains, they learned their assigned roles, moving in a diagonal motion that is varied, which aligns with and is guided by the motion of the same. They revolved, some in larger orbits and some in smaller ones—those with smaller orbits moving faster, and those with larger orbits moving more slowly. Due to the motion of the same, the stars that moved fastest seemed to be caught up by those moving more slowly, even though they were actually passing them; this was because the motion of the same caused them all to turn in a spiral, and since some moved one way while others went another, the star that moved most slowly from the sphere of the same, which was the fastest, seemed to follow closely. To provide a visible measure of their relative speeds as they traveled in their eight courses, God ignited a fire, which we now call the sun, in the second orbit from the earth, to illuminate all of heaven, and so that the creatures, as many as nature intended, might participate in number, learning arithmetic from the revolutions of the same and the like. Thus, for this reason, night and day were created, marking the period of the most intelligent revolution. A month is fulfilled when the moon completes its orbit and catches up to the sun, and a year is completed when the sun has finished its own orbit. Most people have barely noticed the periods of the other stars, they don’t have names for them, and they don’t measure them against one another with numbers, so they can hardly be said to understand that their movements, infinite in number and remarkable in variety, constitute time. Yet, it is not hard to see that the perfect duration of time completes the perfect year when all eight revolutions, with their relative speeds, finish together and reach their completion simultaneously, measured by the motion of the same and moving equally. In this way, and for these reasons, the stars that received changes in motion during their heavenly journey came into being, so that the created heaven could mimic eternal nature and resemble the perfect and intelligible being as closely as possible.

Thus far and until the birth of time the created universe was made in the likeness of the original, but inasmuch as all animals were not yet comprehended therein, it was still unlike. What remained, the creator then proceeded to fashion after the nature of the pattern. Now as in the ideal animal the mind perceives ideas or species of a certain nature and number, he thought that this created animal ought to have species of a like nature and number. There are four such; one of them is the heavenly race of the gods; another, the race of birds whose way is in the air; the third, the watery species; and the fourth, the pedestrian and land creatures. Of the heavenly and divine, he created the greater part out of fire, that they might be the brightest of all things and fairest to behold, and he fashioned them after the likeness of the universe in the figure of a circle, and made them follow the intelligent motion of the supreme, distributing them over the whole circumference of heaven, which was to be a true cosmos or glorious world spangled with them all over. And he gave to each of them two movements: the first, a movement on the same spot after the same manner, whereby they ever continue to think consistently the same thoughts about the same things; the second, a forward movement, in which they are controlled by the revolution of the same and the like; but by the other five motions they were unaffected, in order that each of them might attain the highest perfection. And for this reason the fixed stars were created, to be divine and eternal animals, ever-abiding and revolving after the same manner and on the same spot; and the other stars which reverse their motion and are subject to deviations of this kind, were created in the manner already described. The earth, which is our nurse, clinging (or ‘circling’) around the pole which is extended through the universe, he framed to be the guardian and artificer of night and day, first and eldest of gods that are in the interior of heaven. Vain would be the attempt to tell all the figures of them circling as in dance, and their juxtapositions, and the return of them in their revolutions upon themselves, and their approximations, and to say which of these deities in their conjunctions meet, and which of them are in opposition, and in what order they get behind and before one another, and when they are severally eclipsed to our sight and again reappear, sending terrors and intimations of the future to those who cannot calculate their movements—to attempt to tell of all this without a visible representation of the heavenly system would be labour in vain. Enough on this head; and now let what we have said about the nature of the created and visible gods have an end.

So far, until the beginning of time, the created universe was made in the image of the original, but since all animals weren't yet included in it, it was still different. The creator then went on to shape what remained according to the pattern. Just like in the ideal animal where the mind perceives ideas or kinds of a certain nature and number, he decided that this created animal should have kinds that were similar in nature and number. There are four such kinds: one is the heavenly race of the gods; another is the race of birds that fly in the air; the third is the aquatic species; and the fourth is the land creatures. For the heavenly and divine beings, he created most of them out of fire, so they would be the brightest and most beautiful of all things. He shaped them in the likeness of the universe in a circular form and made them follow the intelligent motion of the supreme, distributing them all around the circumference of heaven, which was to be a true cosmos or glorious world filled with them. He gave each of them two movements: the first is a movement in the same spot in the same way, so they always think the same thoughts about the same things; the second is a forward movement, guided by the revolution of the same and similar ones. The other five motions did not affect them, so each could reach the highest perfection. This is why the fixed stars were created, to be divine and eternal beings, always existing and moving in the same way and in the same spot. The other stars, which change their motion and experience variations, were made as described earlier. The Earth, which nurtures us, encircling the pole that extends through the universe, was designed to be the guardian and maker of night and day, the first and oldest of the gods within heaven. It would be futile to try to describe all the patterns of them dancing in circles, their positions next to each other, their returns in their own revolutions, and how they come close together, or to say which of these deities meet in their conjunctions, which oppose each other, and in what order they pass behind and ahead of one another, and when they are eclipsed from our sight only to reappear, sending fears and signals of the future to those who cannot figure out their movements—attempting to explain all of this without a visible representation of the heavenly system would be a waste of effort. Enough on this topic; let what we've discussed about the nature of the created and visible gods come to a close.

To know or tell the origin of the other divinities is beyond us, and we must accept the traditions of the men of old time who affirm themselves to be the offspring of the gods—that is what they say—and they must surely have known their own ancestors. How can we doubt the word of the children of the gods? Although they give no probable or certain proofs, still, as they declare that they are speaking of what took place in their own family, we must conform to custom and believe them. In this manner, then, according to them, the genealogy of these gods is to be received and set forth.

Knowing or telling the origin of the other gods is beyond our understanding, and we have to accept the traditions of the ancient people who claim to be the descendants of the gods—that’s what they say—and they must have surely known their own lineage. How can we doubt the words of the offspring of the gods? Even though they provide no solid or convincing proof, since they insist they are speaking about their own family history, we must go along with tradition and believe them. In this way, then, according to them, the genealogy of these gods should be accepted and presented.

Oceanus and Tethys were the children of Earth and Heaven, and from these sprang Phorcys and Cronos and Rhea, and all that generation; and from Cronos and Rhea sprang Zeus and Here, and all those who are said to be their brethren, and others who were the children of these.

Oceanus and Tethys were the offspring of Earth and Sky, and from them came Phorcys, Cronos, Rhea, and their entire generation; and from Cronos and Rhea came Zeus and Hera, along with all those said to be their siblings, as well as others who were their children.

Now, when all of them, both those who visibly appear in their revolutions as well as those other gods who are of a more retiring nature, had come into being, the creator of the universe addressed them in these words: ‘Gods, children of gods, who are my works, and of whom I am the artificer and father, my creations are indissoluble, if so I will. All that is bound may be undone, but only an evil being would wish to undo that which is harmonious and happy. Wherefore, since ye are but creatures, ye are not altogether immortal and indissoluble, but ye shall certainly not be dissolved, nor be liable to the fate of death, having in my will a greater and mightier bond than those with which ye were bound at the time of your birth. And now listen to my instructions:—Three tribes of mortal beings remain to be created—without them the universe will be incomplete, for it will not contain every kind of animal which it ought to contain, if it is to be perfect. On the other hand, if they were created by me and received life at my hands, they would be on an equality with the gods. In order then that they may be mortal, and that this universe may be truly universal, do ye, according to your natures, betake yourselves to the formation of animals, imitating the power which was shown by me in creating you. The part of them worthy of the name immortal, which is called divine and is the guiding principle of those who are willing to follow justice and you—of that divine part I will myself sow the seed, and having made a beginning, I will hand the work over to you. And do ye then interweave the mortal with the immortal, and make and beget living creatures, and give them food, and make them to grow, and receive them again in death.’

Now, when all of them, both those who are clearly visible during their cycles and the more reserved gods, were created, the creator of the universe spoke to them, saying: ‘Gods, children of gods, who are my creations and of whom I am the maker and father, my creations are unbreakable, if that is my will. Everything that is bound can be unbound, but only a malicious being would want to disrupt what is harmonious and joyful. Therefore, since you are merely beings, you are not completely immortal and unbreakable, but you will certainly not be dissolved or face death, as my will provides a stronger and more powerful bond than those that tied you at your creation. Now, listen to my directions:—Three types of mortal beings still need to be created—without them, the universe will be incomplete, as it won’t contain every kind of animal it should for perfection. On the other hand, if I created them and gave them life, they would be equal to the gods. So, to ensure they are mortal and this universe is truly universal, you should, according to your natures, take on the task of forming animals, mimicking the power I used to create you. The part of them that deserves the name immortal, which is called divine and guides those who are willing to pursue justice and you—of that divine part, I will plant the seed myself and, having made a start, will hand the work over to you. Then, you shall interweave the mortal with the immortal, create and bring forth living beings, provide them with sustenance, help them grow, and accept them back in death.’

Thus he spake, and once more into the cup in which he had previously mingled the soul of the universe he poured the remains of the elements, and mingled them in much the same manner; they were not, however, pure as before, but diluted to the second and third degree. And having made it he divided the whole mixture into souls equal in number to the stars, and assigned each soul to a star; and having there placed them as in a chariot, he showed them the nature of the universe, and declared to them the laws of destiny, according to which their first birth would be one and the same for all,—no one should suffer a disadvantage at his hands; they were to be sown in the instruments of time severally adapted to them, and to come forth the most religious of animals; and as human nature was of two kinds, the superior race would hereafter be called man. Now, when they should be implanted in bodies by necessity, and be always gaining or losing some part of their bodily substance, then in the first place it would be necessary that they should all have in them one and the same faculty of sensation, arising out of irresistible impressions; in the second place, they must have love, in which pleasure and pain mingle; also fear and anger, and the feelings which are akin or opposite to them; if they conquered these they would live righteously, and if they were conquered by them, unrighteously. He who lived well during his appointed time was to return and dwell in his native star, and there he would have a blessed and congenial existence. But if he failed in attaining this, at the second birth he would pass into a woman, and if, when in that state of being, he did not desist from evil, he would continually be changed into some brute who resembled him in the evil nature which he had acquired, and would not cease from his toils and transformations until he followed the revolution of the same and the like within him, and overcame by the help of reason the turbulent and irrational mob of later accretions, made up of fire and air and water and earth, and returned to the form of his first and better state. Having given all these laws to his creatures, that he might be guiltless of future evil in any of them, the creator sowed some of them in the earth, and some in the moon, and some in the other instruments of time; and when he had sown them he committed to the younger gods the fashioning of their mortal bodies, and desired them to furnish what was still lacking to the human soul, and having made all the suitable additions, to rule over them, and to pilot the mortal animal in the best and wisest manner which they could, and avert from him all but self-inflicted evils.

So he spoke, and once again poured the remnants of the elements into the cup where he had previously mixed the essence of the universe, blending them similarly; however, they were not as pure as before but diluted to the second and third degree. After creating it, he divided the whole mixture into a number of souls equal to the stars and assigned each soul to a star; then, placing them there as if in a chariot, he revealed to them the nature of the universe and explained the laws of destiny, according to which their first birth would be the same for everyone—no one would suffer a disadvantage at his hands; they were to be sown in time's instruments, each suited to them, and emerge as the most religious of beings; and since human nature came in two types, the superior race would later be called man. When they were placed in bodies by necessity and were always gaining or losing some part of their physical form, it would first be essential that they all shared one and the same capacity for sensation, arising from unavoidable impressions; secondly, they must experience love, where pleasure and pain merge; also fear and anger, along with their related or opposing feelings; if they conquered these, they would live rightly, but if they were overwhelmed by them, they would live wrongly. Those who lived well during their given time were to return and reside in their native star, where they would have a blessed and fulfilling existence. However, if they failed to achieve this, at their second birth they would become a woman, and if, in that state, they did not stop doing evil, they would continually transform into some animal resembling them in the harmful traits they had acquired, and would not stop their struggles and changes until they followed the cycle of similar tendencies within themselves and overcame, with the help of reason, the chaotic and irrational influences of later additions made up of fire, air, water, and earth, returning to the form of their original and better state. After establishing all these laws for his creations, to remain blameless for any future wrongs among them, the creator sown some of them in the earth, some in the moon, and others in various time instruments; and once he had sown them, he entrusted the younger gods with shaping their mortal bodies, instructing them to provide what was still missing from the human soul, and after making all necessary additions, to govern them and guide the mortal beings in the best and wisest way they could, and to protect them from all evils except those they brought upon themselves.

When the creator had made all these ordinances he remained in his own accustomed nature, and his children heard and were obedient to their father’s word, and receiving from him the immortal principle of a mortal creature, in imitation of their own creator they borrowed portions of fire, and earth, and water, and air from the world, which were hereafter to be restored—these they took and welded them together, not with the indissoluble chains by which they were themselves bound, but with little pegs too small to be visible, making up out of all the four elements each separate body, and fastening the courses of the immortal soul in a body which was in a state of perpetual influx and efflux. Now these courses, detained as in a vast river, neither overcame nor were overcome; but were hurrying and hurried to and fro, so that the whole animal was moved and progressed, irregularly however and irrationally and anyhow, in all the six directions of motion, wandering backwards and forwards, and right and left, and up and down, and in all the six directions. For great as was the advancing and retiring flood which provided nourishment, the affections produced by external contact caused still greater tumult—when the body of any one met and came into collision with some external fire, or with the solid earth or the gliding waters, or was caught in the tempest borne on the air, and the motions produced by any of these impulses were carried through the body to the soul. All such motions have consequently received the general name of ‘sensations,’ which they still retain. And they did in fact at that time create a very great and mighty movement; uniting with the ever-flowing stream in stirring up and violently shaking the courses of the soul, they completely stopped the revolution of the same by their opposing current, and hindered it from predominating and advancing; and they so disturbed the nature of the other or diverse, that the three double intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4, 8), and the three triple intervals (i.e. between 1, 3, 9, 27), together with the mean terms and connecting links which are expressed by the ratios of 3:2, and 4:3, and of 9:8—these, although they cannot be wholly undone except by him who united them, were twisted by them in all sorts of ways, and the circles were broken and disordered in every possible manner, so that when they moved they were tumbling to pieces, and moved irrationally, at one time in a reverse direction, and then again obliquely, and then upside down, as you might imagine a person who is upside down and has his head leaning upon the ground and his feet up against something in the air; and when he is in such a position, both he and the spectator fancy that the right of either is his left, and the left right. If, when powerfully experiencing these and similar effects, the revolutions of the soul come in contact with some external thing, either of the class of the same or of the other, they speak of the same or of the other in a manner the very opposite of the truth; and they become false and foolish, and there is no course or revolution in them which has a guiding or directing power; and if again any sensations enter in violently from without and drag after them the whole vessel of the soul, then the courses of the soul, though they seem to conquer, are really conquered.

When the creator established all these rules, he remained true to his nature, and his children listened to and obeyed their father’s words. They received from him the immortal essence of a mortal being, and, imitating their creator, they took parts of fire, earth, water, and air from the world, which would eventually be returned. They combined these elements not with the strong bonds that held them together, but with tiny pegs that were almost invisible, creating each separate body from the four elements, while binding the flow of the immortal soul within a body that was constantly changing. These flows, stuck like in a vast river, neither dominated nor were dominated; instead, they rushed back and forth, causing the entire being to move and progress, but in a chaotic, irrational way, in all six directions of motion—backward and forward, right and left, up and down, and in all six directions. The powerful ebb and flow that provided nourishment was further agitated by feelings from external contact—when a body encountered external fire, solid earth, gliding water, or was caught in the wind, the movements triggered by these encounters traveled through the body to the soul. These movements became collectively known as ‘sensations,’ a term that remains. They indeed created a strong and overwhelming disturbance at that time; merging with the ever-flowing stream, they stirred and violently shook the currents of the soul, completely halting its natural rotation while preventing it from prevailing and advancing. They also disrupted the nature of the other or different elements, twisting the three double intervals (like between 1, 2, 4, 8) and the three triple intervals (like between 1, 3, 9, 27), along with the midpoints and connections expressed by the ratios of 3:2, 4:3, and 9:8—these intervals, although they cannot be entirely undone except by the one who brought them together, were distorted by them in countless ways, breaking and disordering the circles in every possible fashion. As they moved, they were falling apart and behaving irrationally, at times moving backward, then sideways, or even upside down, like a person who is inverted with their head on the ground and feet in the air; in such a position, both the person and an observer might mistakenly think that what is right for one is left for the other, and vice versa. When these and similar effects strongly influence the soul's rotations, and they come into contact with something external, whether similar or different, they interpret that thing in a way completely opposite to reality; they become misguided and foolish, with no guiding force in their movements. Additionally, if any sensations violently invade from the outside, pulling the whole essence of the soul with them, the flows of the soul, even when they appear to dominate, are actually defeated.

And by reason of all these affections, the soul, when encased in a mortal body, now, as in the beginning, is at first without intelligence; but when the flood of growth and nutriment abates, and the courses of the soul, calming down, go their own way and become steadier as time goes on, then the several circles return to their natural form, and their revolutions are corrected, and they call the same and the other by their right names, and make the possessor of them to become a rational being. And if these combine in him with any true nurture or education, he attains the fulness and health of the perfect man, and escapes the worst disease of all; but if he neglects education he walks lame to the end of his life, and returns imperfect and good for nothing to the world below. This, however, is a later stage; at present we must treat more exactly the subject before us, which involves a preliminary enquiry into the generation of the body and its members, and as to how the soul was created—for what reason and by what providence of the gods; and holding fast to probability, we must pursue our way.

Due to all these emotions, the soul, when trapped in a physical body, starts off, just like at the beginning, without any understanding. But as growth and nourishment slow down, the soul’s functions calm down, settle into their own rhythms, and become more stable over time. At that point, the different parts of the soul return to their natural state, their movements are corrected, and they begin to recognize and name things accurately, making the person a rational being. If these qualities combine with true education or nurturing, the person reaches the fullness and well-being of a perfect individual, avoiding the greatest of all failures. However, if he neglects education, he stumbles through life and returns to the world below incomplete and useless. But that's a later topic; for now, we need to focus more closely on the issue at hand, which requires an exploration into how the body and its parts come to be and how the soul was formed—what purpose it serves and by what divine oversight it was created; while relying on probability, we must continue our examination.

First, then, the gods, imitating the spherical shape of the universe, enclosed the two divine courses in a spherical body, that, namely, which we now term the head, being the most divine part of us and the lord of all that is in us: to this the gods, when they put together the body, gave all the other members to be servants, considering that it partook of every sort of motion. In order then that it might not tumble about among the high and deep places of the earth, but might be able to get over the one and out of the other, they provided the body to be its vehicle and means of locomotion; which consequently had length and was furnished with four limbs extended and flexible; these God contrived to be instruments of locomotion with which it might take hold and find support, and so be able to pass through all places, carrying on high the dwelling-place of the most sacred and divine part of us. Such was the origin of legs and hands, which for this reason were attached to every man; and the gods, deeming the front part of man to be more honourable and more fit to command than the hinder part, made us to move mostly in a forward direction. Wherefore man must needs have his front part unlike and distinguished from the rest of his body.

First, the gods, mimicking the round shape of the universe, enclosed the two divine aspects within a spherical form, which we now call the head, the most divine part of us and the ruler of all that is within us. When the gods created the body, they assigned all the other parts to serve it, recognizing that the head is involved in every type of movement. To prevent it from tumbling among the depths and heights of the earth, they designed the body to be its means of movement, which was therefore elongated and equipped with four flexible limbs. These were crafted by God to serve as tools for movement, enabling it to grasp and find support, thereby allowing it to navigate all spaces while carrying high the dwelling place of our most sacred and divine aspect. This is how legs and hands became part of every human; and since the gods deemed the front of a person to be more honorable and more suited to lead than the back, humans were designed to primarily move forward. Thus, the front part of a person must be distinct and different from the rest of their body.

And so in the vessel of the head, they first of all put a face in which they inserted organs to minister in all things to the providence of the soul, and they appointed this part, which has authority, to be by nature the part which is in front. And of the organs they first contrived the eyes to give light, and the principle according to which they were inserted was as follows: So much of fire as would not burn, but gave a gentle light, they formed into a substance akin to the light of every-day life; and the pure fire which is within us and related thereto they made to flow through the eyes in a stream smooth and dense, compressing the whole eye, and especially the centre part, so that it kept out everything of a coarser nature, and allowed to pass only this pure element. When the light of day surrounds the stream of vision, then like falls upon like, and they coalesce, and one body is formed by natural affinity in the line of vision, wherever the light that falls from within meets with an external object. And the whole stream of vision, being similarly affected in virtue of similarity, diffuses the motions of what it touches or what touches it over the whole body, until they reach the soul, causing that perception which we call sight. But when night comes on and the external and kindred fire departs, then the stream of vision is cut off; for going forth to an unlike element it is changed and extinguished, being no longer of one nature with the surrounding atmosphere which is now deprived of fire: and so the eye no longer sees, and we feel disposed to sleep. For when the eyelids, which the gods invented for the preservation of sight, are closed, they keep in the internal fire; and the power of the fire diffuses and equalizes the inward motions; when they are equalized, there is rest, and when the rest is profound, sleep comes over us scarce disturbed by dreams; but where the greater motions still remain, of whatever nature and in whatever locality, they engender corresponding visions in dreams, which are remembered by us when we are awake and in the external world. And now there is no longer any difficulty in understanding the creation of images in mirrors and all smooth and bright surfaces. For from the communion of the internal and external fires, and again from the union of them and their numerous transformations when they meet in the mirror, all these appearances of necessity arise, when the fire from the face coalesces with the fire from the eye on the bright and smooth surface. And right appears left and left right, because the visual rays come into contact with the rays emitted by the object in a manner contrary to the usual mode of meeting; but the right appears right, and the left left, when the position of one of the two concurring lights is reversed; and this happens when the mirror is concave and its smooth surface repels the right stream of vision to the left side, and the left to the right (He is speaking of two kinds of mirrors, first the plane, secondly the concave; and the latter is supposed to be placed, first horizontally, and then vertically.). Or if the mirror be turned vertically, then the concavity makes the countenance appear to be all upside down, and the lower rays are driven upwards and the upper downwards.

So, in the structure of the head, they initially created a face, adding organs to fulfill all the needs of the soul. They designated this part, which has authority, to be the front. As for the organs, they first devised the eyes to provide light, and the principle behind their design was this: they used just enough fire to not burn, but to emit a gentle light, forming it into a substance similar to daily light. The pure fire within us, related to this, was designed to flow through the eyes in a smooth, dense stream, compressing the entire eye, especially the center, so it would exclude anything coarse and only allow that pure element to pass. When the daylight envelops the stream of vision, similar elements combine, creating one unified body through natural affinity along the line of sight, wherever the internal light meets an external object. The entire stream of vision, affected similarly, spreads the motions of what it touches throughout the body until they reach the soul, resulting in what we perceive as sight. However, when night falls and the external fire departs, the stream of vision is interrupted; as it ventures into an unlike element, it transforms and extinguishes, losing connection with the surrounding atmosphere devoid of fire. Consequently, the eye no longer sees, and we feel inclined to sleep. When the eyelids, which the gods created to protect sight, close, they trap the internal fire. The power of this fire equalizes the inner motions; once equalized, there is rest, and when the rest is deep, sleep overcomes us with few dreams. Yet, if stronger motions persist, regardless of their nature or location, they generate corresponding visions in dreams, which we remember upon waking in the external world. Now it’s easy to grasp how images are created in mirrors and on all smooth, shiny surfaces. The union of the internal and external fires, along with their various transformations when they converge in the mirror, gives rise to these appearances, as the fire from the face merges with the fire from the eye against the bright and smooth surface. Right appears left and left appears right because the visual rays contact the rays emitted by the object in an unusual way. However, right appears right and left left when the position of one of the two overlapping lights is switched; this occurs when the mirror is concave and its smooth surface redirects the right stream of vision to the left side, and the left to the right (He refers to two types of mirrors: first the plane, then the concave; the latter is thought to be positioned both horizontally and vertically.). If the mirror is turned vertically, the concavity makes the face appear completely upside down; the lower rays are pushed upward and the upper rays downward.

All these are to be reckoned among the second and co-operative causes which God, carrying into execution the idea of the best as far as possible, uses as his ministers. They are thought by most men not to be the second, but the prime causes of all things, because they freeze and heat, and contract and dilate, and the like. But they are not so, for they are incapable of reason or intellect; the only being which can properly have mind is the invisible soul, whereas fire and water, and earth and air, are all of them visible bodies. The lover of intellect and knowledge ought to explore causes of intelligent nature first of all, and, secondly, of those things which, being moved by others, are compelled to move others. And this is what we too must do. Both kinds of causes should be acknowledged by us, but a distinction should be made between those which are endowed with mind and are the workers of things fair and good, and those which are deprived of intelligence and always produce chance effects without order or design. Of the second or co-operative causes of sight, which help to give to the eyes the power which they now possess, enough has been said. I will therefore now proceed to speak of the higher use and purpose for which God has given them to us. The sight in my opinion is the source of the greatest benefit to us, for had we never seen the stars, and the sun, and the heaven, none of the words which we have spoken about the universe would ever have been uttered. But now the sight of day and night, and the months and the revolutions of the years, have created number, and have given us a conception of time, and the power of enquiring about the nature of the universe; and from this source we have derived philosophy, than which no greater good ever was or will be given by the gods to mortal man. This is the greatest boon of sight: and of the lesser benefits why should I speak? even the ordinary man if he were deprived of them would bewail his loss, but in vain. Thus much let me say however: God invented and gave us sight to the end that we might behold the courses of intelligence in the heaven, and apply them to the courses of our own intelligence which are akin to them, the unperturbed to the perturbed; and that we, learning them and partaking of the natural truth of reason, might imitate the absolutely unerring courses of God and regulate our own vagaries. The same may be affirmed of speech and hearing: they have been given by the gods to the same end and for a like reason. For this is the principal end of speech, whereto it most contributes. Moreover, so much of music as is adapted to the sound of the voice and to the sense of hearing is granted to us for the sake of harmony; and harmony, which has motions akin to the revolutions of our souls, is not regarded by the intelligent votary of the Muses as given by them with a view to irrational pleasure, which is deemed to be the purpose of it in our day, but as meant to correct any discord which may have arisen in the courses of the soul, and to be our ally in bringing her into harmony and agreement with herself; and rhythm too was given by them for the same reason, on account of the irregular and graceless ways which prevail among mankind generally, and to help us against them.

All these should be considered among the secondary and collaborative causes that God, executing the idea of the best as much as possible, uses as His agents. Most people believe they are not secondary but primary causes of everything because they freeze and heat, contract and expand, and so on. However, that's not true, as they lack reason or intellect; only the invisible soul can truly have a mind, while fire, water, earth, and air are all visible entities. Anyone who values intellect and knowledge should first explore the causes of intelligent beings, and then look at those things, which, being influenced by others, are forced to influence others. We should do the same. We ought to acknowledge both types of causes, but we need to distinguish between those endowed with mind that produce beautiful and good results and those devoid of intelligence that always create random effects without order or design. Enough has been said about the second or collaborative causes of sight, which contribute to giving eyes their current power. I will now discuss the higher use and purpose for which God has given them to us. In my opinion, sight is the greatest benefit we have; if we had never seen the stars, the sun, and the sky, none of the discussions we've had about the universe would have ever happened. But now, the sight of day and night, the months, and the cycles of years has created numbers and allowed us to understand time, enabling us to inquire about the nature of the universe; from this, we have derived philosophy, which is the greatest gift the gods have ever given to humankind. This is the greatest benefit of sight, and as for the lesser ones, why should I even discuss them? Even an ordinary person would lament their loss, but it would be in vain. However, let me say this: God created and gave us sight so that we could observe the pathways of intelligence in the heavens and apply them to our own pathways of thought that are similar to them, the calm to the chaotic; and by learning from them and sharing in the natural truth of reason, we could imitate the perfectly accurate patterns of God and guide our own erratic behaviors. The same can be said for speech and hearing: they have been given by the gods for the same purpose and reason. This is the primary function of speech, to which it mainly contributes. Additionally, the aspects of music that align with the sounds of the voice and the sense of hearing are given to us for the sake of harmony; and harmony, which moves similarly to the cycles of our souls, is not seen by the thoughtful devotee of the Muses as given for mindless pleasure, which is considered to be its purpose today, but rather as a means to correct any discord that may have arisen in the pathways of the soul and to aid us in bringing ourselves into harmony and agreement with ourselves. Rhythm, too, was given for the same reason, to address the irregular and graceless behaviors often seen among people and to help us counteract them.

Thus far in what we have been saying, with small exception, the works of intelligence have been set forth; and now we must place by the side of them in our discourse the things which come into being through necessity—for the creation is mixed, being made up of necessity and mind. Mind, the ruling power, persuaded necessity to bring the greater part of created things to perfection, and thus and after this manner in the beginning, when the influence of reason got the better of necessity, the universe was created. But if a person will truly tell of the way in which the work was accomplished, he must include the other influence of the variable cause as well. Wherefore, we must return again and find another suitable beginning, as about the former matters, so also about these. To which end we must consider the nature of fire, and water, and air, and earth, such as they were prior to the creation of the heaven, and what was happening to them in this previous state; for no one has as yet explained the manner of their generation, but we speak of fire and the rest of them, whatever they mean, as though men knew their natures, and we maintain them to be the first principles and letters or elements of the whole, when they cannot reasonably be compared by a man of any sense even to syllables or first compounds. And let me say thus much: I will not now speak of the first principle or principles of all things, or by whatever name they are to be called, for this reason—because it is difficult to set forth my opinion according to the method of discussion which we are at present employing. Do not imagine, any more than I can bring myself to imagine, that I should be right in undertaking so great and difficult a task. Remembering what I said at first about probability, I will do my best to give as probable an explanation as any other—or rather, more probable; and I will first go back to the beginning and try to speak of each thing and of all. Once more, then, at the commencement of my discourse, I call upon God, and beg him to be our saviour out of a strange and unwonted enquiry, and to bring us to the haven of probability. So now let us begin again.

So far in what we’ve been discussing, with very few exceptions, we've focused on the works of intellect; now we need to also address the things that come into existence through necessity—since creation is a mix of necessity and reason. Reason, the guiding force, persuaded necessity to perfect most of the created things. Thus, at the very beginning, when reason overcame necessity, the universe was formed. However, if someone wants to accurately describe how this happened, they must also consider the influence of the changing cause. Therefore, we must return to find another suitable starting point, both for these topics and the previous ones. To this end, we need to examine the nature of fire, water, air, and earth as they existed before the creation of the heavens and what was happening to them in that earlier state; no one has yet explained how they were generated. We talk about fire and the others, whatever they may imply, as if people understood their natures, and we claim they are the fundamental principles and elements of everything, although they cannot reasonably be compared to syllables or basic compounds by any sensible person. Let me clarify: I will not discuss the first principle or principles of all things, or whatever name we might use for them, because it’s difficult to express my views within the framework of our current discussion. Don’t think, just as I cannot, that I would be right to take on such a vast and challenging task. Keeping in mind what I said earlier about probability, I will do my best to provide an explanation that is as probable as any other—or rather, more so; and I will first return to the beginning and attempt to speak of each thing and all things. Once more, then, at the start of my discourse, I call upon God and ask him to guide us out of this strange and unfamiliar inquiry and to lead us to the harbor of probability. So let’s begin again.

This new beginning of our discussion of the universe requires a fuller division than the former; for then we made two classes, now a third must be revealed. The two sufficed for the former discussion: one, which we assumed, was a pattern intelligible and always the same; and the second was only the imitation of the pattern, generated and visible. There is also a third kind which we did not distinguish at the time, conceiving that the two would be enough. But now the argument seems to require that we should set forth in words another kind, which is difficult of explanation and dimly seen. What nature are we to attribute to this new kind of being? We reply, that it is the receptacle, and in a manner the nurse, of all generation. I have spoken the truth; but I must express myself in clearer language, and this will be an arduous task for many reasons, and in particular because I must first raise questions concerning fire and the other elements, and determine what each of them is; for to say, with any probability or certitude, which of them should be called water rather than fire, and which should be called any of them rather than all or some one of them, is a difficult matter. How, then, shall we settle this point, and what questions about the elements may be fairly raised?

This new start to our discussion about the universe requires a clearer division than before; we had two categories, but now we need to introduce a third. The two were enough for our earlier discussion: one was a consistent, understandable pattern, and the second was merely a representation of that pattern, created and observable. However, there's also a third type that we didn't distinguish back then, thinking the two would suffice. Now, our argument seems to need us to articulate this new type, which is hard to explain and not easily perceived. What nature should we assign to this new kind of existence? We respond that it is the receptacle and, in a way, the nurturing source of all creation. I’ve spoken the truth; however, I need to clarify my language, which will be challenging for several reasons, particularly because I must first raise questions about fire and the other elements, and figure out what each of them actually is. To state with any likelihood or certainty which should be called water instead of fire, and which should be labeled as any of them rather than all or some, is a tricky issue. So, how do we resolve this matter, and what questions regarding the elements can we reasonably propose?

In the first place, we see that what we just now called water, by condensation, I suppose, becomes stone and earth; and this same element, when melted and dispersed, passes into vapour and air. Air, again, when inflamed, becomes fire; and again fire, when condensed and extinguished, passes once more into the form of air; and once more, air, when collected and condensed, produces cloud and mist; and from these, when still more compressed, comes flowing water, and from water comes earth and stones once more; and thus generation appears to be transmitted from one to the other in a circle. Thus, then, as the several elements never present themselves in the same form, how can any one have the assurance to assert positively that any of them, whatever it may be, is one thing rather than another? No one can. But much the safest plan is to speak of them as follows:—Anything which we see to be continually changing, as, for example, fire, we must not call ‘this’ or ‘that,’ but rather say that it is ‘of such a nature’; nor let us speak of water as ‘this’; but always as ‘such’; nor must we imply that there is any stability in any of those things which we indicate by the use of the words ‘this’ and ‘that,’ supposing ourselves to signify something thereby; for they are too volatile to be detained in any such expressions as ‘this,’ or ‘that,’ or ‘relative to this,’ or any other mode of speaking which represents them as permanent. We ought not to apply ‘this’ to any of them, but rather the word ‘such’; which expresses the similar principle circulating in each and all of them; for example, that should be called ‘fire’ which is of such a nature always, and so of everything that has generation. That in which the elements severally grow up, and appear, and decay, is alone to be called by the name ‘this’ or ‘that’; but that which is of a certain nature, hot or white, or anything which admits of opposite qualities, and all things that are compounded of them, ought not to be so denominated. Let me make another attempt to explain my meaning more clearly. Suppose a person to make all kinds of figures of gold and to be always transmuting one form into all the rest;—somebody points to one of them and asks what it is. By far the safest and truest answer is, That is gold; and not to call the triangle or any other figures which are formed in the gold ‘these,’ as though they had existence, since they are in process of change while he is making the assertion; but if the questioner be willing to take the safe and indefinite expression, ‘such,’ we should be satisfied. And the same argument applies to the universal nature which receives all bodies—that must be always called the same; for, while receiving all things, she never departs at all from her own nature, and never in any way, or at any time, assumes a form like that of any of the things which enter into her; she is the natural recipient of all impressions, and is stirred and informed by them, and appears different from time to time by reason of them. But the forms which enter into and go out of her are the likenesses of real existences modelled after their patterns in a wonderful and inexplicable manner, which we will hereafter investigate. For the present we have only to conceive of three natures: first, that which is in process of generation; secondly, that in which the generation takes place; and thirdly, that of which the thing generated is a resemblance. And we may liken the receiving principle to a mother, and the source or spring to a father, and the intermediate nature to a child; and may remark further, that if the model is to take every variety of form, then the matter in which the model is fashioned will not be duly prepared, unless it is formless, and free from the impress of any of those shapes which it is hereafter to receive from without. For if the matter were like any of the supervening forms, then whenever any opposite or entirely different nature was stamped upon its surface, it would take the impression badly, because it would intrude its own shape. Wherefore, that which is to receive all forms should have no form; as in making perfumes they first contrive that the liquid substance which is to receive the scent shall be as inodorous as possible; or as those who wish to impress figures on soft substances do not allow any previous impression to remain, but begin by making the surface as even and smooth as possible. In the same way that which is to receive perpetually and through its whole extent the resemblances of all eternal beings ought to be devoid of any particular form. Wherefore, the mother and receptacle of all created and visible and in any way sensible things, is not to be termed earth, or air, or fire, or water, or any of their compounds or any of the elements from which these are derived, but is an invisible and formless being which receives all things and in some mysterious way partakes of the intelligible, and is most incomprehensible. In saying this we shall not be far wrong; as far, however, as we can attain to a knowledge of her from the previous considerations, we may truly say that fire is that part of her nature which from time to time is inflamed, and water that which is moistened, and that the mother substance becomes earth and air, in so far as she receives the impressions of them.

First, we notice that what we currently call water can, through condensation, turn into stone and earth; and this same element, when melted and dispersed, becomes vapor and air. Air, when ignited, turns into fire; and fire, when condensed and put out, returns to air. Again, air, when collected and condensed, creates cloud and mist; and from these, when further compressed, comes flowing water, which then turns back into earth and stones; thus, the process of change cycles in a loop. Given that the various elements never exist in the same form, how can anyone confidently claim that any one of them is definitively one thing rather than another? No one can. The safer approach is to refer to them like this: Anything we see as constantly changing, like fire, shouldn't be labeled 'this' or 'that,' but instead described as 'of such a nature'; we shouldn't call water 'this'; but always 'such'; nor should we imply any permanence in things we refer to with 'this' and 'that,' as if they denote something stable; because they are too changeable to be confined to words like 'this,' or 'that,' or 'related to this,' or any expression that presents them as lasting. We shouldn't use 'this' for any of them, but rather 'such'; which captures the similar principle that flows through each of them. For example, what should be called 'fire' is that which is always 'of such a nature,' and this applies to everything that undergoes change. What the elements grow, appear, and decay in should only be called by 'this' or 'that'; but anything that has a specific quality, hot or white, or anything that can have opposing characteristics, and all things made of them, should not be labeled that way. Let me try to clarify my point. Imagine a person shaping various figures out of gold and constantly transforming one form into others; if someone points to one of them and asks what it is, the safest and most accurate response is, "That is gold," rather than calling the triangle or any other shapes made from the gold 'these,' as if they have a fixed existence, since they are in flux as the statement is made; but if the questioner prefers the safe and vague term 'such,' we should agree. The same reasoning applies to the universal essence that contains all bodies—that must always be referred to as the same; for, while it accepts everything, it never changes from its inherent nature and never takes on the form of anything that enters it; it fundamentally receives all impressions, being influenced and informed by them, and appears different over time because of them. But the forms that enter and exit it are replicas of real existences modeled after their patterns in a remarkable and unfathomable way, which we will explore later. For now, let's consider three natures: first, that which is in the process of generation; second, that in which the generation occurs; and third, that of which the generated thing is a likeness. We might compare the receiving essence to a mother, the source to a father, and the intermediate nature to a child; furthermore, if the model is to take on every different shape, then the material from which the model is formed needs to be prepared properly, which means remaining formless and free from the imprint of any shapes it is to take on later. If the material resembled any of the forms that could be imposed on it, then whenever a contrasting or entirely different nature was impressed upon its surface, it would struggle to take on that impression because of its own existing shape. Thus, the substance that is to receive all forms should have no form; just as they ensure that the liquid meant to take on scents is as odorless as possible when making perfumes; or as those who want to imprint shapes on soft materials avoid leaving previous impressions and strive to begin with a surface that is as even and smooth as possible. In the same way, that which is to continuously and wholly receive the likenesses of all eternal beings ought to lack any specific form. Consequently, the origin and receptacle of all created, visible, or otherwise perceptible things is not to be called earth, air, fire, water, or any of their combinations or elements they derive from, but is an invisible and formless entity that accepts all things and somehow engages with the intelligible, which remains incredibly complex. By stating this, we are not going too far off; to the best of our understanding based on prior considerations, we can accurately say that fire is the part of its nature that is ignited at times, and water is that which is moist, while the mother substance becomes earth and air as it accepts their impressions.

Let us consider this question more precisely. Is there any self-existent fire? and do all those things which we call self-existent exist? or are only those things which we see, or in some way perceive through the bodily organs, truly existent, and nothing whatever besides them? And is all that which we call an intelligible essence nothing at all, and only a name? Here is a question which we must not leave unexamined or undetermined, nor must we affirm too confidently that there can be no decision; neither must we interpolate in our present long discourse a digression equally long, but if it is possible to set forth a great principle in a few words, that is just what we want.

Let's examine this question more closely. Is there such a thing as self-existent fire? Do all the things we call self-existent actually exist? Or are only the things we can see or perceive in some way through our senses truly real, with nothing else beyond them? And is everything we refer to as an intelligible essence nothing at all, just a name? This is a question we shouldn't leave unanswered or uncertain, nor should we assert too confidently that we can't come to a conclusion. We also shouldn't get sidetracked in our lengthy discussion with an equally lengthy digression. If we can express a significant principle in just a few words, that's exactly what we need.

Thus I state my view:—If mind and true opinion are two distinct classes, then I say that there certainly are these self-existent ideas unperceived by sense, and apprehended only by the mind; if, however, as some say, true opinion differs in no respect from mind, then everything that we perceive through the body is to be regarded as most real and certain. But we must affirm them to be distinct, for they have a distinct origin and are of a different nature; the one is implanted in us by instruction, the other by persuasion; the one is always accompanied by true reason, the other is without reason; the one cannot be overcome by persuasion, but the other can: and lastly, every man may be said to share in true opinion, but mind is the attribute of the gods and of very few men. Wherefore also we must acknowledge that there is one kind of being which is always the same, uncreated and indestructible, never receiving anything into itself from without, nor itself going out to any other, but invisible and imperceptible by any sense, and of which the contemplation is granted to intelligence only. And there is another nature of the same name with it, and like to it, perceived by sense, created, always in motion, becoming in place and again vanishing out of place, which is apprehended by opinion and sense. And there is a third nature, which is space, and is eternal, and admits not of destruction and provides a home for all created things, and is apprehended without the help of sense, by a kind of spurious reason, and is hardly real; which we beholding as in a dream, say of all existence that it must of necessity be in some place and occupy a space, but that what is neither in heaven nor in earth has no existence. Of these and other things of the same kind, relating to the true and waking reality of nature, we have only this dreamlike sense, and we are unable to cast off sleep and determine the truth about them. For an image, since the reality, after which it is modelled, does not belong to it, and it exists ever as the fleeting shadow of some other, must be inferred to be in another (i.e. in space), grasping existence in some way or other, or it could not be at all. But true and exact reason, vindicating the nature of true being, maintains that while two things (i.e. the image and space) are different they cannot exist one of them in the other and so be one and also two at the same time.

So here’s my take: If the mind and true opinion are two separate categories, then there are definitely these self-existing ideas that we can't perceive with our senses and can only grasp mentally. On the other hand, if some believe that true opinion is the same as the mind, then everything we perceive through our bodies should be considered real and certain. However, we need to recognize them as distinct because they have different origins and natures; one comes from learning while the other comes from persuasion. One is always accompanied by true reasoning, while the other lacks it. The former can't be swayed by persuasion, but the latter can; and ultimately, everyone can have true opinions, but the mind is a trait of the gods and only a few people. Therefore, we must acknowledge that there is a kind of being that is always the same, uncreated and indestructible, never receiving anything from outside itself, nor does it extend outwards, and is invisible and imperceptible by any sense, with its comprehension granted only to intelligence. There’s another nature with the same name that can be sensed, is created, always in motion, taking shape and then disappearing, which we can understand through opinion and sense. Then there’s a third nature, which is space, eternal and immune to destruction, providing a home for all created things, which we can grasp without our senses, through a sort of flawed reasoning, and is barely real; we perceive it almost like a dream, assuming that everything must exist somewhere and take up space, but that what is neither in heaven nor on earth has no existence. Regarding these and other similar aspects of true and waking nature, we only have this dream-like perception, and we struggle to wake up and determine the truth about them. An image, since the reality it’s modeled after doesn’t belong to it, exists as a fleeting shadow of something else, leading us to conclude that it must exist in another space, grasping existence in some form or it couldn’t exist at all. However, true and precise reasoning, which clarifies the nature of true existence, asserts that while the image and space are different, they cannot exist within each other and thus be both one and two at the same time.

Thus have I concisely given the result of my thoughts; and my verdict is that being and space and generation, these three, existed in their three ways before the heaven; and that the nurse of generation, moistened by water and inflamed by fire, and receiving the forms of earth and air, and experiencing all the affections which accompany these, presented a strange variety of appearances; and being full of powers which were neither similar nor equally balanced, was never in any part in a state of equipoise, but swaying unevenly hither and thither, was shaken by them, and by its motion again shook them; and the elements when moved were separated and carried continually, some one way, some another; as, when grain is shaken and winnowed by fans and other instruments used in the threshing of corn, the close and heavy particles are borne away and settle in one direction, and the loose and light particles in another. In this manner, the four kinds or elements were then shaken by the receiving vessel, which, moving like a winnowing machine, scattered far away from one another the elements most unlike, and forced the most similar elements into close contact. Wherefore also the various elements had different places before they were arranged so as to form the universe. At first, they were all without reason and measure. But when the world began to get into order, fire and water and earth and air had only certain faint traces of themselves, and were altogether such as everything might be expected to be in the absence of God; this, I say, was their nature at that time, and God fashioned them by form and number. Let it be consistently maintained by us in all that we say that God made them as far as possible the fairest and best, out of things which were not fair and good. And now I will endeavour to show you the disposition and generation of them by an unaccustomed argument, which I am compelled to use; but I believe that you will be able to follow me, for your education has made you familiar with the methods of science.

I've briefly summarized my thoughts; my conclusion is that existence, space, and creation each existed in their own ways before the universe. The source of creation, nourished by water and ignited by fire, shaped by earth and air, and influenced by various conditions, presented a strange mix of appearances. It was full of powers that were neither similar nor equally balanced, always out of equilibrium, swaying back and forth, causing disturbances, which in turn agitated the elements. When the elements moved, they separated and constantly shifted—some going one way, others another—as when grain is tossed and sifted by fans and other tools during threshing; the dense, heavy bits are carried off and settle in one spot, while the lighter, loose bits scatter elsewhere. In this way, the four elements were tossed around by the receiving vessel, which, like a winnowing machine, separated the most dissimilar elements while bringing the similar ones close together. Thus, the different elements occupied distinct places before they were organized into the universe. Initially, they were all chaotic and unmeasured. But as the world began to find order, fire, water, earth, and air were only faintly distinct from one another, existing as one might expect in a state devoid of divinity; this was their nature in that moment, until God shaped them with form and number. We must consistently affirm that God crafted them to be as fair and good as possible from what was initially neither fair nor good. Now, I will attempt to demonstrate their arrangement and generation through a unique approach that I must use; however, I believe you will be able to follow along, as your education has equipped you with the tools of scientific reasoning.

In the first place, then, as is evident to all, fire and earth and water and air are bodies. And every sort of body possesses solidity, and every solid must necessarily be contained in planes; and every plane rectilinear figure is composed of triangles; and all triangles are originally of two kinds, both of which are made up of one right and two acute angles; one of them has at either end of the base the half of a divided right angle, having equal sides, while in the other the right angle is divided into unequal parts, having unequal sides. These, then, proceeding by a combination of probability with demonstration, we assume to be the original elements of fire and the other bodies; but the principles which are prior to these God only knows, and he of men who is the friend of God. And next we have to determine what are the four most beautiful bodies which are unlike one another, and of which some are capable of resolution into one another; for having discovered thus much, we shall know the true origin of earth and fire and of the proportionate and intermediate elements. And then we shall not be willing to allow that there are any distinct kinds of visible bodies fairer than these. Wherefore we must endeavour to construct the four forms of bodies which excel in beauty, and then we shall be able to say that we have sufficiently apprehended their nature. Now of the two triangles, the isosceles has one form only; the scalene or unequal-sided has an infinite number. Of the infinite forms we must select the most beautiful, if we are to proceed in due order, and any one who can point out a more beautiful form than ours for the construction of these bodies, shall carry off the palm, not as an enemy, but as a friend. Now, the one which we maintain to be the most beautiful of all the many triangles (and we need not speak of the others) is that of which the double forms a third triangle which is equilateral; the reason of this would be long to tell; he who disproves what we are saying, and shows that we are mistaken, may claim a friendly victory. Then let us choose two triangles, out of which fire and the other elements have been constructed, one isosceles, the other having the square of the longer side equal to three times the square of the lesser side.

First of all, it's clear to everyone that fire, earth, water, and air are all physical substances. Every type of substance has solidity, and every solid must fit within planes; every flat geometric figure is made up of triangles; and all triangles fall into two categories, both consisting of one right angle and two acute angles. One type has the half of a divided right angle at each end of the base with equal sides, while the other has a right angle divided into uneven parts with unequal sides. So, by combining probability with demonstration, we assume these to be the fundamental elements of fire and the other substances; the principles that come before these are known only to God, and to the person among humans who is a friend of God. Next, we need to identify the four most beautiful substances that differ from one another, some of which can transform into each other; by discovering this, we will understand the true origin of earth and fire and the proportional and intermediate elements. We won't accept that there are any distinct kinds of visible bodies more beautiful than these. Thus, we must strive to construct the four forms of substances that excel in beauty, and only then can we say that we have adequately understood their nature. Of the two types of triangles, the isosceles has just one shape; the scalene, or unequal-sided triangle, has countless shapes. From this infinite variety, we need to choose the most beautiful if we are to progress correctly. Anyone who can suggest a more beautiful shape than ours for constructing these substances should be praised, not as an adversary but as a friend. Now, the triangle we consider to be the most beautiful among the many (and we won't discuss the others) is the one where double forms a third triangle that is equilateral; explaining this would take a long time, but anyone who can prove us wrong and show that we are mistaken may claim a friendly victory. So let’s choose two triangles from which fire and the other elements have been formed, one isosceles and the other with the square of the longer side equal to three times the square of the shorter side.

Now is the time to explain what was before obscurely said: there was an error in imagining that all the four elements might be generated by and into one another; this, I say, was an erroneous supposition, for there are generated from the triangles which we have selected four kinds—three from the one which has the sides unequal; the fourth alone is framed out of the isosceles triangle. Hence they cannot all be resolved into one another, a great number of small bodies being combined into a few large ones, or the converse. But three of them can be thus resolved and compounded, for they all spring from one, and when the greater bodies are broken up, many small bodies will spring up out of them and take their own proper figures; or, again, when many small bodies are dissolved into their triangles, if they become one, they will form one large mass of another kind. So much for their passage into one another. I have now to speak of their several kinds, and show out of what combinations of numbers each of them was formed. The first will be the simplest and smallest construction, and its element is that triangle which has its hypotenuse twice the lesser side. When two such triangles are joined at the diagonal, and this is repeated three times, and the triangles rest their diagonals and shorter sides on the same point as a centre, a single equilateral triangle is formed out of six triangles; and four equilateral triangles, if put together, make out of every three plane angles one solid angle, being that which is nearest to the most obtuse of plane angles; and out of the combination of these four angles arises the first solid form which distributes into equal and similar parts the whole circle in which it is inscribed. The second species of solid is formed out of the same triangles, which unite as eight equilateral triangles and form one solid angle out of four plane angles, and out of six such angles the second body is completed. And the third body is made up of 120 triangular elements, forming twelve solid angles, each of them included in five plane equilateral triangles, having altogether twenty bases, each of which is an equilateral triangle. The one element (that is, the triangle which has its hypotenuse twice the lesser side) having generated these figures, generated no more; but the isosceles triangle produced the fourth elementary figure, which is compounded of four such triangles, joining their right angles in a centre, and forming one equilateral quadrangle. Six of these united form eight solid angles, each of which is made by the combination of three plane right angles; the figure of the body thus composed is a cube, having six plane quadrangular equilateral bases. There was yet a fifth combination which God used in the delineation of the universe.

Now it’s time to clarify what was previously said in a confusing way: there was a mistake in thinking that all four elements could be generated from one another; this, I claim, was a false assumption, because there are four kinds generated from the triangles we selected—three from the one with unequal sides; the fourth is formed from the isosceles triangle. Therefore, they can’t all transform into each other, as a large number of small bodies combine to make a few large ones, or the other way around. However, three of them can be combined this way, since they all originate from one, and when the larger bodies break apart, many small bodies emerge from them and take on their own specific shapes; or, on the flip side, when many small bodies are broken down into their triangles, if they combine, they will create one large mass of a different kind. That covers their transformation into each other. Now, I will discuss their various kinds and show the combinations of numbers from which each was formed. The first will be the simplest and smallest structure, with its element being the triangle that has its hypotenuse twice the length of the shorter side. When two of these triangles are joined at the diagonal, and this is done three times, with the triangles resting their diagonals and shorter sides on the same central point, a single equilateral triangle is created from six triangles; and four equilateral triangles, when put together, create one solid angle from every three plane angles, which is closest to the most obtuse of plane angles; and from the combination of these four angles comes the first solid form that divides the whole circle in which it is inscribed into equal and similar parts. The second type of solid is formed from the same triangles, which combine as eight equilateral triangles to create one solid angle from four plane angles, and six such angles complete the second body. The third body consists of 120 triangular elements, forming twelve solid angles, each included within five plane equilateral triangles, which altogether have twenty bases, each being an equilateral triangle. The one element (that is, the triangle with its hypotenuse twice the lesser side) generated these figures but no more; however, the isosceles triangle produced the fourth elementary figure, which is made up of four such triangles, joining their right angles at a center, forming one equilateral quadrilateral. Six of these combined form eight solid angles, each created by the combination of three plane right angles; the shape of the body thus formed is a cube, which has six plane quadrilateral equilateral bases. There was also a fifth combination that God used in creating the universe.

Now, he who, duly reflecting on all this, enquires whether the worlds are to be regarded as indefinite or definite in number, will be of opinion that the notion of their indefiniteness is characteristic of a sadly indefinite and ignorant mind. He, however, who raises the question whether they are to be truly regarded as one or five, takes up a more reasonable position. Arguing from probabilities, I am of opinion that they are one; another, regarding the question from another point of view, will be of another mind. But, leaving this enquiry, let us proceed to distribute the elementary forms, which have now been created in idea, among the four elements.

Now, anyone who thoughtfully considers all of this and asks whether the worlds should be seen as having an indefinite or definite number will likely conclude that the idea of them being indefinite reflects a sadly vague and ignorant mindset. However, someone who questions whether they should be truly viewed as one or five takes a more reasonable stance. Based on probabilities, I believe they are one; another person, looking at the question from a different perspective, may disagree. But, setting this inquiry aside, let’s move on to categorize the basic forms that have now been conceptualized among the four elements.

To earth, then, let us assign the cubical form; for earth is the most immoveable of the four and the most plastic of all bodies, and that which has the most stable bases must of necessity be of such a nature. Now, of the triangles which we assumed at first, that which has two equal sides is by nature more firmly based than that which has unequal sides; and of the compound figures which are formed out of either, the plane equilateral quadrangle has necessarily a more stable basis than the equilateral triangle, both in the whole and in the parts. Wherefore, in assigning this figure to earth, we adhere to probability; and to water we assign that one of the remaining forms which is the least moveable; and the most moveable of them to fire; and to air that which is intermediate. Also we assign the smallest body to fire, and the greatest to water, and the intermediate in size to air; and, again, the acutest body to fire, and the next in acuteness to air, and the third to water. Of all these elements, that which has the fewest bases must necessarily be the most moveable, for it must be the acutest and most penetrating in every way, and also the lightest as being composed of the smallest number of similar particles: and the second body has similar properties in a second degree, and the third body in the third degree. Let it be agreed, then, both according to strict reason and according to probability, that the pyramid is the solid which is the original element and seed of fire; and let us assign the element which was next in the order of generation to air, and the third to water. We must imagine all these to be so small that no single particle of any of the four kinds is seen by us on account of their smallness: but when many of them are collected together their aggregates are seen. And the ratios of their numbers, motions, and other properties, everywhere God, as far as necessity allowed or gave consent, has exactly perfected, and harmonized in due proportion.

Let’s assign the cube shape to earth, as it is the most stable of the four elements and the most malleable of all materials, meaning it must have a solid foundation. Now, among the triangles we considered initially, the one with two equal sides is naturally more stable than the one with unequal sides. Among the combined shapes formed from either, the flat equilateral quadrilateral has a more stable base than the equilateral triangle, both in its entirety and in its parts. Therefore, by assigning this shape to earth, we stick to what seems reasonable; to water, we assign the remaining shape that is the least movable; to fire, we assign the one that is the most movable; and to air, we choose the shape that is in between. We also designate the smallest shape for fire, the largest for water, and a medium size for air; additionally, we assign the sharpest shape to fire, the second sharpest to air, and the third to water. Among all these elements, the one with the fewest bases must be the most movable, as it will be the sharpest and most penetrating in every aspect, as well as the lightest because it consists of the smallest number of similar particles. The second element will have similar properties to a lesser extent, and the third will have them to an even lesser degree. So, let’s agree, based on both logic and what seems reasonable, that the pyramid is the solid form representing the fundamental element and source of fire; and let’s assign the next element in the order of creation to air, and the third to water. We should imagine all these particles as so tiny that we cannot see any individual particle of any of the four types due to their size; yet when many of them come together, their clusters become visible. The proportions of their quantities, movements, and other characteristics have been perfectly crafted and balanced by God, as far as necessity allowed or permitted.

From all that we have just been saying about the elements or kinds, the most probable conclusion is as follows:—earth, when meeting with fire and dissolved by its sharpness, whether the dissolution take place in the fire itself or perhaps in some mass of air or water, is borne hither and thither, until its parts, meeting together and mutually harmonising, again become earth; for they can never take any other form. But water, when divided by fire or by air, on re-forming, may become one part fire and two parts air; and a single volume of air divided becomes two of fire. Again, when a small body of fire is contained in a larger body of air or water or earth, and both are moving, and the fire struggling is overcome and broken up, then two volumes of fire form one volume of air; and when air is overcome and cut up into small pieces, two and a half parts of air are condensed into one part of water. Let us consider the matter in another way. When one of the other elements is fastened upon by fire, and is cut by the sharpness of its angles and sides, it coalesces with the fire, and then ceases to be cut by them any longer. For no element which is one and the same with itself can be changed by or change another of the same kind and in the same state. But so long as in the process of transition the weaker is fighting against the stronger, the dissolution continues. Again, when a few small particles, enclosed in many larger ones, are in process of decomposition and extinction, they only cease from their tendency to extinction when they consent to pass into the conquering nature, and fire becomes air and air water. But if bodies of another kind go and attack them (i.e. the small particles), the latter continue to be dissolved until, being completely forced back and dispersed, they make their escape to their own kindred, or else, being overcome and assimilated to the conquering power, they remain where they are and dwell with their victors, and from being many become one. And owing to these affections, all things are changing their place, for by the motion of the receiving vessel the bulk of each class is distributed into its proper place; but those things which become unlike themselves and like other things, are hurried by the shaking into the place of the things to which they grow like.

Based on everything we've just discussed regarding the elements or types, the most likely conclusion is as follows: earth, when exposed to fire and broken down by its intensity, whether this breakdown happens in the fire itself or in some air or water, is moved around until its pieces come together and harmonize, eventually becoming earth again; it can never take any other form. However, water, when split by fire or air, can reform into one part fire and two parts air; and when a single volume of air is divided, it creates two volumes of fire. Additionally, when a small piece of fire is contained within a larger body of air, water, or earth, and both are in motion, if the fire struggles and is overwhelmed, two volumes of fire will condense into one volume of air; and when air is broken down into smaller parts, two and a half parts of air condense into one part of water. Let's look at this from another angle. When one of the other elements is influenced by fire, and is sliced by its sharp edges, it merges with the fire and stops being affected by those edges. Because no element that is the same as itself can change or be changed by another of the same type and state. But as long as the weaker element is resisting the stronger, the breakdown continues. Also, when a few small particles are trapped within many larger particles and are in the process of breaking down, they only cease to break down when they agree to merge into the dominating element, with fire becoming air and air becoming water. But if bodies of a different kind attack the smaller particles, those particles continue to break down until they are completely pushed back and dispersed, escaping to their own kin, or if they are overcome and assimilated by the stronger force, they remain where they are and live with their conquerors, becoming one instead of many. Due to these interactions, everything is changing location, as the movement of the containing vessel distributes each type into its proper place; but those things that become unlike themselves and more similar to others are driven by the shaking into the place of the things they resemble.

Now all unmixed and primary bodies are produced by such causes as these. As to the subordinate species which are included in the greater kinds, they are to be attributed to the varieties in the structure of the two original triangles. For either structure did not originally produce the triangle of one size only, but some larger and some smaller, and there are as many sizes as there are species of the four elements. Hence when they are mingled with themselves and with one another there is an endless variety of them, which those who would arrive at the probable truth of nature ought duly to consider.

Now all pure and basic substances come from causes like these. The smaller types that fall under the larger categories are linked to the differences in the shapes of the two original triangles. Each shape didn't just create one size of triangle, but produced larger and smaller versions, and there are as many sizes as there are types of the four elements. So, when these elements mix with each other and themselves, they create an endless variety, which anyone seeking to understand the probable truth of nature should carefully examine.

Unless a person comes to an understanding about the nature and conditions of rest and motion, he will meet with many difficulties in the discussion which follows. Something has been said of this matter already, and something more remains to be said, which is, that motion never exists in what is uniform. For to conceive that anything can be moved without a mover is hard or indeed impossible, and equally impossible to conceive that there can be a mover unless there be something which can be moved—motion cannot exist where either of these are wanting, and for these to be uniform is impossible; wherefore we must assign rest to uniformity and motion to the want of uniformity. Now inequality is the cause of the nature which is wanting in uniformity; and of this we have already described the origin. But there still remains the further point—why things when divided after their kinds do not cease to pass through one another and to change their place—which we will now proceed to explain. In the revolution of the universe are comprehended all the four elements, and this being circular and having a tendency to come together, compresses everything and will not allow any place to be left void. Wherefore, also, fire above all things penetrates everywhere, and air next, as being next in rarity of the elements; and the two other elements in like manner penetrate according to their degrees of rarity. For those things which are composed of the largest particles have the largest void left in their compositions, and those which are composed of the smallest particles have the least. And the contraction caused by the compression thrusts the smaller particles into the interstices of the larger. And thus, when the small parts are placed side by side with the larger, and the lesser divide the greater and the greater unite the lesser, all the elements are borne up and down and hither and thither towards their own places; for the change in the size of each changes its position in space. And these causes generate an inequality which is always maintained, and is continually creating a perpetual motion of the elements in all time.

Unless someone understands the nature and conditions of rest and motion, they'll face many challenges in the discussion that follows. We’ve already touched on this, and there’s more to say: motion never occurs in something that’s uniform. It’s hard, if not impossible, to imagine that anything can move without a mover, and it’s equally hard to conceive of a mover if there isn’t something that can be moved. Motion can’t exist without both, and they can’t be uniform; thus, we should associate rest with uniformity and motion with a lack of uniformity. Inequality is the reason for the lack of uniformity, and we’ve already described its origin. But we still need to discuss why things, when categorized, don’t stop passing through each other and changing places—let’s explain that now. The revolution of the universe includes all four elements, and since this is circular and tends to come together, it compresses everything and prevents any empty space. Therefore, fire, above all, penetrates everywhere, followed by air, as it’s next in rarity among the elements, and the other two elements also penetrate according to their levels of rarity. Things made of larger particles have more empty space in their composition, while those made of smaller particles have less. The contraction from the compression pushes the smaller particles into the gaps of the larger ones. So when the small parts are next to the larger, the smaller separate the larger, and the larger unite the smaller. All the elements move up and down and here and there towards their own places; as the size of each changes, so does its position in space. These causes create a constant inequality that perpetually generates the motion of the elements over all time.

In the next place we have to consider that there are divers kinds of fire. There are, for example, first, flame; and secondly, those emanations of flame which do not burn but only give light to the eyes; thirdly, the remains of fire, which are seen in red-hot embers after the flame has been extinguished. There are similar differences in the air; of which the brightest part is called the aether, and the most turbid sort mist and darkness; and there are various other nameless kinds which arise from the inequality of the triangles. Water, again, admits in the first place of a division into two kinds; the one liquid and the other fusile. The liquid kind is composed of the small and unequal particles of water; and moves itself and is moved by other bodies owing to the want of uniformity and the shape of its particles; whereas the fusile kind, being formed of large and uniform particles, is more stable than the other, and is heavy and compact by reason of its uniformity. But when fire gets in and dissolves the particles and destroys the uniformity, it has greater mobility, and becoming fluid is thrust forth by the neighbouring air and spreads upon the earth; and this dissolution of the solid masses is called melting, and their spreading out upon the earth flowing. Again, when the fire goes out of the fusile substance, it does not pass into a vacuum, but into the neighbouring air; and the air which is displaced forces together the liquid and still moveable mass into the place which was occupied by the fire, and unites it with itself. Thus compressed the mass resumes its equability, and is again at unity with itself, because the fire which was the author of the inequality has retreated; and this departure of the fire is called cooling, and the coming together which follows upon it is termed congealment. Of all the kinds termed fusile, that which is the densest and is formed out of the finest and most uniform parts is that most precious possession called gold, which is hardened by filtration through rock; this is unique in kind, and has both a glittering and a yellow colour. A shoot of gold, which is so dense as to be very hard, and takes a black colour, is termed adamant. There is also another kind which has parts nearly like gold, and of which there are several species; it is denser than gold, and it contains a small and fine portion of earth, and is therefore harder, yet also lighter because of the great interstices which it has within itself; and this substance, which is one of the bright and denser kinds of water, when solidified is called copper. There is an alloy of earth mingled with it, which, when the two parts grow old and are disunited, shows itself separately and is called rust. The remaining phenomena of the same kind there will be no difficulty in reasoning out by the method of probabilities. A man may sometimes set aside meditations about eternal things, and for recreation turn to consider the truths of generation which are probable only; he will thus gain a pleasure not to be repented of, and secure for himself while he lives a wise and moderate pastime. Let us grant ourselves this indulgence, and go through the probabilities relating to the same subjects which follow next in order.

Next, we need to think about the different types of fire. First, there’s flame; second, the light produced by flame that doesn’t burn; and third, the remnants of fire, seen as red-hot embers after the flame goes out. There are similar distinctions in air; the clearest part is called aether, while the murkiest forms are mist and darkness. Various other unnamed types arise from the irregularities of the triangles. When it comes to water, we can split it into two main types: one that is liquid and another that is solidifiable. The liquid type consists of small, uneven water particles that move on their own and can be moved by other substances because of their lack of uniformity and shape. In contrast, the fusible type, made of larger and uniform particles, is more stable, heavier, and denser due to its uniformity. However, when fire intervenes, it breaks down these particles, destroying the uniformity, resulting in increased mobility; this fluid state is pushed out by the surrounding air and spreads across the earth. This process of solid bodies breaking down is called melting, while their spreading out is referred to as flowing. When the fire leaves the fusible material, it doesn't vanish into a vacuum but transitions into the surrounding air. The displaced air compresses the liquid and movable mass to fill the space previously occupied by the fire, helping it reestablish balance and unify again, as the fire that caused the imbalance has retreated. This departure of fire is known as cooling, and the rejoining that follows is called congealment. Among the fusible types, the densest one made of fine, uniform particles is that most precious resource known as gold, which hardens when filtered through rock; it is unique, with a shiny yellow hue. A gold nugget, extremely dense and hard, takes on a black color and is known as adamant. There’s also another type with properties similar to gold, existing in several varieties; it’s denser than gold and contains a small, fine amount of earth, making it harder but also lighter due to the large gaps within its structure. This substance, which is one of the brighter, denser forms of water when solidifies, is called copper. There’s an earth alloy mixed in, which, as the two parts degrade and separate, is revealed as rust. The remaining phenomena of the same kind can be reasoned through probabilities. Sometimes, a person may set aside thoughts about eternal matters and, for leisure, consider the truths of generation that are merely probable; this brings enjoyment without regret, providing a wise and moderate pastime while living. Let’s allow ourselves this indulgence and explore the probabilities relating to the following subjects in order.

Water which is mingled with fire, so much as is fine and liquid (being so called by reason of its motion and the way in which it rolls along the ground), and soft, because its bases give way and are less stable than those of earth, when separated from fire and air and isolated, becomes more uniform, and by their retirement is compressed into itself; and if the condensation be very great, the water above the earth becomes hail, but on the earth, ice; and that which is congealed in a less degree and is only half solid, when above the earth is called snow, and when upon the earth, and condensed from dew, hoar-frost. Then, again, there are the numerous kinds of water which have been mingled with one another, and are distilled through plants which grow in the earth; and this whole class is called by the name of juices or saps. The unequal admixture of these fluids creates a variety of species; most of them are nameless, but four which are of a fiery nature are clearly distinguished and have names. First, there is wine, which warms the soul as well as the body: secondly, there is the oily nature, which is smooth and divides the visual ray, and for this reason is bright and shining and of a glistening appearance, including pitch, the juice of the castor berry, oil itself, and other things of a like kind: thirdly, there is the class of substances which expand the contracted parts of the mouth, until they return to their natural state, and by reason of this property create sweetness;—these are included under the general name of honey: and, lastly, there is a frothy nature, which differs from all juices, having a burning quality which dissolves the flesh; it is called opos (a vegetable acid).

Water mixed with fire, as much as is smooth and fluid (called so because of its movement and the way it flows on the ground), and soft, since its components yield and are less stable than those of earth, when separated from fire and air and isolated, becomes more uniform, and by their withdrawal compresses into itself. If the condensation is very high, the water above the earth turns into hail, while on the earth, it becomes ice. That which solidifies to a lesser degree and is only partially solid, when above the earth, is called snow, and when on the earth, and condensed from dew, it's known as hoar-frost. Additionally, there are many kinds of water that have mixed together and have been distilled through plants that grow in the ground; this whole group is referred to as juices or saps. The uneven mixing of these fluids results in various species; most are unnamed, but four, which are of a fiery nature, are clearly distinguished and have specific names. First, there’s wine, which warms both the soul and the body; secondly, there’s the oily substance, which is smooth and separates the light rays, making it bright, shiny, and glistening, including pitch, the juice of the castor berry, oil itself, and similar items; third, there's the group of substances that open the contracted parts of the mouth until they return to their natural state, creating sweetness—these are generally known as honey; and lastly, there’s a frothy substance, which is different from all juices, having a burning quality that dissolves flesh; it's called opos (a vegetable acid).

As to the kinds of earth, that which is filtered through water passes into stone in the following manner:—The water which mixes with the earth and is broken up in the process changes into air, and taking this form mounts into its own place. But as there is no surrounding vacuum it thrusts away the neighbouring air, and this being rendered heavy, and, when it is displaced, having been poured around the mass of earth, forcibly compresses it and drives it into the vacant space whence the new air had come up; and the earth when compressed by the air into an indissoluble union with water becomes rock. The fairer sort is that which is made up of equal and similar parts and is transparent; that which has the opposite qualities is inferior. But when all the watery part is suddenly drawn out by fire, a more brittle substance is formed, to which we give the name of pottery. Sometimes also moisture may remain, and the earth which has been fused by fire becomes, when cool, a certain stone of a black colour. A like separation of the water which had been copiously mingled with them may occur in two substances composed of finer particles of earth and of a briny nature; out of either of them a half-solid-body is then formed, soluble in water—the one, soda, which is used for purging away oil and earth, the other, salt, which harmonizes so well in combinations pleasing to the palate, and is, as the law testifies, a substance dear to the gods. The compounds of earth and water are not soluble by water, but by fire only, and for this reason:—Neither fire nor air melt masses of earth; for their particles, being smaller than the interstices in its structure, have plenty of room to move without forcing their way, and so they leave the earth unmelted and undissolved; but particles of water, which are larger, force a passage, and dissolve and melt the earth. Wherefore earth when not consolidated by force is dissolved by water only; when consolidated, by nothing but fire; for this is the only body which can find an entrance. The cohesion of water again, when very strong, is dissolved by fire only—when weaker, then either by air or fire—the former entering the interstices, and the latter penetrating even the triangles. But nothing can dissolve air, when strongly condensed, which does not reach the elements or triangles; or if not strongly condensed, then only fire can dissolve it. As to bodies composed of earth and water, while the water occupies the vacant interstices of the earth in them which are compressed by force, the particles of water which approach them from without, finding no entrance, flow around the entire mass and leave it undissolved; but the particles of fire, entering into the interstices of the water, do to the water what water does to earth and fire to air (The text seems to be corrupt.), and are the sole causes of the compound body of earth and water liquefying and becoming fluid. Now these bodies are of two kinds; some of them, such as glass and the fusible sort of stones, have less water than they have earth; on the other hand, substances of the nature of wax and incense have more of water entering into their composition.

Regarding types of earth, the kind that gets filtered through water transforms into stone in this way: The water that mixes with the earth and breaks it down turns into air, which then rises to its natural place. However, since there isn't any surrounding vacuum, it pushes away the nearby air, making it heavier. When the nearby air is displaced, it spills around the mass of earth, compressing it and forcing it into the empty space where the new air came from; as a result, the compressed earth combines with water to become rock. The higher quality type is made up of equal and similar parts and is transparent, while the opposite qualities indicate inferiority. When all the water is suddenly expelled by fire, a more brittle material is produced, which we call pottery. Sometimes moisture may remain, and when earth is melted by fire and then cools down, it turns into a specific type of black stone. A similar separation of water can occur in two substances made of finer and saltier earth; from either of these, a semi-solid body is formed, which dissolves in water—one being soda, used for cleaning oil and dirt, and the other being salt, which enhances flavors in food and is considered precious by the gods. Compounds of earth and water can only be dissolved by fire, not water. This is because neither fire nor air can melt large masses of earth; their particles are smaller than the gaps in its structure, allowing them to move freely without breaking through, leaving the earth intact; however, water particles are larger, allowing them to break through and dissolve the earth. Therefore, earth that’s not compacted will dissolve only in water, while compacted earth can only be dissolved by fire since it’s the only element that can penetrate it. The strong cohesion of water can only be broken by fire; when it’s weaker, it can be dissolved by either air or fire—the former squeezing into the gaps, and the latter reaching even the smaller structures. Conversely, nothing can dissolve strongly condensed air unless it interacts with the elements or smaller structures; if the air isn’t strongly condensed, then only fire can dissolve it. Concerning bodies that consist of earth and water, while water fills the gaps in the compacted earth, external water particles can’t find entry and instead flow around the entire mass, leaving it undissolved. Particles of fire, however, can enter the gaps in the water and act on it like water acts on earth and fire on air, becoming the sole agents that liquefy the compound of earth and water. These bodies come in two types; some, like glass and certain meltable stones, contain less water than earth, while others, like wax and incense, have a higher water content in their composition.

I have thus shown the various classes of bodies as they are diversified by their forms and combinations and changes into one another, and now I must endeavour to set forth their affections and the causes of them. In the first place, the bodies which I have been describing are necessarily objects of sense. But we have not yet considered the origin of flesh, or what belongs to flesh, or of that part of the soul which is mortal. And these things cannot be adequately explained without also explaining the affections which are concerned with sensation, nor the latter without the former: and yet to explain them together is hardly possible; for which reason we must assume first one or the other and afterwards examine the nature of our hypothesis. In order, then, that the affections may follow regularly after the elements, let us presuppose the existence of body and soul.

I've shown the different types of bodies as they change in form, combine, and transform into each other. Now, I need to explain their properties and what causes them. First off, the bodies I've been discussing are definitely objects we can perceive. However, we haven't looked into the origin of flesh, what it entails, or that part of the soul that’s mortal. We can't fully understand these aspects without also addressing the properties related to sensation, nor can we discuss the latter without the former. Yet, it's not easy to explain them together, so we should start with one of them and then explore the nature of our assumptions. To ensure the properties follow in a logical order from the elements, let's assume the existence of body and soul.

First, let us enquire what we mean by saying that fire is hot; and about this we may reason from the dividing or cutting power which it exercises on our bodies. We all of us feel that fire is sharp; and we may further consider the fineness of the sides, and the sharpness of the angles, and the smallness of the particles, and the swiftness of the motion—all this makes the action of fire violent and sharp, so that it cuts whatever it meets. And we must not forget that the original figure of fire (i.e. the pyramid), more than any other form, has a dividing power which cuts our bodies into small pieces (Kepmatizei), and thus naturally produces that affection which we call heat; and hence the origin of the name (thepmos, Kepma). Now, the opposite of this is sufficiently manifest; nevertheless we will not fail to describe it. For the larger particles of moisture which surround the body, entering in and driving out the lesser, but not being able to take their places, compress the moist principle in us; and this from being unequal and disturbed, is forced by them into a state of rest, which is due to equability and compression. But things which are contracted contrary to nature are by nature at war, and force themselves apart; and to this war and convulsion the name of shivering and trembling is given; and the whole affection and the cause of the affection are both termed cold. That is called hard to which our flesh yields, and soft which yields to our flesh; and things are also termed hard and soft relatively to one another. That which yields has a small base; but that which rests on quadrangular bases is firmly posed and belongs to the class which offers the greatest resistance; so too does that which is the most compact and therefore most repellent. The nature of the light and the heavy will be best understood when examined in connexion with our notions of above and below; for it is quite a mistake to suppose that the universe is parted into two regions, separate from and opposite to each other, the one a lower to which all things tend which have any bulk, and an upper to which things only ascend against their will. For as the universe is in the form of a sphere, all the extremities, being equidistant from the centre, are equally extremities, and the centre, which is equidistant from them, is equally to be regarded as the opposite of them all. Such being the nature of the world, when a person says that any of these points is above or below, may he not be justly charged with using an improper expression? For the centre of the world cannot be rightly called either above or below, but is the centre and nothing else; and the circumference is not the centre, and has in no one part of itself a different relation to the centre from what it has in any of the opposite parts. Indeed, when it is in every direction similar, how can one rightly give to it names which imply opposition? For if there were any solid body in equipoise at the centre of the universe, there would be nothing to draw it to this extreme rather than to that, for they are all perfectly similar; and if a person were to go round the world in a circle, he would often, when standing at the antipodes of his former position, speak of the same point as above and below; for, as I was saying just now, to speak of the whole which is in the form of a globe as having one part above and another below is not like a sensible man. The reason why these names are used, and the circumstances under which they are ordinarily applied by us to the division of the heavens, may be elucidated by the following supposition:—if a person were to stand in that part of the universe which is the appointed place of fire, and where there is the great mass of fire to which fiery bodies gather—if, I say, he were to ascend thither, and, having the power to do this, were to abstract particles of fire and put them in scales and weigh them, and then, raising the balance, were to draw the fire by force towards the uncongenial element of the air, it would be very evident that he could compel the smaller mass more readily than the larger; for when two things are simultaneously raised by one and the same power, the smaller body must necessarily yield to the superior power with less reluctance than the larger; and the larger body is called heavy and said to tend downwards, and the smaller body is called light and said to tend upwards. And we may detect ourselves who are upon the earth doing precisely the same thing. For we often separate earthy natures, and sometimes earth itself, and draw them into the uncongenial element of air by force and contrary to nature, both clinging to their kindred elements. But that which is smaller yields to the impulse given by us towards the dissimilar element more easily than the larger; and so we call the former light, and the place towards which it is impelled we call above, and the contrary state and place we call heavy and below respectively. Now the relations of these must necessarily vary, because the principal masses of the different elements hold opposite positions; for that which is light, heavy, below or above in one place will be found to be and become contrary and transverse and every way diverse in relation to that which is light, heavy, below or above in an opposite place. And about all of them this has to be considered:—that the tendency of each towards its kindred element makes the body which is moved heavy, and the place towards which the motion tends below, but things which have an opposite tendency we call by an opposite name. Such are the causes which we assign to these phenomena. As to the smooth and the rough, any one who sees them can explain the reason of them to another. For roughness is hardness mingled with irregularity, and smoothness is produced by the joint effect of uniformity and density.

First, let's ask what we mean when we say that fire is hot. We can reason this from the cutting power it exerts on our bodies. We all feel that fire is sharp, and we can also consider the fineness of its sides, the sharpness of its angles, the smallness of its particles, and the speed of its movement—all of this makes fire's action violent and sharp, so that it cuts whatever it encounters. We shouldn't forget that the original shape of fire (i.e., the pyramid) has a dividing power that cuts our bodies into small pieces (Kepmatizei), thus naturally creating the sensation we call heat; hence the origin of the name (thepmos, Kepma). Now, the opposite of this is clear; however, we'll still describe it. The larger particles of moisture surrounding the body enter and push out the smaller ones, but since they can't occupy those spaces, they compress the moist essence within us. This, being unequal and disturbed, is forced into a state of rest due to balance and compression. Yet, things that are compressed against their nature are, by nature, at odds and push themselves apart; this struggle and disturbance is called shivering and trembling, and both the sensation and its cause are referred to as cold. That which our flesh yields to is called hard, and that which yields to our flesh is soft; things are also described as hard and soft in relation to one another. Something that yields has a small base; however, what rests on firm bases is stable and belongs to the category that offers the greatest resistance; the same holds for the most compact and therefore most repellent. The nature of light and heavy will be best understood when we relate it to our ideas of above and below; it is quite wrong to think that the universe is split into two separate regions, one lower to which all substantial things are drawn, and one upper to which things ascend against their will. Since the universe is shaped like a sphere, all edges are equidistant from the center, making them all equal edges, and the center, being equidistant from all of them, must also be regarded as opposite to all. Given this nature of the world, when someone claims that any of these points is above or below, can they rightfully be accused of using the wrong terminology? The center of the world can't be correctly labeled as either above or below; it is just the center. The circumference is not the center, and at no point does it relate to the center differently than at any opposing point. In fact, when it is uniform in every direction, how can we justly assign names that suggest opposition? If there were any solid object balanced at the center of the universe, nothing would draw it to one side rather than the other, as they are all entirely equal; and if someone were to circle the globe, they would often, when standing at the exact opposite of their previous position, refer to the same point as both above and below. As I mentioned earlier, it is not reasonable to talk about the whole, which is spherical, having one part above and another below. The reason we use these terms and the conditions under which we typically apply them to the division of the heavens can be illustrated by the following scenario: if someone were to stand in that part of the universe designated for fire, where the large mass of fire attracts fiery bodies—if, I say, they were to ascend there, and could do so, then remove particles of fire and weigh them, before lifting the balance to draw the fire towards the incompatible element of air, it would be clear that they could more easily compel the smaller mass than the larger. When two objects are raised simultaneously by the same force, the smaller one must yield to the greater force with less resistance than the larger; thus, the larger object is labeled heavy and said to fall downwards, while the smaller is labeled light and said to rise. We can observe ourselves on Earth doing precisely this. We often separate earthly materials and sometimes the earth itself, pulling them into the incompatible element of air against their nature, as they cling to their related elements. Yet, the smaller one yields to our force towards the dissimilar element more readily than the larger; hence we call the former light, while the direction it moves towards is called above, and the opposite position and state we term heavy and below, respectively. Now these relationships must vary because the main masses of different elements occupy opposite positions; for what is light, heavy, below, or above in one place will appear contrary, and reversed, and entirely different in relation to what is light, heavy, below, or above in an opposite location. This must be considered for all of them: the tendency of each towards its related element makes the moved body heavy, and the direction of that motion is deemed below, while things with an opposing tendency are called by an opposite name. These are the reasons we attribute to these phenomena. As for smooth and rough, anyone who sees them can explain their reasons to another. Roughness is hardness mixed with irregularity, and smoothness comes from the combined effects of uniformity and density.

The most important of the affections which concern the whole body remains to be considered—that is, the cause of pleasure and pain in the perceptions of which I have been speaking, and in all other things which are perceived by sense through the parts of the body, and have both pains and pleasures attendant on them. Let us imagine the causes of every affection, whether of sense or not, to be of the following nature, remembering that we have already distinguished between the nature which is easy and which is hard to move; for this is the direction in which we must hunt the prey which we mean to take. A body which is of a nature to be easily moved, on receiving an impression however slight, spreads abroad the motion in a circle, the parts communicating with each other, until at last, reaching the principle of mind, they announce the quality of the agent. But a body of the opposite kind, being immobile, and not extending to the surrounding region, merely receives the impression, and does not stir any of the neighbouring parts; and since the parts do not distribute the original impression to other parts, it has no effect of motion on the whole animal, and therefore produces no effect on the patient. This is true of the bones and hair and other more earthy parts of the human body; whereas what was said above relates mainly to sight and hearing, because they have in them the greatest amount of fire and air. Now we must conceive of pleasure and pain in this way. An impression produced in us contrary to nature and violent, if sudden, is painful; and, again, the sudden return to nature is pleasant; but a gentle and gradual return is imperceptible and vice versa. On the other hand the impression of sense which is most easily produced is most readily felt, but is not accompanied by pleasure or pain; such, for example, are the affections of the sight, which, as we said above, is a body naturally uniting with our body in the day-time; for cuttings and burnings and other affections which happen to the sight do not give pain, nor is there pleasure when the sight returns to its natural state; but the sensations are clearest and strongest according to the manner in which the eye is affected by the object, and itself strikes and touches it; there is no violence either in the contraction or dilation of the eye. But bodies formed of larger particles yield to the agent only with a struggle; and then they impart their motions to the whole and cause pleasure and pain—pain when alienated from their natural conditions, and pleasure when restored to them. Things which experience gradual withdrawings and emptyings of their nature, and great and sudden replenishments, fail to perceive the emptying, but are sensible of the replenishment; and so they occasion no pain, but the greatest pleasure, to the mortal part of the soul, as is manifest in the case of perfumes. But things which are changed all of a sudden, and only gradually and with difficulty return to their own nature, have effects in every way opposite to the former, as is evident in the case of burnings and cuttings of the body.

The most important feelings that affect the whole body still need to be discussed—that is, the causes of pleasure and pain in the perceptions I've mentioned, and in all other things perceived by the senses through body parts, which also have accompanying pains and pleasures. Let's consider the causes of every feeling, whether related to the senses or not, keeping in mind that we've already distinguished between what is easy to move and what is hard to move; this is the direction we need to pursue for what we intend to catch. A body that is easy to move will transmit any slight impression in a circular motion, with the parts interacting with each other, until, at last, they reach the mind and reveal the quality of the cause. But a body that is immobile, without reaching into the surrounding area, merely takes in the impression without stirring its neighboring parts; and since the parts don’t share the original impression with other parts, it has no motion effect on the whole organism, and therefore, there is no impact on the person experiencing it. This is especially true for bones, hair, and other denser parts of the human body, while the previous observations mainly apply to sight and hearing because they contain the greatest amounts of fire and air. Now, we should understand pleasure and pain in this way. An impression that goes against nature and is violent, if sudden, is painful; conversely, a sudden return to nature is pleasant, while a gentle and gradual return is hardly noticeable, and vice versa. On the other hand, the most easily produced sensory impression is the most readily felt but doesn’t necessarily bring pleasure or pain; for instance, visual experiences, which, as mentioned earlier, naturally unite with our bodies during the day. Cuts, burns, and other sensations affecting sight do not cause pain, nor do they provide pleasure when sight returns to its natural state; instead, the sensations are most vivid and strongest based on how the eye interacts with the object before it. There’s no violence in how the eye contracts or dilates. However, bodies made of larger particles resist the cause more, and then they share their motions with the whole, producing pleasure and pain—pain when they're taken away from their natural states and pleasure when they return to them. Things that gradually lose their nature and suddenly refill don’t perceive the loss but feel the refill, bringing about no pain, only great pleasure to the mortal part of the soul, as seen with perfumes. But things that change suddenly and only slowly and with difficulty return to their own nature have effects that are completely opposite to the former examples, as is evident in cases of burns and cuts on the body.

Thus have we discussed the general affections of the whole body, and the names of the agents which produce them. And now I will endeavour to speak of the affections of particular parts, and the causes and agents of them, as far as I am able. In the first place let us set forth what was omitted when we were speaking of juices, concerning the affections peculiar to the tongue. These too, like most of the other affections, appear to be caused by certain contractions and dilations, but they have besides more of roughness and smoothness than is found in other affections; for whenever earthy particles enter into the small veins which are the testing instruments of the tongue, reaching to the heart, and fall upon the moist, delicate portions of flesh—when, as they are dissolved, they contract and dry up the little veins, they are astringent if they are rougher, but if not so rough, then only harsh. Those of them which are of an abstergent nature, and purge the whole surface of the tongue, if they do it in excess, and so encroach as to consume some part of the flesh itself, like potash and soda, are all termed bitter. But the particles which are deficient in the alkaline quality, and which cleanse only moderately, are called salt, and having no bitterness or roughness, are regarded as rather agreeable than otherwise. Bodies which share in and are made smooth by the heat of the mouth, and which are inflamed, and again in turn inflame that which heats them, and which are so light that they are carried upwards to the sensations of the head, and cut all that comes in their way, by reason of these qualities in them, are all termed pungent. But when these same particles, refined by putrefaction, enter into the narrow veins, and are duly proportioned to the particles of earth and air which are there, they set them whirling about one another, and while they are in a whirl cause them to dash against and enter into one another, and so form hollows surrounding the particles that enter—which watery vessels of air (for a film of moisture, sometimes earthy, sometimes pure, is spread around the air) are hollow spheres of water; and those of them which are pure, are transparent, and are called bubbles, while those composed of the earthy liquid, which is in a state of general agitation and effervescence, are said to boil or ferment—of all these affections the cause is termed acid. And there is the opposite affection arising from an opposite cause, when the mass of entering particles, immersed in the moisture of the mouth, is congenial to the tongue, and smooths and oils over the roughness, and relaxes the parts which are unnaturally contracted, and contracts the parts which are relaxed, and disposes them all according to their nature;—that sort of remedy of violent affections is pleasant and agreeable to every man, and has the name sweet. But enough of this.

So we've talked about the general feelings of the whole body and the names of the agents that cause them. Now, I will try to discuss the sensations of specific parts and their causes and agents, as much as I can. First, let’s address what we missed when we discussed juices, particularly the sensations unique to the tongue. These sensations, like many others, seem to be caused by certain contractions and expansions, but they also have more roughness and smoothness than is found in other sensations. When earthy particles enter the small veins of the tongue, which test sensations that connect to the heart, and settle on the moist, delicate flesh—As they dissolve, if they contract and dry up the little veins, they are astringent if they are rougher, but if they are not so rough, then they are merely harsh. Those that have a cleansing nature and clear the entire surface of the tongue, if they do so excessively and consume some part of the flesh itself, like potash and soda, are all called bitter. However, particles lacking the alkaline quality, which cleanse only moderately, are called salt and, having no bitterness or roughness, are seen as rather pleasant. Substances that are smoothed by the heat of the mouth, that become inflamed, and in turn inflame what heats them, and are so light that they rise to the head’s sensations, cutting through everything in their path due to these qualities, are all called pungent. But when these same particles, refined by decay, enter the narrow veins and are proportionate to the earth and air particles present, they cause them to swirl around each other, making them collide and merge, forming hollows around the entering particles—these watery vessels of air (since a film of moisture, sometimes earthy, sometimes pure, is spread around the air) create hollow spheres of water; those that are pure are transparent and called bubbles, while those made of the earthy liquid, agitated and effervescing, are said to boil or ferment—these sensations are all caused by acidity. Conversely, the opposite sensation arises from a different cause, when the mass of particles entering, mingling with the moisture in the mouth, is compatible with the tongue, smoothing and lubricating the roughness while relaxing overly tense areas and tightening those that are slack, arranging them according to their nature; this sort of remedy for intense feelings is pleasant and agreeable to everyone, and is called sweet. But that’s enough about this.

The faculty of smell does not admit of differences of kind; for all smells are of a half-formed nature, and no element is so proportioned as to have any smell. The veins about the nose are too narrow to admit earth and water, and too wide to detain fire and air; and for this reason no one ever perceives the smell of any of them; but smells always proceed from bodies that are damp, or putrefying, or liquefying, or evaporating, and are perceptible only in the intermediate state, when water is changing into air and air into water; and all of them are either vapour or mist. That which is passing out of air into water is mist, and that which is passing from water into air is vapour; and hence all smells are thinner than water and thicker than air. The proof of this is, that when there is any obstruction to the respiration, and a man draws in his breath by force, then no smell filters through, but the air without the smell alone penetrates. Wherefore the varieties of smell have no name, and they have not many, or definite and simple kinds; but they are distinguished only as painful and pleasant, the one sort irritating and disturbing the whole cavity which is situated between the head and the navel, the other having a soothing influence, and restoring this same region to an agreeable and natural condition.

The sense of smell doesn’t differentiate between types; all smells are somewhat unclear, and no element is arranged in a way that it has a specific scent. The blood vessels around the nose are too narrow to let in earth and water, and too wide to hold back fire and air; that's why we can’t really smell any of those things. Instead, smells come from substances that are damp, decaying, liquefying, or evaporating, and they can only be detected in that in-between state when water turns into air and air turns into water; all of them are either vapor or mist. What is transitioning from air to water is mist, and what is transitioning from water to air is vapor; therefore, all smells are lighter than water and heavier than air. The proof is that when there's any blockage in breathing, and a person inhales forcefully, no smell gets through, only odorless air gets in. For this reason, different smells don’t have specific names, nor do they consist of many distinct or simple categories; instead, they are only classified as pleasant or unpleasant, with one kind causing irritation and disturbance in the entire area between the head and the navel, while the other has a calming effect, bringing this same area back to a pleasant and natural state.

In considering the third kind of sense, hearing, we must speak of the causes in which it originates. We may in general assume sound to be a blow which passes through the ears, and is transmitted by means of the air, the brain, and the blood, to the soul, and that hearing is the vibration of this blow, which begins in the head and ends in the region of the liver. The sound which moves swiftly is acute, and the sound which moves slowly is grave, and that which is regular is equable and smooth, and the reverse is harsh. A great body of sound is loud, and a small body of sound the reverse. Respecting the harmonies of sound I must hereafter speak.

When we look at the third type of sense, hearing, we need to talk about what causes it. Generally, we can think of sound as a wave that goes through the ears and is carried by the air, the brain, and the blood to the soul. Hearing is the vibration of this wave, starting in the head and ending near the liver. Sounds that travel fast are high-pitched, while those that travel slowly are low-pitched, and sounds that are steady are smooth, while irregular sounds are harsh. A loud sound has a lot of energy, and a quiet sound has less. I will discuss sound harmonies later.

There is a fourth class of sensible things, having many intricate varieties, which must now be distinguished. They are called by the general name of colours, and are a flame which emanates from every sort of body, and has particles corresponding to the sense of sight. I have spoken already, in what has preceded, of the causes which generate sight, and in this place it will be natural and suitable to give a rational theory of colours.

There is a fourth category of tangible things, with many complex variations, that we need to identify. They are collectively referred to as colors, which are a kind of light that comes from all types of objects and has particles that relate to our sense of sight. I have already discussed the causes that create vision in what was previously mentioned, and now it makes sense to present a logical theory of colors.

Of the particles coming from other bodies which fall upon the sight, some are smaller and some are larger, and some are equal to the parts of the sight itself. Those which are equal are imperceptible, and we call them transparent. The larger produce contraction, the smaller dilation, in the sight, exercising a power akin to that of hot and cold bodies on the flesh, or of astringent bodies on the tongue, or of those heating bodies which we termed pungent. White and black are similar effects of contraction and dilation in another sphere, and for this reason have a different appearance. Wherefore, we ought to term white that which dilates the visual ray, and the opposite of this is black. There is also a swifter motion of a different sort of fire which strikes and dilates the ray of sight until it reaches the eyes, forcing a way through their passages and melting them, and eliciting from them a union of fire and water which we call tears, being itself an opposite fire which comes to them from an opposite direction—the inner fire flashes forth like lightning, and the outer finds a way in and is extinguished in the moisture, and all sorts of colours are generated by the mixture. This affection is termed dazzling, and the object which produces it is called bright and flashing. There is another sort of fire which is intermediate, and which reaches and mingles with the moisture of the eye without flashing; and in this, the fire mingling with the ray of the moisture, produces a colour like blood, to which we give the name of red. A bright hue mingled with red and white gives the colour called auburn (Greek). The law of proportion, however, according to which the several colours are formed, even if a man knew he would be foolish in telling, for he could not give any necessary reason, nor indeed any tolerable or probable explanation of them. Again, red, when mingled with black and white, becomes purple, but it becomes umber (Greek) when the colours are burnt as well as mingled and the black is more thoroughly mixed with them. Flame-colour (Greek) is produced by a union of auburn and dun (Greek), and dun by an admixture of black and white; pale yellow (Greek), by an admixture of white and auburn. White and bright meeting, and falling upon a full black, become dark blue (Greek), and when dark blue mingles with white, a light blue (Greek) colour is formed, as flame-colour with black makes leek green (Greek). There will be no difficulty in seeing how and by what mixtures the colours derived from these are made according to the rules of probability. He, however, who should attempt to verify all this by experiment, would forget the difference of the human and divine nature. For God only has the knowledge and also the power which are able to combine many things into one and again resolve the one into many. But no man either is or ever will be able to accomplish either the one or the other operation.

Of the particles coming from other bodies that fall into our sight, some are smaller, some are larger, and some are the same size as the components of our sight itself. The ones that are the same size are imperceptible, and we call them transparent. The larger particles cause contraction, while the smaller ones cause dilation in our sight, exerting an effect similar to that of hot and cold objects on the skin, or astringent substances on the tongue, or the warming substances we call pungent. White and black produce similar effects of contraction and dilation in a different realm, which is why they appear different. Therefore, we should call white what dilates the visual ray, while black is its opposite. There’s also a faster type of fire that strikes and expands the sight ray until it reaches the eyes, forcing its way through their openings and melting them, leading to a combination of fire and water that we call tears. This is an opposing fire that comes from the opposite direction—inner fire flashes out like lightning, while the outer fire enters and gets extinguished in the moisture, creating a mix of colors. This condition is called dazzling, and the object that causes it is referred to as bright and flashing. There’s another type of fire that’s more moderate, which reaches and combines with the moisture of the eye without flashing; in this case, the fire combined with the moisture ray produces a color like blood, which we call red. A bright hue mixed with red and white yields a color called auburn. However, the law of proportion that determines how these colors are formed is something a person would be foolish to explain, as they wouldn’t be able to provide a necessary reason or even a decent or probable explanation. Again, when red mixes with black and white, it turns purple, but it becomes umber when the colors are burned and more thoroughly mixed with black. Flame color is produced by a mix of auburn and dun, and dun comes from mixing black and white; pale yellow is created by combining white and auburn. When white and bright collide with deep black, they turn dark blue, and when dark blue mixes with white, light blue is produced, just as flame color mixed with black results in leek green. It won’t be hard to see how these colors are created through various mixtures according to the rules of probability. However, anyone who tries to verify all this through experimentation would overlook the difference between human and divine nature. Only God possesses the knowledge and power to combine many things into one and then break that one back into many. No human can accomplish either task.

These are the elements, thus of necessity then subsisting, which the creator of the fairest and best of created things associated with himself, when he made the self-sufficing and most perfect God, using the necessary causes as his ministers in the accomplishment of his work, but himself contriving the good in all his creations. Wherefore we may distinguish two sorts of causes, the one divine and the other necessary, and may seek for the divine in all things, as far as our nature admits, with a view to the blessed life; but the necessary kind only for the sake of the divine, considering that without them and when isolated from them, these higher things for which we look cannot be apprehended or received or in any way shared by us.

These are the essential elements that necessarily exist, which the creator of the most beautiful and best of created things associated with himself when he made the self-sufficient and most perfect God, using necessary causes as his helpers to complete his work, while he himself designed the goodness in all his creations. Therefore, we can identify two types of causes—one divine and the other necessary—and we can search for the divine in everything, as much as our nature allows, aiming for a blessed life; but we seek the necessary causes only for the sake of the divine, recognizing that without them and apart from them, we cannot understand, receive, or share in those higher things we seek.

Seeing, then, that we have now prepared for our use the various classes of causes which are the material out of which the remainder of our discourse must be woven, just as wood is the material of the carpenter, let us revert in a few words to the point at which we began, and then endeavour to add on a suitable ending to the beginning of our tale.

Seeing that we have now gathered the different types of causes that are the foundation for the rest of our discussion, just like wood is for a carpenter, let's briefly return to where we started and then try to add a fitting conclusion to the beginning of our story.

As I said at first, when all things were in disorder God created in each thing in relation to itself, and in all things in relation to each other, all the measures and harmonies which they could possibly receive. For in those days nothing had any proportion except by accident; nor did any of the things which now have names deserve to be named at all—as, for example, fire, water, and the rest of the elements. All these the creator first set in order, and out of them he constructed the universe, which was a single animal comprehending in itself all other animals, mortal and immortal. Now of the divine, he himself was the creator, but the creation of the mortal he committed to his offspring. And they, imitating him, received from him the immortal principle of the soul; and around this they proceeded to fashion a mortal body, and made it to be the vehicle of the soul, and constructed within the body a soul of another nature which was mortal, subject to terrible and irresistible affections,—first of all, pleasure, the greatest incitement to evil; then, pain, which deters from good; also rashness and fear, two foolish counsellors, anger hard to be appeased, and hope easily led astray;—these they mingled with irrational sense and with all-daring love according to necessary laws, and so framed man. Wherefore, fearing to pollute the divine any more than was absolutely unavoidable, they gave to the mortal nature a separate habitation in another part of the body, placing the neck between them to be the isthmus and boundary, which they constructed between the head and breast, to keep them apart. And in the breast, and in what is termed the thorax, they encased the mortal soul; and as the one part of this was superior and the other inferior they divided the cavity of the thorax into two parts, as the women’s and men’s apartments are divided in houses, and placed the midriff to be a wall of partition between them. That part of the inferior soul which is endowed with courage and passion and loves contention they settled nearer the head, midway between the midriff and the neck, in order that it might be under the rule of reason and might join with it in controlling and restraining the desires when they are no longer willing of their own accord to obey the word of command issuing from the citadel.

As I mentioned earlier, when everything was chaotic, God created order in relation to everything on its own and in relation to each other, establishing all the measures and harmonies they could possibly have. Back then, nothing had any proper proportion except by chance, and none of the things we now call by name—like fire, water, and the other elements—truly deserved those names. The creator first organized all these elements and used them to build the universe, which functioned as a single living organism containing all other creatures, both mortal and immortal. While God himself was the creator of the divine, he entrusted the creation of mortals to his offspring. They, following his example, received the immortal essence of the soul from him and began to shape a mortal body around it, making it the vessel for the soul. Within this body, they created another kind of soul that was mortal, subjected to intense and unavoidable emotions—first and foremost, pleasure, the greatest temptation toward evil; then pain, which discourages good; along with rashness and fear, two foolish advisors; anger that is hard to calm; and hope that's easily misguided. They mixed these with irrational desires and an audacious kind of love according to necessary laws, and thus they formed humanity. To avoid tainting the divine more than absolutely necessary, they gave the mortal nature a separate space in another part of the body, placing the neck between them as a boundary, which they designed to separate the head from the chest. In the chest, or the thorax, they encased the mortal soul. Since one aspect was superior and the other was inferior, they divided the thoracic cavity into two parts, much like how a house divides men's and women's quarters, using the diaphragm as a partition between them. The part of the inferior soul that holds courage and passion and craves conflict was positioned closer to the head, halfway between the diaphragm and the neck, so it could be governed by reason and work together with it to control and restrain desires when they are no longer willing to obey the commands from the mind's stronghold.

The heart, the knot of the veins and the fountain of the blood which races through all the limbs, was set in the place of guard, that when the might of passion was roused by reason making proclamation of any wrong assailing them from without or being perpetrated by the desires within, quickly the whole power of feeling in the body, perceiving these commands and threats, might obey and follow through every turn and alley, and thus allow the principle of the best to have the command in all of them. But the gods, foreknowing that the palpitation of the heart in the expectation of danger and the swelling and excitement of passion was caused by fire, formed and implanted as a supporter to the heart the lung, which was, in the first place, soft and bloodless, and also had within hollows like the pores of a sponge, in order that by receiving the breath and the drink, it might give coolness and the power of respiration and alleviate the heat. Wherefore they cut the air-channels leading to the lung, and placed the lung about the heart as a soft spring, that, when passion was rife within, the heart, beating against a yielding body, might be cooled and suffer less, and might thus become more ready to join with passion in the service of reason.

The heart, the center of the veins and the source of the blood that flows through all the limbs, was positioned as a guard so that when the strength of emotion was stirred by reason pointing out any external wrongs or desires from within, the entire emotional capacity of the body, recognizing these commands and threats, could respond and navigate through every twist and turn, allowing the principle of the best to lead. However, the gods, knowing that the throbbing of the heart in anticipation of danger and the surge of emotion was fueled by fire, created and placed the lungs as a support for the heart. The lungs were initially soft and bloodless, and had hollows like sponge pores, so that by taking in breath and drink, they could provide coolness and enable breathing while easing the heat. Therefore, they connected the air passages to the lungs and positioned the lungs around the heart as a soft spring, so that when emotions were intense, the heart could beat against a yielding structure, be cooled, suffer less, and thus become more willing to align with emotions in serving reason.

The part of the soul which desires meats and drinks and the other things of which it has need by reason of the bodily nature, they placed between the midriff and the boundary of the navel, contriving in all this region a sort of manger for the food of the body; and there they bound it down like a wild animal which was chained up with man, and must be nourished if man was to exist. They appointed this lower creation his place here in order that he might be always feeding at the manger, and have his dwelling as far as might be from the council-chamber, making as little noise and disturbance as possible, and permitting the best part to advise quietly for the good of the whole. And knowing that this lower principle in man would not comprehend reason, and even if attaining to some degree of perception would never naturally care for rational notions, but that it would be led away by phantoms and visions night and day,—to be a remedy for this, God combined with it the liver, and placed it in the house of the lower nature, contriving that it should be solid and smooth, and bright and sweet, and should also have a bitter quality, in order that the power of thought, which proceeds from the mind, might be reflected as in a mirror which receives likenesses of objects and gives back images of them to the sight; and so might strike terror into the desires, when, making use of the bitter part of the liver, to which it is akin, it comes threatening and invading, and diffusing this bitter element swiftly through the whole liver produces colours like bile, and contracting every part makes it wrinkled and rough; and twisting out of its right place and contorting the lobe and closing and shutting up the vessels and gates, causes pain and loathing. And the converse happens when some gentle inspiration of the understanding pictures images of an opposite character, and allays the bile and bitterness by refusing to stir or touch the nature opposed to itself, but by making use of the natural sweetness of the liver, corrects all things and makes them to be right and smooth and free, and renders the portion of the soul which resides about the liver happy and joyful, enabling it to pass the night in peace, and to practise divination in sleep, inasmuch as it has no share in mind and reason. For the authors of our being, remembering the command of their father when he bade them create the human race as good as they could, that they might correct our inferior parts and make them to attain a measure of truth, placed in the liver the seat of divination. And herein is a proof that God has given the art of divination not to the wisdom, but to the foolishness of man. No man, when in his wits, attains prophetic truth and inspiration; but when he receives the inspired word, either his intelligence is enthralled in sleep, or he is demented by some distemper or possession. And he who would understand what he remembers to have been said, whether in a dream or when he was awake, by the prophetic and inspired nature, or would determine by reason the meaning of the apparitions which he has seen, and what indications they afford to this man or that, of past, present or future good and evil, must first recover his wits. But, while he continues demented, he cannot judge of the visions which he sees or the words which he utters; the ancient saying is very true, that ‘only a man who has his wits can act or judge about himself and his own affairs.’ And for this reason it is customary to appoint interpreters to be judges of the true inspiration. Some persons call them prophets; they are quite unaware that they are only the expositors of dark sayings and visions, and are not to be called prophets at all, but only interpreters of prophecy.

The part of the soul that craves food and drink, along with other necessities related to our physical nature, is located between the diaphragm and the navel, where they've created a sort of trough for the body's sustenance. It's like they've kept this part chained up like a wild animal that needs to be fed for survival. They assigned this lower aspect of us a place where it would always be focused on eating, far removed from the reasoning part, so it would create as little disturbance as possible, allowing the higher part to quietly make decisions for the good of the whole. Understanding that this lower aspect wouldn’t grasp logic, and even if it managed to understand some things, it wouldn't naturally care about rational thoughts—being easily misled by dreams and illusions—they paired it with the liver. They placed the liver in this lower region, making it solid, smooth, bright, and sweet, but with also a bitter quality. This was meant to allow the power of thought, which comes from the mind, to be reflected like a mirror that shows images back to the viewer. This way, it could instill fear in desires. When the bitter part of the liver is engaged, it spreads this bitter essence quickly throughout the liver, creating a look akin to bile, tightening everything and making it wrinkled and rough, while also twisting and contorting the lobe, closing off the vessels, causing pain and discomfort. Conversely, when a gentle inspiration comes, it presents calm images, soothing the bile and bitterness by avoiding conflict with its nature, using the natural sweetness of the liver instead, correcting all things and making them smooth and free, allowing the part of the soul around the liver to feel happy and joyful, enabling peaceful sleep and the ability to gain insights during dreams, as it doesn't engage with reasoning. The creators of us, keeping in mind their father's command to make humanity as good as possible, so they could refine our lower parts and help them reach some truth, placed divination in the liver. This shows that God has given the ability to divine not to human wisdom, but rather to their folly. No one in their clear mind can understand prophetic truth; when they do receive a prophetic voice, they are either asleep or affected by some madness or possession. Anyone who wishes to make sense of what they recall being said—whether in a dream or while awake—by prophetic inspiration or would decipher what their visions mean for themselves or others regarding past, present, or future events, must first regain their senses. Yet, while they remain in a confused state, they cannot judge the visions they experience or the words they express; the old saying holds true that ‘only someone who is in their right mind can act or judge concerning their own affairs.’ Therefore, it's common to appoint interpreters to assess true inspiration. Some call them prophets; they don’t realize they are merely interpreters of obscure messages and visions, not real prophets at all, but simply interpreters of prophecy.

Such is the nature of the liver, which is placed as we have described in order that it may give prophetic intimations. During the life of each individual these intimations are plainer, but after his death the liver becomes blind, and delivers oracles too obscure to be intelligible. The neighbouring organ (the spleen) is situated on the left-hand side, and is constructed with a view of keeping the liver bright and pure,—like a napkin, always ready prepared and at hand to clean the mirror. And hence, when any impurities arise in the region of the liver by reason of disorders of the body, the loose nature of the spleen, which is composed of a hollow and bloodless tissue, receives them all and clears them away, and when filled with the unclean matter, swells and festers, but, again, when the body is purged, settles down into the same place as before, and is humbled.

The liver has a specific role, as we've mentioned, providing prophetic insights. When a person is alive, these insights are clearer, but after death, the liver becomes unresponsive and offers vague predictions that are hard to understand. The spleen, located on the left side, works to keep the liver clean and healthy—like a napkin ready to wipe a mirror. Therefore, when impurities develop in the liver due to bodily issues, the spleen, which has a loose and bloodless structure, absorbs them and clears them out. When it becomes filled with these impurities, it swells and festers, but once the body is cleansed, it returns to its original state and becomes less enlarged.

Concerning the soul, as to which part is mortal and which divine, and how and why they are separated, and where located, if God acknowledges that we have spoken the truth, then, and then only, can we be confident; still, we may venture to assert that what has been said by us is probable, and will be rendered more probable by investigation. Let us assume thus much.

Concerning the soul, specifically which part is mortal and which is divine, how and why they are separated, and where they are located, if God confirms that we have spoken the truth, then, and only then, can we be confident; still, we might dare to say that what we've stated is likely, and will become more likely through further study. Let us assume this much.

The creation of the rest of the body follows next in order, and this we may investigate in a similar manner. And it appears to be very meet that the body should be framed on the following principles:—

The creation of the rest of the body comes next, and we can examine it in a similar way. It seems very appropriate that the body should be formed based on the following principles:—

The authors of our race were aware that we should be intemperate in eating and drinking, and take a good deal more than was necessary or proper, by reason of gluttony. In order then that disease might not quickly destroy us, and lest our mortal race should perish without fulfilling its end—intending to provide against this, the gods made what is called the lower belly, to be a receptacle for the superfluous meat and drink, and formed the convolution of the bowels, so that the food might be prevented from passing quickly through and compelling the body to require more food, thus producing insatiable gluttony, and making the whole race an enemy to philosophy and music, and rebellious against the divinest element within us.

The creators of humanity knew that we would indulge overboard in food and drink, often consuming more than was necessary or appropriate due to gluttony. To prevent disease from swiftly taking us and to ensure our species didn’t vanish before fulfilling its purpose, the gods designed what we call the lower belly as a storage space for excess food and drink. They also shaped the intestines so that food wouldn’t pass through too quickly, forcing our bodies to crave more and leading to endless gluttony. This behavior makes our entire species hostile toward philosophy and music, and defiant against the divine spark within us.

The bones and flesh, and other similar parts of us, were made as follows. The first principle of all of them was the generation of the marrow. For the bonds of life which unite the soul with the body are made fast there, and they are the root and foundation of the human race. The marrow itself is created out of other materials: God took such of the primary triangles as were straight and smooth, and were adapted by their perfection to produce fire and water, and air and earth—these, I say, he separated from their kinds, and mingling them in due proportions with one another, made the marrow out of them to be a universal seed of the whole race of mankind; and in this seed he then planted and enclosed the souls, and in the original distribution gave to the marrow as many and various forms as the different kinds of souls were hereafter to receive. That which, like a field, was to receive the divine seed, he made round every way, and called that portion of the marrow, brain, intending that, when an animal was perfected, the vessel containing this substance should be the head; but that which was intended to contain the remaining and mortal part of the soul he distributed into figures at once round and elongated, and he called them all by the name ‘marrow’; and to these, as to anchors, fastening the bonds of the whole soul, he proceeded to fashion around them the entire framework of our body, constructing for the marrow, first of all a complete covering of bone.

The bones, flesh, and other similar parts of us were created like this. The first principle behind all of them was the generation of marrow. The bonds of life that connect the soul to the body are anchored there, serving as the root and foundation of the human race. The marrow itself is formed from other materials: God took the straight and smooth primary triangles that were perfect for producing fire, water, air, and earth—these, I say, He separated from their kinds, and by mixing them in the right proportions, created the marrow as a universal seed for all of mankind; in this seed, He then planted and enclosed the souls, and in the original distribution, He gave the marrow as many and different forms as the various types of souls would later take on. The part that was meant to receive the divine seed, He made round in every direction and called that part of the marrow the brain, intending that when an animal was fully formed, the vessel containing this substance would be the head; the remaining and mortal part of the soul was distributed into both round and elongated shapes, all of which were called 'marrow'; and to these, as to anchors, fastening the bonds of the whole soul, He proceeded to shape the entire framework of our body, first constructing a complete covering of bone for the marrow.

Bone was composed by him in the following manner. Having sifted pure and smooth earth he kneaded it and wetted it with marrow, and after that he put it into fire and then into water, and once more into fire and again into water—in this way by frequent transfers from one to the other he made it insoluble by either. Out of this he fashioned, as in a lathe, a globe made of bone, which he placed around the brain, and in this he left a narrow opening; and around the marrow of the neck and back he formed vertebrae which he placed under one another like pivots, beginning at the head and extending through the whole of the trunk. Thus wishing to preserve the entire seed, he enclosed it in a stone-like casing, inserting joints, and using in the formation of them the power of the other or diverse as an intermediate nature, that they might have motion and flexure. Then again, considering that the bone would be too brittle and inflexible, and when heated and again cooled would soon mortify and destroy the seed within—having this in view, he contrived the sinews and the flesh, that so binding all the members together by the sinews, which admitted of being stretched and relaxed about the vertebrae, he might thus make the body capable of flexion and extension, while the flesh would serve as a protection against the summer heat and against the winter cold, and also against falls, softly and easily yielding to external bodies, like articles made of felt; and containing in itself a warm moisture which in summer exudes and makes the surface damp, would impart a natural coolness to the whole body; and again in winter by the help of this internal warmth would form a very tolerable defence against the frost which surrounds it and attacks it from without. He who modelled us, considering these things, mixed earth with fire and water and blended them; and making a ferment of acid and salt, he mingled it with them and formed soft and succulent flesh. As for the sinews, he made them of a mixture of bone and unfermented flesh, attempered so as to be in a mean, and gave them a yellow colour; wherefore the sinews have a firmer and more glutinous nature than flesh, but a softer and moister nature than the bones. With these God covered the bones and marrow, binding them together by sinews, and then enshrouded them all in an upper covering of flesh. The more living and sensitive of the bones he enclosed in the thinnest film of flesh, and those which had the least life within them in the thickest and most solid flesh. So again on the joints of the bones, where reason indicated that no more was required, he placed only a thin covering of flesh, that it might not interfere with the flexion of our bodies and make them unwieldy because difficult to move; and also that it might not, by being crowded and pressed and matted together, destroy sensation by reason of its hardness, and impair the memory and dull the edge of intelligence. Wherefore also the thighs and the shanks and the hips, and the bones of the arms and the forearms, and other parts which have no joints, and the inner bones, which on account of the rarity of the soul in the marrow are destitute of reason—all these are abundantly provided with flesh; but such as have mind in them are in general less fleshy, except where the creator has made some part solely of flesh in order to give sensation,—as, for example, the tongue. But commonly this is not the case. For the nature which comes into being and grows up in us by a law of necessity, does not admit of the combination of solid bone and much flesh with acute perceptions. More than any other part the framework of the head would have had them, if they could have co-existed, and the human race, having a strong and fleshy and sinewy head, would have had a life twice or many times as long as it now has, and also more healthy and free from pain. But our creators, considering whether they should make a longer-lived race which was worse, or a shorter-lived race which was better, came to the conclusion that every one ought to prefer a shorter span of life, which was better, to a longer one, which was worse; and therefore they covered the head with thin bone, but not with flesh and sinews, since it had no joints; and thus the head was added, having more wisdom and sensation than the rest of the body, but also being in every man far weaker. For these reasons and after this manner God placed the sinews at the extremity of the head, in a circle round the neck, and glued them together by the principle of likeness and fastened the extremities of the jawbones to them below the face, and the other sinews he dispersed throughout the body, fastening limb to limb. The framers of us framed the mouth, as now arranged, having teeth and tongue and lips, with a view to the necessary and the good contriving the way in for necessary purposes, the way out for the best purposes; for that is necessary which enters in and gives food to the body; but the river of speech, which flows out of a man and ministers to the intelligence, is the fairest and noblest of all streams. Still the head could neither be left a bare frame of bones, on account of the extremes of heat and cold in the different seasons, nor yet be allowed to be wholly covered, and so become dull and senseless by reason of an overgrowth of flesh. The fleshy nature was not therefore wholly dried up, but a large sort of peel was parted off and remained over, which is now called the skin. This met and grew by the help of the cerebral moisture, and became the circular envelopment of the head. And the moisture, rising up under the sutures, watered and closed in the skin upon the crown, forming a sort of knot. The diversity of the sutures was caused by the power of the courses of the soul and of the food, and the more these struggled against one another the more numerous they became, and fewer if the struggle were less violent. This skin the divine power pierced all round with fire, and out of the punctures which were thus made the moisture issued forth, and the liquid and heat which was pure came away, and a mixed part which was composed of the same material as the skin, and had a fineness equal to the punctures, was borne up by its own impulse and extended far outside the head, but being too slow to escape, was thrust back by the external air, and rolled up underneath the skin, where it took root. Thus the hair sprang up in the skin, being akin to it because it is like threads of leather, but rendered harder and closer through the pressure of the cold, by which each hair, while in process of separation from the skin, is compressed and cooled. Wherefore the creator formed the head hairy, making use of the causes which I have mentioned, and reflecting also that instead of flesh the brain needed the hair to be a light covering or guard, which would give shade in summer and shelter in winter, and at the same time would not impede our quickness of perception. From the combination of sinew, skin, and bone, in the structure of the finger, there arises a triple compound, which, when dried up, takes the form of one hard skin partaking of all three natures, and was fabricated by these second causes, but designed by mind which is the principal cause with an eye to the future. For our creators well knew that women and other animals would some day be framed out of men, and they further knew that many animals would require the use of nails for many purposes; wherefore they fashioned in men at their first creation the rudiments of nails. For this purpose and for these reasons they caused skin, hair, and nails to grow at the extremities of the limbs.

Bone was made by him in the following way. After sifting smooth, pure earth, he kneaded it and moistened it with marrow. Then he placed it first in fire and then in water, and repeated this process, transferring it back and forth until it became insoluble in either. From this material, he shaped, like on a lathe, a bone sphere that he positioned around the brain, leaving a narrow opening. He then formed vertebrae around the neck and back, stacking them like pivots from the head down through the torso. To protect the entire seed, he enclosed it in a stone-like shell, adding joints and using various materials as intermediates so they could move and bend. Knowing that bone would be too fragile and stiff, and that heating and cooling it would eventually damage the seed inside, he created muscles and tendons, binding the parts together with tendons that could stretch and relax around the vertebrae. This gave the body the ability to flex and extend, while the flesh protected against summer heat, winter cold, and falls, yielding softly to external forces like felt. It also contained warm moisture that, in summer, would seep out to cool the body, while in winter, this inner warmth offered a decent defense against the cold outside. The one who shaped us took these considerations into account, mixing earth with fire and water, blending them together; he combined acid and salt to create soft, succulent flesh. For the tendons, he used a mixture of bone and unfermented flesh, balanced in between, and gave them a yellow hue; thus, tendons became tougher and stickier than flesh, yet softer and moister than bones. With these, God covered the bones and marrow, binding them with tendons, and then wrapped everything in a layer of flesh. The more sensitive bones were shielded by a thin layer of flesh, while those with less life received thicker, denser flesh. On the joints of the bones, where it was clear that less was needed, he applied only a thin layer of flesh so it wouldn’t hinder movement and make the body clumsy, nor would it become pressed and compacted to the point of dulling sensation, impairing memory, or blunting intelligence. Therefore, the thighs, shins, hips, arm bones, forearms, and other parts without joints, and the inner bones—which lack reasoning due to the soul’s rarity in the marrow—all received plenty of flesh; while bones that contained mind tended to have less flesh, except where the creator made specific parts solely of flesh for sensation, like the tongue. However, this isn’t always the case. The nature that develops within us by necessity doesn’t allow for a combination of solid bone and excessive flesh with sharp perceptions. The head's framework would have had the most of these features had they been compatible, leading to a human race with a strong, fleshy, sinewy head, living potentially much longer and healthier lives. But the creators debated whether to create a longer-lived but inferior race or a shorter-lived but better one, ultimately deciding that everyone should prefer a shorter, better life; hence they covered the head with thin bone rather than flesh and sinews, as it had no joints. This way, the head was more aware and insightful than the rest of the body, but also considerably weaker in every individual. For these reasons, and in this fashion, God placed the tendons at the base of the head, in a circular arrangement around the neck, binding them together by similarity, connecting the jawbone ends to them beneath the face, and spreading the other tendons throughout the body, attaching limb to limb. The creators designed the mouth we see today, featuring teeth, a tongue, and lips for necessary functions and optimal outcomes; food enters to nourish the body, while the stream of speech that flows out serves the intellect, being the noblest of all currents. Still, the head could neither be left as a bare bone structure due to extreme temperatures in various seasons, nor could it become completely covered and thus lose its sensation from an excess of flesh. The fleshy nature wasn’t totally dried up; rather, a thick layer called skin was formed. This skin developed and grew with the help of the brain's moisture and formed a circular covering over the head. The moisture rose under the sutures, moisturizing the skin on the crown, forming a kind of knot. The different sutures were caused by the soul's processes and nourishment; the more they clashed, the more numerous they became, and fewer when the conflict was milder. The divine power punctured this skin all around with fire; from these punctures, moisture escaped, along with pure liquid and heat. A mixed material, similar to the skin and matching the puncture size, rose up but was too slow to get away, pushed back by outside air, and rolled back under the skin, where it settled. Therefore, hair grew out of the skin, related to it like leather threads but became harder and denser due to cold pressure, compressing and cooling each hair as it separated from the skin. Thus the creator made the head hairy, using these causes and considering that instead of flesh, the brain required hair as a light covering for shade in summer and warmth in winter, without hindering our quickness of perception. The combination of tendons, skin, and bone in the structure of the finger created a triple blend, which, when dried, forms a single hard layer incorporating all three elements, fabricated by these secondary causes but designed by the mind, which is the primary cause, with future considerations. The creators understood that women and other animals would eventually be made from men, and that many animals would need nails for various purposes; thus, they incorporated the early forms of nails into men's designs. For these reasons, they caused skin, hair, and nails to grow at the ends of the limbs.

And now that all the parts and members of the mortal animal had come together, since its life of necessity consisted of fire and breath, and it therefore wasted away by dissolution and depletion, the gods contrived the following remedy: They mingled a nature akin to that of man with other forms and perceptions, and thus created another kind of animal. These are the trees and plants and seeds which have been improved by cultivation and are now domesticated among us; anciently there were only the wild kinds, which are older than the cultivated. For everything that partakes of life may be truly called a living being, and the animal of which we are now speaking partakes of the third kind of soul, which is said to be seated between the midriff and the navel, having no part in opinion or reason or mind, but only in feelings of pleasure and pain and the desires which accompany them. For this nature is always in a passive state, revolving in and about itself, repelling the motion from without and using its own, and accordingly is not endowed by nature with the power of observing or reflecting on its own concerns. Wherefore it lives and does not differ from a living being, but is fixed and rooted in the same spot, having no power of self-motion.

And now that all the parts and members of the living creature had come together, since its life was made up of fire and breath, and it was therefore subject to decay and depletion, the gods came up with the following solution: They mixed a nature similar to that of humans with other forms and perceptions, creating a new kind of creature. These are the trees, plants, and seeds that have been enhanced through cultivation and are now domesticated among us; in ancient times, only wild varieties existed, which are older than the cultivated ones. For everything that has life can truly be called a living being, and the creature we are discussing has the third type of soul, which is thought to be located between the diaphragm and the navel. This soul doesn't involve opinion, reason, or intellect, but only feelings of pleasure and pain and the desires that come with them. This nature is always in a passive state, revolving around itself, repelling external movement and using its own, and thus it is not naturally equipped to observe or reflect on its own situation. Therefore, it lives and doesn’t differ from a living being, but remains fixed and rooted in one spot, having no ability for self-movement.

Now after the superior powers had created all these natures to be food for us who are of the inferior nature, they cut various channels through the body as through a garden, that it might be watered as from a running stream. In the first place, they cut two hidden channels or veins down the back where the skin and the flesh join, which answered severally to the right and left side of the body. These they let down along the backbone, so as to have the marrow of generation between them, where it was most likely to flourish, and in order that the stream coming down from above might flow freely to the other parts, and equalize the irrigation. In the next place, they divided the veins about the head, and interlacing them, they sent them in opposite directions; those coming from the right side they sent to the left of the body, and those from the left they diverted towards the right, so that they and the skin might together form a bond which should fasten the head to the body, since the crown of the head was not encircled by sinews; and also in order that the sensations from both sides might be distributed over the whole body. And next, they ordered the water-courses of the body in a manner which I will describe, and which will be more easily understood if we begin by admitting that all things which have lesser parts retain the greater, but the greater cannot retain the lesser. Now of all natures fire has the smallest parts, and therefore penetrates through earth and water and air and their compounds, nor can anything hold it. And a similar principle applies to the human belly; for when meats and drinks enter it, it holds them, but it cannot hold air and fire, because the particles of which they consist are smaller than its own structure.

Now, after the higher powers created all these natural elements to nourish us, who are of the lower nature, they carved various channels through the body like pathways in a garden, so that it could be irrigated like a flowing stream. First, they made two hidden channels or veins down the back at the junction of the skin and flesh, corresponding to the right and left sides of the body. They extended these along the spine to house the reproductive marrow between them, where it could thrive best, allowing the flow from above to reach other parts and provide balanced nourishment. Next, they divided the veins around the head, intertwining them and directing them oppositely; those from the right side were sent to the left, and those from the left were channeled to the right, creating a connection that would secure the head to the body since the top of the head wasn’t surrounded by tendons. This also ensured that sensations from both sides could be distributed throughout the entire body. Then, they arranged the body's waterways in a way that I will describe, which will be easier to grasp if we start by accepting that smaller parts are contained within larger ones, but larger parts cannot contain smaller ones. Among all elements, fire has the smallest particles, which is why it can permeate through earth, water, air, and their mixtures; nothing can contain it. A similar concept applies to the human stomach; when food and drink enter, it can hold them, but it cannot contain air and fire because their particles are smaller than its own structure.

These elements, therefore, God employed for the sake of distributing moisture from the belly into the veins, weaving together a network of fire and air like a weel, having at the entrance two lesser weels; further he constructed one of these with two openings, and from the lesser weels he extended cords reaching all round to the extremities of the network. All the interior of the net he made of fire, but the lesser weels and their cavity, of air. The network he took and spread over the newly-formed animal in the following manner:—He let the lesser weels pass into the mouth; there were two of them, and one he let down by the air-pipes into the lungs, the other by the side of the air-pipes into the belly. The former he divided into two branches, both of which he made to meet at the channels of the nose, so that when the way through the mouth did not act, the streams of the mouth as well were replenished through the nose. With the other cavity (i.e. of the greater weel) he enveloped the hollow parts of the body, and at one time he made all this to flow into the lesser weels, quite gently, for they are composed of air, and at another time he caused the lesser weels to flow back again; and the net he made to find a way in and out through the pores of the body, and the rays of fire which are bound fast within followed the passage of the air either way, never at any time ceasing so long as the mortal being holds together. This process, as we affirm, the name-giver named inspiration and expiration. And all this movement, active as well as passive, takes place in order that the body, being watered and cooled, may receive nourishment and life; for when the respiration is going in and out, and the fire, which is fast bound within, follows it, and ever and anon moving to and fro, enters through the belly and reaches the meat and drink, it dissolves them, and dividing them into small portions and guiding them through the passages where it goes, pumps them as from a fountain into the channels of the veins, and makes the stream of the veins flow through the body as through a conduit.

These elements, then, God used to distribute moisture from the body into the veins, creating a network of fire and air like a wheel, with two smaller wheels at the entrance. He built one of these with two openings, and from the smaller wheels, he extended cords all around to the edges of the network. The entire inner part of the net was made of fire, while the smaller wheels and their cavities were made of air. He took the network and spread it over the newly-formed animal as follows:—He allowed the smaller wheels to enter through the mouth; there were two of them, one led down through the air pipes into the lungs, and the other beside the air pipes into the belly. He split the first one into two branches, both of which met at the nose channels, so that when the path through the mouth didn't function, the streams from the mouth could be replenished through the nose. With the other cavity (i.e. of the larger wheel), he surrounded the empty parts of the body, sometimes letting everything flow gently into the smaller wheels, since they are made of air, and at other times causing the smaller wheels to flow back. The net found a way in and out through the body's pores, and the rays of fire held inside followed the airflow in both directions, never stopping as long as the living being remained intact. We call this process inspiration and expiration. All this movement, both in and out, happens so that the body, being supplied with moisture and cooled, can receive nourishment and life; for when respiration goes in and out, and the fire contained within follows, moving back and forth, it enters through the belly and reaches the food and drink, breaking them down, dividing them into small portions and guiding them through the pathways, pumping them like from a fountain into the veins, and flowing through the body like a conduit.

Let us once more consider the phenomena of respiration, and enquire into the causes which have made it what it is. They are as follows:—Seeing that there is no such thing as a vacuum into which any of those things which are moved can enter, and the breath is carried from us into the external air, the next point is, as will be clear to every one, that it does not go into a vacant space, but pushes its neighbour out of its place, and that which is thrust out in turn drives out its neighbour; and in this way everything of necessity at last comes round to that place from whence the breath came forth, and enters in there, and following the breath, fills up the vacant space; and this goes on like the rotation of a wheel, because there can be no such thing as a vacuum. Wherefore also the breast and the lungs, when they emit the breath, are replenished by the air which surrounds the body and which enters in through the pores of the flesh and is driven round in a circle; and again, the air which is sent away and passes out through the body forces the breath inwards through the passage of the mouth and the nostrils. Now the origin of this movement may be supposed to be as follows. In the interior of every animal the hottest part is that which is around the blood and veins; it is in a manner an internal fountain of fire, which we compare to the network of a creel, being woven all of fire and extended through the centre of the body, while the outer parts are composed of air. Now we must admit that heat naturally proceeds outward to its own place and to its kindred element; and as there are two exits for the heat, the one out through the body, and the other through the mouth and nostrils, when it moves towards the one, it drives round the air at the other, and that which is driven round falls into the fire and becomes warm, and that which goes forth is cooled. But when the heat changes its place, and the particles at the other exit grow warmer, the hotter air inclining in that direction and carried towards its native element, fire, pushes round the air at the other; and this being affected in the same way and communicating the same impulse, a circular motion swaying to and fro is produced by the double process, which we call inspiration and expiration.

Let’s take another look at how respiration works and explore what makes it what it is. Here’s the explanation: There’s no such thing as a vacuum that allows anything moving to simply enter; when we exhale, our breath moves into the outside air. As you can see, it doesn’t just fill empty space; it pushes neighboring air out of the way, which then pushes out its neighbor in a chain reaction. This way, eventually, everything comes back around to the place where the breath originated, filling in that space, creating a cycle similar to the rotation of a wheel, because a vacuum cannot exist. Therefore, when we exhale, our chest and lungs are replenished by the surrounding air entering through our skin's pores, circulating around. Also, the air leaving the body forces fresh breath inward through the mouth and nostrils. Now, we might think the source of this movement is this: inside every animal, the hottest area is around the blood and veins; it acts like an internal fountain of heat, similar to a fire woven throughout the center of the body, while the outer parts consist of air. We have to recognize that heat naturally moves outward to its own place and to its related element. Since there are two ways for heat to escape—out through the body or through the mouth and nostrils—when it flows out one way, it pushes air out the other. The expelled air then goes back to the fire and gets warmed up, while the escaping heat cools down. However, when the heat shifts direction and the particles at the other exit get warmer, the hotter air moves toward its natural element, fire, and pushes air round at the other exit. This creates a similar reaction, leading to a back-and-forth circular motion, which we label as inhalation and exhalation.

The phenomena of medical cupping-glasses and of the swallowing of drink and of the projection of bodies, whether discharged in the air or bowled along the ground, are to be investigated on a similar principle; and swift and slow sounds, which appear to be high and low, and are sometimes discordant on account of their inequality, and then again harmonical on account of the equality of the motion which they excite in us. For when the motions of the antecedent swifter sounds begin to pause and the two are equalized, the slower sounds overtake the swifter and then propel them. When they overtake them they do not intrude a new and discordant motion, but introduce the beginnings of a slower, which answers to the swifter as it dies away, thus producing a single mixed expression out of high and low, whence arises a pleasure which even the unwise feel, and which to the wise becomes a higher sort of delight, being an imitation of divine harmony in mortal motions. Moreover, as to the flowing of water, the fall of the thunderbolt, and the marvels that are observed about the attraction of amber and the Heraclean stones,—in none of these cases is there any attraction; but he who investigates rightly, will find that such wonderful phenomena are attributable to the combination of certain conditions—the non-existence of a vacuum, the fact that objects push one another round, and that they change places, passing severally into their proper positions as they are divided or combined.

The phenomena of medical cupping glasses, drinking, and the movement of objects—whether thrown into the air or rolled on the ground—should be examined on a similar principle. Swift and slow sounds can seem high or low, and they sometimes clash due to their differences, yet can also harmonize because of their equal motion. When the faster sounds start to slow down and become equal, the slower sounds catch up to the faster ones and then push them forward. When they catch up, they don't introduce a new, discordant motion; instead, they bring in the beginnings of a slower motion that corresponds to the faster one as it fades, creating a single mixed sound made up of high and low tones. This produces a pleasure that even the uninformed can appreciate, while the knowledgeable experience a deeper delight, as it reflects divine harmony in mortal movements. Additionally, regarding the flow of water, the crash of lightning, and the wonders observed with the attraction of amber and Heraclean stones—there's actually no attraction involved. However, those who investigate properly will discover that these incredible phenomena arise from a combination of certain conditions: the absence of a vacuum, the way objects push each other around, and how they switch places, moving into their proper positions as they are separated or joined.

Such as we have seen, is the nature and such are the causes of respiration,—the subject in which this discussion originated. For the fire cuts the food and following the breath surges up within, fire and breath rising together and filling the veins by drawing up out of the belly and pouring into them the cut portions of the food; and so the streams of food are kept flowing through the whole body in all animals. And fresh cuttings from kindred substances, whether the fruits of the earth or herb of the field, which God planted to be our daily food, acquire all sorts of colours by their inter-mixture; but red is the most pervading of them, being created by the cutting action of fire and by the impression which it makes on a moist substance; and hence the liquid which circulates in the body has a colour such as we have described. The liquid itself we call blood, which nourishes the flesh and the whole body, whence all parts are watered and empty places filled.

As we've seen, this is the nature of respiration and its causes—the topic that sparked this discussion. The fire breaks down food, and with each breath, it surges upward within us; fire and breath rise together, filling the veins by drawing up from the belly and pouring in the processed food. This way, the flow of nutrients is maintained throughout the entire body in all animals. Fresh cuts from similar substances, whether fruits from the earth or herbs from the fields that God provided as our daily sustenance, take on various colors through their mixing. Red is the most prevalent color, created by the cutting action of fire and its effect on moist materials. Thus, the liquid that circulates in the body has the color we've described. We refer to this liquid as blood, which nourishes the flesh and the entire body, ensuring all parts are supplied and empty spaces are filled.

Now the process of repletion and evacuation is effected after the manner of the universal motion by which all kindred substances are drawn towards one another. For the external elements which surround us are always causing us to consume away, and distributing and sending off like to like; the particles of blood, too, which are divided and contained within the frame of the animal as in a sort of heaven, are compelled to imitate the motion of the universe. Each, therefore, of the divided parts within us, being carried to its kindred nature, replenishes the void. When more is taken away than flows in, then we decay, and when less, we grow and increase.

Now the process of filling up and getting rid of waste happens like the universal movement that pulls similar substances together. The external elements around us constantly make us wear down and distribute similar things among each other. The blood particles, which are split and contained within the body like a kind of universe, are forced to follow the same motion as the universe. Each part inside us, therefore, is drawn to its similar nature, filling in the gaps. When we lose more than we take in, we decay, and when we take in more than we lose, we grow and flourish.

The frame of the entire creature when young has the triangles of each kind new, and may be compared to the keel of a vessel which is just off the stocks; they are locked firmly together and yet the whole mass is soft and delicate, being freshly formed of marrow and nurtured on milk. Now when the triangles out of which meats and drinks are composed come in from without, and are comprehended in the body, being older and weaker than the triangles already there, the frame of the body gets the better of them and its newer triangles cut them up, and so the animal grows great, being nourished by a multitude of similar particles. But when the roots of the triangles are loosened by having undergone many conflicts with many things in the course of time, they are no longer able to cut or assimilate the food which enters, but are themselves easily divided by the bodies which come in from without. In this way every animal is overcome and decays, and this affection is called old age. And at last, when the bonds by which the triangles of the marrow are united no longer hold, and are parted by the strain of existence, they in turn loosen the bonds of the soul, and she, obtaining a natural release, flies away with joy. For that which takes place according to nature is pleasant, but that which is contrary to nature is painful. And thus death, if caused by disease or produced by wounds, is painful and violent; but that sort of death which comes with old age and fulfils the debt of nature is the easiest of deaths, and is accompanied with pleasure rather than with pain.

The entire structure of a young creature has fresh triangles of each type, and can be compared to the hull of a ship that’s just launched; they’re tightly joined together yet the whole mass is soft and fragile, being made of new marrow and fed on milk. As the triangles that make up food and drink come in from outside, they’re older and weaker than the triangles already present in the body. The body’s frame takes control, cutting up the new triangles, allowing the animal to grow large, nourished by countless similar particles. However, when the roots of these triangles become loose after enduring many challenges over time, they can no longer effectively process or absorb the incoming food, and instead, they themselves become easily broken down by what enters from outside. In this way, every animal eventually succumbs and deteriorates, and this condition is termed old age. Ultimately, when the bonds holding the triangles of the marrow fail and are detached by the weight of existence, they in turn loosen the soul's bonds, allowing it to joyfully escape. What happens according to nature feels pleasant, while anything contrary to nature feels painful. Thus, death caused by illness or injury is painful and abrupt; however, the kind of death that comes with old age and fulfills nature's course is the easiest death, bringing more pleasure than pain.

Now every one can see whence diseases arise. There are four natures out of which the body is compacted, earth and fire and water and air, and the unnatural excess or defect of these, or the change of any of them from its own natural place into another, or—since there are more kinds than one of fire and of the other elements—the assumption by any of these of a wrong kind, or any similar irregularity, produces disorders and diseases; for when any of them is produced or changed in a manner contrary to nature, the parts which were previously cool grow warm, and those which were dry become moist, and the light become heavy, and the heavy light; all sorts of changes occur. For, as we affirm, a thing can only remain the same with itself, whole and sound, when the same is added to it, or subtracted from it, in the same respect and in the same manner and in due proportion; and whatever comes or goes away in violation of these laws causes all manner of changes and infinite diseases and corruptions. Now there is a second class of structures which are also natural, and this affords a second opportunity of observing diseases to him who would understand them. For whereas marrow and bone and flesh and sinews are composed of the four elements, and the blood, though after another manner, is likewise formed out of them, most diseases originate in the way which I have described; but the worst of all owe their severity to the fact that the generation of these substances proceeds in a wrong order; they are then destroyed. For the natural order is that the flesh and sinews should be made of blood, the sinews out of the fibres to which they are akin, and the flesh out of the clots which are formed when the fibres are separated. And the glutinous and rich matter which comes away from the sinews and the flesh, not only glues the flesh to the bones, but nourishes and imparts growth to the bone which surrounds the marrow; and by reason of the solidity of the bones, that which filters through consists of the purest and smoothest and oiliest sort of triangles, dropping like dew from the bones and watering the marrow. Now when each process takes place in this order, health commonly results; when in the opposite order, disease. For when the flesh becomes decomposed and sends back the wasting substance into the veins, then an over-supply of blood of diverse kinds, mingling with air in the veins, having variegated colours and bitter properties, as well as acid and saline qualities, contains all sorts of bile and serum and phlegm. For all things go the wrong way, and having become corrupted, first they taint the blood itself, and then ceasing to give nourishment to the body they are carried along the veins in all directions, no longer preserving the order of their natural courses, but at war with themselves, because they receive no good from one another, and are hostile to the abiding constitution of the body, which they corrupt and dissolve. The oldest part of the flesh which is corrupted, being hard to decompose, from long burning grows black, and from being everywhere corroded becomes bitter, and is injurious to every part of the body which is still uncorrupted. Sometimes, when the bitter element is refined away, the black part assumes an acidity which takes the place of the bitterness; at other times the bitterness being tinged with blood has a redder colour; and this, when mixed with black, takes the hue of grass; and again, an auburn colour mingles with the bitter matter when new flesh is decomposed by the fire which surrounds the internal flame;—to all which symptoms some physician perhaps, or rather some philosopher, who had the power of seeing in many dissimilar things one nature deserving of a name, has assigned the common name of bile. But the other kinds of bile are variously distinguished by their colours. As for serum, that sort which is the watery part of blood is innocent, but that which is a secretion of black and acid bile is malignant when mingled by the power of heat with any salt substance, and is then called acid phlegm. Again, the substance which is formed by the liquefaction of new and tender flesh when air is present, if inflated and encased in liquid so as to form bubbles, which separately are invisible owing to their small size, but when collected are of a bulk which is visible, and have a white colour arising out of the generation of foam—all this decomposition of tender flesh when intermingled with air is termed by us white phlegm. And the whey or sediment of newly-formed phlegm is sweat and tears, and includes the various daily discharges by which the body is purified. Now all these become causes of disease when the blood is not replenished in a natural manner by food and drink but gains bulk from opposite sources in violation of the laws of nature. When the several parts of the flesh are separated by disease, if the foundation remains, the power of the disorder is only half as great, and there is still a prospect of an easy recovery; but when that which binds the flesh to the bones is diseased, and no longer being separated from the muscles and sinews, ceases to give nourishment to the bone and to unite flesh and bone, and from being oily and smooth and glutinous becomes rough and salt and dry, owing to bad regimen, then all the substance thus corrupted crumbles away under the flesh and the sinews, and separates from the bone, and the fleshy parts fall away from their foundation and leave the sinews bare and full of brine, and the flesh again gets into the circulation of the blood and makes the previously-mentioned disorders still greater. And if these bodily affections be severe, still worse are the prior disorders; as when the bone itself, by reason of the density of the flesh, does not obtain sufficient air, but becomes mouldy and hot and gangrened and receives no nutriment, and the natural process is inverted, and the bone crumbling passes into the food, and the food into the flesh, and the flesh again falling into the blood makes all maladies that may occur more virulent than those already mentioned. But the worst case of all is when the marrow is diseased, either from excess or defect; and this is the cause of the very greatest and most fatal disorders, in which the whole course of the body is reversed.

Now everyone can see where diseases come from. The body is made up of four elements: earth, fire, water, and air. Any unnatural excess or deficiency of these, or if any of them shifts from its natural position to another, or—since there are different kinds of fire and other elements—if any of these takes on the wrong kind, or any similar irregularity occurs, it leads to disorders and diseases. When any element is produced or altered in a way that goes against nature, cool parts become warm, dry parts become moist, light parts become heavy, and heavy parts become light; all sorts of changes happen. As we say, something can only stay the same, whole, and healthy, when the right things are added or subtracted in proper proportion. Anything that enters or leaves in violation of these principles causes all kinds of changes and countless diseases and corruptions. There is also a second category of natural structures, which provides another chance to observe diseases for those who want to understand them. Marrow, bone, flesh, and sinews are made of the four elements, and blood, though formed differently, is also made from them. Most diseases come from the processes I described; the worst diseases are severe because these substances develop in the wrong order and are then destroyed. The natural order is that flesh and sinews should be made from blood, sinews from related fibers, and flesh from clots formed when the fibers separate. The sticky and rich material that comes from the sinews and flesh not only bonds flesh to bones but also nourishes and promotes the growth of the bone surrounding the marrow. Because bones are solid, what filters out consists of the purest, smoothest, and oiliest components, dropping like dew from the bones and nourishing the marrow. When each process happens in the right order, health usually results; when it happens in the wrong order, disease occurs. When flesh decomposes and sends back its waste into the veins, an excess of varied blood mixes with air in the veins, taking on various colors and bitter, acidic, and salty qualities, containing bile, serum, and phlegm. Everything goes awry, and the corrupted elements first taint the blood itself, and then stop nourishing the body, coursing through the veins without maintaining their natural order, battling against each other, and damaging the body’s constitution, which they corrupt and dissolve. The oldest parts of the flesh that become corrupted, hard to decompose, grow black from long decay and become bitter from being eaten away everywhere, harming all parts of the body that are still healthy. Sometimes, when the bitter element is refined out, the black part turns acidic instead; other times, the bitterness is mixed with blood and takes on a redder color, which, when combined with black, takes on a greenish hue. An auburn color may mix with the bitter matter when new flesh decomposes due to the internal heat. A physician or perhaps a philosopher who could see a common nature in many different things may have called all these symptoms "bile." The various kinds of bile are distinguished by their colors. The serum, which is the watery part of blood, is harmless, but if it comes from black and acidic bile, it becomes harmful when mixed with any salty substance through heat, and is then called acidic phlegm. The substance formed from the liquefaction of new, delicate flesh when air is present, if inflated and surrounded by liquid to form tiny, invisible bubbles, becomes visible and has a white color from the generation of foam—this breakdown of tender flesh mixed with air is what we call white phlegm. The whey or sediment of freshly-formed phlegm is sweat and tears and includes the daily discharges that cleanse the body. All these can lead to diseases when the blood isn’t replenished naturally by food and drink but instead increases from opposite sources in violation of natural laws. When parts of the flesh separate due to disease, if the foundation remains, the disorder's impact is less severe, and recovery is still likely. But when what binds flesh to bones is diseased, separating from muscles and sinews, it fails to nourish the bone and connect flesh and bone. Instead of being oily, smooth, and sticky, it becomes rough, salty, and dry due to poor habits. This corrupted substance crumbles away beneath flesh and sinews, separating from the bones, and the fleshy parts fall away from their base, leaving the sinews exposed and salty, causing the flesh to re-enter the blood circulation and worsen the previously mentioned disorders. And if these bodily conditions are severe, prior disorders become even worse; for example, when the bone itself, due to the density of the flesh, fails to get enough air, it becomes moldy, hot, and gangrenous, receiving no nourishment. The natural process reverses; the bone crumbles into food, and the food turns into flesh, which then falls back into the blood, making any ensuing illnesses even more virulent than those already mentioned. But the worst case occurs when the marrow itself is diseased, either from excess or deficiency; this leads to the most severe and fatal disorders, reversing the entire functioning of the body.

There is a third class of diseases which may be conceived of as arising in three ways; for they are produced sometimes by wind, and sometimes by phlegm, and sometimes by bile. When the lung, which is the dispenser of the air to the body, is obstructed by rheums and its passages are not free, some of them not acting, while through others too much air enters, then the parts which are unrefreshed by air corrode, while in other parts the excess of air forcing its way through the veins distorts them and decomposing the body is enclosed in the midst of it and occupies the midriff; thus numberless painful diseases are produced, accompanied by copious sweats. And oftentimes when the flesh is dissolved in the body, wind, generated within and unable to escape, is the source of quite as much pain as the air coming in from without; but the greatest pain is felt when the wind gets about the sinews and the veins of the shoulders, and swells them up, and so twists back the great tendons and the sinews which are connected with them. These disorders are called tetanus and opisthotonus, by reason of the tension which accompanies them. The cure of them is difficult; relief is in most cases given by fever supervening. The white phlegm, though dangerous when detained within by reason of the air-bubbles, yet if it can communicate with the outside air, is less severe, and only discolours the body, generating leprous eruptions and similar diseases. When it is mingled with black bile and dispersed about the courses of the head, which are the divinest part of us, the attack if coming on in sleep, is not so severe; but when assailing those who are awake it is hard to be got rid of, and being an affection of a sacred part, is most justly called sacred. An acid and salt phlegm, again, is the source of all those diseases which take the form of catarrh, but they have many names because the places into which they flow are manifold.

There’s a third category of diseases that can be understood as arising in three ways: they can be caused by wind, phlegm, or bile. When the lungs, which supply air to the body, are blocked by mucus and the passages aren’t clear, some parts suffer from a lack of air while others receive too much. This leads to parts that are starved of air becoming damaged, while the excess air forces its way through the veins, distorting them and breaking down the body, creating pressure in the midriff. As a result, countless painful ailments arise, often accompanied by heavy sweating. Sometimes, when the flesh in the body breaks down, wind generated internally can cause just as much pain as the air that comes in from outside. The greatest discomfort occurs when wind gathers around the muscles and veins in the shoulders, swelling them and twisting back the major tendons and connected sinews. These conditions are known as tetanus and opisthotonus due to the tension they cause. Treating them is challenging; relief often comes from a fever that develops afterward. White phlegm, although dangerous when trapped inside because of air bubbles, is less severe if it can interact with outside air, but it can still discolor the body and lead to leprous eruptions and similar issues. When mixed with black bile and spread through the head—considered our most divine part—if the attack happens during sleep, it’s less intense; however, if it strikes when someone is awake, it’s harder to treat, and since it affects a sacred area, it is rightly termed sacred. Additionally, acidic and salty phlegm leads to diseases that manifest as catarrh, but they have many names because they affect various areas.

Inflammations of the body come from burnings and inflamings, and all of them originate in bile. When bile finds a means of discharge, it boils up and sends forth all sorts of tumours; but when imprisoned within, it generates many inflammatory diseases, above all when mingled with pure blood; since it then displaces the fibres which are scattered about in the blood and are designed to maintain the balance of rare and dense, in order that the blood may not be so liquefied by heat as to exude from the pores of the body, nor again become too dense and thus find a difficulty in circulating through the veins. The fibres are so constituted as to maintain this balance; and if any one brings them all together when the blood is dead and in process of cooling, then the blood which remains becomes fluid, but if they are left alone, they soon congeal by reason of the surrounding cold. The fibres having this power over the blood, bile, which is only stale blood, and which from being flesh is dissolved again into blood, at the first influx coming in little by little, hot and liquid, is congealed by the power of the fibres; and so congealing and made to cool, it produces internal cold and shuddering. When it enters with more of a flood and overcomes the fibres by its heat, and boiling up throws them into disorder, if it have power enough to maintain its supremacy, it penetrates the marrow and burns up what may be termed the cables of the soul, and sets her free; but when there is not so much of it, and the body though wasted still holds out, the bile is itself mastered, and is either utterly banished, or is thrust through the veins into the lower or upper belly, and is driven out of the body like an exile from a state in which there has been civil war; whence arise diarrhoeas and dysenteries, and all such disorders. When the constitution is disordered by excess of fire, continuous heat and fever are the result; when excess of air is the cause, then the fever is quotidian; when of water, which is a more sluggish element than either fire or air, then the fever is a tertian; when of earth, which is the most sluggish of the four, and is only purged away in a four-fold period, the result is a quartan fever, which can with difficulty be shaken off.

Inflammations in the body come from burns and irritations, and they all start with bile. When bile gets a way out, it bubbles up and causes various tumors; but when it gets stuck inside, it leads to many inflammatory diseases, especially when mixed with pure blood. This mixture displaces the fibers scattered in the blood, which are meant to maintain the balance between thin and thick. This balance is important so that the blood doesn’t become too thin from heat and leak out of the skin, nor too thick to circulate properly through the veins. The fibers are designed to keep this balance; if someone gathers them all together when the blood is cool and dying, the remaining blood turns liquid. However, if the fibers are left alone, they quickly thicken due to the surrounding cold. These fibers can influence the blood, and bile, which is essentially old blood that has broken down into blood again, initially comes in gradually, hot and liquid, but is solidified by the fibers’ influence; this solidification causes internal cold and shivering. When bile floods in and overwhelms the fibers with its heat, throwing them into chaos, if it has enough power to dominate, it can penetrate the marrow and harm what could be called the soul’s cables, freeing it. But if there isn’t much bile, and the body holds on despite being weakened, the bile is subdued, either completely expelled, or pushed through the veins into the lower or upper abdomen, eventually getting expelled from the body like an exile after a civil conflict, causing diarrhea, dysentery, and other such disorders. When the body becomes unbalanced from too much heat, it leads to constant heat and fever; if it’s caused by too much air, the fever is daily; if caused by water, which moves more slowly than fire or air, the fever is every other day; and if from earth, the slowest of all, resulting in a fever that recurs every four days, which is very hard to shake off.

Such is the manner in which diseases of the body arise; the disorders of the soul, which depend upon the body, originate as follows. We must acknowledge disease of the mind to be a want of intelligence; and of this there are two kinds; to wit, madness and ignorance. In whatever state a man experiences either of them, that state may be called disease; and excessive pains and pleasures are justly to be regarded as the greatest diseases to which the soul is liable. For a man who is in great joy or in great pain, in his unreasonable eagerness to attain the one and to avoid the other, is not able to see or to hear anything rightly; but he is mad, and is at the time utterly incapable of any participation in reason. He who has the seed about the spinal marrow too plentiful and overflowing, like a tree overladen with fruit, has many throes, and also obtains many pleasures in his desires and their offspring, and is for the most part of his life deranged, because his pleasures and pains are so very great; his soul is rendered foolish and disordered by his body; yet he is regarded not as one diseased, but as one who is voluntarily bad, which is a mistake. The truth is that the intemperance of love is a disease of the soul due chiefly to the moisture and fluidity which is produced in one of the elements by the loose consistency of the bones. And in general, all that which is termed the incontinence of pleasure and is deemed a reproach under the idea that the wicked voluntarily do wrong is not justly a matter for reproach. For no man is voluntarily bad; but the bad become bad by reason of an ill disposition of the body and bad education, things which are hateful to every man and happen to him against his will. And in the case of pain too in like manner the soul suffers much evil from the body. For where the acid and briny phlegm and other bitter and bilious humours wander about in the body, and find no exit or escape, but are pent up within and mingle their own vapours with the motions of the soul, and are blended with them, they produce all sorts of diseases, more or fewer, and in every degree of intensity; and being carried to the three places of the soul, whichever they may severally assail, they create infinite varieties of ill-temper and melancholy, of rashness and cowardice, and also of forgetfulness and stupidity. Further, when to this evil constitution of body evil forms of government are added and evil discourses are uttered in private as well as in public, and no sort of instruction is given in youth to cure these evils, then all of us who are bad become bad from two causes which are entirely beyond our control. In such cases the planters are to blame rather than the plants, the educators rather than the educated. But however that may be, we should endeavour as far as we can by education, and studies, and learning, to avoid vice and attain virtue; this, however, is part of another subject.

This is how physical illnesses develop; mental disorders that depend on the body come about in this way. We need to recognize mental illness as a lack of understanding; there are two types of this: madness and ignorance. Whatever condition a person is in when they experience either can be considered a form of illness; excessive pleasures and pains are viewed as the greatest diseases of the soul. When someone is overwhelmed by joy or suffering, their intense desire to pursue one and escape the other makes them incapable of seeing or hearing things clearly; they lose their reason and are essentially mad. A person who has too much energy around their spinal area, like a tree overloaded with fruit, faces many struggles and gets caught up in numerous desires, often living in a state of madness because their pleasures and pains are extreme. Their body messes with their mind, yet they are mistakenly seen as simply being bad on purpose. The truth is that an excess of love is a type of mental illness primarily caused by excessive moisture and fluidity from weak bones. Generally, what we call lack of self-control regarding pleasure, which is criticized as a moral failing, isn't fair to blame; no one chooses to be bad. People turn bad due to poor physical condition and lack of proper education—things that everyone dislikes and that happen against their will. Similarly, when someone suffers pain, their soul also endures the consequences of their body’s condition. When harsh bodily fluids like sour or salty phlegm get trapped inside, mixing with the soul's movements, they can cause a range of illnesses with varying severity. These can affect different aspects of the soul, leading to many forms of bad moods or sadness, recklessness or cowardice, as well as forgetfulness and confusion. Additionally, if a person’s poor physical state is compounded by bad governance and negative influences in private and public, and if no proper guidance is offered during their upbringing to address these issues, then those of us who are misguided become bad for reasons completely outside our control. In these cases, the blame lies more with the caretakers than the individuals; it’s the educators who should be held accountable rather than the students. Nevertheless, we should strive, through education and learning, to avoid vice and attain virtue; however, this discussion leads us to a different topic.

There is a corresponding enquiry concerning the mode of treatment by which the mind and the body are to be preserved, about which it is meet and right that I should say a word in turn; for it is more our duty to speak of the good than of the evil. Everything that is good is fair, and the fair is not without proportion, and the animal which is to be fair must have due proportion. Now we perceive lesser symmetries or proportions and reason about them, but of the highest and greatest we take no heed; for there is no proportion or disproportion more productive of health and disease, and virtue and vice, than that between soul and body. This however we do not perceive, nor do we reflect that when a weak or small frame is the vehicle of a great and mighty soul, or conversely, when a little soul is encased in a large body, then the whole animal is not fair, for it lacks the most important of all symmetries; but the due proportion of mind and body is the fairest and loveliest of all sights to him who has the seeing eye. Just as a body which has a leg too long, or which is unsymmetrical in some other respect, is an unpleasant sight, and also, when doing its share of work, is much distressed and makes convulsive efforts, and often stumbles through awkwardness, and is the cause of infinite evil to its own self—in like manner we should conceive of the double nature which we call the living being; and when in this compound there is an impassioned soul more powerful than the body, that soul, I say, convulses and fills with disorders the whole inner nature of man; and when eager in the pursuit of some sort of learning or study, causes wasting; or again, when teaching or disputing in private or in public, and strifes and controversies arise, inflames and dissolves the composite frame of man and introduces rheums; and the nature of this phenomenon is not understood by most professors of medicine, who ascribe it to the opposite of the real cause. And once more, when a body large and too strong for the soul is united to a small and weak intelligence, then inasmuch as there are two desires natural to man,—one of food for the sake of the body, and one of wisdom for the sake of the diviner part of us—then, I say, the motions of the stronger, getting the better and increasing their own power, but making the soul dull, and stupid, and forgetful, engender ignorance, which is the greatest of diseases. There is one protection against both kinds of disproportion:—that we should not move the body without the soul or the soul without the body, and thus they will be on their guard against each other, and be healthy and well balanced. And therefore the mathematician or any one else whose thoughts are much absorbed in some intellectual pursuit, must allow his body also to have due exercise, and practise gymnastic; and he who is careful to fashion the body, should in turn impart to the soul its proper motions, and should cultivate music and all philosophy, if he would deserve to be called truly fair and truly good. And the separate parts should be treated in the same manner, in imitation of the pattern of the universe; for as the body is heated and also cooled within by the elements which enter into it, and is again dried up and moistened by external things, and experiences these and the like affections from both kinds of motions, the result is that the body if given up to motion when in a state of quiescence is overmastered and perishes; but if any one, in imitation of that which we call the foster-mother and nurse of the universe, will not allow the body ever to be inactive, but is always producing motions and agitations through its whole extent, which form the natural defence against other motions both internal and external, and by moderate exercise reduces to order according to their affinities the particles and affections which are wandering about the body, as we have already said when speaking of the universe, he will not allow enemy placed by the side of enemy to stir up wars and disorders in the body, but he will place friend by the side of friend, so as to create health. Now of all motions that is the best which is produced in a thing by itself, for it is most akin to the motion of thought and of the universe; but that motion which is caused by others is not so good, and worst of all is that which moves the body, when at rest, in parts only and by some external agency. Wherefore of all modes of purifying and re-uniting the body the best is gymnastic; the next best is a surging motion, as in sailing or any other mode of conveyance which is not fatiguing; the third sort of motion may be of use in a case of extreme necessity, but in any other will be adopted by no man of sense: I mean the purgative treatment of physicians; for diseases unless they are very dangerous should not be irritated by medicines, since every form of disease is in a manner akin to the living being, whose complex frame has an appointed term of life. For not the whole race only, but each individual—barring inevitable accidents—comes into the world having a fixed span, and the triangles in us are originally framed with power to last for a certain time, beyond which no man can prolong his life. And this holds also of the constitution of diseases; if any one regardless of the appointed time tries to subdue them by medicine, he only aggravates and multiplies them. Wherefore we ought always to manage them by regimen, as far as a man can spare the time, and not provoke a disagreeable enemy by medicines.

There is an important question about how to take care of both the mind and body, and I think it’s necessary to address this, since it's more important to discuss what’s good than what’s bad. Everything good is beautiful, and beauty involves proportion, so any living being that is beautiful must also have proper proportions. We often notice smaller proportions or symmetries and think about them, but we ignore the biggest ones; yet, there’s no greater factor in health and disease, or in virtue and vice, than the balance between the soul and the body. We usually overlook this, failing to realize that when a weak or small body carries a strong and powerful soul, or when a small soul exists within a large body, the whole being lacks beauty because it’s missing the most important symmetry. The correct proportion of mind and body is the most beautiful sight for those who can truly see. Just as a body with an uneven leg is unpleasant and struggles to perform its tasks, causing distress and clumsiness, we should think about the dual nature we call a living being. When the passionate soul is stronger than the body, it disrupts and disorders the person's inner self. When it focuses intensely on learning or study, it can lead to depletion; or when it engages in discussions, arguments, and conflicts, it can create turmoil, leading to physical issues. This phenomenon isn't fully understood by most doctors, who blame it on the wrong causes. On the other hand, when a strong body is combined with a weak intellect, the natural desires for nourishment and wisdom conflict, resulting in the stronger desire overshadowing the weaker one, making the soul dull and giving rise to ignorance, the worst of all illnesses. The solution to both kinds of imbalance is to ensure that the body moves together with the soul and vice versa, so that they keep each other in check and maintain health and balance. Therefore, mathematicians or anyone deeply focused on intellectual pursuits should make sure to give their body regular exercise and practice physical activity; similarly, those who care for their bodies should ensure they also nurture their soul through music and philosophy if they wish to be truly good and beautiful. The individual parts should be treated similarly, following the example of the universe; the body is heated and cooled by the elements and affected by outside forces, and if it remains stagnant while in a state of rest, it can become overwhelmed and perish. But if someone, like the universe's nurturing aspect, keeps the body active, creating movements and actions throughout, it acts as a natural defense against other internal and external movements. Moderate exercise helps organize the body’s wandering particles and conditions, as we've discussed in relation to the universe, preventing discord and fostering health. Among all types of movement, the best is that which is generated within itself, as it resembles thought and the movements of the universe; external movements are less optimal, especially those that disturb the body while it’s at rest. Therefore, of all methods to purify and unify the body, gymnastic exercise is the best; the next best is gentle motion, like sailing or other non-exhaustive forms of transport; the third type may be useful in emergencies but should generally be avoided by sensible individuals: I'm talking about medical treatments that purge the body, because unless diseases are very serious, they shouldn’t be aggravated with medicines; every disease shares a connection with the living being, which has a predetermined lifespan. Not just the entire species, but each individual—barring unavoidable accidents—enters the world with a set lifespan, and our bodies are designed to last only so long, after which no one can extend their life. The same applies to diseases; undermining them with medication instead of letting them run their course only makes them worse. Therefore, we should manage them through lifestyle as much as possible and avoid provoking them with drugs.

Enough of the composite animal, and of the body which is a part of him, and of the manner in which a man may train and be trained by himself so as to live most according to reason: and we must above and before all provide that the element which is to train him shall be the fairest and best adapted to that purpose. A minute discussion of this subject would be a serious task; but if, as before, I am to give only an outline, the subject may not unfitly be summed up as follows.

Enough about the combined creature, and about the part of him that is his body, and about how a person can train themselves to live most in accordance with reason: we must, first and foremost, ensure that the influence that is meant to train him is the most beautiful and best suited for that purpose. A detailed discussion on this topic would be quite a challenge; however, if I'm only to provide a brief overview as I did before, this topic can be summarized as follows.

I have often remarked that there are three kinds of soul located within us, having each of them motions, and I must now repeat in the fewest words possible, that one part, if remaining inactive and ceasing from its natural motion, must necessarily become very weak, but that which is trained and exercised, very strong. Wherefore we should take care that the movements of the different parts of the soul should be in due proportion.

I have often noted that there are three types of souls within us, each with its own activities. I must now say briefly that if one part remains inactive and stops its natural movement, it will become very weak; however, the part that is trained and exercised becomes very strong. Therefore, we should ensure that the activities of the different parts of the soul are properly balanced.

And we should consider that God gave the sovereign part of the human soul to be the divinity of each one, being that part which, as we say, dwells at the top of the body, and inasmuch as we are a plant not of an earthly but of a heavenly growth, raises us from earth to our kindred who are in heaven. And in this we say truly; for the divine power suspended the head and root of us from that place where the generation of the soul first began, and thus made the whole body upright. When a man is always occupied with the cravings of desire and ambition, and is eagerly striving to satisfy them, all his thoughts must be mortal, and, as far as it is possible altogether to become such, he must be mortal every whit, because he has cherished his mortal part. But he who has been earnest in the love of knowledge and of true wisdom, and has exercised his intellect more than any other part of him, must have thoughts immortal and divine, if he attain truth, and in so far as human nature is capable of sharing in immortality, he must altogether be immortal; and since he is ever cherishing the divine power, and has the divinity within him in perfect order, he will be perfectly happy. Now there is only one way of taking care of things, and this is to give to each the food and motion which are natural to it. And the motions which are naturally akin to the divine principle within us are the thoughts and revolutions of the universe. These each man should follow, and correct the courses of the head which were corrupted at our birth, and by learning the harmonies and revolutions of the universe, should assimilate the thinking being to the thought, renewing his original nature, and having assimilated them should attain to that perfect life which the gods have set before mankind, both for the present and the future.

And we should recognize that God gave the divine aspect of the human soul to each individual, which is the part that, as we say, resides at the top of the body. Since we are a plant of heavenly rather than earthly growth, it elevates us from the earth to connect with our kindred in heaven. This is true; for the divine power lifted our head and root from the place where the soul's generation first began, thus making the entire body upright. When a person is constantly preoccupied with desires and ambitions, striving to fulfill them, their thoughts become entirely mortal, and as much as possible, they become fully mortal because they have embraced their earthly side. But someone who is passionate about the love of knowledge and true wisdom, who exercises their intellect more than any other part of themselves, must have thoughts that are immortal and divine if they attain truth. To the extent that human nature can share in immortality, they must be entirely immortal; and since they continually nurture the divine within them and maintain that divinity in perfect order, they will be truly happy. There is only one way to care for things, which is to provide each with the food and movement that are natural to it. The movements that are naturally aligned with the divine principle within us are the thoughts and motions of the universe. Each person should follow these and correct the flawed courses of the mind that were corrupted at our birth. By learning the harmonies and movements of the universe, they should align their minds with these thoughts, renewing their original nature, and by assimilating them, they should reach that perfect life which the gods have set before humanity, both now and in the future.

Thus our original design of discoursing about the universe down to the creation of man is nearly completed. A brief mention may be made of the generation of other animals, so far as the subject admits of brevity; in this manner our argument will best attain a due proportion. On the subject of animals, then, the following remarks may be offered. Of the men who came into the world, those who were cowards or led unrighteous lives may with reason be supposed to have changed into the nature of women in the second generation. And this was the reason why at that time the gods created in us the desire of sexual intercourse, contriving in man one animated substance, and in woman another, which they formed respectively in the following manner. The outlet for drink by which liquids pass through the lung under the kidneys and into the bladder, which receives and then by the pressure of the air emits them, was so fashioned by them as to penetrate also into the body of the marrow, which passes from the head along the neck and through the back, and which in the preceding discourse we have named the seed. And the seed having life, and becoming endowed with respiration, produces in that part in which it respires a lively desire of emission, and thus creates in us the love of procreation. Wherefore also in men the organ of generation becoming rebellious and masterful, like an animal disobedient to reason, and maddened with the sting of lust, seeks to gain absolute sway; and the same is the case with the so-called womb or matrix of women; the animal within them is desirous of procreating children, and when remaining unfruitful long beyond its proper time, gets discontented and angry, and wandering in every direction through the body, closes up the passages of the breath, and, by obstructing respiration, drives them to extremity, causing all varieties of disease, until at length the desire and love of the man and the woman, bringing them together and as it were plucking the fruit from the tree, sow in the womb, as in a field, animals unseen by reason of their smallness and without form; these again are separated and matured within; they are then finally brought out into the light, and thus the generation of animals is completed.

Our original discussion about the universe and the creation of humans is almost finished. We can briefly mention the generation of other animals to keep our argument balanced. So, here are some thoughts on animals. Among those who were born, it's reasonable to suppose that cowards or those who lived unjustly transformed into women in the second generation. This is why the gods gave us the desire for sexual intercourse, creating one kind of substance in man and another in woman. The pathway for drinking, through which liquids move from the lungs to the bladder, was designed to also connect to the marrow that runs from the head down the neck and along the back, which we previously called the seed. The seed, being alive and able to breathe, generates a strong desire for release in the area where it breathes, creating in us the love for reproduction. Therefore, in men, the reproductive organ becomes uncontrollable, like an animal that disregards reason and is driven wild by lust, trying to dominate; the same goes for the womb in women, which desires to bear children. When it remains unfilled longer than it should, it becomes restless and agitated, wandering through the body, blocking breathing passages. This obstruction leads to various diseases until ultimately, the desire and love between a man and a woman bring them together. Just like plucking fruit from a tree, they sow in the womb as if it were a field, tiny and formless. These then develop and grow inside, eventually being born into the world, completing the generation of animals.

Thus were created women and the female sex in general. But the race of birds was created out of innocent light-minded men, who, although their minds were directed toward heaven, imagined, in their simplicity, that the clearest demonstration of the things above was to be obtained by sight; these were remodelled and transformed into birds, and they grew feathers instead of hair. The race of wild pedestrian animals, again, came from those who had no philosophy in any of their thoughts, and never considered at all about the nature of the heavens, because they had ceased to use the courses of the head, but followed the guidance of those parts of the soul which are in the breast. In consequence of these habits of theirs they had their front-legs and their heads resting upon the earth to which they were drawn by natural affinity; and the crowns of their heads were elongated and of all sorts of shapes, into which the courses of the soul were crushed by reason of disuse. And this was the reason why they were created quadrupeds and polypods: God gave the more senseless of them the more support that they might be more attracted to the earth. And the most foolish of them, who trail their bodies entirely upon the ground and have no longer any need of feet, he made without feet to crawl upon the earth. The fourth class were the inhabitants of the water: these were made out of the most entirely senseless and ignorant of all, whom the transformers did not think any longer worthy of pure respiration, because they possessed a soul which was made impure by all sorts of transgression; and instead of the subtle and pure medium of air, they gave them the deep and muddy sea to be their element of respiration; and hence arose the race of fishes and oysters, and other aquatic animals, which have received the most remote habitations as a punishment of their outlandish ignorance. These are the laws by which animals pass into one another, now, as ever, changing as they lose or gain wisdom and folly.

Thus were created women and the female sex in general. But the race of birds came from carefree men who, although their thoughts were directed toward heaven, naively believed that the clearest understanding of the things above could be obtained through sight; these men were reshaped and transformed into birds, growing feathers in place of hair. The race of wild land animals originated from those who had no philosophical thoughts and never gave any consideration to the nature of the heavens because they stopped using their minds and instead followed the instincts of their hearts. As a result of these habits, they rested their front legs and heads on the ground to which they were naturally drawn; and the tops of their heads elongated into various shapes, reflecting the disuse of their minds. This is why they were created as quadrupeds and creatures with many limbs: God gave the more mindless among them more support so they would be more connected to the earth. The most foolish of them, who drag their bodies entirely on the ground and no longer need feet, were made without feet to crawl on the soil. The fourth group consisted of the inhabitants of the water: these were made from the most completely senseless and ignorant creatures, whom the transformers considered unworthy of pure air because their souls were tainted by various wrongdoings; instead of the clean and pure medium of air, they were given the deep and murky sea as their breathing element, which gave rise to the race of fish, oysters, and other aquatic animals, confined to the most remote depths as a punishment for their ignorance. These are the laws by which animals transform into one another, constantly changing as they gain or lose wisdom and folly.

We may now say that our discourse about the nature of the universe has an end. The world has received animals, mortal and immortal, and is fulfilled with them, and has become a visible animal containing the visible—the sensible God who is the image of the intellectual, the greatest, best, fairest, most perfect—the one only-begotten heaven.

We can now conclude that our discussion about the nature of the universe has come to a close. The world has embraced both mortal and immortal creatures, and it is filled with them, transforming into a visible being that contains the visible—the tangible God who represents the intellectual, the greatest, the best, the most beautiful, and the most perfect—the one and only heaven.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!